Book - 1029 - Al Biruni - The Book of Instruction in The Elements of The Art of Astrology

THE BOOK OF INSTRUCTION
IN THE ELEMENTS OF THE ART OF
ASTROLOGY
By
ABU'L-RAYHAN MUHAMMAD IBN AHMAD
al-birun!
Written in Ghaznah, 1029 A.D.

Reproduced from Brit. Mus. MS. Or. 8349
The Translation facing the Text by

R. Ramsay Wright, M.A. Edin., LL.D. Tor. and Edin.
Emeritus Professor of Biology
University of Toronto
I
934
LONDON
LUZAC & CO.
46 Great Russell Street
j'sX"
JjljV
c>.
4ijP j
4*aU JS
-iiii- i >ri j i ji^vi ûi ji <^j

NOTE.
This norl: had occupied Dr.

Hamsay Wright for fflany years.
The whole of the text, transla-
tion and notes had been printed
and the title page and moat of
the preface finally rCTised by
him before his death on 5th Sept-
ember 1933, The remainder of
the preface was awaiting his last
corrections. An Index has been
added.
The edition is limited to
one hundred copies of which this
is
No. ...
MatU and PrinUd by th* Rephka Proceu in Great Bnlain by

PERCY LUND, HUMPHRIES & CO. LTD.
12 Bedford Square, London, IV.C. I
and at Braxiford
PREFACE
The Hlatopy of 3cier»oe Is oultivatod so aaalduous-

ly at tha preaont tlmej aa on« raay Judge from the perl-
odiaala exolualvaly demoted to it, and rrom the Impopt-
aat booJca wbi oh oppear from time to time eluoldatlng
the hiotory of certain auhjcota or of certain periods»
that the tranalatlon of a book -ahloh served aa a prlmar
of Science for two or three hundred yeara sfter it was
written requlrea no apology.!
Tble eppliee with opecial algnlflcanoe to the
âfhla of il-BlrunT baoauee Ita author la^ on© of the
moat outatending figures of the eleventh "century, whloh
has been deaorihed aa the hloaaoming time of Mohammedan
eultura> and aa the climax of mediaeval thought,
3o oharacterlatic for hla aga la Ita author that
Sarton In hia admirable "latroduotlon to the Elatory of
Solonoe'1 atylea the flrat half of that century the
"Time of AI-Blrdnl.^
Intimacy with Sir William Oalar, whoae fine library
wee aaaemblad In llluatratlon of the History of
Science,3 and with Dr. Charlea Singer whose notable
contrlbutlona to it are well-known formed a favourable
atmoephere for Increaalng intereat therein and led to
my undertaking the task of this tranalatlon.
The auggoatlon that tha Tafhlm waa both worthy of
being translated, and also suitable aa a representative
of Ita period waa made by Professor S.B. Browne to
Dr. Singer who kindly placed a rotograph of the Persian
veralon (PL) at my disposal. It waa from this that
the tranalatlon waa made In the first inatence.
An answer to a question aa to the Peralan source
of Areevea* "katronomioa quaedatn" brought 10© Into oom-
aunlcatlon with Profasaor fliedemann of Krlangen.^ H©
X2 Chron, Text, X7.
Washington, 1927, Vol. I, 693-737. I am Indebted to
Profeaeor
3 rulton of Yale for thia referenoe.
Blbllotheoa Oalerlana, Oxford, 192©.
* Uebep die Sohrlft "utronomloa qiuaedam,f von Creavoa;
R. Faipaay Wright nit elnem Zuaatz von B. Wiademann.
Beitracge, limi.
he<a translated vorloua paasaften frora the TeHiim In his
"Boltxaega zur Oeschlchte der NaturwlaaeciBchaften** oom-
mimloated to the Physlco-Xfedlcal Soolety ot Erlangen,
and was good enough to loolt over my translation of thla
work and to m-ake a number of valuable suggeatlons whloh
have been Incorporated into It, H.e advised that the
Arabic versions should be* collated with the Persian,
lending me with this object* photographs of the two Ber-
lin l^S. {AB.AB',} and presenting roe with copies of hia
numerous papers on Arabic science. Tie was about to
write at my request a short' Introduotlon to this work,
whloh he did not live to complete, la_which he proposed
to compere the life and works of Al-BirunI in the East
with thoee of his oontemporary Ibn al-Haithain, batter
known In th6 Weat as 1Alharen, so dlatlnguiahad for his
researches In Optics.
A warm tribute to Professor Wledamann, by his form-
er aaalstant E,J Seenann, discuoaea his contributions
to the History of Arabic Science, and gives a list of
hia nunarous papers, which testify to the extent and
diversity of his studies therein,^
I take this opportunity of aaaoolatlng myself with
Dr. Se^mann In expresalng my admiration of Professor
Wledemann's aohlovements, and my indabtednaea for the
Interest he showed In ay work.
SQTton thus characterizes Al-Elrdnf In comperiaon
with his more widely-known oontemporary Avloonna (Ibn
Slni) "Al-BlrClnl repreasnta the more edventuroua and
oritloal spirit, Ibn ainS the aynthetlo; Al-Blrunl was
more of a discoverer and in that respect cooea nearer
to the modern scientist's Ideal; Ibn Glna wa» eascn-
tlally en organizer, en enoyclopaedlat, a phlloeopher."
Two other ooritemporerlea may be mentioned; Ibn
YQnuar distinguished for hia astronomical work In Cairo,
and A.1.i ibn 'laa for hia raaearohea In Ophthalmology.^
^ One of Wledemanz^s papers deals with the lives and
works of Ibn ai-Haithan and al-Klndl; Johrb, f. Photo.
u'.Heproduotionstechnlk, 1911» 8 IslepMey 1330 pft 166-166.
3 Not to be confused with the Astrolabe-maker (p. 119)
who lived under the Caliph Ua'mun nearly 200 years
earlier,end whose tract on the Aatrolaba has recently
been edited by Father L. Chelkhu S,J, Ibn yCnus refers
to him with anthuslaam (Not, at TSxtr. Vli, 54) ranking
II
The Tafhlm lg a BooV of Instruction on the Prin-_
clplefl -of the Art of Astrology (Kltab al-tefhrm 11 awe*-
11 ■ln§rftt al-tanÎm) but may be regarded as a Primer of
darenth oantury aolenoe, bcoauae apart^from the elemaits
of Oeometry and Astronomy, (rllm al-nujum, ''llm al-falek)
and tho use of the Astrolabe for eatronomJoal and astro-
logloal purpoaee (AAtroIogy la dIffarantloted as 'llm
•"llm ahklm al-nujOn) It has sections on Ge-
ography and Chronology both favourite topics et this
period* It Is, therefore, often olasslfled with other
works designs ted as ocsmographles but the author places
It et ths head of his list of works on Astrology. Al-
Blrflul Insists that no one la entitled to call hiraaelf
an Astrologer unless he poaaesaes a thorough knowledge
of these ancillary sciences.
The author,Abu'1-Ray^nn Muhammad ibn Ahmed Al-anri
(il-Khwarlzral) generally known hy his nlsbah,which afisno
that he belonged to the suburbs,outside (blrCnJ the walls
of the JhwirlJBailan Capital, but alao often referred to
by hie kunyah,which la oocaslonally written Abu Ray^Rn.
Ho oantion is made of Al-BIranl's offspring nor is there
any ladloation why •ray^Rn* (llterolly sweet-basil, but
also a not unoojnnon name) should have been eelacted as
hla kuoynh. Sprigs of this fragrant plant are often worn
by Arabs,and It moy have been as oharaotertotio for him
as an orchid for a distinguished polltlclan. In its fam-
inlne form.HayhKnah,lt is a woman*a name like eny other
tahmn from flower or plant like Myrtle. One of Kuljanod*
wlvefl.a highly-educated Jewish girl from Khalbar, wee
ao-oallod. It la also the name of the ledy,Bay^Snah the
Ehwtrlimlea,daughter of Al-âsan,to whom thia" book is
dedicated,and at whose request, indeed, It was written.
The Tafhtm oocure In both Arabic end parslan var-
alone,neither of which ecoordlng to Rlau purports to
have bean translated the one from the other. Browne
epeaka of the bilingual Tafhlm (Lit. Hlat. 11,102) and
of Its having been composed simultaneously in both lon-
guegea (Ohahar Keqalah) while a Parla 1®. (ip) haa been
regarded on Inadequate grounds as favouring the view
that it had been tranaleted from the Persian by the
author. (p.EV under AP.)
Ma with Ptolemy and Galen. Nor la he to be oonrused
with ft si Ibn •'All, a phyalolan of the 3rd oantury at-
teohed to the court of Wutawakkll (and Muftamid?)
Ill
Hayânah being a native of Kbwirlzw would neceasal^
ily be more famiiler witb Persian than with AraMo,
which would acoount for the Persian version. Al-Blrllnl
wrote in Arable and was eccustomed to rnake usa of as-
aiatants In his literary output. There are aome indica^
tlona that the translator into Persian was leas
familiar with Arabic than Al-Pirtlnl, (v. note p. 61)
The following sketch of the life of Al-BlrDnlis
compiled from that by Sachau In the Preface to the Ara-
ble Edition of the Chronology,and from materiel trans-
lated by Wiedemarm from YBqQt'a Biographical Dictionary*
7T}306^ md references by Al-Bethaqt and Ibn Abl Paslblê.^
Al-BlrunI was born in 352 a.H. (973 A.D.) In a sub-
urb (blrun) of the Capital of the principality of Ehwar-
izm,corresponding roughly to the former Khanate of
Khiva,at that time a Province of the Samfinld Empire un-
der HOh ibn IJansQr (ob, 267/997-6). The Capital, Keth,
situated on the'right bank of the Oxus,where is now
Shaikh rAbba3 V7alT,was the seat of the last Khwarlzra-
ahfih,Abu Abdallah Muhammadpa direct deaoendant of the
Khusrawa.but the greeter part of the Province waa gev-
erned by the Emir Me'mun Ibn Muhammad from GurgSnj, an
important cltyjiiow Kuhna Urgenj,a hundred milea to the
K.W, situated on the branch of the Oxua leading to the
Caspian.
He overthrew the ancient dynasty of tha Khwarlzm-
eheha in 365 A.H.(appropriating the title.^ By this
time the Oxua had already destroyed the Citadel of the
Capital,and was making further inroads in the city.
These olroumstanpea may have led to Al-Blranl'a leaving
for the court of Haaadr, for In a verse quoted by
YSqCt, he refers to llm as his first patron.4
Little Is known up to this time of Al-BlrQnlâ
early history; be knew little of hla grandfather end no
thlng of hla father,5 but he must have profited by his
studies under Abu Near Manpur Ibn rAli ibn rEraq,* for
he had already written a number of aclentlfte papers,aid
had had diacusalons with his younger contemporary Avi-
cenna before leaving Khwarlzm, and while Avloecne wee
a till in Bu)diSre>
T wicdemann u.'HeTl; l!itth. z. (ieaoh* d. flaturwlse. u.
Med.
5 XI,373. 2 Wledemann,Beltraege.XX.XXVIII.LX^
v. note 3 p. IQ6, 4 Wledemenn,Beitraege,LX,p.61,No.
2. 5 C7iedenifinn, Beltraege, LZ, p. 62, No. 4.
^ 'tfledemann, Beltraege, UC, p. 61, No. 3.
rv
Jhlle at the Saminlh court ha probably met Qabus
ihn iraahnS^f Shams el-Ka'all1 who had taken refuge
there end when ftabua regained his Frlnolpellty In 268,
Al-Blruni anat hi ot
a InTltatlon joined hlra In CurgSn at
the S.®» 6la ^he Caspian. To hlra Al-BIrOnl'a
first Important work, the Chronology of Ancient
Nations, is dedicated; It aaa finished In 390-1/1000
«,D. and, althouî not his first work, represents
tbe'suimiatlon of hi a rassarohes up till that time.
It la unoertaln when Al-BlrOnl returned to
KbsBrlzra, certainly before_S99 A.H., for he apeaks of
hla kind reoeptlon at Ourganj by AbU'l-Hasan rAll,
the 2eldest
r son of Ma'mOn who suooaaded his father In
367, AlI died In 399, and waa followed by hla
brother Abu* 1-'Ahbis Ifa'mBn iba Ma'mun, with whom
^_l_BlTQnr oooupled an honoureble poeitlon® aa Coun-
cillor during the whole of hie reign till 407, whan
he was murdered by rebellious aubjeots.
It waa to revenge thla murder that Mdjjnud of
Chaznah Ma'mQn's brother-in-law,» aet out to oonquer
Khwirlza, plaoed Altuntaah on the throne, and oerrled
the eurvlvlng merabera of the Boyal family and other
noblsa to Afghanlstsn In 408,^ and with tham Al-
BlrQnl and two other savants Abu'l-Kholr Ibn Khammfir
the phyalolan, and Abu Haar IbnTraq, the ma theme tlo-
lan. Kehmud had previously tried to attract the
learned men of GurgSr.J to hla own court for_already
Avloanna (Ahu ^11 Ibn sins) and Abu Sahl 'laS Ibn
Tabyi al-liasl^l® had fled from GurgSnj, probably In
598 before Al-Blrunl's arrival, rather than ecoept
Ida^mud'a somewhat peremptory Invitation.
^ At a later period of hie life he must have met QSbds

grandson, iTnûr, author of the qEhQa nSmah who was
ooopanlon of Mas'ud from 4ES-432 and married his sla-
ter, Von Diaz, Buoh daa KBbus, p. 136 saq.
| Wledemann, Beltraega, hi, p. Sb, No. 4.
Wledemann, iHeltraege, u, p. 51, Ko. 5.
h. Subuktlgln, Uajimad'a sister waa first
married to arid subsequently to Me*mcin. kapraCd
also married a elater of Ma'mdn,name not raoorded.
IZambaur,Manuel de Genealogle et de Chronologic,1927,J
.La^râ*el had fled from Ghaznah seven yeare before
this,
0
v. note p. 325.
In one of hi a verges Al-SlrunI says Ha^miud did not
oease to load hlro with benerita;^ he may have ooeopied
an official position as AatrologerjS hut many of the
twelve years between 408 and the completion of his
aeoond great work "India** (Te'rlkh ol-Hlnd) in 421/
1030 rauot have been spent In travel and study In India,
aa wall aa in the extraordinary and enoyclopeedlo
literary activity, including the Tafhlm in 420/1029,
which may be gathered frooi his own bibliography of his
writings ap to 427, contained in the Leiden IB.Oollua
133, printed by aoohau Im his Prefaoe. and trsnslated
by ^ledemsnn, with the appendix of Al-Ohadanfar (630-
692 A,H.) who la reaponaible for the details on which
the figure of Al-BlrQnl'a horoscope p. 191 is founded.^
lfa£mud, to whom the Indlca would probably have
bean dedicated, died (421/lo3oJ before the work was
aetuelly finished^ so there la no dedication.
When Uastld auooeeded his father, Al-fiirhnl oom-
poaed his third principal work, the Canon Maaudious,
end was In receipt of a pension which enabled htm to
devote the rest of his life to his, aclentlfio studies
and his literary work, Yaqut relates that Was Hid
sent him en elaphant-lood of silver ooln for the
Canon, hut that Al-BlrQnl returned it to tte Treoaury.
He survived Kas'ud, dedicated a work on jewel a
to his successor Wawdud, and died at Chaznah in
440/1046.
WledeBiarin> Beltraege, LX, p. 61,. No. 6.

^ v. Chahar Waqaiah, XXIII; Browne, Lit. Fiat, of
Persia, II, 97; D'Herbelot, under Abu Rlhln.
3 Saohau, preface to Chron. Text. pp. XL-tLVllT and
Wiedenann, I.e. pp. 71-77 and notes to p. 96.
^ I am obliged to H.A.R. Glbb for the rest of the quo-
tation from the Leiden LB., and to Dr. Fotherlngham
for calculating the cusps of the houses from the data
there given.
VI
To return to to whom the Tofbln le de-
dioeted; she muat have been carried off to Oheznah
In 408 .A.H. with the rest of Vahmud's inToluutary
fuoota. It rhaa been Buggeeted*that she wws a ala-
er of Ahu»l- 'i.bbfiB, but In auoh event ah« would have
bean f bint al-Me»miln,not bint ll-âaan.
Abu^l-âsan la a aonnion Vunyfth whloh does not
neoaaeartly Imply the exlstenca of a aon Al-Haaan,
otherwlaa ona might fluapaot a reiatlonahlp to
lbii»l-peaB» rXll Ibn Uaûn, whose only1 reoordad
aon AbuU-Harij auoeaedad hia unola Abu !- rAbbis for
a few montha; or to Abu'l-âaan ÂIl
Jadl Al-Oiiaal to whom, aooording to Ufidjl Khalifa
(II, 505) an edition of the Tafhim was dedioated In
481 A.H. AI-Kbaaa was a village near the ancient
Cnpltal of KhwErizm, (Ta*rilch-1 naehldl, p. 45) and
Abu*l-BaBan waa evidently one of the cxllee in
Ghavian. . ^ _
Al-Blrunl oooupled euch a prominent poeltion in
OurgRnj, it Is possible that Hayhanah waa a namoaake
(■amlyyah),daughter of some friend at Ha'mOn'a oourt
Whatever her origin she Is marked out among oriental
women by her oravlng for solentifio knowledge, and
by the rare diatinctlon of having a book dedicated
to her.
vrr
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
The paragraphs (abwSb) are referred to in the text by

numbera alone*
GEOMETRY
1-28. Deal with definitions and propositions of Euclid
Book I.
29-32. Of Book II. 33-36. Of Books III and IV.
37. Ratio of diameter to circumference,
38-51 and 55, Definitions of BOOK V. 52-54. Of Book VI.
56-71, Definitions from Books U and HI.
ARITHMETIC
72-95. Names and properties of the various kinds of numbers.
96-108. Arithmetical Operations. Decimal Notation,
109-115. Algebra. 116-119, Representation of numbers by
letters of the alphabet.
ASTRONOMY
120-124. The Spheres. 125. Stars and planets,
126,-131.Celestial Movements. Horizon. Meridian. Cardinal
Points, Indian Circle.
132-137. Day and Night. Dawn and Twilight. Hours,
138-143. Equinoctial. Ecliptic, parallels of Declination and
of Latitude. Muqantarahs, Equinoxes. Solstiees.
144-145. Subdivision of the circumference of the circle.
Relation to it of the diameter.
146. THE SIGNS. 147. Declination and Latitude of Stars.
150-152. THE PLANETS. Superior and Inferior. The Epicycle.
153-154. Combustion and Conjunction with the Sun.
155-156. Waxing and, 7/aning of the Moon. Phases peculiar to
the Moon?
157-162, The Fixed Sters. Their arrangement in Constellatloaa,
Zodiacal, Northern and Southern. Tables of
these.
163-166. Star names. MANSIONS OF THE MOON, Their Ascension.
167-169. The Galaxy, Order of succession of Signs. North-
ern and Southern Signs and Mansions.
170-175, Mumaththal Orbit or Parecllptic. Apogee of Sun,
Its Excentric Orbit. Its Mean Movement, Mean
Argument and Equation. The amount of its move-
ment in the Ecliptic.
VIII
1176-105.
" Inollned Orbits Equant.
Deferent; of Planets, their
Apogee Modes, Spicyole;
of Epicycle, Mean
rate of planet, Mean and True Anomaly. Mean and
Corrected Longitude, Squatlor. of Anomaly. True
position among the stars.
106-190. Orbits of the Moon.
Planets. Its Movements.
Revolution Those of the
of the Planets.
191. The Trepidation Theory.
198-196. Latitude of the
of their Moon and
Apogees and of the Planets,
of their Modes position
197-198. Daily rate of movement of Planet, SUHT.
199-801. MaqSmflt, RibHtat, Nitaqat.
jjoE. Planets. Ascending and Deaoendlng.
205.* Increase and Decrease of the Planets.
204. World-Days and World-Yefers.
205-809. Size of Planets. Distance from the Earth. Size of
the Earth and surrounding Elements.
210-213. Distribution of Land and ^Vater. Equator. Erect
Posture.
214-219. Latitude and Longitude of Locality.
220-222. Ortlve Amplitude. Day and Night, Diurnal atc.
225-224. Stars of Perpetual Apparition and Occultation,
225-226. Altitude and Zenith Distance.
287-229. Gnomon and Shadow.
250-255. Azimuth. Meridian Altitude and Shadow. Relation to
time of Prayer. AzimutM of Qiblah. Direction
of Keooa.
GEOGRAPHY
236-2io, The Seven Climates. Their Extent and Cheracteris-
tios. Qubbat al-ar(J. Other Methods of dividing
the Earth.
241. Cities in the Seven Climates.
ASTRONOMY
242. Co-ascensions of Equinoctial and Ecliptic.
243. 'Epoch' of star with Lotitude. Degree with which it
244. rises,
Da'lr. Arc sets and crosses
of parallel of a the
starMeridian.
traversed from the
g 45-248. horizon at a given time.
Ascendant. Houses, Gadent and Succeedent. Their
249 Angles.
- Annlv.rsarr. £50. COKJDNCTIOIC of Saturn and
»■!
ZOO-ZS4. Jupl t«r, and Opposition of L'oon. Phases (FasIsEt)
Conjunction
255-2 6 at which forecasts are made, Athazer (al-tasylrat).
"« Eclipses of Moon. Eclipses of 3un. Parallaxis.
IX
CHRONOLOGY
269«£7E. Montha. Solar and Lnnar Yaara. Leapyaar. Intar-
oalation.
272a, Hindu Hamaa for Daye of tha Week.
272-270. Lfontha of the Various Hatlona.
280~2fll. Datea. Cyolea. Kraa. 262. Feaata and Faata of
the Nations.
EBS-EdO. Jawlah. 291-300. Chrlatlan. 301. Muallm.
302-310. Persian.
311-315. Days In Greek Calendar. 3l8-320« Soghdlan and
Xhwarlzmlan.
321-323. THE CALENDAR. Page of a Persian Calendar.
ASTROLABE
32 A-34 B. The Aatrolche. Ite Parts, Varloua Kinds. Uses.
A3TP0L0CT
THB SIGNS
347-368. Their Nature and Charaoterlatlca. Salatlop to
points of the Compasa and to the ^Tlnds.
350-371. Tables giving Xndloationa as to their Influence on
Character, Figure and Faoe, Profesalon, Di«.eaBe.
Cropa. Animals.
372. years of the Signs.
373-378, SLgna and Flaneta in Aapeat and Inconjunot.
377. Relatlona other than Aapaot,
378, Aaoendlng and Desoendlng halves of the Zodiac.
379-380. Trlplloitles sad Quadrants of the Zodiac.
THE PLANETS
381-323. Their Nature and Cheracteplatloa, Relation to
points of the Compeas. as Lords of Hours and
Days of the Week. Raletion to Cllmetes and
Cities.
394-305. Their YEARS. Periods (FTRDAHrA) of control of
Human Life,
396-435. TABLES giving Indications as to Soils. Buildings.
Countries, Jewels. Poods. Drugs. Animals
Crops, parte of the Body. Disposition end
Mennora, Disease. Professions JcO-
435-439. ORBS and YEARS. Details of Firdarla.
440-444. Domiciles and Detriments. Exaltation and Fall,
445. As Lords of the Tripllcltles.
446-447. planets In Aspe-ot, Friendship and Enmity of
Planets.
X
Dm 31 Oils or THT SIGNS
i48-4»e. Halvea. Faoea. paranatellonta. Decanatea^
Ptolemy's thlrfla.
452-454. TERMS ood their Lor<la. 455-456. Ninths and
Twelftha.
459-460. ChareoterlBttos of DgGREfiS Of the Signs.
TRE KOUSBS
461-474. TABLES of Indloatlona at Natlvltlea, at Horary Qaes-
tions, as to Organa, Poners, Joya and Powers of
the Planeta. Sex. Cbaraoterlatloa of Groupa of
Houses In Threes end^Slxea.
THE PART 0? FORTUNB
475-48C. Tahlee of other LOTB oast in a similar way.
481-488. Relative Position of Planets emd Sun. Caziml. Ori-
entallty.Influanoa changed under certain con-
ditions . TAHL3S.
4e9-4fl0. APPLICATION and SEPARATION. 491, DEAD DECREES.
40£. Oonjunotlon In longitude and In latitude.
455-505. DICNITISS. Order of preoedence. Pavoureble end
unfavourable eltuatlona of the Planeta In the
Signs and Houses.
506-509. Interferenoe with their conjunctions, Reception &c,
510. Substitutes for conjunction end aspeot.
511. Opening the doors.
513-513. Strength nnd Veakmcsa of Planets.
514, The Combust Way,
JUDICIAL ASTROLOGY
515-519. The Five Diviaions and the astrological principles
on wbloh inrjulries ore to be based in eeoh.
520. The Lord of the Year. SfilJchudH.
521-523. The deterrrilning oondltlons at a iintlvity, HylOfe*
KadVhuda, Ascendant, Foroacope, Piguje of the
Heavena. Direotlan or Apheaia (Taayir)
jSnbakhtSp. Gifts of lenpth of life. Position
of the maleflos (Qawatj*) which ternxinate It.
524-526. Procedure at birth, use of Numuder. A similar
aubatitute for Aaoandant (Rectification),
527. ♦^leotlon3,. Selecting suitable time for action.
528-530. General Questlona. Thought reading. Danger of
baaty conclusions.
U33. BIAiUNED.
PERSIAN
1. PL. Brit, Uua. Add. 7697, Cat. Pera. M33. TI, 451
2. PL*. " 83566. * „ n * 452
3. PP. Bibl. Nat. Paris 774. " « N « 49
ARABIC
4- AL. Brit. Mug, Add. Or. 8349. Peoently aoqulrod.
5. AO. Sodl, Marsh, 572. Cat. Ara^. iES. I, 221
6. AO*. " 3odl. 281. •• " 11, 262
7. AB. KSnigl. Slbl. Berlin 5666. •» " V, 150
d» Afl* . " ' •* 5667.
9. AP. Blbl. Net. Paris 2497 443
The trenalation vaa orlclnally wade -from PL, , w«h after-
wards'oollated with and amended from AO and AO', while tha
reproduction of AL whloh aaoompaniBB the tranalatlon has had
son.® laounae supplied froi AO and AO*.
PL.
This MS. is unique In being preceded by a Hat of the 550
peragr&pha (abwab) Into whioh the work la divided. This ia
more detailed than that given In the Bodleian Catalogue of
Arabic M33. II, 2S2-S. Purther it la the only IB. in whloh
"the paragraphs ere numbered, and in whloh there are flgurea of
the consteliationa.
There are oerteln laounae, viz. 91-95, 193-106, 206-7,
476-461; all of theae oan be supplied from PL' except the
last, whioh, however, ia In PP.
The script is described In the Catalogue as a fair naakhi.
The table Id 453 has been substituted for the Arabic one as a
specimen of the neat oelllgraphy. Profeaaor Browne In a let-
ter to Dr. 3ingar refers to the archaic writing; this la
chiefly noticeable in dBl being written dhfil between vowels
end after a vowel at tfie end of a word, and In forms like ank
and anch for gnkl and anohl (v. Horn, -NBa-Persisohe Sprache,
pp. 61 snd 121).
The M3. is dated the baginning of Rama^fin, 6feb A.H.
(end of October 1286 A.D.), and was written 'by the most weak
hand* of Al^Heliq ibn Ghulam al-Qunfiwl. It is interesting
that Ibn Ohulfim is the copyist (G92 A.K.) of the Leiden If.
Oolius 135 (Cat. II, 29G) in *hich his master Al-flhadanfar, a
great admirer of the TarhTm, discusses the life and works of
Al-ÎrQnl, (Chron. t. xv.)
m
A note indioates that the IS., wrl tte;i In Konia, was
bought In Slwaa in 732 A«H»
TLf
. A M3- of the 19th oentury; complete except for sbsence of
paragraphs 473-4fl9 and 512-523, This IS. ia referred to In
tha B.W. Catalogue, II, 451, and elsewhere as giving the date
of writing {321) aa 425 A.H. Instead of 420 as in other ISS*,
but this Is due to a mistake of the oopylst ae will be seen
from the subjoined peasage;-
"pas In ruz slh shaicblh ast kl bfat u panjum
RamadSn andar a51 ohaharpad va blet u penjim
az Hijra, va hem haftum az Tlshrl al-aWai
andar ail
{haxar va alaed va-ohlbll yakum ast
az lakandar va mz erdlbablsht alwum Abanmeh
andar sal)
alsad va nuvad va haahtuo az Tazdlglrd"
The worda in braakota are omitted. The Calendar la the aeme
as In PL with aoae ineooureolea,
PP.
Although this IE. la complete (as la AO) it haa many
dropped llnea and other mistakes. The script ia very legible;
ff. 39 and 110-1 ere by another and more elegant hand, it Is
dated Monday 19th Ramadan €68 A.H. (12th May 1270 A.D.) The
date of writing the Tafhlm la aa In PL, 'bTstura ast* for Mat,
f. fifir. U. Bloohet In speaking of this IS. refers to an
Arabio edition, which he regards as probably the original.
Thle is the ISS. which haa been selected for reproduction

on account of ita legibility. A few folios are lost which are
copied from AO and AO*. These ore from AO pp. 52-3, 60-62:
fro* AO*, 00, 115-0| 130-1, 138: from AO, 219-22, 240-3. The
colophon does not indicate the date or the name of the copy-
ist, but two owners have written the dates onf which the book
come into their possession, viz. Auhad b, AS ad b. Mlhrlar el-
Vustswfi in the month of Allah, Hajab the deaf, 839 A.H. ,
1435-6 and Mli b. al-Hunaln b. ♦'Ala al-SahTar, 809 A.H.
(1484-5 A.D.)
AB
This MS. is dated the lest day, gelkh, of Dhu el-01rdah.
633 A.H. (20 Aug. 1450 A.D.) It begins with paragraph *42 Hno.
omlta 64-67, 150-165, 460-490.
ABr
Tula l®. la dated BSD (12S7-0 A.D.} It to«6lna with
peregraph 120; f, Ifl ahould oom© botwaan ff, 10 and 11; tt.
98-99 should follow f! S4, Peragpepbs 20Oa-S46 ara omitted
with exocptlon of part of 321 on ff. 60-61; 350-272 are omit-
ted; f. 113 should follow t. 104.
This KB. la dated 9 Ramadan 1035 A.H. (4 June 1626 A-E. }

23 Ayydr 1938 la glvan as a oonoordant data but la aqulvalant
to 2 June 1627, allowing tan days for 0,3.
The text la praoedad by a oonfuaed end rambling aocount
of the contents, whloh doea not ooour in any other of_the IBS.
eacamlned, and la certainly not attributable to Al-Brruhl, In
the course of whloh the writer saya "we have trenalatad this
Into Arablo^.
Joseph Asoarl aummariaing this Introduotlon aayo "the
work has baen tranalated from the Persian by an anonymoua
author", and De 3lane describing the IB. refers to 1t as a
translation of a Paraian work on the Elements of Astranomy by
Al-BTrHnT. I have not found in the H3. any statement to the
effect that thla is a translation from the Persian by the
author himself.
Nallino refers to this M3. I p. LXV, and Inter I» p. 239
to the pessage on f. 28 where the position of the aujat of the
planets In 420 A-H. is dlaoussod. (195)
The text, which la Imperfect, agrees as far as It goes
with the other Arabic texts; It begins with paragraphs 11 fi-
lls, oontlnuea with 147-300 and finishes with 204-359.
AO and AO'
1 These M33. are described at length in j?odl. C? t. 11, 252,
AO Is mentioned for the legibility of Its script, AO. for
Its age and ecouraoy. The acrlpta may be oomporcd In the
paragrepba referred to under AL above.
AO was written for his own use, by a Copt, Abu ShBklr
TumB' b. Abl al-yarah, a Cairene writer known as Ibn al-
'Uabsha•. It waa finished on a Monday being the Feast of the
ApoatleB,^ Id al-rueul, 2l3t SabI, al-ewwal 681 A.fU {29th
June 1262), or the Sth Ebib (Eflfl) 998, Kra of the Martyrs,
E.M., and the 29th yazlrin, 1594 (should be 1593) of the
Selcucld Sra, S.E., find the 26th Shehrlr mah, 651 of the Yaz-
dlglrd Era, Y.B., In Cairo (Ml^r al-mahruaah) at Qa^r al-Sham'.
[âar al-Sham' remained a refuge for tfie Copts till after the
English occupation of Egypt. (Bnoyol, Islam)]
T The Beast, a flxe^ one, Is now celebrated on the 11th July,
N.'S, (Lane, farmers and Customs, Sverywan 2d, p. 547) The
Creek and "vestern Churches have retained Old Style.
:av
AO
Thle MS. Is undated liut belonga to the 9th or 10th cen-
tury of the HIJre, In addition to the usual title It has an
•Iternetive rhymed one> apparently Invented by one of Its
former owners. Yiieuf ibn Ahmad tbn Ibrahim ai-Nablaal al-
ghafl'I, which doea not ocour elsewhere
Kltab Infrat al-halak, fl einS'at 'llml al-fslak A book;
to lighten our darknoaa In the art and aclenoe of the sphere.
It la aomplcte eroapt for a lacuna includlcc paragraphs
580-443. Between AO' and AB' there Is evidence of direct
filiation, e.g. the substitution of the word murBghamah for
muza'amah, 493.
Nicoll In his account of AO' eiplalna that he gives c
11 at of tha AbwHb of the Tafhlm, beoauae the anawora to the
<l.uefltlonB posed not only serve to ahow the aoope of the
eolancea oultivatad by the Arabs, but alao furnish eiplen-
etlons of many terms the meaning of which is not always ob-
▼Ioub. It Is hoped that these have baan adequately dealt
with in the following pages.
As there are several place a In toe Tafhlm where dates

other than a.H. are cited, the conversion of these into a.D.
may ba affected by the following forraulae:-
To convert fi.W. (p. 173n) Into A.D;- aa lat Thoth, I
*.¥. • B9th Aug. 284 A.D., add 203 years ♦ 240 days:- e.g.
(date AO) to Sth Eblb 990 (997y ♦ 305d) result 1261y ♦ ISOd,
29th June IE8S.
To convert 3,E. (Hex.) £60a, into A.D.i- as lat Tlahrln
I, 312 3.K. > lat Oct. 1 B.C., deduct 311 If the day of the
Month ii in the laat 9 months of S.E. (first 9 of A.D.), 312
If In the flrat 3 of S.S. (laat 3 of A.D.); e.g. (321) 7th
Tlfhrln I 1341 3,5. - 312 . 7th Oct. 1029 A.D., and (date AO)
S9th gazlrln 1595 - 311 . 2gth June 1282.
To oonvecrt Y.E. (p. I72n) into A.D.t- as the 1st far-
wardln mflh 1 Y.B. • 15th June 532 a.D. (53Iy ♦ ISYd), this has
to be added to the Y.E. date to obtain A.D., but, orire to the
fact that the Y.K. year la shorter by quarter of a dey thaa
the solar year, the number of leap-yeera has first to be de-
ducted from tha 167:- e.g. (321) 3pd Xban nSh 396 Y.E. (SQVy *
21Sd) ■ 7th Oot, 1029 A.D. , for, deducting 398/4 from the
above 167 laavec 67 daya and adding 831:/ + S7d to the Y.E.
date gives 1028y 4 280d - 7th Oot. 1029.
X7
NOTES AND CONHECTIONS
Paragraphs (abwab) are referred to by numbers alone; pages

with a prefixed p. Paragraphs are numbered at top of
page; pages at bottom.
With regard to transliteration ^ Is represented by 1 In the
type-script and by a alight modification thereof
P. 1 The baa1ana and first paragraph from PL.
P. 2 Note, Bodl. MS. Thuraton 11.
P. II The passage on proportion, 39-55, translated by
Wledcmann, Beltrag, XLIV.
P. 39 Note 2. Wieleltner finds that x la derived from an
r t in use for res In the middle ages.
P. 45 Note 1; In his translation of Bar Hebâeua, "Llvre
de I'aaoenslon de I'saprlt,"
P. 47 Note 2. Brehm's Thlerleben.
P. 52 Note 1, by Wledemann.
P. 57 Mote 1 for 378 read 377.
P. 79 IdelerÛrsprung u. Bedeutung d. Sternnaraen.
P. 82 for hadl al-na^m, -the leader, read had! al-najm,
the driver.
95 The diagram Is modified from Jfanutlus' Translation
of Ptolemy's Syntaxla, II p._413.
P. 114 The Book of the Thousands (Kltib al-uluf), v. note
p. 320, deals among other things with the emer-
gence of new religions. Astrologers commonly as-
sociate this with the entry of the vernal equinox
into a new sign. v. Dupuls, orlglne de tous les
oultea.
P. 134 Chauoer, v. Skeat p. 194 note 1.
P. 143 The Mountains of the Moon regarded now as applying
only to the Ruvenzori range.
P. 144 Note 9. v. De Goeje, De Pfuur Van Gog en Magog,
Versl. d. Kon. Ahad, Amsterdam. Letterk, 4th
series, lat Part p. 87.
160 Accidentally omitted: see inserted Blip.
268. Ma al-eyyam al-wustg al-nm'addalah. If
the sun had no eastward movement and simply contlnu-
sjrfmr n.y ed r&volviag In virtue of the flrat
movement,
P. 177 and 195 a and b; umm haa acquired an Initial ' by mis-
take.
P. 178 The rule for finding Saster requires to be modified;
If the number to be deducted is greater than 27,
Easter la four weeks later than the result arrived
at.
p. 19C-I figures
space referplaced
to p. here
205. on aooount of available
p. 191 method adopted in constructing the figure is aa
follows:- Two great circles, the meridian and a
circle, of declination through the point of the eo-
llptfo ascending divide the heavens Into four
quadrants. The two Baatern quadrants ere unequal;
the HI, H and X houses are each made the arc of
the ecliptic corresponding to one-third of the
semi-diurnal arc of the ascendant, and the I, II
and HI houses to the arc corresponding to one-
thlrd of its semi-nocturnal arc. The houses of
the Western quadrants are the Nadirs of those of
the Eastern,
p. 226 Note, see figure on p. 225.
p. 229 A convenient edition of the Tetrablblos Is contsln-
ed in Junctlnua" Speculum Astrologlae,
p. 228 Chaucer says; v. Skeet p, 194.
p. 255 Text, last row, for haiyah read harbah and for
tinln, thalithln. ^Translation*, note, slsad is 300
although there is some excuse for Steingass trans-
lating it 3000; formerly alsad.
p, 265 Text 3rd line; 'note Arab transliteration of
genitive of Aataratos with otiose allf,
p, 279 note 2, read 290 seq.
P, 282 Madkhal Kablr, Abu Ha • ashar, Bodl, MS. Hyde 3.
P. 286 No. 51, for al-teqal read quttal^pl. of qatil,
killers, anaeretal, usually qawatl*, sing, qfiti*
a highwayman (pi. in latter sense quttS'J. Qa;,,atl,
In addition to Its astrological meaning la also
used for incisors and migratory birds In oontrasx
to perennial residents (avibld). Qaja'a in the
sense recorded by Dozy JI, 367a, does not occur in
the Tafhlm, nor does he refer to the astrological
meaning of qati1, of. p. 323 1.8 and note 5.
P. 268 last line, for read
P. 292 jjo, 6. Iron, a peculiar crop, but âdld and ahan
occur in A and P.
P. 308 The urjuzah is not the only Arabic astrological poem,
it consists or 372 verses; the Muqnl' of Al-SQsT
with 97 verses has several commentaries.
See Not. et Extr. X2III for two Byzantine poems, the
one by Theodore Prodroraus in political metre, the
other by John Karaateros in twelve-syllable iambics;
the latter contains references to two Babylonian
Astrologers Selekb and Meslas or Lasbas not other-
p wise known. 1354 verses.
P*• •v*p
322 NurcOdhSr, Vullers* »repraeseutans'.
Prol. The Prolegomena of Ibn Khaldun translated by
t)e Slane.
XYII
ABER£7I ATIONS
Tê Chronology oX Ancient Katlona and the Iniilcfl of .U.-Blrunl,

texts edited end tranaiated by Sachau, are indicated by
Cbxon, end India.
Dictionaries by the namea of their authors: Lane^. Dozy,
Stelngeea, Vullera; the Muhlt al-Muhit appears as Wuhft.,
the Dictionary of Teohnioal'Terms used'In the Solenoea
of the .I'uaalinana (Bibllotheoa Indlce) es Dlot. Scl.
Terms and Barbler de lleynard'a Diotlonnalre Ceographlque
d» la parae -as Diet. Geog. para.
ôacb^-Leolarocl♦ a, L'Astrologie Grdoûe appears In the notes
aa BL. al-»ulQai aa M'fo.
Nalllno, when unspeolfied, refers to nie magniftoant Al-
Battanl.
Nau, to his translation of Bar-Hebraeus, "L"Hscenalon de
1'esprit.1*
pocooke, SpeoiiLen; for Specimen Hlstoriae Arabum.
Junntlnua is for Junotinue* Speculum AsoTologlae whdch to-
gether with the two following works give an adequate
account of Areblo Aetrology.
Albohazen-Hely is for Abu'I-âsar 'All b. AblH-RljSl. Hia
Urjuzah appears in a reoent sumnory of Arabic Astrology
by GhazBl al-MuaawI. -His *De, judlolls AstrorUffl' and
the »Tractatua de AatônoInla of Bonatus (Guldo Bonato)
were both issued at Baallea 1571 and 1550,
Wilson for Wilson's Dlotlonary of Aatrology which la referred
to for definition of tenna.
yy thanka are due to yeaars. Percy Lund, Kumphriea & 0o.

for the excellent manner In which they have reproduced the
I/S. and type-script.
in i r
[In the.Name of God the Merciful, the Compassionate.
Him do we ask for eld.
The Teaching of the Master, Abu'l-Rayhfln Muhammad Ibn
Ahmad al-BIr11nI(May the Mercy of God be upon film) on the
Elements of the art of Astrology by way of Introduction],
The comprehension of the structure of the unlyerae,
and of the nature of the form of the heayens and the
earth and all that Is between them, attained by rehears-
ing Information recelyed,! Is extremely adyantageoua In
the art of Astrology,because thereby the listener ac-
quires practice, he becomes accustomed to the terms
current among astrologers, the apprehension of their
meanings la facilitated, so that when he again meets
them In his study of the yarlous problems and demonstra-
tions he brings to these a mind freed from haying to
deal with difficulties from both sides (the problem and
Its terms].
It Is on this account that I haye prepared,at her
request,an aide-memoire for Ray^Snah [the EhwErlzmlan]
daughter of al-Hasan, In the form of question and answer;
which Is not only elegant,but facilitates the formation
of concepts.
X haye begun with Geometry and proceeded to Arith-
metic and the Science of Numbers, then to the structure
of the Unlyerse.and finally to Judicial Astrology,for no
one Is worthy of the style and title of Astrologers who
Is not thoroughly conyersant with these four sciences.
May God by His grace,and In the fullness of His
mercy,fayour accuracy of statement In the work,3
GEOMETRY
1. Al-handasah. Geometry Is the science of dimensions
and their relations to each other and the knowledge of
the properties of the forms and figures
GEOMETRY found In solids. By It the science of num-
bers Is transferred from the particular to
the unlyersal, and astronomy remoyed from conjecture
and opinion to a basis of truth.
iBa rfll shanldan ya taqlld glrlftan. 3i.almat al-munaj-
Jlm; Bafter sawKb Ins. ai.-qawl fl'l-ramal bl mlnnat wa
sa'et.
*Jz__ IAU._> lAjrel^^^ ^ ^^ ^
^ ^T ' ^ <- ^
,<
—^ ^ ^-&jif' 03-?>J ^LîoU i I
^ o*/-^' /'* * * ' * "< ■ 1
!~-> >■ I ^ |.UjX^^JU3i^~r'lu^^
" _ '^ " --yjSt u
L^-'j
I
2-5.
2. MB al-Jlsm. A solid body Is that which can be
felt by the sense of touch standing by itself, It occu-
pies only its own share of space but en-
THE SOLID tirely fills that to the extent of its di-
mensions, so that no other solid substance
can occupy its place at the same time.
3. Abrad al-mehan. The dimensions of space are
three In number,length,breadth,and depth;these terms
are not applied to the dimensions in them-
DIMKW3I0N3 selves so as to be invariable,but relatlve-
OF SPACE ly.so that as soon as one of them is call-
ed length,that which crosses it Is breadth,
and the third,which traverses both,depth,but it is cus-
tomary to call the longer of the first two,length,the
shorter,breadth or width,and that which is extended
downwards,depth[or thickness],while if its extension
upwards Is considered,height.
4. Al-jlhat al-3ltt. The boundaries of these three
dimensions at both ends are known as the six sides,
those of the length being described as
THE SIX front and back,of the breadth,as right and
SIDES left,and those of the depth as upper and
lower.
5. Al-sath. The solid is necessarily terminated on
each of its sides by a boundary;this is 'a surface'
which like the roof of a house,is called
THE aatb, because of being on the top,or also
5DKFACE has't■ because it is,as it were,spread out
on the solid. It possesses length and
breadth,but one dimension leas than a solid,viz.thick-
ness,because if it had that it would be a solid,and we
have assumed it to be a boundary thereof. When a solid
is of a deep opaque colour,it is the colour which is
seen on the surface,because whatever there is below la
concealed from vision. In this way It is easy to picture
a surface to oneself,and still easier if you put oil
and water in a glass and observe that they do not mix
but are in intimate contact at a 'surface* between them,
A surface is of two kinds,either plane or not[acoordlng
to the solid].
^The roots sth and bst both mean spread out,so that
satb may be a pavement as well as a roof.
£^^1 (âJJ.^ IjuJaA£=>-«J £-|l?XJ". ■A-^=1_l|î>l ^•L'fcî 1
l.\ \ Ot
L[^=Jj <Xf\^
^vyuvyO^'
1 •" j* *■ - v^.C. »^ ^^
J^ywAic
>l^JJja! A. L* a LL> ^ Jkaj U^LlÛ^'>' 3
UjI ^ M x jJ?- Li>ic-

I y » w» ^ * * /■ .» ' —• '' **^ ^ <> %*
1
^jbU;UvÛjuÂ^l^y^^lli Vlr^-^-t^- e>/3
6-9
6. if a surface has boundaries,these are
necessarily lines,and lines have length without breadth
therefore one dimension less than the
THE LINE surface,as that has one less than the
solid;If It had breadth,It would be a
surface,and we have assumed it to be the boundary of a
surface. A line can be Imagined by observing the oil
and water at the side of the glass,or the line between
sunshine and shadow,contiguous on the surface of the
earth,or,also, It Is possible to picture all that to
oneself from a thin sheet of paper[although It has
thickness],until the familiar sense-perception leads
gradually to the Intellectual concept.
7. Al-nuctah, If a line Is finite Its extremities
are points. Points have one dimension less than lines,
via.length;they have neither length,
THE POINT breadth,nor thickness,and are Indivisible.
The point of a sharp needle may be taken
as an Illustration from the sensible world,but surface,
line,and point,although they occur on the solids which
bear them,apart from them cannot be apprehended except
by the intellect.
8. Al-sath wa'l-khatt al-mustaqTmSn. A plane sur-
face Is the shortest surface between two lines which
are Its boundaries,and a straight line
PLANE 30R- is the shortest line between two points
FACE AND which are Its extremities. If on a sur-
EJTP.AIGHT LINE face there are lines which exactly cor-
respond to each other,Ithe surface is a
plane surface;and similarly,If In a line the points are
exactly opposite^- to each other It Is a straight line.
9. Al-zawlyah. An angle la the termination of a
surface In a point at which two lines meet each other,
but not in the same straight line. If
THE ANGLE both the lines are straight,the angle la
a rectilineal angle.otherwise It Is not.
j-barabar yak dlgar.P The translation by laljiq Ibn

ûnayn of Euclid's definition is preferable;1 the plane
surface is thai which conforms everywhere to the
straight lines upon It'.
3
wîlj UWJMW VijL«i^7î jâ^» J 4! AL^
llK/-^*.»'-'k ^ / i '* • '
lÛi'-A^L^ U ^,3* Â j
^y>51 JW»^LL«J'XL^jf Ulj
lf^»lL 1» UUl*^jliJ iLfcj-V LI îlllj ^tJlj

I aL *1 •* * ^lt'1*it ^ i I 1 ^ ^ 4 W
^ A,#*
'-2^5^141 VJ^ L« i* &yf
N,
^^^^^*^»!0\jll»Ljyl ^vj4>J3îX—^»j^c«j^*ly^j t^LCoj^
^ - >> ÛÎJI
10-X5
10. Kam anwar al-zawSya. Such angles are of three
kinds. When one straight line falls on anotherflike the
tongue of a balance on the beemDlf the
KINDS (F resultant angles on either side are
ANGLES equal,they are called right angles,
q5' Daeh.and the one line Is said to be
perpendicular, fld.to the other. If the angles are
not equal,the line In question Is not perpendicular;
the larger angle Is styled obtuse.munfarlJah.and the
smaller acute.haddah.l
11. Al-shakl. A figure Is that which Is surrounded
FIGDKE by one or more lines.
12. Al-dfi'lrah. A circle is a figure on a plane
surface boundeA by one line,the circumference.mublt.
dawr. In the middle Is a point,the centre
THE CIRCLE markaz,from which all straight lines
reaching the circumference are equal.
13. Al-qutr wa'l-watar. A straight line passing
through the centre of a circle and reaching the circum-
ference by Its two ends Is a diameter,
DIAUETER qu^r,which cuts the circle into two semi-
AHD CHORD circles. If such a line does not pass
through the centre,It Is a chord.watar.
which outs the circle Into two unequal parts,and the
circumferenee Into two arcs,qaws,one larger than the
other,
14. Al-sahm. A sagltta Is the line between the
middle of a chord and the middle of the corresponding
arc. It Is part of a diameter of the
SAGITTA circle,and Is longer than half the di-
ameter If the arc Is larger than a seml-
clrole;shorter,lf not.
15. Al-Jalb al-arjam. The half-diameter of a clr-
THE RADIUS ole Is called a whole sine.
■'•The figure on the left Illustrates 'perpendicular* and

right angles, that on right 'not perpendicular' and
obtuse and acute angles.
_3x>iuj^ 1^ Î jÂ-î
^ '-2^^
& ' v. -.
'3 * .-/ •'. - . -

'd^' i
"^ t i ( • ■'''*. ' *
vji^^^LlI s> tk-Lf1!/*-*0 i ■f^>-ILo
l>i^«*. ■^^^--**^-v,^7::a^* xZ--^ oifc»\jLjk»- U
V*«—2^]>-LJ|fc> ^styiî^sju 4^. 1_ j IJ J J UijI^J
1 s>w^*ilvZa*j 3 Ll* i^JjM,l(^ ^7/'
uiCj-^r ^->7^'
( * t A ^ ^
16-19
16. Al-Jalb al-muBtawl. A natural sine is the half
of the chord of a doubled arc,or if you prefer It,the
peipendluular dropped from one end of
NATURAL the arc on to a diameter passing through
SIKH the other end. If the expression Jalb Is
used without qualification, It means a
natural sine.
17, Al-jalb al-iiiarl<us. A versed sine Is the saglt-
ta of the doubled arc or the line from one end of the
arc to tue extremity of the sine opposite
7ER3ED SINK It. The greatest of all versed sines Is
a diameter, as that of all natural sines
Is a radius.
18. Tamgin al-qawe wh tamKm al-Jalb. The cemplement
of an arc Is that which,when added to the arc,makes it
a complete quarter of a circle, and con-
COMPLEUENTS sequently when you subtract the arc from
OF ARC AND 90° Its complement remains. Also the
SINE complement of a sine Is the amount re-
quired to be added to It to make a radius.
19. inviKr Hi-muthallathat. Every triangle has
three angles and opposite each is a straight line,the
side, illIn accordance with the re-
KIKRS OF latlve length of the sides the triangles
TRIANGLES are either eqnllateral.mutasawl al-adla*";
Isosceles, mutasgwl al-sgqaln, wken two
are alike and the third either longer or shorter; or
scalene, rmiirht.si if al-adia*". when all differ In length;
K
AB,CD, Qutr GD. Jalb maHdls
EF.Watar of are AE ,T''"ehii al-
EDf \ qawsS)-
DG.GG, Sahm (c H G D AJ.Tamnm al-
PH. Jalb arxam jalb EG
GE.Jalb mustawl. EJ.J lb ofarcAE-
arc BP Cosine of arcEP
" V' ^»
J
k-f:
I^X w^1 u^j.

^M'-l
\^S<ty J \ /^l^lLl^l
r-trT ^
^-ri^'.^y——f I Uâ *!£=» WJU -Mas yi
v/ - Jr ^ * */ *t \
-ryjûuu # ';
^^kiLLil^) Ji,
U^ Ll jj Jîô! Jl''Jli!j
riliu'r.Li•• ^,,.r--' .' S •". .

□u j^^yî.—JijMji^îjUiU,^ Lii^
20-22.
In accordance with the angles, either right-angled;
qS'lm al-zgwlyah.obtuse-angled,munfarlj al-zSwlyah.or
acute-angled, hfldd al-zawaya.
20. rAffliId we qa'"ldah. The perpendicular Is the
line proceeding from one of the angles of a triangle
at right angles to one of the sldes-.and
EEKEENDICULAB the base Is the side on which the perp-
AltD BASE endlcular falls.
21. ttesqlt al-hajar. The place of fall of the
stone Is the point of the base which the perpendicular
reaches. Some people call by this name
WHERE THE the smaller of the two parts Into which
STOHE FALLS the base Is thus divided, but such use
Is remote from whet the word and Its
meaning require.
22. Asma' al-adlfl1, ghayr hadhlhl. The side of a
triangle opposite a righi or obtuse angle la the long-
est side, If It Is a right angle, the
OTHER NAMES hypotenuse, qutr or watar. Of the
FOR THE SIDES other sides, If they are different, one
Is designated the shorter of the short
sides, the other the longer of these.
V > . f . .. w ^ e "
'^î-»î^»iî U'j -^byy\*j~ l< is '■.) '^£jU^,'i^
i^
V.
Jv
NT
o>
bv' ;'Uyjj
' »•>
>_i^ f l-LU1 Uj ^1 J
1 cJcLjj^ Uj I
<3*^15gJlAl< ^dU
l/^J ^Û>xLJ!^^|^JaxVI^»i«£jÂXiLilj|^»jull/-'jl)t
23
23. DhawSt al-arba'at aijlar. Of quadrilateral
figures, the first, murat>tiari la the square In vhlch
all the sides are equal, and all the
I1UASRILAT£RAL angles right angles [like a tile] and
FISURES the diagonals Joining opposite angles
equal. The second Is the oblong,
muatatll, which Is longer, has all the angles right
angles, the diagonals equal, but only theropposite
sides equal. The third Is the rhombus, mu ayyan. [I.e.,
has ehaahma; by this expression Is meant that the
diagonals are unequal Just as chnabiiiH-vl lurgzB1 means
that one half of the beam of a balance (steelyard) Is
longer than the other.]2 It has all the sides equal,
the diagonals different, and the opposite angles equal
but not right angles. The fourth Is the rhomboid,
shablh bl'1-mufayyan. which differs from the foregoing
In having only tne opposite sides equal.
Any other quadrilateral figure Is called a
trapezium, munjjaraf. As to polygons, mudallar5t. which
have their sides and angles equal, these are named
after the number [5,6,7,etc.) of the sides, muVbaTmnas.
musaddas, musabbar. etc.
oX- SKAJSLX.
■'•According to Stelngass, "the eye In which the tongue of

the scales plays", but here used as the equivalent of
A. ''aya."the Inclining of the balance", Lane, p.2, 217.
Example of explanation of difficult Arabic words In
the Persian version.
■*^l£A---M iip»'_iii<^jfl
1JLI .- -
^Xv Z
II
^XJ
UUli,
24-27
24. AI-KhulTat al-mutaTOziyah. Parallel lines are
those on a plane surface, whose distance from each
other remains constant, and which
PAPAJ.i.KL LINES when produced continually in both
directions do not meet.
25. Al-zaway5 al-mutagabllah. When two straight
lines cross each otlier, four angles result, and the
OPPOSITE ANGLES opposite angles are eaual-
26. Al-zaw5yg al-mutabgdllah. V/hen a straight line
is drawn between two parallel straight lines, the angle
which is at one aide of one of
ALTERNATE these two lines is said to be alter-
ANGLES nate to the angle at the other side
of the other line; the alternate
angles are eûal.
27. Zawiyah hhariJahA min al-muthallath. When one
side of a triangle is produced, there is formed an
angle called the exterior angle, and
ANGLE EXTERIOR each of the two angles not adjacent
TO TRIANGLE to it is called an interior and op-
posite angle.
shakl
The distance the same as al-zaway
here is the distance here

al-mutaqabllah
mutabgdilah/'
al-kharijah
/mutabHdilah min al-muthallathz
ÂL has hgdithah.

8
' •■ *
R-.v-- ^
>f y^LLii^ lljJIL
^ Lic/^S)53^
XîxuS, ûdiiijiu
.•
I ^ ' • #. . * . < .I ' J . „V < \X X/ "'
<13^
"(#
lîu
LiÛ^
38-31
28. Zgwlyah icharljah mln aX-lfrattaln al-mutairazl-
yaln. If the line drawn between two parallel lines be
produced, there result, outside these,
ANGLE EXTERIOR two angles called exterior, each of
TO PARALLEL which Is equal to the Interior and
STRAIGHT LIKES opposite angle on the same side of
the line.
39. MutawazI al-adlg'". A parallelogram Is a quad-
rilateral figure of which the opposite sides are equal
and parallel to each other, and the
PARALLELOGRAM line which Is drawn between opposite
angles Is called a diagonal, qutr.
30. Mutamman. flhen two parallelograms are con-
structed on the diagonal of a parallelogram in such a
way that the extremity of the dlag-
COMPLEUENTa 0T onal of one of the former Is In con-
PARALLELOGRAM tact with that of the other, each of
the two remaining parallelograms Is
called a complement, mutamm.
31. rAlam. The two complements with one of the
parallelograms constitute a gnomon, ''alam. which are
shown in the diagram by segnents of
GNOMON a circle, passing thruugh the three.
aZ->n<-' CtMwt.
vl.
ii
iThis is numbered 37 In PL, while under 38 are,out of

place, numbers 36,37,38, of the table of contents.
Lit ^ •—'^ j-A /}jiJ|c-
S
'. " " ^V $*&lL£
S s * .♦ •
/ •AtwlC / LjuT
.i"
K ■«û-
X" .' .■•: *>'

•*———'——4 jii-i^'j
J 1 ^ 'J^y__Js^jXjck
Lt-iU^L^j tXXy
— i&\y
>
32-36
32, Darb al-khatt fl'l-Miatt. If of two lines an
end of one is placed at right angles to an end of the
other and caused to pass over It so as
LIKE I LIKE to describe a rectangular figure, the
plane so described Is a square If the
lines are equal, an oblong, If unequal.
33. Hutamassan. Tangency nay occur between two
circles, internally If they are of different diameters,
and externally whateyer their relative
TAUOEMTS dimensions; also between a line and a
circle If the line Is straight and Is In
contact with the circle, without the one cutting the
other.
34. Shakl iwihit bl'l-d5'lrah. A rectilineal figure
Is said to be described about a circle when all its
FIGURE ABOUT sides are In contact with the
A CIRCLE circle.
35. Shakl muhlt blhl al-dfl'lrah. A rectilineal
figure Is said to be Inscribed in a circle when
FIGURE WITHIN the latter passes through all the
A CIRCLE angles of the former.
36. Zawlyah allattl taqbaluhS al-qaws. The angle
which Is received by an arc Is the interval between two
ANGLE IN A arc, and meeting in one point thereof,
SEGMENT [and any equal angle Is said to be ac-
cepted, plzrufta, by that arc].
10
v
v . "■ » •- , ^^
>' / ^
<i3v 3i£ÎJiiûljUc^Jv^l^-4!jls=»
-LJ)
Ui'
;l
s:
^ -3 ^1^4 ftk- ..*
d s^5^V) Lcv-^
«Li'«
Ul.iil JULjJ^t
37-40
37. Dawr al-da'lrah Idha qutruha wahld. If the
diameter of a circle Is one (cubit or a span or any
other measurement), the circumference
BATIO DIAMETEB- la approilmately three and a seventh
-GIHGUKFEEEHGE times as much according to the In-
vestigations of Archimedes, vko found
that It Is between two numbers, being a little less
than the larger and a little more than the smaller.
If half the diameter be multiplied by half the circum-
ference, the result la the area of the circle, and In
this example (diameter one) would be. a half and two
sevenths or 11/14.
30. Juz' wa amthal. If one magnitude Is used to
measure another, and found to enter It several times
without remainder, the former Is
ALIQUOT AND called an aliquot part, juz', of the
UU1TIPLE latter. The former Is necessarily
smaller than the latter, which Is
described as a multiple, amthSl. ajfif, of the former,
because It contains It so many times.
39. Nlsbah. Batlo Is the relation between two
things of the same hind, by which we know the measure
of the one as compared with the
BATIO other. Thus we call a man 'father'
when we contrast him with his son,
and the latter 'son' when comparing him with his
father. Similarly we call one thing half of another,
which Is double the former.
40. Tangsub. Proportion Is the equality of two or
more ratios between a aeries of terms, at least three
In number, e.g., the first1 Is one-
fifth of the second and the second
one-fifth of the third, as 1 Is to
S, as S Is to SS.
25
1st 2nd 3rd
one five twenty five

1
l.al-awwal Khums al-thSnl wa'l-thanl Khums al-
thallth. t1
/.«^r "î£'^r-J —^J-^.
i-^ljJI —J-" -*/'I >'b ^
ij^ ^
w. ^ ^ f^ f ^ ^ » u, ^ ' « rf*'
\)\ilL*jL\>\
-—v»" j>^^*Livj»\
"—L_^--»Hi!^!} -Miil ^cJo lt>! —
-*—» i w" L--i|lA_3 jW-«*^j>-V^1

* ^ ^ (0 f ^ >•
-Ji Li* lj ? Ljy>
41-44
41. AqdSr mutanaslbah. When there are four terms,
the ratio or the rirst to the second being the same as
that of the third to the fourth, whether
PHOPORTIOJJAL the second and third are equal or no,
UAGNXTUDES then the first multiplied by the fourth
Is equal to the second multiplied by the
third, also the third divided by the first Is equal to
the fourth divided by the second thus;
Multiplication between those which
1 3 are diagonally opposite always gives
Is to : Is to the same product, as does division
5 IS between those on the same side, not
diagonally.
42. Muqaddam wa tSlI. Of two terms between which
there Is a ratio, that which Is mentioned first Is
called the antecedent, muqaddam. and
ANTECEDEKT AMD that which Is mentioned second, the
CONSEQUENT consequent, tail.
r
43. Ak3 al-nlsbah. When there are four propor-
tionals, and the second Is to the first as the fourth
Is to the third, the proportion Is
BrTEETED said to be Inverted, 'eka or khllaf
PROPORTION al-nlsbah, [bashguua^J, e.g.,5:1
TT"—r~s.
44. Ibdal al-nlsbah. When there are four proport-
ionals, the first of which Is to the third as the sec-
ond to the fourth, the proportion Is
PERMUTATION said to be by permutation. Our ex-
ample Is one-third, eg., 1 : 5 :: 3 :
15.
1 5 1 5
first second first second
3 15 15
third fourth fourth third
r
aka Ibdal
12
5^ « « *
\j L^JJjU »Jii I > C1*jj&j I JXjfc^ LH
I T ^•"-'^t^'-Va)
J- n
v. ■;." a
» ,, •'
J
18 r* w5^M!ksr- "
^ '* *' ^ !L.
q ii
"*) ■# r tit
^_s*' , U\>»L-iJ»"i)^3Ul
-» yt*1 (It • •, r 4 < >
J\--> Jj>^jft_-\ui A-i^j ^ j^y' ^
''' ^ ^ o Uf 4 S^- ^
^d>K
t. . 'i jCl A-^yS^y63^»^^

? ►] -> ^ ^'X .' • ^ 7
VC ^ OÛiJXj
V-V^^ JJAâIÂ X .XL 11i,Ai--~.i
-;i r aXJL-^, Uû1 ^>7"}^'46^1

f*'
C "J-j T ^
45-48
45. Tarklb al-niabah. Vftian there are four proport-
ionals, and the aum of the first and second Is to the
second as the sun of the third and
COMPOSITION fourth Is to the fourth, the proport-
ion is said to be by composition. Our
example is a multiple and the fifth thereof, 5:1::15:3
6:1::18:3.
46. Tafsll al-nlsbah. TVhen there are four propop-
tlonals, and the fiTcnaaa of the first oter the second Is
to the second, as the excess of the
DIVISION third over the fourth Is to the fourth,
the proportion Is said to be by divis-
ion or separation. As the first term In our example la
smaller, than the second, 1:5::3:15, proportion by sep-
aration can only occur after Inversion, thus; 5:1::15:3
yielding 4:1::12:3.
47. 0.alb al-nlsbah. When there are four propor-
tionals, and the first Is to Its excess over the
second, as the third is to Its excess
CONVERSION over the fourth, the proportion is
said to be by conversion. Our example
after Inversion, 5:1;:15:3, gives 5:4;:15:12.
48. Nlsbah al-musgwBt al-muntazlmah. 5/hen the
ratio of the first to the second is the same as that of
the third to the fourth, and that
PROPORTION Bf of the second to the fifth the same
ORDIMATE EQUALITY as that of the fourth to the sixth,
and so on for any number of propor-
tionate terms, then the terminal numbers are also In
proportion, as In our example, the first Is 1/5 of the
second, and the second I/4 of the fifth, so the first
Is 1/20 of the fifth, as Is the third of the sixth.
20
1st 2nd 511i
1 1
15 60
4th 6th
13
^(v-1
>r^î ^ Ult* ■^r—
—1^. li=aii}li— li^J^^âîi lUt^J^5^\j^/Oj^^-—Jl^'
OLII jl-Î^D; juiâ^
t* P ^ ^jAl^Liliûiiû
jV j/ ^lûwûijujv^
l^-^ [ U ^JU^^îlui^
f l« .r>
CLJ
49-50
49. Miebah al-mjaSwat al-mudtarlbah. when the ratio
of the first to the second Is the'same as that of the
fourth to the alxth, and that of the
PROPORTION BY third to the fourth the same as that
INORDINATE of the second to the fifth, the mid-
KQUALITY die terms are not proportionate as in
the last case, hut the ratio of the
first to the fifth is the same as that of the third to
the alxth, then the proportion is said to he hy inord-
inate equality, e.g.,
the ratio of the first
to the second is 1/5, as 1. 5 20
is that of the fourth to
the sixth, while the 1st 2nd 6th
ratio of the second to
the fifth is 1/4 as is
that of the third to the
fourth. The second and
fourth are not proport-
ionate, while the extreae
terms, first and fifth, 12 60
and third and sixth have
the same ratio 1/4 of 1/5
3rd 4th 6th
50. Misbah muthannah bi'l-takrlr. When the same

ratio is continued between a long series of terms in
such a way that the ratio of the
DUPLICATE RATIO first to the second is the same as
that of the second to the third, and
that of the third to the fourth etc., then the ratio of
the first to the third is said to be the duplicate,
muthannah. ratio by repetition, takrlr, of the ratio of
the first to the second, and the ratio of the first to
the fuurlh, the triplicate, muthallathah. ratio thereof,
14
r. fr T ibLll)
^ ) 2_^> Jjj* —' ^-7 ^jjU iS^^-.Ifial
') ^JL ^^>L—1
t* ^ r ^1 jÔu \Arif=,
^ Jp" jAj ^ -ill
a3 UU V
A.J J
U i—l^l|^3VAÎ»>^'ls==i^-r5LjL*^jil i)
50-51.
and so on according to this analogy. Do you not see
that If the ratio between these numbers is, for exanple,
1:8, then the first is of the second, and ^ of ^ of
the third, (the half occurring twice), and ^ of of
of the fourth, and ^ of ^ of J of of the fifth, (the
^ recurring four times).
The analogy is the same if you assume some other
ratio, such as 1:5 or 1:4, or any other fraction or
multiple.
2 4 16 38
id itd th th
51. Nlsbah nm'allafah. This ratio resembles the

foregoing, the duplicate, except that In the latter the
ratios between the terms are Identlc-
C0MP0UND RATIO al, while in this, the ratios are
different, such as 1:4, or 1:5. For
instance, between two proportionate terms a third is
interposed, and the ratio of the first to the third Is
said to be compounded of the ratio of the first to the
second and that of the second to the third. Just as in
the case of a road between two towns the distance
^ The copyist remarks that this line » was added inad-

vertently,
16
rr 17
•>L J.l
vj
i- u' —J IÛIa_U)
A^y i L o U.V3
51-53
Is made up of the stretches between the various stages.
Sometimes Instead of the expresslen compound,tatlif,It
Is described as duplicate, tathnlyyah.It being said that
the ratio of the first to the third Is equal to the
ratio of the first to the second multiplied by the
ratio of the second to the third. But compound Is pre-
ferable .
As an example of the compound
ratio,lot 2 and 12 be two terms and 2 4 12
let 4 be Interposed. The ratio between
the first and the third, one sixth, Is
composed of the ratios between the first
and second, and the second and third,
viz., one half of one thlrd;whlle if the
proportion be Inverted,the ratio between
the third and first, viz., six times, Is 1 1
composed of the ratios between the third 5" S
and second, three times, and the second
and first, twice, viz., three multiplied
IV two.
52. Xrtlfa'' al-shakl. The altitude of a figure is
the greatest perpendicular from an angle
ALTITUDE of the figure [Internally] to Its base, or
OF FIGUHE [externally] to Its base produced.
53. MuthallathSt mutashablhah. Any
triangle, the angles of which are sever-
ally equal to the angles
3HIILAH of another triangle, Is a
TRIANGLES similar triangle, and the
corresponding sides,
naza'lr. [which are opposite any two
equal angles of the two triangles) have
the same proportion to each other.
!</" j litl-y
i_ Uj)UjVxJlk=JUj^l
9 V ^ ^ *" *
fAjjby j^Ly* LX-^ >\ I ^1 ^
^ t V
| , ) -L^'—axuj^ljJI
lr r
f V. . .', -
^ rf * '^ * * *
IL' -X us 1 :}l»La>lj—Lo^LZlLli#!
î' ,J^y\^S\^\.: Xr.

^ s t*, t
a—Ar-«ijf-,*-f"\J'
-Af j^■**J.>1 A^-l/V *_j\_*>*o\ A-l> A-^t
•'v.., S -VT - .
54-57.
54. Hlahah dhot wasat wa tarafaln. '.Then a line Is
divided into two parts In sued a way that the lesser Is
to the greater as is the greater to
MEAN AND the whole,the ratio is said to be
EITKEME BAT10 dhat wasat wa tarafaln;the line is
cut in mean and extreme ratio.
55. Takafi^- al-nisbah. This kind of proportion dif-

fers from that dealt with in paragraph 41,in having the
second and third terms on the same
THE 3TEELYABD side. It l3_well seen in the steel-
yard,oarastun,'■ where the ratio of
the distance of the hooE
*8(1 rab which carries the
scale-chains, from the
fulcrum.'"ilaqah. Is to •aqrab 'llaqah
that of the Ladjustable] 2
counterpoise.rummana.®
from the fulcrum,as the
weight of the counter- 0
poise is to the weight rummana 5
of the 1oad.thiql,which
is being measured.
thiql
56. Quwwah wa tul. A square is called a power,

quwwah, and its side, tul, "tfhen the power of a certain
line Ts spoken of as equal to the
POWER AND BOOT product of a certain line by a cer-
tain line, know that its square is
equal to the rectangle designated by those two lines.
57. Al-mukgrab. A cube is a solid body like the
dice in nardbounded by six squares disposed in the
six relative directions so that Its
AL-MJKArrAB length, breadth, and height are equal.
1. The sixth form of kafl does not occur except when

used for kafa'a.so that the form takafu is preferable
which contains the two meanings of eqallty and Inversion.
2. From xapibTtiov ;v,Lane under tlr q.abbEn from P.kapBn.
3. A pomegranate;P.nara;a stone weight of this shape.
4. A kind af bnnkgammfvn■ v. Hyde, Hlstorla Nerdiludii,
p. S50.
L •* h • *
_î» -r^-^ 'S j>^>>OL»l V<^

' ' *9
'' .ft '"^Mli,
jlH
&} **f j ^ ^
/v-' "^'iV
58-61
58. Al-manshur. A prism has for its sides three
surfaces, square or rectangular,and two triangles,one
above and one below. Sometimes the squares
THE PRISM may be replaced by rhombs and the rectang-
les by rhomboids.
59. Uefuwgnah qfi'imah. A cylinder, ustuwSnah,sutllif
is an elongated round body,bounded above and below by
equal and parallel circles,the centres
RIGHT CYLINDER of which are joined by the axis of
the cylinder, which is the shortest
line between these two points,while the side is the
shortest line between their circumferences. It is gen-
erated by the rotation of a line perpendicular to the
circumferences of the two circles.
50. Ustuwanah ma'ilah. An oblique cylinder is on©
where the axis is not perpendicular to the ends. The
top and bottom of a column need not
OBLIQUE CYLINDER be circles, but may be any similar
and equal figures,such as two tri-
angles or two squares or other many-sided figure,
mudalla r.
61. A1-makhrut. A cone is a solid whose base is a
circle or other figure,from which it diminishes to a
point. It may be regarded as a cylinder
THE CONE tapered from the base, the one end remain-
ing as before, the other, the point,being
the centre of the circle above. If the cylinder is a
right cylinder the cone is a right cone,if oblique, oblique
18
• ' il»l' i •,^' •'..'« ■ -i'i'- n -''•». ■»
sm
CX^ ^(jcls X [jk-B l^j^juaJijtiX^'^jligj^J Ij I ejrU
vfk ^yj;^
61-63
A cone Is always the third part of a cylinder [haying
the same base and altitude]. The axis, sahm,! of the
cone Is the straight line from the yertai to the centre
of the base; and the side, the straight line from the
vertex to the olrcuniferenoe of the base.
62. autu'- al-makhrut-8 [There are five different
planes by which a cone may be out Into sections, as If
by a saw], the f1rst, through the
CONIC SECTIONS vertex, the result being a rectilinear
triangular f1gure;the second,parallel
to the base,producing a circle,[smaller than the base];
the third,parallel to a 1\ /
side,resulting In a para- ' ' '
bola.mukgfl. If the plane
of section,the fourth,Is
not parallel to the side
of the cone,but meets the
side within the cone to-
wards the base,and when
produced emerges there,
the section Is an ellipse,
nSqls; while3 If It meets
It towards the vertex and
emerges there,the section,
the fifth,Is a hyperbola,
zS'ld.
These are the only sections of the cone, unless It
Is oblique, In which case the plane of section, although
not parallel to the base may still produce a circle If
adjusted to the axis.
63. Al-kurah. A sphere Is a rounded body bounded by
one undivided surface; within It Is a point, the centre,
markaz. from which all straight
THE aEEERE lines which reach the surface are
equal. If you Imagine a circle
rotating on Its own diameter which remains stationary,
1 PL and PP have nlz for tlr.
S PP has magrflt throughout and drops a line describing
the parabola.
3 should read:- while If,Instead,It Intersects the base
and when produced towards the vertex reaches the side
of the second cone (as In P and above) It Is a hyper-
bola etc.
Js,\3pj-Cg~ 4IU U Is
>, jlAl^Jic- ^r=i<Jr^'-,

" » •'' ^ *•( t A -•I »' ^
^y39U^2iJiiAZ.l Jj
j\> ^ <jW—A^.'
1
■k
fa t&jp J i '
L»L«—y»L^=>
Wjuw^LyaitLiiil
63-65
on Its own diameter which remains stationary, until the
circle has come back to the point from which It started,
a sphere has been described.
64. B1 kam shakl tuhlt al-kurah. How many figures
(polyhedral can be Inscribed within a sphere? When the
faces of the polyhedia are equilateral
FOLYHEDBA and equiangular and all equal and of one
IN A SPHBRB kind, only fire [the five (Platonic)
regular bodies]; and these five are re-
lated by resemblance to the four elements and the
sphere. When, however, the faces are of various kinds,
there Is no limit to the number.
With regard to the five referred to; these are,
first, the cube, bounded by six squares, called earthy;
second, the loosahedron, by twenty equilateral tri-
angles; It Is the watery one; third, the octahedron, by
eight equilateral triangles, the airy body; fourth, the
tetrahedron, by four equilateral triangles, the prickly
body, hassakl, fiery; and fifth, the dodekahedron, by
twelve Lequilateral and equiangular] pentagons, [the
sphere].!
65. PawB'lr rlzam wa slghSr. The terms great and
small circles are used only for those described on the
surface of a sphere. The plane of a
CHEAT AND great circle passes through the centre
311ALL CIRCLES of the sphere and divides It Into two
hemispheres; It has two poles equi-
distant from the centre. If It Is desired to draw a
circle on a plane surface about a centre, the compass
must be opened to the extent of a radius.2 Similarly,
to describe from a pole a great circle on a sphere, the
compass must be opened to the extent of the side of a
square Inscribed In the circle.
The plane of a small circle, on the other hand,
does not pass through the centre of the sphere; It
divides the sphere Into two unequal parts, and In con-
sequence the distances from Its centre to the poles of
1 It will be observed that paragraphs 1-64 are sub-

stantially from the definitions of the first six, and
the 11th and ISth books of Euclid.
2 The Persian rendering.
'••• « "' . * r ' *
-__!> )^^>1„Ma.5 L^JLJ
»yjl^JVîllmu^'
• fc *:« u^ 44, *
"""^ ^s——^1^3 J— LllJ ^-*^11
Û^wjuui-A
tyiSi Li-^JtLLi Ivôû^'

65-67
the sphere are unequal. All great circles on a sphere
are of equal size, being the largest possible on the
sphere. The dimensions of small circles, on the other
hand, are not only less than those of great circles,
but are unequal in size, and vary from what la Just
less than a great .circle to the smallest possible size.
66. Shawass hadhlhl al-dawa'jr. Great circles on a
sphere, in view"of the fact that they are all of the
same dimension, and cut the sphere
PROPERTIES OF into two halves, necessarily intersect
THESE CIRCLES each other because their being
parallel or independent is absolutely
excluded. They cut each other into halves at two
opposite points, and whenever one great circle passes
through one of the poles of a second greet circle, [it
necessarily passes through Its other pole] and if
perpendicular to it, cuts it at right angles; likewise
the second passes through the poles of the first.
The area of a great circle is quarter of the area
of the sphere on which it is described, and in accord-
ance therewith, when the diameter is multiplied into
the circumference, the area of the surface of the
sphere results.
With regard to small circles on a sphere, in view
of the fact that their dimensions are less than those
of great circles, and that they offer an uninterrupted
sequence in decrease of size from these, they may be
parallel to each other and to great circles, and may be
cut into halves or unequal divisions by other circles
great or small. They cannot be described by opening a
compass to the side of an inscribed square, as in the
ease of great circles, but by different measures.
67. ftutb wa mlhwar. We have already referred to
the poles of a sphere from the point of view of draw-
ing a great circle thereon; the pole
POLE AND AXIS represents here the centre of a circle
drawn on a plane surface. But we also
speak of the poles of a sphere from the point of view
21
^lejjî^y ^),£,)4?M$jzX£=*
1
^ÛLt^lil^l^l <oJ) LyL—tt^j 1^5 Ci*
kj-^V) 1*^/1} jW U!j l^-^jir~J=>j^p^jt>)j\£

67-70
of its movement, for then if It moves In its own place,
revolving by itself, there are two points opposite each
other which are obliged to remain stationary as in a
turner's wheel, shahr al-kharratln.1 The line joining
these points, the axis, is also stationary while the
sphere is revolving.
68. Mintaqat al-harakah. The equator of a sphere
is the great oircle half-way between the two poles
of the moreiaont of the sphere. On this
EQUATOR OF account It is called mintaqah., as re-
MOVEMENT sembllng a girdle; this girdle revolves
Itself but its plane is not marked ex-
ternally. Other great circles, however, are then marked
externally on the sphere, or sections of it like the
hoop of a tambourine, shanbar al-daff.2
69. MadarSt. Small circles on the surface of a
sphere parallel to each other are called
PARALLELS madirit.
70. Qusl mutashabihah. Similar arcs on a plane
surface are those which are intercepted between two
straight lines proceeding from the centre
SIMILAR of a series of concentric circles towards
ARCS the largest of these. On the surface of a
sphere, however, they are the portions of
parallel circles intercepted between two great circles
passing through the pole of these. Similar arcs are
either all arcs of small circles or one may be an arc
of a great circle; they are said to be similar because
they are the sane proportionate parts of the circles of
which they are parts, whether on a sphere or on a plane
surface, [if, for example, one is a third of its own
circle, all the others are thirds of theirs.]
1 charkh-i hunqagarSn. P. Gharkh la the ordinary

Persian word for a wheel, and occasionally appears as
jarkh in Arabic; v. Boothor, Diet. Fr.-Arab. Vulg.
under 'roue*, while 'tour' is as usual mlkhratah. Shahr
(or Jahr) is an unusual word for a lathe, 5u^ Is noted
by Dozy; here by mistake, sahm.
S Arabic form of chanbar P. Meaning of last sentence
obscure.
22
~Z^M^JAJ*LL+ A£3jiJ^1^3^\^_i^tw\jJ|^
^w Lij '*-4i^L^~^-'j^}L4]^t.
—.sij^l^jjdCujij4^-L^LÛljW'l./£=tj|U i :.
- * i > '•» i "'••iii -'.^ „ „ * '"
l « ^ ^ , ' j I ^ •'' X • •* -■ I '

OJjUlj oV-i^J^Vr'O
, * , * "^ (lr
_A- —, * * ■* t ^
Iw
71-72
71. Shakl al-quta''. A spherical transTersal figure

results, when of four arcs of great circles Intersect-
ing each other,each two unite In one
■SECAMT FIGUDE' point;as when the points of the
middle fingers of each hand are In
contact,and the points of the Index fingers are brought
against the middle joints of the opposite middle flnîia,
as In the diagram.
In Tlew of the fact that geometrical propositions
make use of Arithmetic In the sciences of Astronomy and
Astrology, we shall proceed In the first place to
describe the properties of numbers.
ARITHMETIC
72. Wahid. 'One' Is that to which the term Unity Is
applied. Complete In Itself It does not admit of being
added to or subtracted from, nor Is It altered
ONE In substance from Its original condition by
multiplication or division. It has the powers
of all numbers and all the properties pertaining to
these, and has In addition a special technical
function to discharge with regard to things which
are numbered. In this sense It occupies an Intermediate
position between the higher numbers, which result
from the continuous addition of units, and the lower
fractions Into which It may be divided, and differs
from both In that It does not alter by being multiplied
or divided by itself.whereas the former are respectively
The spherical transversal proposition was of fundamental
Importance In the evolution of spherical trigonometry;
Al-BirunI develops It In the Masrudl Canon, and wrote a
separate work on the subject, v. BJdrnbo, Thablt's Werk
fiber den Trausversalensatz, Erlengen, 1924, p. 84.
ST 21: -ysA
'A ) y ■ - \
jULa)i
^ -î y*'_iA, ^wî^geo

72-75
respectively increased or diminished, and the latter
diminished or increaaed hy these processes while'one'
occupies its own position between the two.
73. Kaif yatajaza'a al-wjihid wa ila ham Juz'•
Although 'one* is in reality Indivisible, nevertheless
the unit, one as a technical expression,
SOBDIVXSIOH employed in dealing with sense-objects,
OF ONE whether by weighing, measuring by bulk,
or length or number,or merely in thought,
is obvlouslyl capable of sub-division,tajzl'ah,for as
a technical expression ena nnly nnHna lirTTvyjjMO^dBnijvfth-
In the science of Astronomy the unit employed is the
degree,darajah,it is divided into sixty parts,smaller,
ahaflh^-ffianZIEa—flrst and these are called minutes,
dace'jq. on this account. This method of division is
customary in dealing with money, the dirham is divided
into sixty fulus,2 and in mensuration, the JarlbS has
sixty ra3hlr. Again these m-imit.aQ a-ra a-iinatOT Tnt.a
sixty seconds, (the second time of division) and the
second into sixty thirds and the thirds into sixty
fourths, and so on for the whole series of natural
numbers as far as the arithmetician desires In any
particular case.4
74. ""Adad.. A number is defined as a sum of units:
one is therefore excluded from the category of numbers
NUMBER and is not called a number.
75. Al-''adad al-tabHyyah. The natural series of
numbers results from the successive addition of a unit
to one and is, therefore also known
NATURAl NUMBERS as mutawall', consecutive, like 1,
2|3,4,5,
13 For muhal read mujalla. 2plshlz P;v.ffled. Beltr. XIT.

Jarlb.a measure of corn and of land sown therewith,
3,500 sq.cubits. The '"ashlr, 60 sq.cubits is one-tenth
of a qaflz, which, therefore, is here one-sixth of a
.tarlb. Garl P is any standard of measure, also of time,
as in India gharl,24 minutes, 1/BO of 24 hours.
'The flfth3_up to the tenths are specified,khawan^s,
sawadis aawabjv. thawSmln. tawasi''awashir, all oh
measure fawgril instead of the usual' af TSr7~^
^ '*-f^ \ ^ llT^
i u i(j-r^'îj31 14^/
'X'\»0^\ J<»-J{jf Jo'^jlÛV I J^C)!J /«^fc

_,,jjI . *— -, )f „ . . ' '
j -^3 S ^ c/* ^ ^ ^ ** ^■Jr' *
•• ^^ ^ >]\1"-" \^ ••• ^^ | ^
0 Li \) ^-" ^ ' J A-- I't/* (j ' i-lt
3 3 a-a 1^ 3 cr* 3^^ ^ ^ ^
y^L^y* s jiJlUL|(v»^j^Pi_3y^^<-^'^—
^VW.^ j^\j \ ^>1 >\l ji_,
|pli) j J»l_y_ £A.V^ I \ iLl UI (/ 1

76-63
76. ZawJ. Even numters are those which are divis-
ible Into equal parts, i.e., halves; the first of these
Is two, and the successive even numbers are 2,
EVEN 4,6,0,10,610.
77. Eard. Odd numbers are those not so divisible,
except by making use of a fraction; the first Is three
and the successive odd numbers 3,5,7,9,11,
ODD etc.
78. ZawJ al-zawj. Evenly-even numbers are those
which can be divided Into halves, and each half Into
halves, and so repeatedly until the
EVENLY-EVEN quotient la one.
79. ZawJ al-fard. Unevenly-even numbers are those
which admit once of division by two yielding an odd
number as quotient, not one, like
UHEVENLY-E7EN ten.
60. Zewj al-aaw.] wa'l-fard. Evenly-even-odd num-
bers are those which admit of b"eln6 divided Into halves
more than once, but the division
ETEN1Y-ETEN-0DD does not extend so far as to yield
a quotient of one, like twelve.
81. Eard al-fard. Oddly-odd numbers are those
which are divisible by an odd number with an odd number
as quotient; such as nine. Into which
ODDLY-ODD three enters thrice, or fifteen, Into
which five enters thrice and three five
times,
82. Ma el-r'adad al-awwal. A prime number Is that
which has no other factor than unity,and no fraction
—except that resulting from division by
PRIME NUMBER Itself and called after Itself, like
five, In which one Is contained five
times, and of which fifths are the only fractions; or
like seven, of which one Is the seventh part, sevenths
the only fractions, and Into which no other number en-
ters without remainder.
03, MS al-faded al-murakkab. A composite number
^r^tS^lygl^'îuUtl IvTr
^(i' Xj J O* U* 1
<J& \* fjSJ'jj-
^ v11 ^ U^rHi MIij ;

^V^YJ o-
tlAl'U J^j OJ \ ^ b j V ^ i>»
'^•^bvd?* ^ ^ a^-6,«—^ Jj-

V^ ^ j VI 11* ^l/Jj-^-
^ ^l/Jf a,>p A *^/f ^
\\Il> ^[r^.
$A*~\£ 'J^y J^ J^J Iff \* Ijj V^\^ [f Vi^- ^y) l»

83-85
has more than one factor, and has fractions other than
those hearing the same name, like
COMPOSITE NDUBER six,In which one Is contained six
times,two three times,and three
twice,the corresponding fractions being a sixth, a third
and a half.
84. Ma al-âdad al-musattah. A plane, musattah.
number 1r t.bat, wmnh raanTta frnm the multiplication of
one number by another. If the two
FLAKE NUMBER numbers are the same the result Is
a square, murabbar. and one of the
two numbers multiplied, Its root, Jldhr. For example,
If three be multiplied by three the pi'uduct,nlne, Is a
square,the root of which Is three. If the two numbers
differ by one, the plane number Is said to be altered,
ghayrl: this la the case with twelve which Is the pro-
Juox of three and four, while if they differ by more
than one the result la a rectangular number.mustatll.
Twelve Is also an example of a rectangular number,
for It Is the product of two and six, a difference of
four between them, and so from one point of view It Is
ghayrl. and from another mustatll.
85. MB al-radad al-mutammam. When the root of a
square number Is multiplied by the root of another
square number, the product Is a
COMPLETE NUMBER complete number,mutnimnam, because
the sum of the twu squaies plus
twice the complete number yield another square number,
whose root Is the sum of the two roots In question.
?or example six Is a complete number, being the
product of two by three, the roots of four and nine,
and twelve added to the sum of these squares gives
twenty-five, whose root la five, the sum of two and three.
The plane numbers are Important because the ancients

In multiplication considered the factors as lines, the
products as planes. Wledemann.
/vl*-^**C^V* •JJVtAjjli^ >10\>«^
^Vj O\» ^-êr*
^ d/.-5 \ die ^ J»^-» ^V w
jtiij ij ^ ^ ^ ^\3-«li-j ^tj
i>îV-4rd^ 4—^^' '..•^l/'^«——^/-\» 1
■* (j^
I. <4/^ ■J-^LrV^ ^j I
VcTr-^ O"^ ^rûVuTl JV" Cr*
4_1, gj Ja-^J* 0V»'\ O-1"^/* <-»,JV1

84-89
86. Ma al-a''iiad al-mushtarakah. These are numbers
like 15,25,30. whloh share tshgrakaT a common factor
other than one, for each of them Is dl-
NUMBEH3 WITH visible by five without remainder,and
COMMON FACTORS shares in having the fraction called
after five viz. a fifth. And these
fifths have a definite relation to each other and to
the numbers themselves, for the fifth of fifteen is
three-fifths of the fifth of twenty-five,and the fifth
of twenty-five is five-sixtha of the fifth of thirty.
The number whloh is shared by them, the common factor,
is called wafq, and when they have all been divided by
it, the quotients are styled matwlyySt,
87. VS. al-a""dad al-mutabaylnah. These are numbers
like seven and ten, whloh have no common factor other
than one, and do not share in other
SEPARATE NU11HERS particulars. They are therefore
spoken of as separate numbers.
r
88. MS al- adad al-tanm. A perfect number, tamm,
is one the aliquot parts of which being added together
yield the number in question, like
PERFECT NUUBER six; for half of six is three and a
third two, and a sixth one, all of
which being added together make six.
89. Ma al-radad al-naqls wa al-zB'ld. A deficient
number, naqls, la one the fractions of which added to-
gether amount to a sum less than ttio
DEFICIENT AND number in question, like eight; for
ABUNDANT NUMBERS its half, four; and its fourth,
two; and its eighth, one; amount
to seven, less than the eight itself.
An abundant number on the other hand, za'id, is one
whose component fractions amount to more than the number
itself, like twelve; for its half, six; and its third,
four; and its fourth, three; and its sixth, two;
with its twelfth part, one, add together to sixteen.
Û-U^lOW- ^
'i^j^ K ^ Ly^ ^WVTiAi; ^ U- (j^.^ W—j
f«(J-'U'vX-'Â_^P-t)^'^(J-^ (J-'J/U-I
a»i> \ > \# \**jiJA\ tiîl i
^ j^y,^\t/lv> yi i» ^ 6* ^ K" ^
I*
l»»*^<-,tV'jcl>* ftt* l^-a''i t>l»
^ ^r <S 'A [^*lrt (

u OÛ^Jo\j)l
f^ûj 1 îLi«! U/-iy
trees'
90-91
r
90. MS &l-a dSd al-mitahSbbah. These are any two
numbers, the fractions of one of which being added to-
gether are equal to the other num-
A1IICADLE NUMHKKS her. One of eeoh such pair is el-
ways abundant, the other deficient.
An example of such a pair la fumlahed by 220 and 284.
The former Is an abundant number; Its fractions are:-
a half, 110; a quarter, 55; a fifth, 44; a tenth,
22; a twentieth, 11; a hundred and tenth, 2; a
twenty-fifth, 4; a forty-fourth, 5; a twenty-second,
10; an eleventh, 20; and a two hundred and twentieth,
1; which numbers being added together make 284.
The other number of the pair Is a deficient number;
its fractions are:- a half, 142; a quarter, 71; a
hundred and forty-second, 2; and a two hundred and
eighty-fourth, 1. These add up to 220, and the numbers
of this pair are therefore called amicable numbers.
91. MS al-aMSd al-mulassamah. These so-called

solid numbers result from the multiplication of one
number by another and the product
SOLID NUMBERS by a third. If the three numbers
are all alike, the product Is a
cube, muka*'rab and one of the three, the cube-root,
kali. Sometimes this name is given to the cube Itself,
In which case the root is spoken of as a side, dll''.
For example, if three Is multiplied by Itself and
the product again by throe, the result Is 27. This Is
the cube, mufca"b, and the cube-root, ka£b, 3; or the
cube, kali and Its side dll*", 3. If two of the three
numbers are alike, and the third smaller, the result Is
IjL*
ij-fy i i ^j^jj \>«l^<-j^»» J^Vlj^^jk,^
'—fyj'sTJ r J* Sr^»Ût/& ^y-ir'Lîj rr^j
'a* J'V ^ ^cV^-> ij aî/y T^^CA—
•êvk^y^ \j*uj^j(3^(lr**^T'^r-PJ-'lu'^rji.
V^Vjiijj it* r-/*^
'*-^> fû^r"-' j» ^ Cr" 0** Tj* t/fr* \* ^ ^ ^ L^
^3(j^\6'a6j rr* 'l^-VI I JUi ^fjT^4lt'£ lj j-â-
"/i-A^ > WVf^ VIU uyli-

t
-^J}Ljij]i^\>>j^>£c»;\
■—^'«dki \ j» ij U jj 13 j»'j
/Ut'o*l(j\c-lj>(3li
*»r'>^<rf3r^ <-1^ IT o li
licV1s_41i ^ (jL'ICSJLjqIJ *1x a^J^-

91-92
like a brlok, iihTiiy. For example; I multiply the
three by three and the product, 9, by two, the result-
ant eighteen is a llbnly number. On the other hand if
the third number Is larger, the result Is known as
tlrlT resembling tlr. the main beam of a house,P or
Judhu'. the trunks of trees.
For example; I multiply the three by three and
the product by four, the result Is thirty-six, a tlrly
number. Should all the numbers be different the result
Is a lauhly number, [lauh, a table;] for example; I
multlply"?Ee three by four and the product by five
making sixty; this Is a lauhly number.
92. Ma al-aMSd al-muthallathah ai-nmt.Hw5Hy*iti-
Successlve triangular numbers result from the summation
of oonsecutiwe natural numbers
TBIANGU1&B NUMBERS beginning with one. They are
called by the Hindus sankallta.
One which has the powers of all the numbers, Is the
first triangle; one added to two makes three, the
second triangle; the third triangle, six, Is formed
by the addition of one, two and three; while the
fourth, ten, Is the sum of one, two, three and four;
and so further on this analogy. The figure Is Intended
to show the relation of the triangles.
lst\
SndA
4thA
29
>00*^4*'A*l^^-lj.' ^k-I. • r-J\l>'--^r/..V.vl|-
a\)^ '
j'vt-JJ 1 \±j.\\*\U J li \ i ^ VAzllil

>b#VL(^ i
^ b; i' v ^ i '(jijitr cxZ- "VjuiU^jî
^ f" ^ (»zXiL»'w u4)>j rri

fe.. ^ " »'•
—' Liii i
V:
St,* jtl
V.
>
rrs
Kw
93-94
93. Ma al-ardad al-iiiurabbarah al-mut6wallyah.
Successive square numbers are arrived at by the smnma-
tion of sueeeaalve odd numbers.
SQUAKE NUMBERS One la the first square, which
with the addition of three yields
four, the second square, the product of two by two.
By adding five to four we have the third square, nine,
the square of three, which with the addition of seven,-
gives sliteen the fourth square, four by four.
The figure verifies the foregoing.
94, Ma al-ardad al-makhrutiyyah. Conical numbers

are obtained by the eumioatlon 6f successive triangular
numbers; they are called by the
CONICAL NUMBERS Hindus sankalita. The first cone
is one, to which the second tri-
angular number three being added gives four, the second
conical number. Vfltia the addition of six, the third
triangular number, we have ten, the third conical
number, [and by adding ten, the fourth triangular num-
ber, we have twenty the fourth conical number]P.
The figure^" facilitates the conception of these-
ist
2nd
3rd
1
4ih
All the M3S reproduce this figure which when completed

is evidently a summation of the odd numbers as seen in
the successive squares. One MS gives an elegant conical
figure here reproduced, which however, like the other
has the numbers 1,3,5,7 instead of 1,3,6,10.
30
vvV^ ^ b 1>VI £*& ^ I ajJ 1L
X--J X-" j VIJ" j.j 1 i lj
i-li a tLr-i ^ CMutj'JC, 'tiC
►t
i-Ul
dk. UJUl
J^l JrO ^WVM«
j ldL4^ 'y x-ji ur*> fi ^1»4jVi
j^-»> J—v^t CPcftJ ^ ^ ^ -^^ly f f '^r^j

95-98
95. Ma al-a^dSd al-ahr5mlyyah. Pyramidal numbers
are plied up like tbe arrangement of the weights of a
balance, one above the other, the
PYRW.IIDA1 smaller uppermost, like steps and
NUMBERS stairs. When the steps have the same
height like successive squares, as
l.^g.^ld.as, the sum Is called by the Hindus vargaS
sankalltaj when different, like successive cubes, gha™
sankallfaT 1,8.27,64.
■The properties of numbers and the technical terms
applied to them seem to be Interminable Just as numbers
are; we shall, therefore, proceed to mention some of
the processes In which they are used.
96. Ma al-hlsab. Arithmetic Is the treatment of
numbers and their properties In solving problems by way
of addition and subtraction, I.e.
AHITHMCTIQ Increases and decreases.
97. Ma al-darb. Multiplication Is the taking one
of two numBers and adding together so many fold^ of It-
self as there are units In the other
MULTIPLICATION number. For example, If we wish to
multiply five by seven, this Is
equivalent to adding seven fives, the sum of which Is
thirty-five; similarly the addition of five sevens
gives the same result; for the meaning of our expression
five by seven Is the amount of five taken seven times
or seven taken five times.
98. M5 al-qlSmah. Division Is the ascertaining of
a single share, blsgah, [bahr P,] of a quantity, the
alvTdend, al-maqsum, which has to be
DIVISION divided Into a certain number of
parts by the divisor, al-maqsum
''alalhl. Such share Is called the quotient, qism.'
For example, I have to divide thirty-five, the
dividend, by seven the divisor. Let us call the dividend
1 The Mi has 8 for 9.
2 The M3S have nazk or tark. Sankallta means addition;
varga. square; gTiana, cube.
S dHf Is not confined Lo doubling, but extends to
treEling, four-folding, etc.
^ ^ \&£o^S*Y\ Oj» V-il^;
•«
î6 plj^«
/* ^"Ui-'"LJtj^lI^ \» Ir-I jj 1
alÛp*j ^^7?7
vyO4 ^ U
#. M
' ••^'OÛjjOykj *—ru^*wjj- g- ■« -^1- '.-^/.ii
^"j *—'"^L^'uV (^-Ij <—'—'1
4 'yS'
4
|j\ ^ lt» |f» >*«fl ^^lillor «-^ j>g^ .«■■<'*•
^plj O* ^JI ly»j ^

99-101
a sum of money, mal. and the divisor a number of men,
the share of each man will be fire and this la the
quotient.
99. Ma al-tamwll wa'l-ta.1dhlr. When a number is

multiplied by the same number the product is the
square, mal, of that number, the opera-
SQ.UARE AMD tlon, squaring, being called tamvll.
SQUARE-ROOT For example, if seven be multTpTTeS by
sown the product, forty-nine, is the
square of seven. Tajdhlr on the other hand, is the
ascertaining of the number which, when multiplied by
Itself, will give the square in question, in this case
the number seven. This is called the root, Jidhr or
ajl, because the side of the square, dilr. is the
original dimension to which it is related.
100. Ma al-Jidhr al-muntac ■ 1 -p^mnni There are

rational, muntaoT and Irrational or surd, asamm. roots;
the farmer, known also as mantflq blhl,
RATIONAL AND mutlaq. maftflh [and ngtiq]. canoe ex-
SDHD ROOTS pressed in whole numbers, like three in
relation to nine, or four in relation
to sixteen, but the latter cannot be so expressed. It
is impossible, for Instance, to find a number which
multiplied by Itself will yield ten,l and the effort to
do so merely ends in a surd root, called asamm,B
because there does not exist any method of arriving at
it except approximately.
101. Ma al-tak'"lb wa'l-tadllC Cubing a number,

takÎb. is multiplying it by Itself and the product by
the original number;^ the result is a
CUBE AND cube, mukar""ab. For example, three
CUBE-ROOT multiplied by three gives nine, and
nine multiplied by three gives twenty-
seven. The extraction of the cube-root, tedlI*; is the
finding of the number which after being so Treated
T~creTete slttah.
S MS has aldan,
3 fl mithlihl is omitted.
VVj Oe VL
1
^ ^J-J*5 ^ Û»,
Z»*> tJ "^v® ^ ^ W\i
J VU J«*»-L$ jM
^ c^ z^-*
J\1 ^ J^-»<jV^L>» 1 Lf ^\> J* ^ iJ^J U^-*
^^1.^11 ^VLijjl-l U lT
Sj^Jy ■ 'A\ «ilAJ la »j p IsJal< Loj '^-'j < n "f*'
^^ j >î« <• y \ ^^Vu / ^ V^ a£J
VU^yJrj j-J'
^-^}J -^3^1. ci'il

1
>pj ^ ^ y V > jJ I ^ i 2^ ^r\ lu Vvr^
A—f£e"^ /Ât 2-^^
\C^j ^ VJ t^j
101-104.
gives the cube In question. In this ease the three
shose cube Is twenty-seven. This number Is called the
side of the cube, dllr. Sometimes It Is called kaTb,
but by the people generally the cube Itself Is known as
kam- for short, sorwe are constrained to name the root
dll* Instead of ka b to avoid ambiguity.
102. Ma al-takhattl • The method of trial and error,
takhattlt is used m extracting the square or cube root.
~ You neglect one or more ciphers, and
TRIAL AND [assume an approximate value for the
ERROR unknown quantity] saying In the case of
the square root, vakun,Ifi yakun.yakun.
[It Is,It Is not,It Isj] and In that of the cube root,
yakun.Ifi yakun.la vakun,yakun. some people Instead of
yakun say ya'î - it will give (the answer) - until the
last position Is arrlaed at,which satisfies all the
ciphers.
103. IS al-mukhraj.1 The denominator of a fraction
Is the number of the parts Into which the Integer Is
divided, and the fraction Is less than
DKHOMIKATOR that number. Take for Instance, the
three of a third, for the latter Is one
part of the Integer If that Is divided Into three parts.
So also two-thirds ere two of these parts. Similarly
four stands In the same relation to a fourth, as does
five to a fifth. The denominator should always be the
smallest In which the fraction csn be expressed,for two-
tenths and three-fifteenths are each of them one-fifth,
and while there Is no limit to higher terms, there is
to the lowest, wherefore the latter are preferable.
104. Ma al-tajnls. In order to make Integers and
fractions homogeneous, tajnls, the Integer must be
multiplied by the denominator of the
REDUCTION fraction and the numerator added to the
sum, so that the whole Is now of one
kind. For example, three and a quarter may be expressed
as three wholes and one of four parts of a whole; to
make them homogeneous we must multiply the wholes by
the denominator, four, making twelve fourths to which
1 So vocalized In Ellas' Eng.-Arab. Diet. Maqfim la the
usual expression for denominator, as Is bast for numer-
ator , and jmikhraj really refers to the lowest teims In
which a fraction can be expressed, v. Diet. Sol. Terms.
I ijj -'ggjl I <iXS \ 2— LryÔ-; ^-ir^
r^"' ^^ ^ûi^Vu!^3 Ui
^ !îi ^ -ir5,^"j-»u^Y'
0^*-^ ^ Cf~4lri*'^-ft'^ tt ^
^Sr-^cr^ J0 '
W/T-t ^fô £/* I^^^j*4-^ ^juftr"
1^' 1**101 '^1
'^t^\ i-»j| liiÛ Jc • t jyjjji* til X^JI
^ 6^r(H>^ \ Ufo îiUL^^jj^-

104-105
there has to be added one fourth In all 13/4. Or If
there are two different fractions such as 2/7 and 3/5,
and you desire to add them, then the denominators must
he multiplied, 7 x 5 = 35 which becomes the denominator
for both fractions. Now 2/7 of 35 is 10 and 3/g of 35
Is SI, so that when these are added the combined
fractions rendered homogeneous become 31/55.
In the case of fractions In the sexagesimal scale
used In Astronomy, such as minutes and seconds,
thawfinl, and whatever fractions are beyond these, when
It Is desired to make them homogeneous, the highest
denomination must be multiplied by sixty, the next
lower must be added to the product, and the operation
repeated until the lowest Is reached, and all are of
the same denomination, fmanall. pi. manazlll
For example, we have to make homogeneous three
minutes, four seconds and five thirds, thawalith, then
3' X 60 • 180" + 4" . 184" x 60 » 11040'"+ 5'" .
11045'" -
105. HE raf al-vadad. Nhen we have a number In

one of the denominations of the sexagesimal system,
—mere than sixty, we raise It to the next
ASCENDING higher denomination by dividing it by
REDUCTION sixty, and this operation Is repeated
until we have If possible only whole
degrees.
For Instance we have 11045 seconds which It Is
proposed to raise to a higher denomination. Divided
by sixty we have 184 minutes and five seconds, and
when this Is repeated the result Is 3° 4' 5".
In the table of contents of PL tarflr occurs under 105

PL. The term Is a synonym of bardEshtan-l "adad under
which title raf al-"adad Is discussed In PL 106. The
numbering of the paragraphs leadjusls Itself, PL 108
being 107 & 8.
'ffledemann refers to this passage In Act. Oriental.V,
153, where he observes that Reduction Is expressed by
forms of â-ft VII.
UXjO-1 Utr^t)V*j^J
ciul||cÂ^ i) (j J^'ij
ikiS^ ^LilUaJj (-/rx3^\^^^ ^cr* ^
VrttT ^ U J ^ UHd \ J1
L\—^ji)
J^^s-^w>al>^j\jc a^/Oylij/-^ g^jCl—y\3*
^ ^jfj *y^t^f^j\j <-^j—^Jwl
LTj^y^j®-! îLrÛ? Ia ^ jy *i I (_A^jl>
^S" U ^\y ixlfr (jkH >j'*^ Û^J 'j
SjU.\o~\j^L~
IvOlijCAjl 1 I;
106-107
106. MB al-tayy.1 This Is the reduction, taqlll,
to their lowest terms of two numbers which share a
common factor, by dividing each of
HSDDCTION TO them by their highest oonmon factor,
LOWEST TERMS wafq■ For example If we have the two
numbers seventy two and three hundred
and sixty, seventy two Is the wafq between them,
divided by which, they yield7 one and five their lowest
terms, and 1/5 la equal to 2/360*
107. Ma al-maratlb al-tabilyyah. When one Is mul-

tiplied by any other number and the product multiplied
repeatedly by the same number, there
NATURAL SERIES results a series of proportional
POWERS numbers the so-called powers of that
product. The first power, martabah.
after the one posited, Is called the root; the second,
the square; the third, the cube; the fourth, the square
of the square; the fifth, the square of the cube; and
the sixth, the cube of the cube; and so further on this
analogy. The ratio of the one, with which we begin, to
the root Is the same as that of the root to the square,
end of the square to the cube, and of the cube to the
square of the square etc.
The example shows the first to the sixth powers of
two and three.
1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th

Names Square Square Cube
of Root Square Cube X X X
powers One Jldhr mal ka^b Square Cube Cube
1x2 1 2 4 8 16 32 64
1x3 1 3 9 27 81 243 729
1 The Persian expression Is navardldan which Is a

translation of A. al-tayy. folding [Into the smallest
compass).
35
'S^£ W^ ^>} \ oYf(J '-^lt^^'J
^ lil^ U^ ^ l* »^» J ^ Iflr* a» IjJ^-^1 t
'^j*u Cj^Z Oy^j a Ui^L'outî
>«—'tii^V/l) lit
cJj-VV
^^-A^gij- U)^ i-^*l»Li—>aJi
J
^^4i ji i
^ % • • • •
y^
106
108. MS al-marStlb al-wadrlyy'ali. The oonventlonal
grouping of numbers, depending on their relative posi-
tion, used In the operations of
DECIMA.I NOTATION arithmetic. Is one of the methods
of arranging the separate numbers
In multiplication and division. It Is a decimal system
and so the ratio between the various groups Is based on
the number ten.
The first group Is that of the units from one to
nine, advancing by one; the second, the tens, from ten
to ninety, by ton; the third, the hundreds, from one
hundred to nine hundred, by a hundred; and the fourth
the thousands, from ons to nine thousands.
This fourth group In so far takes the place of the
units that the tens of thousands follow It In the same
way as the tens follow the units, and the only
difference between them Is that the Inoremant Is by
thousands.
Again when the actual position of a number In a
particular group Is established, It Is Invariably one-
tenth of the number occupying the same position In the
succeeding group.
Should any group lack a number, a sign Is used to
Indicate the vacancy. We employ for this purpose a
small circle,o. and call It a cipher, alfr, or zerol
but the Hindus use a point,.,. '
The accompanying figure Illustrates numbers In
their respective groups, Indicated by the separate
columns.
1 Zero, as well as cipher, Is derived from sufr, empty;

cipher being afterwards extended to the nine digits.
Carra de Vaux, Penseurs de 1'Islam,11,109, suggests
that cipher In Its other meaning Is traceable to slfr.
a book, or writing, with sin Instead of ;ad.
WM
rr 11
vnl^rj'll rv 1
jf —fXr" V3^-*^
Jta-1 ^ J>
' ' "f V ' .'■■ *'* ^
L^*jL£^fc» ^11,^ ^ LiVtVAf-^1
j-^J"^ ''.Uil Û'jtJI^>_A\-i»-\i)l^=>-l^^>&

v^t - 1 1 j ,
** •* ^ ^ * J *
Q Lh^-
108-109
9 0 0 8 6
o
« 8
fH
•K)a S Ao §
<a V. g
i—i Uo
O 3 «
& rito
EH s EH
If wo desire to write this sum or to express it by word

of mouth, we say nine thousand thousand thousand
thousand and eight thousand thousand thousand, and six
hundred and seventy-five thousand thousand, and thirty-
four thousand and one hundred and two.
[Nine billion eight thousand six hundred and seven-
ty-five million,thirty-four thousand one hundred endtwoj
109. Ma al-jabr wa^-muqabajah. If things of
different nature in the scales of a balance are in
equilibrium,the scales remain parallel,the
AXGXBRfl. tongue vertical and the beam level. It Is
obvious that if you take anything from one
of the scales of one kind you must remove the like from
the other both in kind and amount so as to preserve the
equilibrium and the previous condition. Similarly, if
you add anything to one scale you must add a like
amount to the other.
Should there be a minus quantity on one side it is
necessary to remove it and to restore1 the equilibrium
by adding a like amount to the other aide. This is the
operation of jabr; for example,if we have on one side
100 dlrhams minus 14 dinars and on the other 13 staters
1 Jabarq; cf. Mujabblr, A bone-setter and Spanish
Algebrista, El que profesa la Algebra, 6 arte de
concertar los huesos dlslocados. (Canes, Diet. Esp.
Arab.)
ritvjfrj-iriii
"> ^ -rt .? 4 •? 11 *f -*
I ^ S
li 1-^ ii'J o^J-dJ A3

109-110
atatersl of Iron plus IS dlrhama, the operation of jabr

eliminates the minus quantity end completes the 100
dlrhama so that «e hate
100 dlrhama • 13 staters - 12 dlrhams + 14 dinars
and If the same operation be carried out on the other
side we have
112 dlrhams • 13 staters + 14 dinars
lihen the operation of Jabr has been concluded, we
turn to that of muqSbalah which consists In comparing
things of the same nature. m.ianasSt. which may be on
opposite sides, and then deducting the smaller of these
from both sides. For example:- If we hare
112 dlrhams » 13 staters + 12 dlrhams
by deducting the last Item we have
100 dlrhams « 13 staters
110. Ma al-mufradat al-muta'"adllah. Algebra deals

with three elements: 1/ a simple number unrelated to
the others; 2/ anothei' number so related,
SIMPIJS mudaf, the root of a square number; and
EQUATIONS 3/ the square number Itself. In simple
equations mufradat, these ere associated
In three different pairs: 1/ roots equal to number;2 2/
squares equal to number; 3/ squares equal to roots.
1 Gr. oroTqp, A.lstSr, P.sltlr. The stater = 4^

mlthqals or dinars, and the dinar > 1 3^ dlrhams. The
stater, therefore, Is 6 3^7 dlrhams. The equations abcue
come out 7 and 7,7 respeotlirely. For Arabic weights,see
Wledemann's account of these from MtT, Beltr.ZXII,304.
2 e.g. 4i - 16; 4x2 . 64; i2 • 4x.
1
^ L* ^-i,1
Oli
_^jj^->L*^- LAiJb-^^ Ll^[rJxil>'
A-X»^X-LlljjVj ftSjl tlj!il<j£=>i
• »»-j LLJjts-'ili,
"'' ;
r-*UJjUjL. y»^J>
. ' ^ .' ^ . • ''
v^*?x jl^jfcc3>*j--,>-Uj!ij,U.i j5j\
f < i .• <,
111-118
111. MB al-muqtaranBt al-auta^gdllah. These equa-
tions of the second degree result from the association,
muqtarlnah. of a third term, either
COMPOSITE squares, roots, or number with the two of
EQUATIONS each of the foregoing simple equations.
The first of the three resultant equations
is SQUARES + ROOTS ■ NUMBER, which means that one or
more squares associated with one or more roots are
equal to such and such a number. For example:- a square
plus ten of the root is equal to thirty-nine; the
square is nine and the root three.
The second maqrfln Is SQUARES + NUMBER - ROOTS.
This particular form In some eases admits of two ans-
wers e.g., a square plus thirty is equal to thirteen
roots and this is satisfied either by a hundred with
root ten or nine with root three.
The third raaqrun is ROOTS + NUMBER • SQUARES e.g.,
six plus ten of the roots Is equal to the square; the
square is thirty-six and the root six.
118. Ma— al-ahal'.2 This is a technical term for

an unknown quantity; it means 'thing*; and corresponds
to 'x' in modern algebra. When multiplied
'x* by itself it gives shal' square.
1 t, Muhammad b. Uusa al-KhwBrlzml; Colebrook, Algebra

from Sa&skrlt, 1817, p. T.TTV; and Earplnskl, Univ. Mich.
Stud., II, 1915, p. 71.
The solution of these is arrived at as follows:-
* l28 + 101 - 39. I - VbZ ♦ 39 -5 » 8.
I + 30 - 131. I • 6-5 t Ve-Sa - 30 . 6.5 1 S-S.
Is - 5l + 6. I - VZ-5S * 6 ♦ 8*5 - fi.
In his last example A and PL have 10 Instead of 5,
end FP dah panjt Earplnskl remarks on the persist-
ence of this example51 from Khwarizml, borrowed by Al-
Blrunl 800 years later and by Omar KhayyBm 100 years
after him.
g
In early books of algebra translated 'res'; the trans-
literation Into Spanish 'xel* has been suggested as the
source of the modern 'x'. (Arabic words in Spanish such
as sharBb (sherbet) were formerly spelt with an initial
x, now with j, jarabe.)
f ^ i ~ * >
j >^ -r^ JLMj
jjULi* l»—1»^/—> Lm -i^L
>^^JU,^ JUIsC-i Ujfr
\ y» j j jJJ^J > 1»jU -L Ujj j j jiilj >ii»»jVj
o ^JX-jl L JLka^)/,ll£=»^Jc. wl> iiLayj^jJJa.

* • ■> ' J ^ <s ~r y
Ii i^JLi juL^ (t»U-i
'• '* * J" J *
o ^ Ujp>^cJ.i3 JL»
4>> akj juo^ysjvJUi tJiU) L. ->—LiULxi(j_>il»L«^
K
^r * ajL- Jlil LL>Vt JJ«J^>.1 gJJU-1 I
113-116
113. Kaif darb al-ahal'. Shai' when multiplied by
a number n glvea n ahal'. when multiplied by minus
2 (lllg.kamF) shal' gives a minus square,
I mSl ngqls mustathnB: when minus shal' is
multiplied by a number the result Is minus
n shal'. and when minus wfaal' Is multiplied by itself a
posltlve square, mfil zd'Id results, because the minus
sign, latlthna', Is not abolished except by multiplica-
tion by Itself.
114. Ma hlsab al-dlrham wa'l dinar. This Is a
method of rectonlng derived from Algebra. As there are
sometimes muie unhuomi quantities than
y. z one, It becomes necessary to have names
for them. Some people call them dinars,
dlrhams and fulus, while others adopt the Hindu method
of naming the ashya' blade, yellow and gray.l
115. Ma hlsab al-kliata'aln. A number Is assumed
which appears'to be suitable for solving the problem;
if a test Indicates its accuracy, it is
RULE OF unnecessary to proceed further, but if
TWO ERRORS it has led to an error, the amount of
that must be noted and the process re-
peated after the unsuccessful guess, when either you
hit upon the correct answer or else you have a second
error. Then the answer can be deduced from the two er-
rors by a method which is known [to Arithmeticians].^
116. Kalf Ithbat al-erdad bl hurtf al-'hrab. The
notation of numbers by Arabic letters Is a maHer of
agreement and convention; for It
ARABIC LffTTERS would have been possible to use the
FOR NDMERALS letters In the ordinary order of the
alphabet, a, b, t, th, etc., because
there are nine units, nine tens, nine hundreds, which,
with a sign for a thousand, are provided for by the
twenty-eight letters.
2 v. Colebrook, I.e.p.139. For akhab read ashhab.

Carra de Tauz quotes an example from Al^khwhrlzml,
I.e.II,117. x - 1/3 x - 1/4 x • 0. Try IS, result 5,
(-3); try 24, result 10 (+2); 12 v/ -3
24 /\ +2 multiply
diagonally, result 24, and -72; add, because signs
contrary, result 96/5 • 19 1/5.
40
-if?
V^l»>l'j^*^ sjc- \y>^—-tf0^

. *> ^ I • t f ♦ i v l^ , " ,' t '*'. ^
^r^_î^yL>yj\' —^ vÛ Jj^^!j2»-)l Ui—VI
J^-1 1 jLju.lj^*Afi») <4)^^ I LJi-Vt- L£=» Lf 13^1 LAI

*0 7 ■ "" " f Y » • 't ' ''• ^
a jojjuj—
j^yu ll> ^ J*j —Jii J> Ulj oU»^-2>^- L2a^'a) ,
"* ^-Û-Vtcjc jugL-j LA#^* J

116-117
However,peopl« selected the order of the frurtlf al-
juirmial because this was widely diffused among people of
ihe Book before the time of the Arabs, The mode In which
the letters are apportioned to the several numbers Is
shown In the accompanying table.
1 1 :> « 1 3 j 1 e 1 i?
Units | a T) J 3 d r-i
1 1 8 3 4 5l 6 71 8 9
1 J r -3 tl
1 1 5
Tens 1 J 1 * 1 m n 8 r f 8 9 1
10 BSD 30 40 50 1160 70 1 80 90
] 3 J J" ^ 1 ^ j I^jP t
Hun- 1 <1 f r 1 ah 1 t| '■aJ i 6 9 f ft P
|| 100 fenn ann knn 1500 bOO 700 1800 900 llOOOll
117. Hal Ikhtllaf flha- The object In using
these letters Is economy of space and ease of writing
numbers especially In astronomical
MOROXAN USAGE tables. Among astronomers there is no
disagreement as to their use, but there
are perverse people outside the profession who put
sa'fad for sarfa§, thus making s 60, and d 90, and
qarasat for qarashat, basing their objections, some on
linguistic, others on religious grounds; but this la
all nonsense. Were it not that a general agreement has
1
A memorla technics is made by the Insertion of vowels
as Indicated in the transliteration above• Pococke,
Spec. Hist. Arab., p. 300, refers to the use of the
first six words for the days of the week from Saturday
to Thursday, Friday being al-rarubah.
"The Muslims of Morocco make the last four words,
ga^fa^L, qarasat, thakhadh, jaghash.
1> c J J p- j
•1 ^
v
\- *v \' \ VV w
<_> ^r \~j _1 ±=» i (
••>
/ / y y y y y y 4"
*%
J5 r _ V. ji- _J vJ>
\
i •\ <'| X \ X %
» VX* X < \ 4v
f e>
L^^___j]jja^d>
117-118
been arriyed at as to this order by Its users, their ob-
jection might be allowed, but It would constitute a de-
parture from an established custom.
118. Kalf vakun tarklbha. Certain rules have to be
observed In combining these letters. Of the units, tens
and hundreds, the hundreds come first,
COMBINATION the tens next and the units last; thus
01 LETTERS lib is written "qyli, and [when written In
blaohjP must have a line over It to show
Jiat It Is not a word. So 105 is written qli, and 48
Bib, and 1002 ahb. On the other hand 8000 Is written
bgh. the smaller number coming first to distinguish It
from ghb. end to show what is Intended.
The customary way of writing these letters Is that
jlm 3, Is written without a tall to distinguish It from
â* 8; little attention need be given to Ebfi* 600, as
astronomical calculations are concerned with numbers
less than 360; [it Is pointed without a tall]. Yfi' must
have Its tail drawn backwards, in case It should be mis-
taken for a nOn with Its point. Kef must be written
horizontally, so as not to resemble 15m, and nun must be
written larger_than zS' and pointed, for za' also Is
pointed, and ra' unpointed. Shin 300, must be pointed
to distinguish It from sin 60, and attention must be
paid to other pointed letters.
_ When nun or ya' are combined with units. Eh 51,
ya 11, nun must be pointed, end Indeed the ya' also
should have Its points.
Vhen zero, slfr. has to be written In places lack-
ing a number, Its eTrole must have a line over It, ■tf
touching, to distinguish It fromhfi', but In the Indian
notation this line Is unnecessary, for there, there Is
no resemblance to ha'.
Oenerally the right end of the line In question is con-

tinued downwards to the left to Join a very small cir-
cles , or the circle has two horns,^ ; compare X and
ha' In future tables.
42
y' .
li-A jljuUgg L'
Ar
Â.U ^JM^)W>l>ls 4Jl£S3'Î—jC* j Jal. ^ -Vj
' •v£d>l
^"Tj' ^' C^V—^^ o ^'juU^ ^ 'lÛLI

119-121
119. Hal tusta'mal hadhlhl 'l-huruf fl ghayr al-
a'dad. The same letters are used for another purpose.
namely, for iluslguatlng the signs of the
PURTHER USE zodiac a<s In the following table
OF LETTERS
Names of Signs . Symbols
Aries TV 0 The foregoing amount of
Taurus y i i arithmetic will suffice
Gemln E- 2 for anyone who desires an
Cancer 3 Introduction to It.
Leo 4
Virgo It! ° 5 Now, however, we must
Libra 5 6 proceed to the description
Soorplus Ifv J 7 of the form of the heavens.
Sagittarius •*+ Zi s
Capricornus Xp 9
Aquarius z=UlO
Pisces *. (ill
ASTROHOMT
120. Ma al-falalt. The celestial sphere la a body
like a ball revolving In Its osn place; It contains
within Its Interior objects whose moye-
THE CELESTIAL cents are different from those of the
SPHERE sphere Itself, and we are In the centre
of It. It la called falak on account of
Its circular movenent like that of the whirl of a spin-
dle, and Its name, athlr, (ether) Is current among
philosophers.
121. A huwa wehld au akthar. There are eight such
spheres enclosed the one within the other, like the
skins of an union; the smallest sphere
MORE SPHERES Is that which Is nearest to us, within
THAN ONE ? which the moon la always travelling
alone, rising and setting, within Its
limits. To each sphere there la a certain amount of
space between the outer and Inner boundaries so that
the planet to which It belongs has two distances, the
one further, the other nearer. The second sphere above
that of the moon belongs to Mercury, the third to Venus,
HHHOiWHHBHHUgMBgBlM
aA-^^K, xdj&if AfsJLu >jbu-^
^ ^*>.i^»ijpjL»>fc»lÛpJîsVl
>>Jâ»JUIj ^-^JlxliUU t>jL2L*J

181-188
the fourth to the Sun, the fifth to Mars, the sixth1 to
Jupiter, the seventh to Saturn, These seven spheres
belong to the planets, hut above them pall Is the sphere
known as that of the fixed (or desert) stars. The ac-
companying diagram represents them-
cxmeFbsn
Saturn
er
Mar
bun
venus
eicur
oon
enters
X-Th,
X2S. Ma alladhl wars' al-falak al-thamln. A number

of people conalfler that beyond the eighth sphere there
Is a ninth entirely quiescent; It
WHAT BEYOND is this which the Hindus call In
EIGHTH SPHERE their language brahmanda,® I.e., the
egg of Barahnm, because the prime
1
Pkar, pi. of ukrah; unusual as pi. of lenrah. t.
Dozy, 30.
• firahmanda means the with all the products of
oreatlon'in It. India, I, 221.
128-124
mover must not be moved, and it Is on this account that
they describe It as motionless. But it Is possible that
It Is not a body like the other spheres, otherwise its
existence could be demonstrated, and that to apply this
name to It la an error, llany of our ancestors consider-
ed that beyond the eight spheres there Is an infinite
empty space, others, a boundless quiescent substance,
while according to Aristotle there Is1 neither substance
nor void beyond the revolving bodies.
123. Ma al-sama'« The word samfl* refers to any-
thing which is above you or covers you. In a restricted
sense It refers to the clouds or the
TEB HKATEHS roofs of the houses, but when used with-
out qualification it corresponds to the
Persian word aaman, and means the roof of the world or
the spheres of which we have been sneaking. The word
asman. I.e. like a millstone, (as manandp1 shablh bl'l-
raSSS' refers to the circular movement.
124. Ma alladhl fl hashw falak al-qamar. In the
centre of the sphere of the moon Is the earth, and this
centre Is in reality the lowest part
COKTEHTS OF (and this Is a real centre, because
MOON'S SPHERE all heavy things gravitate towards It).
The earth Is, as a whole, globular,and
In detail Is rough-surfaced on account of the mountains
projecting from It and the depressions on Its surface,
but when considered as a whole It doss not depart from
the spherical form, for the highest mountains ere very
small In comparison with the whole globe. Do you not
see that a ball of a yard or two In diameter, covered
with millet seeds and pitted with depressions of simil-
ar size, would still satisfy the definition of a sphere.
If the surface of the earth were not so uneven, water
coming from all sides would not be retained by It, end
would certainly submerge It, so that It would no longer
be visible. For water while it shares with earth in
1
Dr. H.D. Boss Informs me that the words quoted occur
In De Caelo, STB11 21, and 279 11. Bar-Hebraeus follows
Al-Blrdnl In referring to the same passage. The extern-
al surface of the ninth sphere Is in contact with no-
thing, because beyond It there is 'nl vide nl pleln' v.
Nau. p. 11.
2 Translation of the Persian etymological pun.
U txC—
JU-I*• X^- <*1^>*} fiV^^jliiJ^T^j^j-tt-^'

^4 * ^f t>lX*' a * ^
I j, I vJS^L« J^^t)'i,ûJ.i)j4^j 4 J jVi I
o^- _j UM^> iSitiL^^ji
-^•U)^Ji> j! Lrt^J 111

184-125
hairing a sertain weight, and in falling as low as pos-
sible In air, is nevertheless lighter than earth,which
therefore settles in water slnhlng In the form of sedi-
ment to the bottom. Moreover water,although it does not
penetrate earth itself, sinks into the interstices
thereof,and there becomes mixed with air, and as a re-
sult of the Intimate contact beoomss suspended in the
air. When the air escapes to the outside, the water re-
gains its natural state In the same way as rain falls
from the clouds. On account of the various irregulari-
ties projecting from the surface, water tends to col-
lect in the deepest places1 giving rise to streams.
The earth and the waters Fire
together form the one globe,
surrounded on all sides by the Air
air;as much of the latter as is
in contact with ths sphere of
the moon becomes heated in con-
sequence of the movement and Pole £arthl Pol
the friction of the parts in
contact. Thus is produced the
fire which surrounds the air,
less in amount in the proximity Air
of the poles owing to the
slackening of the movement
there. Fire
185. Ma al-kawakib al-thabltah wa'l-saiyarah.
The fixed stars are those which stud the whole heaven,
whose distance Prom each ether Is fixed
OTAfS AND PLANETS to all eternity, so that they neither ap-
proach each other nor separate from each
other. In Persian they are called the desert stars
blvabanl■ for finding the right way through deserts de-
pends on them.
The planets,on the other handjseven in number,each
moving in its own sphere continually alter their dis-
tance from each other and from the fixed stars,sometimes
being near and sometimes opposite,in virtue of the dif-
ference in the rapidity and character of their movements.
By way of declivities and fissures and ditches, ba

sttl shlvha va gauhS va maghakhS. P
^ 184 is quoted by YSqllt in the Geographical Dlotlonaiy.
v. Wledemann, Arch. Qesoh. Haturw. u. Technlk, I, 26:
and cf. Chron. p. 247.
L&liiw l^-
Ijl U1^ IjAJ* ti ^ U UL< UU
.yy^Lj>.L^ I
if-viuu.^
^ V . . ' A , ''
I f~A>\ Lir j^- (ilo-l
IP »
,ui
Ui\ A£s>^l «_-L-4>iiL-^r U
yvt OV'W'^"1-'
^s. Lol.\ yiL JaJs^j li\| 5>^
jUI
CôciA^Lj^* --^,l'^,î^'
_J
^Jr;
ejLlÛ^^JlC
"* •* ** ^ JB 9-" ,. ^
* ejL^LyjSaj J,| JU11,1 jJa^V ^ IL. UiL
126-127
126. Ma al-hareteat al-ula al-gharblyyah. Everyone
sees that t.hft mnnn afirt iTara nrfl Rngagftd In a
first or weatwaid movement; they rise
FIRST WESTERLY gradually, attain the summit of their
MOVEMENT course,and then descend little hy lit-
tle till they disappear,thereafter
returning to the place where they rose.l It Is owing to
the heavenly bodies that this movement Is perceived; it
Is well-known to animals as they disperse In search of
food, more so Indeed than to man,for there are animals
whose movements correspond with it like the chameleon,2
which facing the sun turns with It,as do the leaves of
many plants .notably, vetch,mash, and liquorice, stis.S
It la called the first movement as It Is this
movement of the heavenly bodies which first attracts
our attention, and gharblyyah,because the goal of the
course reached by tnft.Ti Ts netting in the west.
127. Ma al-harakat al-thanlvyah ai-aharklyyah. The

second or eastward movement of all planets Is towards
the quarter where they arose; but
SECOND EASTERLY the movement of the fixed stars is
MOVEMENT very small,and on account of the fact
that the distance between them re-
mains the same,they are called fixed,whereas the motion
of the planets Is much greater,more obvious,and also of
varied nature.
It is most obvious In the case of the moon on ac-
count of Its rapid movement,for,from the time when the
moon appears in the west,it moves further away from the
sun and any star which la between It and the sun,and ap-
1
Al-Blrunl says, India,I,877, that all astronomical
phenomena can be equally well explained by the theory
of
2 the rotation of the earth.
See Lane under hlrbg*. Brehms YII, 245 says that
though Its colouring varies with the intensity of
light the chameleon Is the most sedentary of animals.
3
Mahk In Persian, misspelt In PL, PL', and PP.
AO has susan, lily, for gfla.
» ' . I * " V
1 j La^C/J
.—ijl>U ii,L«ji"^'.lÛ= C^-irtj^J
e>_> *-S~y*-->1 J —j L^j>^»' ~jjii=>->
ÛCii^ÛL —,L^}>'
f^j UIA
^.V -» ^..■<- UvVl^ ^—liL^v4|^[yal4f=>—Âli
'*tb-ci^!/'/îy5^1\s±=*' o'L^1
V,Ij
1>U.^> '?yr=^J=&C
137-128
approaches any star which Is on the other side of the
sun from It. When It occults one of these,It dees so
with Its eastern border and clears It with the western.
This second movement Is common to all the planets;
It Is an Inverted replica of the first,but Is not an
exact counterpart,for It deviates from It slightly. It
Is called second,because It Is different In amount for
each planet,while the first Is uniform and prevails over
all the second movements,although In the opposite dir-
ection. It Is llhe the movement of a ship whose pas-
sengers may walk In the direction of the current,while
they are all being carried up stream by the ship; the
uniform movement prevails over the contrary one by
reason of greater efficiency.1
The second movement Is not obvious like the first,
but requires some consideration and reasoning based on
observation. It Is called sharql,eastward,on account of
Its direction towards the rTiTiTg of t.ha ann.
128. Ma al-ufq■ Only about half of the vault of

heaven Is visible to the observer; It Is like a dome
placed over the earth, Its margin
THE HORIZON forming a circle round about him. What-
ever is above this circle, known as the
horizon, is visible to him.
There are two kinds of horizon,the one sensible or
visible,hlssl, the other true or astronomical.haqlql.
The sensible horizon Is that already referred to.which
we always see when on the surface of the earth,and
which divides the celestial sphere Into two parts, an
upper smaller one, and a lower Invisible to us.
The true horizon Is parallel to the other, but on
a plane passing through the centre of the earth and
cutting the celestial sphere Into two equal parts. That
which Is between the two horizons Is small In amount so
as not to be obvious when the sphere is large [the cel-
estial sphere] but large when the sphere Is small [the
earth].
"Like a ship floating downstream, a passenger may

walk In the opposite direction,so that he Is at once
moving both forwards and backwards, but the direct
movement Is more effective than the contrary one."^
46
v
• ''tg * * * i* ^ * y ++
** ^ d^' ^. *.ff—b uii^-L^
^ t—«»^> ^yj3 li-l I -r^y' C^y, JL^ j?\3 L

V. ^ *' -- »*.' fc "' ^
* 9* ^
jtf ^ 9
^MUl *>W J ^^LgÛ
U^J\^
.0^0^' ^>\oW»
OV^' VmAiO\J(pL* J^JL^J- ^ wJ-M»^~iLi. I

129-131
129. Ua falakniaf al-nahar. ETerywhere In the
world day la caused by the track of the sun from Its
rising to Its setting; Its course Is oall-
MEBIDIAN ed the arc of day, and the circle which
passes through the zenith and everywhere
divides the day Into two halves Is called the meridian.
Every point In the celestial sphere which becomes visi-
ble rises towards this circle, reaches It, and then be-
gins to sink till It disappears towards the west.
130. Ma Jlhat al-âlam. The cardinal points are
the places, mahabb. from which blow the four familiar
winds. The zephyr, which comes from
CARDINAL POINTS the east. Is called saba and qabul.
on account of Its blowing towards
the ka'taah;
r the dabur comes from the west from behind
the ka bah; and the north wind, ai-nb«m«i from the
direction of the pole, I.e., from the left hand,
ahlmal. of any one facing east; It Is called Jlrblya'
In Syrlac (a name which Is familiar although not of our
language).P
The south wind, al-Janub. blows from the opposite
pole, from the right.~yanln. of one facing east; It Is
on this account that tnls region Is called Janub and
yeman, and In Syrlac, tayamnd'.
The names of the IntenaaJiate quarters are not
very current (except aiuoug the Hindus, where they often
conflict with each other), but any wind blowing from
one of these Is called a side-wind, nakba'.
131. Pa kalf IstlkhraJ hadh-ibi ai-j-ihet- in order
to establish exactly the direction of these four quar-
ters, level a piece of ground as far
INDIAN CIHCLE as possible, until you get It In such
a condition that water poured on It
haphazard flows evenly In all directions, without any
tendency towards depressions In any one of2 these. When
the ground Is levelled then draw a circle on It of any
diameter, and fix In the centre a sharp-pointed stick
the length of half the radius. This must be perpendi-
cular to the surface as determined by a plumb-line3
passing from the point to the centre of the circle.
1 Zakhmgah, usually the seat of a wound, but zakhm Is
2'lotus' as well as 'vulnus'.
The Indian Circle. See Wledemann, Aota Oriental.T. 156.
3 Plummet, shSqul.
*» *" ' m ' UI, /■y"' •. ♦
°&i AHCK-^ *iÂiwu^£=>s3'i'^-#^jLefl

wl^-U —-«js^l^L^Vjiy-il iÂei-t'
IÎUÎ I yytLÎ —-y^ JI
JUj^j a-*S=1 LfixJ^ j J ^
9 y
* '* 9 £ '' * **
-v-j J ^
>
*-,6^^L^^L*^y^^^^\j<<^L*j^-^jVeUi-*-l^.^vi^
f*~*' »r »» • »
^tjU y ^V^jAJV^- U '

131
Then watch the shadow In the first half of the day as
It extends to the west and gradually shortens, and when
it enters the circle, mark that point of the circum-
ference; similarly, in the afternoon, when it lengthens
and passes out of the circle, that second point. Join
these two points of entrance and exit hy means of a
cord or rule, bisect the line so obtained and Jein the
middle point to the centre of the circle by a straight
line which cen be produced to the north and south
points of the circumference. This is the meridian
which divides the circle into east and west halves, the
quarters of the rising and setting of the sun. Then
divide each of these halves into two by a straight line
at right angles to the meridian passing through the
centre of the circle, and mark the east and west
points. This is the east and vest line or khatt al-
irtld51. while the meridional line is known as'kEaJJ
al-zawfll. By these two the circle is divided into four
quadrants, called after the adjacent cardinal points,
Huulh-easl, south-west, north-east, and north-west, as
in the diagram.
S
US, Meridian or khatt-

al-zawal. EW, East and
West Line or khatt al-
i'tidSl. M, Midday;
middle of line Joining
entrance, Sir, and ex-
E ^ it, Sh®, of shadow. G.
the gnomon.
Sh'
The copyiet is unhappy in his nomenclature of the

quadrants.
9
w
'9 ^*
;Ui tî4>; o\)^ ~Jîlj<
^llc.
LA>^)v_ii wi'M J»4J^w gÛ1 w-^ba^ —
b ^ <J j'Vj AI.

'I,/ .* «' ^ " * --
Aljîplft^£=>l) ^ydb
'' r " " "•
)jl ><_il» jil i=r»\J Lîil »jo> i>^_? jLl-C-VOak. JaAJ \ji®
« ' "' ^
ilr*
„ » » —-"
132-133
132, Ma al-yaum wa ma al-nahar wa ma al-lail.
The nychthemeron, ahabgnah-rGz-^. civil day, yaum. Isf
that apaoe of time between tRe—aim a
DAY AND NIGHT leaving one half of a great circle by
the first movement and returning to
the same half in the course of completing Its revolu-
tion; the most obvious of such circles are the horizon
and the meridian.
Day, nahfir. Is that space of time during vhlch the
sun Is visible above the horizon, and night, lall, that
In which It Is hidden under the earth-
The Arabic word, yaum. Is sometimes used for
nychthemeron and sometimes for day. If, therefore, it
Is Intended to use it In the former sense, say, to make
sure, the day and the night, al-yaum bllallatlhl.
There Is no star nor point In the heavens where
there Is no nychthemeron and no night and day. tfhen
these are mentioned In connection with something un-
specified It Is the sun which Is referred to.
133. Ma al-fafr wa ma al-shafaq. Night In reality

consists In our being in the darkness of the earth's
shadow. When the sun Is still hidden
DAWN AND from us under the horizon, but Is ap-
TWILIGHT proaching, we first see the emergence of
those rays which surround the shadow, the
advance-guard1 of the sun, forming the dawn, fajr.
sapldah-^. In the east, and when the sun has set, the
t ght, shafaq.in the west. Its rear-guard.2
12 tairrah, talayah15,
saâh.
L X
A.
AJi*_Jlj>\-yU>^J_|jiV *£^L^Î^Va#J1»CX/U
jL^L.I» jL^LJt^'UJ'«><bU^—>
»i *ii i. ...^ ... ^ ^

133
In the east the first light vhlch succeeds the
daybreak, sahar, Is a long thin whiteness directed up-
wards.1 TT'Ia called the false dawn, al-subh al-kSdhlb,
subh-l durdph , during which no religious observances
are enjoined. It is compared to a wolf's tall, dhanab
al-alrhan. on account of Its length, slendernesak and
eraotness,^ and It persists for some time. Then comes
the horlaontelly diffused light of the true dawn, the
time of the morning prayer,4 and fasting (for those
keeping a fast11). Thereafter the horizon becomes red
owing to the proximity of the sun and the diffusion of
Its rays through the impurities, kudflrSt, tlrakha', in
the vicinity of the earth (which consist of vapour and
dust)P.
The same phenomena occur in inverted order in the
west on the setting of the sun, first the red horizon
persists for some time, then the red disappears and the
white diffused light, the nadir of the dawn follows,
both of which determine the time for the sunset and
evening prayers.4 Thereafter the white light fades
away and the long and high light appears, which corres-
ponds to the false dawn, and lasts for a part of the
night.
The Hindus call dawn and twilight sand (aamdhi)-
and do not reckon them as parts of the day and of the
night respectively, but some of them (who see the ab-
surdity of that)P do not recognise such an intermediate
period between night and day, and apeak of sand as that
time when the centre of the sun is on the horizon.
1
Islam, III.Heft 1/2, where this paragraph is translated,
i tarlki for barlkl P. [and the light regarded as zcdlasl.
^ AO' has intlsBf~?or intieBb.
5alat al-fajr. The other prayers are; salSt al-zuhr,
the time for it begins shortly after noon: saiat al-êar
when the sun isT midway to setting; aalgt al-maghri6,sun-
set; salat al- i8ha*. early night pfayer-hf- wieriamanTi
and Prank, Sltz. Briangen, Vol. 58, p.29. Die Gebets-
5zeiten 1m Islam.
India, I, 364.
52
^LovVJj^b
U,*/*
jij ^ i ^ ^^!Ai^<L^4[io e/ib/^
^JsLctx&Vj
^bu^îU-^wfe^'-V t
134-135
134. Ma mubda' al-yaum wa'1-nahar wa'l-lall. It la
permlaslble to select any lime you please for the be-
ginning of the nyohthemei'uii, but the
EEOINNXIIG OF arrival of the sun at the horizon and
DAY AMD NIGHT the meridian are the jsost convenient
for this purpose. Astronomers prefer
the meridian to the horizon, as easier for carrying out
some of their operations, some selecting the upper part
(midday), others the lower (midnight). Few pay atten-
tion to the horizon except the astrologers, who do, on
account of the rising and setting of the sun, both of
which are more obvious phenomena than the arrival of
the sun at the meridian. Those who place the night be-
fore the day (the People of the Book and Muslims) al-
ways regard the setting of the sun as the beginning of
the civil day; other sects who give precedence to the
day over the night regard sunrise as Its beginning.
There Is no oonfllet of opinion as to the begin-
ning of the night, which la always considered to be
sunset. So also the beginning of the day (nahBr) Is by
general consent regarded to be sunrise, except by Mus-
lims; whose theologians of all sects are agreed that It
Is a fundamental principle of the law (furiir al-flqhl
that dawn should be regarded as the beginning of the
new day, following In this the custom of the people of
the present day, and their rule as to this and as to
fasting at the appointed time. With us the period of
the fast Is the whole day with a certain limited por-
tion of the previous night Joined on to the beginning
of it.
185. Mi al-sSwat wa anwalia. Hours are of two
kinds, equal and unequal. The former, mustawlyyah. are
each the twenty-fourtli part of the
HOUHS civil day, and are all equal In length.
At the equinoxes there are twelve equal
hours In the day and twelve In the night, but as soon
as the day or the night Is longer, the equal hours are
unequally divided between day and night, the surplus In
the one being equal to the shortage In the other.
53
u
W-J
b j ^li^c^J^/^l^^-
$) l&jVcltM^
l^r<^
y ,J
^t?iu- ' !^ oy^v.iîj jujiH^J
^w»l^
^>li !>bjj^J WtebJGO^^^V^11^
^Lr^cj îxW y'-pfM
^ W^J '^lui)) h$fx$> ^l?3

135-137
The unequal, ♦crooked1, rnu^wajjah, hours are In
each case the twelfth part of the day or night, of
whatever length these may be. An hour of a long day Is,
therefore, longer than an hour of a short day, and ex-
cept at the equinoxes, the day hours differ in length
from the night hours.
The equal hours, however, although their number
in the day may be different from that in the night,
are always equal in length, while the unequal hours
differ in length but agree in number. The equal hours
are also called murtadllah. even, and the unequal hours
zamanlyyah. temporal,
136, Ilakam juz5 tuqsamu al-sar&h. The hour, aa
well as everything which can be measured In length, or
bulk, or weight, Irs divided into sixty mln-
DIVISION utes and each minute into sixty seconds.
OF HOUB The Jews divide the hour into 1080 fract-
ions, called in Hebrew halag, but they make
no smaller division than perhaps half a halag.1
137, Kalf hal sl-3arat rlnde al-hlnd. The Hindus
recognise the hour, but call It half a sign of the
zodiac; In their language It Is hur
INDIAN DIVISION and not sarah; they only use It for
OF HOUR astrological purposes, while the
people generally divide the civil
day into sixty parts called g'harl, (twenty-four minutes)
and the gtiarl into sixty parL3_called by some hassah
and hekanj and by others blyarl;s these again into six
prBnaa, which unit coincides with the average respir-
t ry rtry Lhm of a healthy man. The gTiaris, like equal
hours, are a fixed quantity, and, unless day and night
are equal, the number of gliarls in a day is different
from that In the night. To convert ^haris Into equal
1
PL jllaq; PL',A0• ,hlleq; AO khallq. v. Chron. p. 64,
and 387 note, where i regar equals 1/76 of a êlaq;
but of. Jewish Encyol. 111,503, for a different sub-r
ivislon of the hour, and another value for the rege ,
cashaka, vinfiÎ, India, 337. PI Jashah, Ijabkah,
banazl. PP jaahshah, hakkah, banazi. AO hashah, hakah,
banSrl. AO*, hassa, hakah, bizarl.
\ ^fy1—^—• V —.ItL- ^ Laj»- I Jj^L-Lli] (JJc^Li
-_j\^L4l)(^«_jJ^^ÛwO<uLjJ lyj> 1^3 l*jjWXj

9 § 0 9
—^ ^
A^j ^»I—^
137-139
hours It1 Is necessary to multiply by two and divide
by five, (and hours Intog'harls, to multiply by two
and a half).
Another unit Is also employed by the Hindus, the
muhurta, which is equal to two gtiarls. If day and
night are equal, each has fifteen equal muhurtas; If
they differ In length, the muhurtas also differ In the
same way as do the crooked hours.2
138. Ma mu''addll al-nahSr. The pole and circle on

the surface of a sphere have already been discussed.
For the muvauent of the sphere there are
EQUINOCTIAL necessarily two poles and a great circle
between them; one of the two poles of
the first movement Is visible to people In the north,
while the other towards the south Is concealed from
them. Since the globe moves on an axis between these
two poles, the movement Is moat rapid at the circle
Intermediate between them, and slackens at circles
parallel thereto In proportion to their distance there-
from. This great circle la compared to a girdle and Is
known as the equinoctial or girdle of the first move-
ment.
139. Ma mlntaqat al-buruj■ The zodiac girdle or

ecliptic Is that great circle which is the girdle,
nlttq or miutaqah, of the second move-
ECLIPTIC menT; it Is also known as the circle or
sphere of the signs, falak al-burdJ, to
which the sun In Its eastward movement adheres and
does not leave. It Is Inclined to the equinoctial and
Intersects It at two points opposite to each other, so
that one half of It Is north and the other south of
the equinoctial; the poles, therefore, of the two
1
Literally, write the number In two places, double the
one,
2 halve the other and add the results.
India,I, 338. Therefore, not always forty-eight
minutes, but 1/15 of day or night.
v
»»- . r' , . », » Ji '
\z=>* fir—M
^■>y^=lS^3
i.fcyjL^^ i_ij^%'J>>c.i_jii=»*wll»ijo-!\ jkjjtfjjLzT*—<*■
•jw^WLUii:
U^g^sil A£=*J*'i^j£=*s wjUA'—
t?&£=>j<- <y]> LX*.^ -î^r1 *
_L\Vi<-^JO'wivju?-A-fcii'
^Lil ^J-^SDaÂ
l^£=^>-j
<>j
139-143
moyemanta are distant from one another by the extent of
this Inclination (the obliquity of the ecliptic) both
In the north sad in the south. The great circle, (the
solstitial oolure) which passes through ell four polos
receives Its name, al-marrah ''alg al-aqt5b al-arba'"ah,
from this circumstance.
140. Ua al-medarat al-yaumlyyah. Circles parallel

to the equinoctial towards the north and south are inown
as day-clrclae, (determining the length
PAR4LLEL3 OF of day). They out or touch points of
OSCLIUATION the zodiac, or other stars or points In
the sphere to which they are related as
parallels In which they keep revolving.
141. Ma madarat al-rard. Circles parallel to the

ecliptic north and south are called parallels of
(celestial) latitude.
PARALLELS OF
LATITUDE
14S. MS al-nuqantarat. These axe circles parallel

to the horizon; those towards the zenith are muqanârEhs
of altitude, IrtlfB1-, those towards the
MCOANTAEAHS antipodes, muqanfarahs of depression,
InhltSt.
143. Ma nuqtatS al-lrtld5l wa'l-lnqllSb. One great

circle approaches another on a sphere till they meet
end Ijileisect at—leu puiuts diametrically
EQUINOCTIAL opposite1 to each other, and at the
POINTS same time attain their greatest distance
from each other at two other opposite
points. It Is thus that the ecliptic and the equi-
noctial Intersect each other at two opposite points and
separate as far as possible at two others. The points
of intersection are known as the equinoctial points,
beoause when the sun arrives at them there Is equality,
ftldal, of day and night all over the world; that
which the sun leaves on Its Journey over the northern
half of the ecliptic Is the vernal equinox, nuqtah
1
For mutaqantaraln read mutaqStaraln.
56
^.^■l). jytU-f tlllit i_i^>
-r-1 a—1^ l> ^Î-JSTLÛUÎ Jkj

^fiikl f)^}j Jjil^Ô^^ljllLAU ^JjjJJ^ljl
_ J- ^CA\jM^f J^JJS^ e/U -JSL^Vr
^-- J" ^ c
143-145
al-l tldal al-rab!''!. [baliari-p] and the opposite one
r
where it enters the southern half, the autumnal
equinox, nuqtah al-1''tidal al-kharlfl (tlriLBhl l^1.
For equality^ iatlwfi' is used aa well as lrtldSl.
The middle points of the northern and southern
halves, the most distant from the equinoctial (the sum-
mer and winter solstices) are known as the turning-
points, Inqilgh, munqalih, the first al-inqllSb al-
aaifl (tabistaniIf, the second al-lnqliab al-shatwl
( stBnl), beemrse the sun turns from the latter
northwards towards its ascent, su''ud. and from—tha
former southwards towards its descent, hubCt after its
ascent.1
144. Blkam taqaainu muhitat al-dawa'lr. Astrono-

mers have agreed to divide the circumference of
circles, whether great or small,
DIVISION OF CIRCLE into 360 equal parts; those of
the equinoctial are called
azmSn, units of time, because its revolution and time
run together like two horses running a race, so that
time, zaman, is called 2after these divisions, and is
Indeed counted by them. Those of the ecliptic are
named degrees, darajah, because the sun on the two
sides of its course ascends and descends among them as
by the steps of a ladder; in other circles they are
simply called divisions 1 a.1za').
145. Blkam tuasamu aqtar al-dawa'lr. Our ances-

tors believed the dlametBr of a circle to bo one-third
of its circumference, but
RATIO DIAMETER Archimedes and others showed that
TO CIRCUMFBHBNGE it is nearly a seventh more, so
that if the circumference had 360
dlvlalona the diameter would have 114 6/11 in accord-
ance with the statement of Archimedes. On account of
this fraction and Its unsultablsness for reckoning with,
for really it is like a surd root, Astronomers abandon
The ecliptic Is divided into ascending and descending

halves by the solstices; cf. 378.
E ezman la the pi. of zaman. time■
57
U5Llaj" U i I *■—'Vi l-»jj
ji., v1'
Jv-iiJJl,1 Vl i^-lAxl^y^ i—J-^
^ ^-UJv^fUJ Jp Qa^^£=kJ -^1)1 ^
~z> ifi. ! f ^ '' ^

L.L^J LW^0 LJi'iJÎ-^ I^-UIJ
--—j^^vU=Ujj^^l)!i\jQa5^
''iC-^Vxî < ^r- )^-fjiA) \ii3l_y
"O«J1 -'ôl^' ^ ^
•''' ^ 'îy —If J)

145-146
it and employ Instead some other number which they
select deliberately and properly so, Tor they cannot
dispense with some approximate number which will allow
them to study the ratios of the chords to each other.
That which Ptolemy chose was 120, and that which we
find In1 the tables of the Slndhind in our possession
is five divisions, [less?]
146. Ma al-buruj. If the ecliptic be divided into
twelve equal parts beginning with the vernal equinox,
and great circles be drawn through each
SIGNS OF THE division-point, the six circles inter-
ZODIAG sect each other at the two poles of the
ecliptic with the result that the sphere
is divided Into twelve sections,2 like a melon with
twelve grooves. These sections are the signs of the
zodiac, burj. pi. burtU, which are 30° long measured
along the ecliptic, and 90° broad, north and south from
the ecliptic to its poles. The annexed diagram repre-
sents these signs on one half of the sphere, because it
Is Impossible to show the whole sphere on a flat surface.
s1 3
N,S« North and

Eq South Poles of ^ ,
Ecliptic Ec. N ,a.
Eo. Ec of Equinoctial Eq.
1-6 signs, 7 Vernal
Equinox. 8.9. Sum-
Eq mer and Winter
Solstices
N N1
1 So A and P. - 115:360 would make * 2.13. v. India I,

168 where
177
the proportion used by Pullsa is stated to be
4i:3 A250.- 3.1416,
read sharlhah - a slice.
58
^ -" '. . 9 ' . ^ t *
-' 1 * 3 N! jb \
v aJ
■—'\jfLJ-\
^ * \^~) ^ i' ^' * w-•'.'.
^ if . Sr»» *■
^_, !j J J ul ^\*^\i>-fÂJ%ju!lii JÎ^-JI ,
* '* "V
^?JcUU»L^li' vJ^Xuy Lix-j'j »3 j
tr^ • ^-'J u"

'» ^ • • ♦ < t f
-X^ > J y" j L-frAjo^ j
? /
- ..' ^--"y211 -y-
^| . /a> ^
a
147-148
147 ♦ Ija al-jnail wa ma rard al-kawaklb. The distance
of a star from the equinoctial north or south Is called
mail, declination, and la measured
DECLINATION AND on the great circle passing throuî
LATITUDE OF STAHS It and the poles, while the diver-
gence from the ecliptic towards
the north or south Is called ♦'ard,latitude,and is
measured on great circles passing thiuugh the poles of
the zodiac sphere.If the expression mall is used alone
it refers to the sun or the degrees of the ecliptic
which It does not leave,hut if it refers to the moon or
a planet or a fixed star that must he definitely statei
The expression 'ard is never used alone,but always
associated with tHe moon or a star.
In consequence of the fact that the ecliptic and
the equinoctial diverge from each other,it is possible
that a star should be north of both1 or south of both,
or north of oneând south of the other,^ or distant
from the one and near the other,so as to have a certain
declination and 6no latitude,5 or no declination and a
certain latitude as indicated in the figure.
^ 148. Ma darajah
al-kadmb dhl al-^terd*
The degree
DEGREE (longitude)
OF A of a star
STAR possessing
latitude
Is the degree of
the ecliptic in-
tersected by the
vertical clrda
on which the
latitude Is
measured.
Ec N.3. North &
South Poles
1of Ecliptic,Eo.N1-
S , of Equinoctial,
Eq.Great circles
passing through these
on which latitude and
declination are messored.
The copyist remarks that he found this circle empty on
his original. Ao1 end PP also deficient.
59
L^-j j-^*^ V £*>-?'
\ . •.•' "/t'-ri .'• •«. •• 'l ' v\ \" * \l M

149-150
149. Kam a »am ar5d al-alyarah wa araam ml'Ailha.
r r
The declinationof the sun Is the same as that of the
ecliptic; Its Jhailmum, (the obllqutty
LATITUDE AND of the ecliptic) as we have found by
DBCLIKATION observation Is . [Same as al-
OF PLANET3 BattEnl.0 Newoomb
, calculated for 1000
0 , A.D. E3
0 34 6", Ptolemy E3051', Ulugh-
Beg, 23 30 17", now 23 26'23".] When this Is added to
the highest latitude of a planet we have Its great-
est declination. This Is represented In the accompany-
ing table;
Orestest Greatest Greatest Greatest
Names North South North South
of Latitude Latitude Declination Declination.
Planets o t 0 * 0 t o •
Sun 25 35 23 35
Moon 5 5 28 35 28 35
Saturn 3 2 3 5 26 37 26 40
Jupiter E 5 2 8 25 40 25 43
liars 4 21 V 7 27 56 30 42
Venus 6 22 6 22 29 57 29 57
Mercury 4 5 4 5 27 40 27 40
The latitude of the fixed stars Is Jcnown end does
not vary. Whenever one of them coincides with a
solstice, and the declination of the solstice and the
latitude of the star are both northern or southern, the
sum Is the declination of the star north or south. If
the one Is north and the other south, the difference Is
the declination towards the side of the larger figure.
If the star Is not exactly on the solstice, the above
does not apply and It will be necessary to malce a cal-
culation In each case.
150. MB al-mutahalrlyah mln al-kawSklb. The fol-
lowing are the planets, Saturn, Jupiter, Mara, Venus,
and Mercury, They are called mutahalyIrah■
PLANETS erratic, because from time to time tney
retrograde from that quarter to which they
are travelling by the second movement, and are still
carried westward by the first. It Is this retrograde
movement which resembles confusion, tahayyur,
andarmSndan-P
60
)^ ASj&y*'*
• A.i >. \j i i i . .-^ , >. . i J. ..
iwi J«i
^1 Aj- Jk!"iA V"
V-'^j'1 5Le-lJ JL-»l
l>>ij r>> n» \
i
^1 5? T r 'T ■t
WÎU s
?k J \ /yi" o d ! ^
.-r-^ j & 0 J^J
^1
J^£> y Cb a -
j y >1 J
-1 lf> ^1
v^'#l;
J
J" Lh y HH5 ^1 A*)
y d
» -y
g-VKyi - >
1 L ^41 —4 - ^1«
^ Vi i^>^j>iJ^ 1 >jU i
151
151. Keif tatruku frarakatha wa tarjl*' ân imjhatha
Each planet has a small orbit_Known as on epicycle,
falak: al-tadwlr.; the earth Is not
TEE EPICYCLE within it but the orbit is entirely
above us. On the circumference of this
epicycle the planet moves, when on the upper part
towards the east in accordance with the succession of
the signs, and when on the lower towards the west;
during such movement it completes its revolution and
adheres closely to the circle.
But the epicycle Itself is also constantly moving
eastward, when, therefore, the planet is on its upper
half the movements of the epicycle and of the planet
coincide and the planet moves quickly on the direct
path, but when the planet is on the lower half, the
direction of the two movements Is contrary, that of
the epicycle being towards the east.and carrying the
planet with it, while that of the planet is visibly
towards the west. If it is less than that of the epi-
cycle the planet*s movement is slowed, if more, it is
necessarily retrograde, and If equal, the planet stands
muqlm, and this occurs at f the beginning of the
x grade movement, ruju ', and atîts end, the begin-
ning of the direct movoment, Istlqamah, as represented
In the figure.
d dh.summit of epicycle,
dhlrwah d.direct,r.retro-
grade path, s*first stop
plcycie before lelrogradlng, a".
second, before entering on
direct path.
P uses the Arabic names of

the planets throughout.
The The Persian names below
Earth are from Chron. p.172.
Arabic Persian
Zuâl Kalwfln
I.Tushtarl Hurmuzd
Illrrlkh BahrSm
Shams I/iihr, ilmrshid
Zuhrah Nahld
futSrid Tlr
Qamar MSh
61
J t •' .1- L .A. ..I L.cy i),Vl..L <? .r. !! JnlliA
W Bj^1
i v \vy
158
158. Ma al-Îwlyyah mln al-kawaklb wa'l-aufllyyah
mlnhg. Saturn, Jupiter and Mars are superior planets'
while Venus and Mgrctcry ale luJfaiiar,
SUPERIOR AICD as Is the moon; but the moon is not
INFERIOR PLANETS to be reckoned with the other
planets. The expressions superior
and inferior refer to the position relative to the sun.
They say that the Arabic word for the sun, shams,
(which also msans a collar) refers to the fact that the
position of the sun among the planets is as if it were
surrounded by a necklace, qlladah [P has shamsah.] All
the conditions of the planets are certainly referable
to the sun, especially the luminosity of the moon and
the retrograde movement of the planets.
The difference between the inferior and superior
planets is that the distance of the former from the aun
is restricted and never exceeds a certain maximum
elongation either in the East or in Uie West. When they
precede the sun (are east of it) they leave it so far
behind that they become visible after sunset In the e-re-
nings. Their visibility increases with the distance
from the sun until the greatest eastern elongation is
reached. Thereafter their movement becomes slower, and
they again begin to approach the sun, when their slow
movement comes to a complete stop. Thisris the stop
before retrograding, the muqlm lll-ruju . After this
stop, IqSmah, they turn back and their retrograde move-
ment becomes more rapid until, at inferior conjunction,
they become invisible in the rays of the sun, their
evening occultatlon, gha'lbah bl11-ra3hlyy5t. After
which, emerging on the other side of the sun, they move
more slowly on their retrograde course, and begin to
rise before the sun, so as to be visible when they have
escaped from its rays,; this is called their matutine
apparition, zuhur bi1l-ghadaw5t; then the retrograde
movement bftnnniR.q still al nwar fill the planets reach
the second stationary period, the muqim lll-lstl-
qamat, before entering on their direct course. Then
xhey soon reach their greatest distance from the sun,
their western elongation, and proceed on their direct
path till they again approach it, and, at superior con-
junction, become invisible in its rays, their matutine
occultetion, ghaibah bi*l-^hadawfit. Thereafter, passing
through the rays, they again1 become visible in the west
in the evening, the zuhflr bl 1-re3hiyyBt,thus returning
to the sequence of the events described.
62
I ■" (iLl '>/*">rJ^'T *(» U
f s
sSrtL ®
■"w. . r^ .■ «Ia ll*'^^J« I A
)/b Sb>^
•ju IjiJi-VJ 'J^bU'
VW^Lf , 11! t .
15S
But the distance of the superior planets from
the sun Is not thus restricted; the sun moves quicker
and outstrips them so that they escape from its rays
and become visible in the east in the morning, their
tashrlq or oriental!ty. 481. Every day their dls-
tance from the sun is increased as they proceed on
their direct course, until at sunrise they arrive at
a point in the heavens, which, if the sun were there,
would indicate a time between the early end late
afternoon prayers. They then attain the stationary
point before retrograding, after which, their distance
from the sun increasing every day, they reach the
middle point of that course, they are in opposition
to the sun, and have thus attained the greatest
distance possible within their spheres. They then
begin t» rise in the east at sunset like the full
moon at the fourteenth night of the month. Thereafter,
the distance between them and the sun begins to
decrease till a point is reached at sunset, which,
if the sun were there, would indicate the forenoon.
That time corresponds to the stationary period before
beginning the direct course; thereafter the sun grad-
ually approaches them till they come within its rays,
and they become invisible in the west, a condition
described as their taghrlb, occidentallty.
The difference, therefore, between the inferior
and the superior planets is this, that the former are
never further from the sun than the sixth of a circle,
and in the middle of their retrograde course are
ocoultated, their apparition and occultation occur
both ^.n the east and the west; while the latter
attain the greatest possible distance from the sun
within their spheres, are not concealed at the middle
of their retrograde course but are there in opposition
to the sun. Their apparition is only in the east, and
their oooultatlon is restricted to the west.
63
1
. ^ vl ^
-U»J^ 'J ^-1-9 »<__£=>^=^1^—i-j- r^ Lli\t-
—'^J.'jc*?- l^c-L»jj,, Li^-M —i J>
J
v—ia^j^^JliaJol^-^-j ^ ^-»J)( 1
* " > *
îja— » i_LjJu Lwj A,)
-ri^ '■*«?: \
153-154
153. Ma al-lfrtlraq. A planet Is said to ba com-
bust, mutitarlq. idien It comes into conjunction irltb the
T sun, tEe expression being due to the com-
C0MBU3T1 perlson of the sun with fire, and the non-
appearance of the planet when It enters
the sun's rays, suggesting Its combustion or destruc-
tion. This phenomenon Is ccsnmon to all the planets, and
occurs when they are at the summit or apogee, dblrwah,
of the epicycle. The superior planets differ from the
Inferior ones In that the latter show the some phanume-
non at Its lowest point or perigee, whereas the
former do not, but are then in opposition to the sun.
154, Kalf dhallka fl'l-qamar. The moon exhibits

the same appearance, but this isr described as Its con-
Junction, ijtiiaa . After Its first
CONJUNCTION appearance in the west as a slender
OF MOON orescent in the evening at the beginning
of the month, the Illuminated surface
grows with the increasing distance from the sun, till
on the seventh evening, halfway between east and west
It looks like a half-circle. When the moon has
travelled 180° from the sun by the fourteenth evening,
it rises at sunset and the whole surface la illuminated.
Thereafter as the distance decreases, the bright
surface diminishes, so that by the twenty-second
evening the dark part Is again equal to the bright
part; after which the dark part gains on the bright
till the crescent shape like that of the new moon is
attained, visible In the east in the morning. In all
phases the luminosity of the moon comes from that
surface which Is towards the sun, consequently when It
enters the rays of the sun, It Is concealed, sarar.
64
—? >*<— ' - »-'<''',^^-
»* ■<*
^r \ «-h'11 r-^ Xs 4^'' —^/"jr0®"
riPJJ'jj
—>^\ l3X^^V^X_>^ yj
^13 U i Jj _, '^VlS^—^ ?xJ

■', j , » > -- \ , j , v" 'L-'
<_/) J. g MlA,^—> AJ^_$j»L« jix»J^jîJjt-«»Jyv^/*"*^^
.. t>f , - ft ^
•w'0*i-A.>^jji,;_>*J >1J1 ilj _J.«^_juiv» >—'J ^
^ ?% > ■ f
^j^>jWy^£jL^JlJlj xJ-UI >iLiil l_
J iV J \Ly i^pjj J ^cj\^-|j^.
"—i.. ^'iA^
154-155
muhfiq. till after two days it again appears new in the
west.
Curing these two days it is in conjunction with
the sun, close union, ittiafil, as Ptolemy describes it
in the Majlsti, and so it has come about to speak of
this as companionship, muqgranah. rather than as
combustion, i^tiraq.
The opposite position of the moon, full moon,
badr. ImtllS'. when it confronts the sun, is known as
istlqbSl.
155. Kaif zlyadah nur al-qamar wa nnqsanuhu.

The moon is a non-luminous globular body and its
brightness is due to the rays of the sun
WAXING AND which fall upon It as they do upon the
WANING earth, mountains, walls or the like,
OF MOON the other sides of which are not
Illuminated. When the moon Is In
conjunction with the sun, It is between us and the sun,
because it is lower and the rays fall on that surface
which Is towards the sun, while we see only the
surface facing us, and are unable to distinguish the
dark mass of the moon from the blue1 of the sky on
account of the dazzling light of the sun, until the
moon moves a little further away from it. Then a small
part of the illuminated surface comes into view if
the evening twilight is not too bright, and we- have the
new meon.
Owing to the spherical fom of the moon, the
margin of the sun's rays which fall upon it is necesffip-
ily circular, and so much of the illuminated half as
comes into view is also bounded by part of a circle
1
P. kabudl, A. lazwardiyyah, from P. lajward, lapis-
lazull.
65
^Û,1 t*f13 1
• —^ ^ J\^ 1
«i^py. ^
U»J^_A' . I '—■ L/- A_~« » LjIIi^ It 1^-1 il ^g"~?
—t*oyi, (j,
^11 J * y4 9- W '-, ^ '

i « .\'''-- ^, -i . ' %-
£Xiii__ja^-Li-^ \ji_,
—5 .^r^- f Pr JLA/U^y
uH ^ ^ ^ y
'>-< • LÛ- ^^LLXLoj-
^ >J llV r-r<L-t* 5^ Z*-^' W-U-'
-fcUaL. Jj.*) lyC^sol A.^ jiL^^1—^7 aJ>] 1^-1 J
^J=.>
>Jc TfJ ^9-Lj^yî
' t/j > -^$J),

155
ao as a result of the intersection of these two circles
on the spherical surface, the interval between them is
at first crescentic like the slice of a melon. As the
distance from the sun increases, the Illuminated
surface grows until it equals the dark part, and this
is called the first quarter, tarhi*', because the sun
and moon are distant from each other by quarter of a
circle. This equality of the bright and dark parts
occurs also at the second quarter. At full moon, when
it is separated from the sun by half a circle, the
whole of the surface illuminated by the sun is visible
to us, as may be seen from the diagram.^
135 45°
D
0 i)
160° ■ ) HJLL NEW MOON J0 Rays of sun
O 1)
D
225° ^ ^•315°
270°
- Modified by the substitution of parellel rays for the

sun, and by the representation of the real conditions
of illumination, together with the appearance of these
from the Earth.
. ^.j -'r^LS-.'-C
j L-> ^ >L)Lli-\ i L ulj - L <0 ^vU>i'
rt
^jLo)^vkû^Jl_!iL^v-.l3 O'i
1
i
CKr0^ .ekA iT'J ^

156
156. Lem llchtSaa al-qamar mln bain al-lmraklb
bizlyadah wa nugsfia al-nur. Oplnlona of Intelllgerit
people differ as to wly this
PHASES PECULIAR naaiufe and waning of the moon Is
TO MOON? not shared by the other planets, and
as to whether the planets are self-
luminous like the sun, or merely Illuminated by the
rays of the sun falling on them.
Many assert that light Is exclusively the property
of the sun, that all the stars are destitute of It, and
that since the movements of the planets are obviously
dependent on those of the sun, It may be assumed by
analogy that their light Is In the same position.
But others believe that all the planets are lum-
inous by nature with the exception of the moon, and
that Its special peculiarities are Its paleness and
absence of brilliancy. This opinion is more In accord
with the truth (as long as there Is no evidence to the
contrary) and that their concealment under the rays of
the sun Is Just like their non-vlslblllty In diffused
daylight, which by Its Intensity so affects our vision,
that we are unable to perceive them. But any one who
looks out from the bottom of a deep pit by day may see
a planet which happens to pass over the zenith, because
his vision Is relieved from the Intensity of light by
the surrounding darkness and strengthened by It, for
black concentrates and strengthens vision, while white
dissipates and weakens It.
Whether the higher planets are self-luminous or
not, they ere always to be seen In the same condition.
For If the moon were above the sun, It would cease to
present the phenomena of waning, InthllSm, and would
always appear as full moon.
The situation, however, with regard to Venus end
Mercury la this, that If they are not luminous, there
would be a difference In the amount of their light when
at their greatest distance from the sun, and when
approaching their disappearance In Its rays at conjunc-
tion, for Indeed they are lover than the sun, and no
such difference Is observable.
^ •>i-A^^> yâ.iI'IW
^, ,»- '" •' i*»
^ ^ ^f' ' -'-rtiryvJ

Li#.)l vl iLi=> ft —^yjbj^Vr l/j
• -" c
U ^ ly |-^ % —^ ^ •^li ^4*" L-li^ 3^ 3 e> I
6
£' La—^ w 4- Ut» jtq ^ J> L lg—> I 3
x
^ ^ k .
^^.1^3 5 o j uL^ v l..'-sN\^3 'L<—^-^j—c-
• r^âi'1 _• j\ ^_»i 1 s>-JO A_a L L^5=alj i)
^Lr^lls^V^-^J^ J> ' r^je.

l" '
^3*^- ^ V \i H zl £*r- j y—<2-Jl Tt-^
s
^ .w'- ; 9' ^ \
Ljf^cj^j^-^ ct—Us
f r ^ » ^ ^ ' Jl' I \0" • ' • 9
je. O J ^W ,
.L'^^^ ? f ^L^vb ■> i^Jitj
= J
L-d- Lj^VjÎ^LL^L
156-157
It ie therefore preferable to regard the planets
as self-luminous, while the special characteristics of
the moon and the variety of the phases of its light
are due to [three things, its captivity (by the sun,
conjunction), bastagl, glrlftagl,^1 its pale colour
and absence of brilliance, and its position below the
sun.
157. Kam al-kawgkib al-th5bitah. The fixed stars

in the heavens are so multitudinous that it is
impossible to enumerate them, yet those
FIXED STARS diligent investigators who have
endeavoured to recognize them and to
determine their positions in longitude in the signs,
and their latitude north and south of the ecliptic,
observed that they differ in size and have consequently
established a scale of magnitudes qadr, to the
two first degrees of which astrologers give the name
of glory, sharaf. Of the first magnitude there are
fifteen stars, of the second, forty-five, of the third,
two hundxed pud eight, of the fourth, four hundred and
seventy-four, and of the fifth, fifty-eight.
Among the stars of the sixth magnitude there are
nine stars which Ptolemy described as 'dark', -muz11m,
apart from three otherst not counted with them, w6TcE
together are called dhu abah and j.aflrah, the tresses,
(Coma Berenices), glsQ-d&r^, the loc^-wearer.
Stars which are smaller than the sixth magnitude
cannot be separately distinguished by our vision, or
if they are can only with difficulty be kept under
observation.
U»^>J ^=>^* >• V"' j^-^'y*^--'j
—£p\
y
* »
L^li'
flf^ ^ L<fc' Ji».*UL^l» —■*■ »

| " ^ ^ .
.—L> i \~>'■* 52>' ^-*>
,f \ :■ * ' -
>_ji'L j |_^, Ôjl« —^VlI'.JJj^J'
•■ ^ ■* <%-* j j ^ u -IJ j l*jl jy$&- 2- * ^_-£="' J:=:"s~~ 'a-'

• -' ■ . ;,i
" .•' s' C •'' '■< " ' ' .
7*—^ • .-Wr^ ^
'9 } " ...♦',
))1A^ LA^ 'L^=»^=>
^ ' 0> v, 4. / -
^ ^ * k 1 •\ ^ " I ^v'*
157-159
Apart from these there are fire stars of the
charaoter of the nllhy way, like fragments of aloud
lalivtigt. which are called nebulae. With them the number
of stars registered Is one thousand and twenty-two In
all.
158. fa kalf maTrlfah hadhlhl al-thawablt. It

would have been possible that a separate name should
—have been Invented and given to each of
HOW TO the fixed stars, were It not for the
KNOW THEM length of the task, and the difficulty
of keeping them In memory; but all
nations, especially the Arabs, Hindus and Turks, have
Imagined them grouped Into figures, with which they
have associated various romances and fables.
The Greeks also have Imagined lines round these
groups, and out of them have constructed constellations,
so as to make it easier to point them out when
discussing their Import or references to them In books,
or when two people, familiar with the outline of the
constellations, refer to the position of a star as In
the hand or foot of such and such a figure.
Of such constellations there are twelve In the
zodiac belt, twenty-one north thereof, and fifteen to-
wards the south. Associated with some of them ere cer-
tain stars, which are described as 'outside'.
159. Ma al-suwar allatl ral5 mintaget al-burSJ.

The constellations In the zodiac belt are those after
which the signs of the zodiac are
ZODIACAL called. Beginning from the vernal
CONSTELLATIONS equinox they are:-
1. ARIES, al-hamal: barrah.^ represented In the
form of a ram half-recumbent, but looking backwards
with the mouth resting on the back.
S. TAURUS, al-thaur; gay, in the form of the fore-
part of a bull, out In two at the navel, and with the
head bent down as If about to gore.
1
The Arabic names of the constellations are followed
by the Persian ones, separated by a semicolon - these
only occur In the Star-tables of the Persian I.IS3, ff.
37-36 PL. 25-26 PP.
. ♦■ ' >■• . - *•• "it
lâJb Vt^-.Ul ^^J^JL»li>UjUr> „*_.. U-.^. i
^ > .
L£3 ^£=>. J i,
»•>»' ^ ^* w » ■
t • '*. ^ I * . ♦ '
■to
^*<Xc/'Ay,| ^
s ■*" i »
'^> 5» ' li ^ jP V-X^J yi r1}'j ^ wij^'j k ' I1',
^ g-, _-'1 •"_ t . , ' V --" - . sf
>s-J^_^-'J U. \ ^ U J'^ l>-k. il1 Jkfc- •^
>—j -L^jivo ^1
^ L U;\L^j 1| *—>3—<—^=>'jfc1 S-^-J
JP^JîO1 Aj; c\\ .kJ^*),S^'fgj ^ 5^

^ -<: '' '" ■ , " / -I i y ^ ^T
J t « V '- "JL5 j-tk .*" ^ 6 J ^
>'y» ^ a'v-'âJ y» ^
if
159
3. QEMUH, al-ta^Rmfin; du palkar, two boys
standing erect, one of them has his ana round the
other's shoulder;
4. CANCER, Al-sarat5nr kharohang, like a crab.
5. LEO, al-aaad; ahYr.
6♦ VXHGt. al-radhr6'; dtlahlza bg khusha, in the
form of a maid with two wings and a flowing skirt, (in
her hand an ear or two of corn directed tp the bottom
of her skirt)p.
7. LIBRA, al-mlaan; tarazu, like a balance with
scales;
8. SCORPIUS, al-^qrab: kazhdum,; as a scorpion;
9. SAGITTARIUS. al-r5ml; tlr-andSz, in the form of
a horse as far as the base of the neck, from which
there projects half of a man frprn the region of the
loins upwards; he has long tresses, is fitting an
arrow to his bow, which he has stretched to its utmost.
10. CAPHXCORNUS, al-jadl' buz-ghflla. the front
half like a kid, the hinder like a fish to the end of
the tail,
11. AQUARIUS, sfiqib al-mg*; rlzanda 5b, a man with
both hands outstretched, in one of them a pitcher
which he has turned upside down, and from which water
is flowing towards his feet and runs down rrom then.
12. PISCES, samakah; mfihi. represented by two
fishes whose tails are Joined together by a thread
called the thread of linen, khalt al-klttfin.
Although the Arabic name for Aries is al-hamal,
a lamb, kabsh weuld be more correct, because it .is more
like a ram on account ofîts horns; similarly
Capricorn, in Arabic jadl, a kid, should really be
called tals, a goat, on account of its head; the Hindus
call it magar, (mugger or crocodile) which is the name
Of a mn-rYTiP Evnlmfil,
The common people call Gemini al-^JauzS' instead

of al-tau'amfln; Virgo, al-sunbula Instead of
al-âdhrS1; Sagittariua al-qaus for al-rBml; Aquarius,
al-dalw instead of saklb ai-ma'; and Pisces, al-hut
for al-samakah, but the names given in the first place
arc the correct ones.
70
iJf Jj'. ">
—'/>—*^ a1> Q ^ 5 ajA^ i' >
t. .' *> ' , » » > l ^

Lv- >y •*^=>-«^xJ 4'
j^=* Uiu^^_r"J
L%^v-_î> >-^=o f'LI^lUl—-uaiU^Jj. >
j.V'ej^t^
m
9 . f i •* I ^ * ^ *»
_j
AfjJz** J,
I * vi ' " ' ♦« * .' ^
^yS'^^yWi—^;L.
160
160. Ma al-auwar al-ahamallyyali. The following
are the Northern Constellations. 1. URSA MINOR,
al-duhb al-aaehar: khlra ktlehah.
NORTHERN 2. URSA MAJOR, al-dubh al-ahbar;
CONSTELLATIONS khira buzurg. Both are pictured aa
bears standing with tails out-
stretched. 3. DRACO, al-tlnnin; Azhdahg. is repre-
sented as a very long serpent with many convolutions;
It is colled round the north pole of the ecliptic.
4. CEPHEUS, qlfaus or flqaus, is a man with a conical
hat qalansuwah. and Is resting on one knee. He has
both hands outstretched, as is the case with 5.
BOOTES, al-âwwd', the shouter, »dio is erect. 6.
CORONA B0BEALI5. al-fakkah, al-lklll al-shamBll,
qa3,"at al-vata"'' wa'l-masakin; afsaFj is generally
known as the beggar's dish. 7 . HEKCIILES, a 1-.iathl
âlB rukbatalh; zanu nlshastah, is represented as a
man kneeling. 6. LYRA. IttrB, al-sanj; chang rOml, as
a Greek lyre, but it is somfltirmH called a tortoise,
sulhafSh. 9. CYGNU3, al-dajajah; meklySn, is like a
duci with neck and wings outstretched in the act of
flying. 10. CASSIOPEIA, dhat al-kursl; khudawand-1
fcursl, the lady of the throne, is seated on a kind of
pulpit. 11. PERSEUs, barshaus, hamil ra's al-ahul;
bmandah aar-1 diy. who is represented erect, holding
in one hand the hideous head of the decapitated r
ghoul. 12. AURIGA.■mumslk al-ânSn; girandah anan,
is a man with a whip in one hand and holding the reins
in the other. 13. SERPEHTARIUS, al-hawwa'; mar afsay,
the serpent-charmer, standing over a serpent, 14.
al-hayyah; mar, the head and tail of irtiich he holds
aloft above his head.
15. 3AGITTA, al-sahm; tlr, also called al-bulah and
al-nauk; because it is a long thing of indefinite
form, and bears many names suggested by its resemblance
(to an arrow)p. 16. AQUILA, al-ruq5b is an eagle
seated on the arrow.
1
bClah a short sword, naukP- for beak or nib.
7
^ * ' "■ 1
', ' v v ;
\^^yS\^
J, 01
' ^ * "-y * ^
11 1
L-^ 1—/ f i'ly^ ^ y'■^> * x*yij
^ A^ji—A»l^^ Ly^y^ <A i
Ax-l^=> &*} AjL^=»-3^-i— U^^SJ 1
"> o 3_yciÛH^^l^y»(O^LJ_yjj.!^,L
( ,. -<r * 4,4.'^' j
>_yl-c-!liL->y oLÂyl«^P^^ ^*^■^-►(3^1 Vf
jus-jLLt^y
-..*■' ' « . '
AjeUi-^ ^v^yyy—
•^y- J"^'T'r^/yy>âJ^'^"' -^lj^1

160-161
17. DELPHINDS, al-dulfln. a marine animal like an
Inflated water-akln;llt la friendly to man, accompanies
boats, rescues tlie drueued, alive or dead, (and plays
about in groups of tenK- 18. EQUOLEUS, al-faras al-
awwal. pictured as the head and neck of a horse, and
TEerefore referred to as cjlfat al-faras. 19.
PEUAaua. al-faras al-thani, the fore part of a horse
with two wings; there Is no man with it, for it is cut
In two at the navel, like Taurus above described.
20. ANDROMEDA, andrumlda, she is the woman who has
never seen a husband.a al-marat allatl lam tara baTan.
also al-musalaalah; zan bS zanjlr, the chained woman,
who stands erect, and according to Abd al-IJuoaln al-
fufl this chain Is around her feet, while Aratus,3 who
esorlbed these constellations, placed the chains on
her hands, so that she Is as it were suspended by them.
21. TRIANGULUM, al-muthallath; sih stt, its figure
corresponds wlthTUa name.
161. MS al-suwar al-Jandblyyah. The southern
constellations are fifteen in number. 1. 0ETU3,
qltua. this la a sea-monster with two
SOUTHERN fae'T'and a tall like a bird's. 2.
CONSTELLATIONS ORION, al-Jabbar. JauzS', the tyrant
with belt and sword. Si ERIDANUS,
al-nahr: jul. like a river—wttir many bends. 4. LEPUS,
al-arnab; khargush, the hare. 5. CANI3 MAJOR, al-kalb
al-alESar; sag buzurg. 6. 0ANI3 MINOR, al-kalb al-
asghar also al-mucaddam; sag plshln. 7. HYDRA, al-
shuja*', a serpent long and slender. 8. ARGO, al-
saflnah; kashtl, the ship. 9. CRATER, al-ka'a, al-
bgtiyah; paiygla, the cup. 10. CORTOS. al-ghurBFT
kuiagh- All of the above are eignTca an t.aatT. wnmnQ
suggest. 11. CENTAURUS, qantaurua. like Sagittarius
la represented as half man and half horse (Just as the
Centaur is described in the Greek books).P 12. LUPUS,
al-sabtl''; shir. This is a wild beast which the Centaur
has seized by the feet, and holds aloft. 13. ARA, al-
iiiiJiuarali. an incense-burner. 14. CORONA AUSTRALIS,
al-iklII al-janObl: afsar. 15. PISCIS AUSTRALIS, al-
hPt al-Jandbt; mafai.
1 jlctq. P. khlk.
2 avbpa un fifte.
3 So in P, but Azarlpas in A.
' A*1^J-1 jiA > ) Jj^^j I
> 'r^" ts^S -L Li^-Jttl1
_^»>.*.1>1- fq^J^-^-'J>^ L«i\) A>A» »^(2/I.»*g_^, -J

■' ' » - k • " t" ■
A--s- Lfe" -"j r^J ~ JJ W^y Lai L^3 ^>.
^ >>*'4\k V
* * %iu *
^.y* J J14'^-^ U15
* s *^*1$ *
■—^\i=&\rx*' (
AIÎSVs ^-^',^1 C^^CjjjA^ k=»i'
v^r-îoWj Le(U,l£=tV'!J9,v—
oÊiUVj ~-^4y
The translation ot the matter
on the opposite page la to he
found at the top of p. 73.
-4^; ^jfC^s Li*1-
4 ** ^v i.
^_t--^r£=>l_^=»L<r-'i!!JI 'Z^Z^y. •>»^ -tHJ' Ur1 —5x^1 * ■
161-162
The last two constellations must not be confused
with those of similar names (Corona borealls and Placed
In the northern and zodiacal constellations.
162. Fa kam kawkab fI kulll surah. There are
differences of opinion as to the number of stars in
sauh uuualellatlon, both as to number and
NOUHER magnitude, also as to whether a particular
OF STARS star should be regarded as outside or not.
The following tables present a catalogue
convenient for reference and study.
Northern Magnitudes
Constellations 1 2 3 4 5 6 •da a* nebulae Sum.
1 Ursa minor 2 1 4 7
Outside 1 1
2 Ursa major 6 8 a 5 27
Outside 1 2 1 4 8
3 Draco 8 16 5 2 31
4 Cepheus 1 7 3 11
Outside 1 1 2
5 Bootes 4 9 9 22
Outside 1 1
6 Corona borealls 1 5 1 1 El
7 Hercules 6 17 2 3 28
Outside 1 1
S Lyra 1 2 7 10
9 Cygnus 1 5 9 2 17
Outside 2 2
LO Cassiopeia 4 6 1 2 13
Summary 2 10 40 94 31 8 4 - 189
73
iL ' ' \t'r ■
U-"*
L* ■N
3. rx L' r- h
fL fe C g C" <1
j >* >v -* « 1
\ \ ft t t >» /X * ^VtiuÛ-
•* n » r" *. '*
f=> 'i r r J 'I
i>Z 6 I —. .1 t %
V •< * —' * j' s: « >4 ^
l •«. •s 7" -> «
t % \ I * y
V- HI <4 •i* i T 1^1
\ •4 *< 1 ^'y»,^2jU
7- * \ \ 0 << \ « J > »-^l
/* J* J /< v
1 r4 t y J jUiÛ
i << *4 •< <4
i_ * •4 •« 1 -» —• * \ T
* *1 « . JU 6 \ >4
•< 4 * f* fi H j-W'
^ .
-S — \ J % *6
>
162
Nortlieiii
Constellations Magnitudes
continued 1 2 3 4 5 6 MerlC nebulae Sum
From last page 2 10 40 94 31 8 4 - 189
11 Perseus 2 5 16 2 1 26
Outside 2 1 3
12 Auriga 1 1 2 7 2 1 14
13 Serpantarlua 5 13 6 24
Outside 5 5
14 Serpens 5 12 1 18
15 Sagltta 1 3 1 5,
16 Aqulla 1 4 1 3 9
Outside 4 1 1 6
17 Delphlnus 5 2 3 10
18 Equuleus 4 4
19 Pegasus 4 4 9 3 20
20 Andromeda 4 15 4 23
21 Triangulum 3 1 4
Summary 3 18 81 177 58 13 9 1 360
The total number of stars in the northern oonatellatlons

is therefore 360, of these 3 are of the first
magnitude, 18 of the second, 81 of the third, 177 of
the fourth, 58 of the fifth, 22 of the sixth including
the dark; ones, and 1 of the cloudy category.^
1 The US has 28 and 167 in this Summary for 18 and 177.
74
u 1 .
f.-L L-
•h FL k
Ui % k c- £ ft ^c
■5 — V « V t' v_rsli>
1^= \
1 'i —. <a A * Y —r.L,2.JL
?- *
* * ! . j \ 1
' 'l
1£=> * ti -i ^1 4- i o • 
A H ■i ^ ' 6 ►i
•i 1 d "i 'i
f H *
& ^■ -6 i,
1
t t T \ > \ >
i.
1 , *i 4 \ 1 > < n
J— t 15 f % — 6 t * -> ûijl
'
-< > ■< * % •i t
[iu£^ ■»i 't •< T io > -i Ja»
ii > Am > « i
> <i -i H i^ 1 *4 lfc« -irn
U— .
.r r * ^ v ^.V*'- . , , ^
tv,,^', J-IÛtuU1 'LJ'
16 S
Zodiacal Magnitudes T
Constellations 1 2 3 4 5 6 »dark nebulae Sum
1 Aries 2 4 6 1 13
Outside 1 1 3 5
S Taurus 1 7 11 13 1 33
Outside 1 10 11
3 Gemini 2 5 9 2 18
Outside 3 4 7
4 Cancer 7 1 1 9
Outside 2 2 4
5 Leo 2 £ 6 8 5 4 27
Outside 1 4 5
6 Virgo 1 6 7 10 2 26
Outside 4 2 6
7 Libra 2 4 2 8
Outside 5 2 1 8
8 Scorpius 1 13 5 2 21
Outside 2 1 3
9 Sagittarius 2 9 9 8 2 1 31
LO Caprloornus 4 9 9 6 28
11 Aquarius 1 9 10 13 1 42
Outside 3 3
12 Pisces 2 22 3 7 34
Outside 4 4
Susmiary ezoluaiw
of Coma Berenices 5 9 64 133 105 27 3 346
which cmtalns 3 alan
75
-i >• -t- 0 ■ Lrv- irt(. ^^ ^
icv
\ ^ /
L
fs 'r c" (e:- £ ^ ^ A<
jk- i K 1 j > •K 3-^'
» /» T1 K \ \ 1 «
? — *« *4 1 ■ L I 1 1
-S >4> L. 1 OS -4 is
4 4 i. i —■ t ?-
> 7* •& •« *4
1 ^ 1 •i •4> _>
> -» —> .
■< <« S r —' j~>n
•< « « > 1 t «
•* -6 — —>- <l_ J < 1 *1^1
•« > 4> * t
* ft • • f* j Û'
\y IS » — •i /'A)-^.-'l»
l£3 •6 f, _- A V -4
7^ 1 IS ■ >* ■jr
V f •< —> c- • •< i.
*? 3 J» ij * 4 i— jfî
-e—- ]=« « \ I aou
*< * \
■ t- -s IS >■ 4 * UiiU: - £
J —- "4 •«
« 1 -5 - ttJ •4
l
. S^li > •—V* -.'~'* j^3> jÂ"
y— HJ1 ^ '»f-J
v V, /T ^
162
Southern
Conate llatlons 1 2 5 4 5 6 'dark* nebulae Sum
1 Cetus 10 G 4 22
2 Orion 2 4 8 15 3 5 1 38
3 Erldanus 1 5 26 2 34
4 Lepus 2 6 4 12
5 Canls major 1 5 5 7 18
Outside 2 9 11
6 Cenls minor 1 1 2
7 Argo 1 6 10 20 7 1 45
8 Hydra 1 3 19 1 1 25
Outside 2 2
9 Crater 7 7
ID Corvus 5 1 1 7
11 Centaurus 1 5 7 16 8 37
12 Luyu s, 1 Camelus 2 11 6 19
13 Ara 5 2 7
14 Corona australla 5 6 2 13
15 Plsela australla 9 2 11
Outsldei 3 2 1 6
Sunmiary 7 18 62 165 54 9 1 316
Northern 3 18 81 177 58 13 9 1 360

Zodiaoal 5 9 64 133 X© 27 - 3 346
Southern 7 18 62 165 54 9 1 316
summary 15 45 307 475 217 49 9 5 1022
2^Fomelhaut omitted, already assigned to Aquarlua.

The tablea are Identical with Ptolemy's except that
1/ Hercules and Libra have respectively 6 and 2 stars
of the third oag: Instead of 5 and 3; 2/ outside Libra
there la an additional star of the 3rd and one of the
6th lacking, 3/ that Argo has 10 of the 3rd and 20 of
the 4th Instead of 11 and 19 respectively.
f
-± L L-lu-c ^
c c
a a C. A e. j 7' — .UJ
—i—i——— » — i
rr —> j ^ -> .J,
^
H n 3 , ^ t ^
* uL ' | * _" ^ <> $_*'
Jl i JS | Jo ^ i —'
-ZSh
* \ rr *, y •» rlaui''
Ay* U
I 3
j 1
j -■ A-UI
a" Mm .k, 1 r
^ ^ j"E Vg
^ I-a v | a — - ^
a yiA I ^ Y_
* 4_ Y ^
> a M | I J 5 -» ^ -yl^l
1
'S' Yj g v _J-> 0 I L
Y 4 J t _
* *
-Tf A 2=.[ <i Y Y ^ —■'^
_i«V '^^0 ^ ■y^-' ^1 L U'^.

jJ J—., JJ.
163
163. Fa hal tuTaf hadhlhi al-thabitah bl asma'
ukhar. All peoples, especially desert-dwellers. Have
glTeii aajnaa te the atara la accordaucc
STAB NAMES with resemblances shlch they suggest.
Those which are best known in our day
are names given to them by the Arabs, accordingly I
shall mention those which are most current.
In Ursa minor at the tip of the tall there Is
a bright star of the third magnitude called the kid,
Judaly.l (the pole star) the significance of which la
great as it Is regarded as occupying the place of the
north pole; in our times there is no bright star
nearer It. On account of this position It la of great
service to any one directing himself to the qiblah
[or for orientation,because It does not sensibly
alter Its position.
On the fore part of the body are two bright
stars of the second and third magnitude, al-farqadSn,
(the two calves) and between them8 and the tall a
group of Inconspicuous stars confronting them-dlsposed
in the form of a myrobalan, halllail. Some people call
it a fish, and others the mill-atone, fa's al-rnbfi.
(Bslya P) on account of their belief that the pole is
in the midst of the group, [and that these stars are
revolving round It].P
All of the stars of Ursa minor ere sometimes
called the smaller children2 of the bier, banSt narah
al-sughrB, owing to the similarity of their die-
position to stars of like name In Ursa major, banBt
na^sh al-kubrB. On account of the closeness of the
north pole to these banBt, It Is sometimes called the
pole of the banBt na rsh.
^8 diminutive of jadl.
2 supply al-farqadSn before kawBkib.
banBt la generally Interpreted as plural of bint.
daughter, but Lane points out that when Ibn, eon, is
applied to an Inanimate object, Its plural la also
banBt.
^f7_Jl^^L^<^l^22_v<yilj>w-'^jL.lj(^Jîljj4ail
t. , ^ #
«- J—W1-, i\-~=*
^ iS=»>i-I. ^\ i _jL.^ '-J
^ yj jJ 1
—^3 Jdiil xy^wili^ jJ^jj
o^j'j
-—>-^0'U'j^V^ <-£=^£=>-£^gi> jLî- j iL x\ w^jui^'

163
The larger banat al-na'sh of Ursa major are seven
bright stars (called In Persian haft varane) four of
which disposed In a quadrangle form the na*sh or bier
while the other three on the tall ere the bshBt (or
mourners). 1 That on the tip of the tall, furthest away
from th ' " ' ' ' *'
middle
within e
root of the tall Is called al-Jaun.
Below the banSt na^sh on the legs of the bear are
a number of small stars In pairs i&loh are called osftat
al-zlbS'. leaps of gazelles, Jastan-l ahwSn P, and are
lilcenad to their hoof-prlnts. In front of the bier Is
a semicircular group of stars named the tauk, baud.
The four stars on the head of Draco are called
♦"awg'ldh. (camels which have recently foaled) end some-
times the falling cross, al-eallb al-waql^, and between2
them and the farqadSn are two bright stars, al-^huheqai
and al-dhlbSn3 bulls or wolves.
On the left foot of Cepheus there Is a star called
a shepherd, al-rS'I, another between the feet, his dog,
and a number In the body, his sheep.
Outside Bootes there la a star opposite the banSt
called al-slmik al-rSmlh, (the high spear-bearer
Aroturua) ; hia spear la formed by two stars from Ifeicuke.
It Is called slmak on account of Its high altitude. In
a line with It towards the south Is another star large
and bright. bimgir al-a^zal, (the high unarmed one),
because there Is no other star near It to serve as a
weapon. (Sploa Virginia.) Aroturus Is sometimes called
the guardian of the northern heavens harls al-shlmSl.
Stars which are on the breast and arm of Hercules
form the northern row, al-nasaq al-shlml, while some on
the forepart of the Serpent of Serpentarlus make the
southern row, al-nasan »i -yoTnanT Between the two rows
Is the garden, al-rawaah.
1 usually translated 'kid', but according to Tallgren
"Las nombres de las estrellas" p. 664 •'annaq êmbracing'
(the little Suhi7 epcotuXo^ v. Boll, Sphaera p. 81)
for legends regarding the two stars, cf. B.H. Allen,
Star Hames p. 446.
2 misspelt In US. for dhl'ban or dhu,ban.
* * ^ ^ >
a»jV^*5 J^'—
"rî /■*—ÛiL\>lîjV-ili_^(j<»
„< " •"» •• ' V, '• -'^
^J Ir^1 I "Jê/
^*,i^_«»^3ir-U-L>>^^l i__5=>' ^^3. iWÎ/oW Llv' k_j/j

' * «, ' ' •' •* % ^ **' "^ «" '
U •l^-lA-^»(tjL»J^ V^'1 ^
163
The bright star In Lyra, al-nasr al-waqlr. (Vega)
oalled the falling or the sitting vulture, because Its
wings are folded, two small stars, whlsh_together with
Vega resemble a trivet, uthflyyah, dlg-payahP. Vega and
the heart of Soorplus, qalb al-âqrab, are oalled al-
harrarfin, [dogs barking on account of the cold],
[because they are so clearly visible In winter^.]
The stars on the breast and wings of Cygnus are
called the horsemen, al-fawSrls, end the bright one on
the tall, the follower or pllllon-rlder, al-rldf.
A bright star on the chair af Oasslopela Is known
as al-kaff al-khadlb, or the henna-stained hand of
thuralya, the Pleiades, the nebula of Perseus being the
wrist: It Is also oalled the camel's hump, sanSni, by
the Arabs who make a camel out of the stars of Cassio-
peia and others.
Capella, the large bright star on the shoulder of
Auriga, Is called al-'"alyuq. the smaller one lower
down, al-fanz,8 the she-goat, and the two further down
the goat's kids, al-jadlBn: It Is on this account that
they call Capella the goat-herd, al-rannSz.3
Altalr, the bright star on tHe wing uf Aqulla, Is
called the flying vulture, al-nasr al-tS'lr, and the
four stars (like a rhomb on the headlP of the Dolphin
are known as the flying cross, al-sallb al-ta'lr.
The four great stars forming ihe body of Pegasus
are called the bucket, al-dalw. and between them and
the Fish there Is the fox's den, baldat al-tharlab.
Now this fish la not Places but one which the Arabs
picture to themselves out of some staia uf Andharu-
mldha and others. T«k> of the stars of Triangulum are
oalled the companions, al-anlaaln.
The Arabs do not picture the constellations of the
zodiac In the way described, there Is no trace of them
except In three eases. The first Is Aries where the two
stars on the horns are called na$} end netlh, which Is
an Indication that they were tETnklng ofa ram butting.
The second Is Soorplus which Is conceived entirely In the
Greek way. The third Is Leo:but their lion Is fashioned
1 F. hazSrfin,AO huwfixda;Al-harrSrSn,v.Lane under harra:
also the cold Syrian months KanOn I & II,Dec. 4. Jan.
2
P. buz, buzghSlagBn, buzvan end buzbSn:
® usually read InSz, she-goats or AO ran5q, but see
Dozy
r end Tallgren p.675 - maâz Is more usual than
annaz, for a-goat-herd.QazwInl (Ideler p.90) "they can
Capella and the kids rlngz". In By copy of ft. vitaq.
5 l . ' <S^*t t
i. i jxl »5 yji yiA>lAt>-^j»
, l-iJ- ii£=J\tf-f ^l.> .) ^rjlyi^
) Âl/^ ct^'A3
^ A' * k ^ V •*
J^_j âi—^ di
• —^ ♦ y - v ■ t-^-
Ojj-o 4^l>£5^]^ljj?>-L»j\£.j 1 >-^3 j> I
jrA f
t \ 1 j' ^ L^. '
163
out of acme fire oonstellatlons,only the eyea,forehead,
neck and ahouldera, and the tall-tuft belong to Leo,
while they make one fore-leg out of the heada of
Gemini, the other out of Canla minor, the nose out of
Cancer and the hlnd-lega of the two almSka.
The Pleiades, thuralya, parrlnP. they set down as
a head with two hands, one of which Is the khadlb whloh
was mentioned In Cassiopeia, whose finger-tips, anSmll.
are stained with henna; If we proceed from these
towards the Pleiades we find a series of stars whloh
represent the wrist, the elbow, the shoulder, and the
shoulder-joint, ''atlq.1 The other hand Is the kaffal-
jadhmS' from stars In the head of Cetus; It Is called
JadhmB', amputated, because the row of stars whloh
eztends to It from the Pleiades Is shorter.
Al-dabarBn Is called fanlq, a big male camel;
round-Elm are a number of young_females, qalB'ls. like
the young of the old females, nOq. while the two small
stars, his dogs, are near each other In the narrow gap,
dalâh,between him end the Pleiades, (idiloh brings
ml ry nsS -I 1 1-1 iinV-) P
They call the heads of Gemini the extended arm,
dhlrdr al-mabsfitah, of their lion, and the two stars of
Canls minor, Prooyon, al-shlTtf al-shBmlryah, and its
r-nmpanlnn miTTOm the nonTtta nTait arm frTH t-W r
maqbfldah.
stars In the body of Cetus are spoken of as
ostriches naramSt.£ and cows, baqar, while the large
one in the tall together with thai in the mouth of the
Southern Pish, Fomalhaut, fam al-htit. are the two frogs
dlfda ran.
Orion Is called JauzR' Instead of Al-jabbir, and
his belt a string of pearls, nltHm, or a row of maids,
jawSrl; out of some of the stars of Erldsnus® they make
a chair for him, and of some from Lopue a throne, The
large bright star (Slrlus) In the mouth of Orion's dog,
Canls major, Is named al-ahlfra al-yamBnlyyah. and the
passer over, al-cabflr, for they related that (both of
T That part of the shoulder on whloh rld8' a cloak or
a shoulder-belt rests.
^ ahuturmurghdnP. 'camel-birds'; navflm, the species
ostrich, na'amalT, a single ostrichjanral na'&mit; It has
uuukhur plural na'S'lm. na'am, pasturing cattle
Including camels or camels alone, plural, anfl'lm.
3 PL has hawwS' by mistake for nahr, PP, Jul.
v. Fococke, Specimen, p. 136.
>_jf[C=^ L/iH^-t^JJ^-.J >jc—
.• K, ' _ * ,k ** ^ '% - ^
A>Ia1 t^=> CA^ 4*oLi \ t_j)uV^ <^5
lr^> L^'^^y-^dr-*-' «--='' ^J1^ —l-^J
. j' >^SjL^«£= » LU=«JO^ jl-*«aJ
'*-a^> iLJllIJ'voV'iii.
J>Jf-J lj Aô^JulJJ A—C-lj > [^»^ ,> ^
ik) j\ j ^ jLiJ^-J' A^~jJ-i-' LyL^ *>.

k •• t '
—l_}--j^!» A_1.LCÎ_$ jl^J—jL£=>ykiî£=>V'»—
•—^jiLo^L ■•|-^^'>—aOI_lioj-^>J/f-U^
153-164
the dog-atara are alstera of Canopus, auhall.and that)
the greater dog-otar oroased over the milky-way to the
south with Canopus, while the lesser remained on the
Syrian side and beaajDS blear-eyed, ghumaisS'.
Among other stars ot Cents major there are two
known as the oath-takers and oath-breakers, muhllfain
and muhnlthaln, beoause any one who does notlmow
Canopus well, mistakes these stars when they arise for
Canupus and its uifisui, [and takes oath to_thls effect;
when Canopus really appears he Is perjured?] They are
known as the two stars.
In the neck of Hydra there Is a star known as al-
fard, the solitary one; stars of corvus form the AraH
tent, khlbfl', and the throne of the slmfik; those of
Crater, [a manger, majlaf;] and those In the body of
Hydra are the ribs, shargslfl and within them horses
and foals khalla wa aflfl'. The stars of Centaurus and
Lupus are Enown as bunches of grapes, shomfirlkh, while
those of Corona australls are regarded' as a cupola or
as an oatrloh's nest, udhlyy^ al-nwam, that Is the
place where It lays Its eggs.
With regard to other star-names we bawe not
brought them forward, either beoause there is much
disagreement about them or beoause we have not heard
them sufficiently distinctly.
184. Pa ma manazll al-qamar. As the zodiac, the
course of the sun in a year. Is divided Into twelve
equal signs, so also the path of the
MANSIONS OP moon among the fixed stars Is divided
THE MOOH into daily stations.the mansions of the
moon. Of these there are twenty-seven
according to the Hindus and twenty-eight according to
the Arabs. Just as the signs are called after the con-
stellations, so the mansions are called after the fixed
stars in which the moon is stationed for the night.They
begin as in the case of the sun at the vernal equinox,o
1. al-sharataln. (two signals), the first mansion,
la marked by two bright stars on the horns, sarUgghP>
of Aries; they aie disposed In a north and south line,
the apparent distance between them, about a fathom,
being the same as that between the southein one and a
third smaller star. Also called the butters, na^jS,
X The translator Into Persian was unfamiliar with"this-
word; he translates It the Champion's head sar-1 aslf
al sar-1 pahlayfln (aslf, a skilled swordsman),
^ misspelt. ^ read lltldal.
81
9 f } y-
^>1^1 >j SC~ ! ^4-2ai
_»-^j JJ'I—l*»A^>ljli_ _Î«^=>i
^W-i Aio*i ^—A^yyV*' aj ' -'
•® ^f *k "' f *'
2-_ —•>v_rK_*-J-» UrL^yj^
i3 Ir-"^"-? -^v*' >Jl>OJ*. aL^£=»

I ÎL v_l^^jJ)J_rJ^.îi'
)UlJ ,\,
■».' u, . !»
163-164
3. al-butaln, three stars from the tall of Aries
disposed In a "triangle. Dlmlnutl-ve of batn, bally,
because smaller than batn al-hut. No. 'SB'.
3. al-thuralyg. parvln^,'STx stars from the
shoulder of Taurus grouped like a bunch of grapes.
Generally, and especially by poets, the number Is sup-
posed to be seven, but this Is a mistake. Although
the term najm Is applicable to every star, thuralya
alone Is specially distinguished as 'al-najm'.
4. Al-dabaran la a large shining red star In the
easterly eye of Taurus. The head of Taurus Is shaped
like a1bowl with Its muuth to the north, twhile the
muffle p of Idle bull (mouth and lips) are directed
south.) Aldeberan,® the 'follower' of the Pleiades Is
also called t§blr al-najm.
5. Al-haq ''a Is formed by three small stars from
the bead of Orion arranged like a trivet, so close
together that they look like one. On this account
Ftolany re^rded them as a single nebula.
6. Al-hanra. two small stars from the feet of
Gemini, the one rsmaller, the other somewhat brighter.
7. Al-dhlrg , the extended foreleg of the Arab
lion, for the contracted one Is formed by Prooyon and
Its mlrzam (a mlrzam Is a small star, coupled to
another bright one). Al-dbira.r Is formed by two bright
stars from the beads of Gemini, distant from each
other as much as the distance between Al-sharataln.
S. Al-natbrab, the nose of the lion, formed of
two small stars of Cancer which are Interpreted as
the nostrils. Betweem tbem'ls a nebula which some call
the lion's uvula,lahBt, malazab,?, but the Greeks call
the stars the two asses, hlmaraln and the nebula, the
manger, marlaf. (Praesepe).
9. Al-tarf, the eyes of the lion; these are two
bright stars, one from Leo, the other from outside It,
apparently about a cubit3 from each other.
1 blnlyash PL. PP has pish.

2 and hadl al-najm,r the leader. tablr also occurs as
diminutive tuwalbl v. Phllby,Ârabla of the Wahabls,
. 60. Ptolemy calls it kiUROdtu;
The measures rumh, dblrar and ahlbr, spear, cubit,
span, appear In F as nlzah, arsh, and bldast.
JL-^- \ jVj£=»f+Xb-i [^ \^y^*£»-yc^
^4y ')l^=ajfe.jl -'41 ^ ^ ^ < f Ljsr
>
~—•'\^jl-£=»â^V-3^» ^-^^Li.Alaû>_r ^ ,•—,
3^ it'^J.
N J Q» 'X2yO^Jî^,^:;J•-^:=, ^(5 ?> Lj3—^' A^>^»JJ—V' .Jl, I
L^-Jc-N ^L?
U^J/j l^tLr^^H ^ '>tJ^S}^- ^r13-5 4=11 j

>
M'-m ^ . •' ' '
—•l~j!iJvj^-*4=*^9>—&■ Jv*' »3=^^ ***Î3A(3 ^ xJjjAly^
W j v-J'.v ■ LAJ<r>-> y-^-S~fiî-.

10. Al-Jabhah. or jabbet al-aaad, tbo lion's
forehead, la formed by four bright stare, not In a
straight line from north to south. The largest.and
brightest and moat southerly Is the heart of Leo.
qalb al-aaad. or al-malahl (Hegulus).
11. Al-zubrah, the mane of the Arab lion, formed
by twu uIhi'b from the hind-quarters of Leo, distant
more than a cubit. Also known as al-kharatan.^-
18. Al-sarfah Is a bright star at th« tip of
the tall of Leo, but according to the Arabs on the
tall ItsetT, (and Is regarded by them and the
astrologers as the scrotum.F) Al-dafirah (Coma
Berenices] Is the group of small stars like the
Pleiades forming the tuft of hair, hulbah. at the
tip of the tall.
13. Al-''awwa'. four stars running (from north to
south)F end curving at last like the latter lam;
they are from the breast and wings of Virgo, and the
Arabs speak of them as dogs barking behind the lion.
14. Al-slmSk. the unarmed one of the two
considered by the Arabs to be the hind legs of their
lion, but according to the Creeks al-'azal Is an ear
of com.crdxu? , In the hand of virgn wtTTnh the
translators have rendered by sunbulah, (SplcaJ. It
Is sunbulah by which the sixth sign Is so well-known.
It occupies a siullar position to that of al-dafirah
(In Its relation to Leo.)
15. Al-ghafr Is formed by two small stars on the
train, dhall, of Virgo, quite Inconspicuous; the name
Is derived from_their concealment.
16. Al-zubSnS, the claws of the scorpion, two
stars 2from the scales of Libra, which are at a spear's
length from each other,
17. Al-lklll or the crown, three bright stars
from the forehead of Scorplus, arranged In a slightly
curved line frum north to south.
1 as In PL-1- 1and Be2. KharStSn In PL and PP. Kharithan

In
2 AO and AO . V. Lane II p. 717.
qldl rumh.
^'jI-V 1 Û'V - U^ r"^'
•',. _ ■' ' . ^ ^
j. LP »—1
. .. . ^ ■■ v •■ .
>—\1 -^ ■> iJ»^X>"
".^■»^>< JlaL^V —-^J^-Jt^ r\l£=»/*^jl»->
♦ ^V * \ ^» V
5r j^-VJ»U-c5.^—iblj«^}>i||ftrJ^X^r=>^
^3U U' —y»J
—j^-VJ
+'a>^
—-'.iîl i jyjiLy, î,—^>-^1—^VJA'j a 1 jjj^)*?ic-LAiLî-1

' ' , 'ul 4 1
^ ^ ^ ■■"•'
*,'' 9 —' . \s '

164
18. Al-qalb. i.e. ijalb al-raqrab, the heart of
Soorplus, Ahtarea, is a red and trembllne star ebloh
astrologers dosorlbo as haying the nature of Mars; In
front of It Is another star, and behind It a third,
the three being disposed In a curve.
19. al-nhauiMh, the sting of Soorplus, ebloh Is
turned forwards over the Joints of the tall; two stars
bright, but uut large, separated by about a span from
each other. .
SO. Al-nn''a'Im, the oatrlohes, four bright
stare from the bow, arrow and foreleg of the horse
of Sagittarius furmlng a quadrangle. The Arabs compare
the milky way to a river, and these stars to ostrlohes
going to the river, n&r5m wSrldah al-nahr, while there
are four others which they apeak of as na^gm sadlrah,
returning from watering.
21. Al-baldah, an area of the heavens behind
Sagittarius, devoid of stars, and pcompared to a desert
or to a gap (between the eyebrows) . The stars which
border It (on the west)p from the tresses of
Sagittariusrare called al-qlladah, the necklace.
22. 3a d al-dhSblh. the sacrlfloer: here are
two stars, not bright, disposed horizontally with
more than a uublt between them; both are on the horn
of Capricorn. Near them Is a third star which the
Arabs call ra sheep about to be sacrificed.
23. 3a d bula*". the glutton, marked by two stars
on the left band of Aquarius, between them la a third
about to be rdevouredr by the glutton.
24. Sa d al-3u ud. three stars In a row from north
to south from the tall of Caprloomus and the shoulder
of Aquarius.
1 According tor Ideler p. 186, naram unlikely, probably

originally na am, cattle; but Brehm, VI, 198, speaks of
troups of Ostriches watering dally.
. ^ 7... - ■• . ^ -' ''
'• ' * J" ' • | ^

—:;^'^'lJ>Lij ^<îMAi-Vi5^-»^jj»-'^'-j»-Ujv_£=>^
O^jIOU^La Jb-^
^^j)^l»!i'>w)-^/iJ^1_3j^^J •'->\v-i»Lvy1;OUi-i
-^ \f *» .• ,• ^.1 ^^j^l^Ll-f-j
*• y A-J Li .4 j^1\I^>J>J jfU-
«i •
lAi I^^ju^/Jejlilsj.jj—jlJA^>lÔjib ^
■—J-^l^jj.li^jiib s« .^jL^ ! ^ )'—j '^/
v^Jb8 ^7^/* ^ ^ bM^/ frsftJ L^y-*^j V^=» £=> i1 jl*-
^jf=» ^-^-' '

b*_3 /i b ^ ^^bAl)0j^VL(v^J
164-165
r
25. 3a d al-akhbly&h Is marked by four stars
on the right hand of Aquarius; the outline of the
group resembles a duck's foot; three of the stars
form a triangle which conoeals in Its Interior the
fourth, the lucky one. According to the Arabs these
are not the only fortunate stare, for there are many
outside the mansions of the moon which are.
26 and 27. Al-fargh al-awwal and al-thanl or
muqaddam and mu1 akhkhor, are each marked by two
all from Pegasus. The Arabs compare the four stars to
a bucket dalw, but the eleventh sign of the zodiac Is
so known; fargh really means the place for pouring
out the waTer, but these ere often Interpreted as the
upper and lower handles, farquwatan♦ .
26. Batn al-hQt is marked by two bright stars
from the liead of Andromeda, near to which Is a group
of small stars In a curved line, out of which the
Arabs make a fish, end these stars are falling Into
the wide-open mouth of the flah, whence the name
belly. Others call this mansion rlshS♦, comparing the
fish to a rope, so that the bucket in Pegasus should
not lack a rope.
165. gekalf al-tarlq lid marrlfah hadhihl al-

manazll. Al-thuralyhh, the Pleiades, is the moat
HOW TO KlfOW noticeable
tlie and the best known
THE MANSIONS ^nslona
it is therefore of the moon;
a convenient
starting point for their study; although any
other point which Is familiar on the path of the
moon will servo. Proceeding from thuralyah, however,
seek first Aldebaran s spear's length towards the east,
1
Plural of khlha' a tent,khiba'a, to conceal.
2 The crossed pieces of wood which prevent the leather
bucket from collapsing.
f
*"*"'* » ' *' ^ S "v
j —^0 j
f'J AV/ijJi\3ijuiw_â\j£=>_lcY—i- w- J__s^)i|^_X^^ »j?^^jLi>ii
—^jiiêXôLA-o
y*~> l^^-ÂslvLi^ irJ^-j^l <-_£=»
LA; >--^,^=3
&J jUUfiM,*
1 ^ ^ ^ ^ * ••
~JjT,4U£J>j ^ l^li-jJ»jj-^'vj_t L^L^lîL-l^J' JJlA}* Ijj1
165-166
a spear's length towards the east, and sberaân two
spears' length towards the west, then halfway between
sharatan end the Pleiades look out for butaln. The
distance between the other mansions Is approximately
the same as ascertained for these three, so that they
can easily be recognized by this procedure. It will be
necessary to Incline slightly to the north or south so
as to Include ell the stars mentioned.
166. MS yu''n^ bltulC al-manSzll. The expression

ascension of the mansions does not mean their rising
above the hoi'lzon, wh 1 ch occurs once
ASCSKSION 07 every day, but this ascension Is like
THE MAUSIOSS the condition of orlentallty, tashrlq,
which we considered In connection with
the three superior planets. Because when the sun Is
near one of the fixed stars It conceals It by Its
radiance; the star rises by day and sets before the
disappearance of the twilight. This condition Is
described as Its ghalbah, time of Invisibility In the
vest. This persists until the sun moves away somewhat,
so that when the star rises before the sun, the pale
light of the dawn Is not sufficient to overcome It.
The beginning of visibility In the east In the
morning, this Is the real ascension (heliacal rising)
and Is known as nau' as If the star were rising with
difficulty. Just about the time we have described
when the mansion has arisen, Its nadir, the fourteenth
from It, sets. This nadir la also called raqlb, and Its
setting gUQUt■ Between the ascension of two adjacent
mansions there Is an Interval of approximately thirteen
1 The root of nau' pi. anwS' Is nS'a to rise with

difficulty, but the word has come to mean the setting
of a star In the morning twilight, while at the
same time another rises opposite to It In the east.
The setting of a mansion la supposed to be more
significant from a meteorological point of view than
Its rising, which perhaps explains the change In
meaning of nau'.
86
9
* f +. ** >.
.Jjj
jLU feijt^-ijjl alsLyj.^
Li«J^^âi\Ulj
-r/ iîif ■—«= 1jfcall «L-t(»j^^^j^>_l^\ jI'm
3-sV-«>y1 jLwLaf'i-^'-J^0''^ jt-— ^-li1

1
^ e>^5rt ^ ^
sL''-~=»
yij.{jj^^
;Uy JiU- A^'/J»Uci^fe. Jrjl^ÛjilLi''^-'

166-168
days, not exactly, because of the difference In magni-
tude of the stars concerned and their divergence to
the north or south.
The tem anwfi* Is associated with the rains,
because the times of their occurrence are related to
the setting of the mansions In the morning In the west,
while that of bawSrlh refers to the winds and Is
related to other times of rain on the ascent of a
mansion escaping from beneath the rays In the morning.
What has been said with regard to rain and other
atmospherical phenomena refers to Arabia, for these
differ very much In places distant from each other,
Indeed, In places quite near If their situation with
regard to heat, low-lying or elevated ground, alkaline
desert (or bodies of water)P, differs.
167. Ma al-majarrah. The milky way, kahkashfin,^

Is a col 1ect1 on nf nmintlftflH fragments of the nature
of nebulous stars. They form a nearly
THE GALAIT complete great circle which passes be-
tween Gemini and Sagittarius, the stars
densely-paeked In some places, more scattered In
others, the way sometimes narrow, sometimes broad, and
occasionally breaking up Into three or four branches.
Aristotle considered that It Is formed by an enormous
assemblage of stars screened by amoky vapours In front
of them, and compared It to haloes and nebulae.
168. Mb al-tawall wa ghayr al-tawall. The proper

order of succession of the signs of the zodlak and of
the mansions of the moon Is from one to
SUCCESSION that which lies east of It, for example
OP SIGNS from Aries to Taurus then to Gemini
and then to Cancer; or In the case of
the mansions from Shara^&n to Butaln, then to the
Pleiades and then to Aldebaran. But If one proceeds
from Aries to Pisces then to Aquarius end then to
Capricorn, or from Sharaân to Batn al-^Qt then to
Fargh al-mu'akhkhar and then to Fargh al-muqaddam,
\,\\L-lb- U J >3^3^ V^
^1« ^ "i * '■** • '' '
j iLVJ^Jk. i^V^j a>JJ Hlb »
ylLjJ _^1 jjji1! .^jA' l-Tâs LAO>A\Ltf tjj I
^1 -ils ^11?^ —^ J ?>AL
^ LU JA^> ÛUf îl.^'

•X> . . " \ \ {"A- ^^
—AL^ y-fa-/- f v* Jaj-JJ A- A|-4rj\j^'
^ fejiiAA IA j ■A'^Jx 1/13 a

y}^''
v
^ • "•" ' . • '
>J dkJ^
—.'J! j^VU1 w-SÛ^-Av lAjl1
•'laolUIi
JjU'L, PJ^-;1 Â)^
(V-Ali'—-' ^ c.^ -^'^ ^ ^ |^ VcL'jÂA^

169-171
this reverao dlreotlon is described as contrary to
auccesslon- Now the proper order of succession Is in
accordance with the second or easterly movement, but
when a planet is described as In advance of or behind
another this refers to the first or westerly movement,
contrary to the order of succession; so the planet in
advance is towards the west and that behind further
east.
169. Ma al-buruj wa al^manazll al-shamallyyah
wa al-janQbiyyah. Six of the signs are northern, viz.
Aries, Taurus, Gsmlni, Cancer, Leo
NORTHERN AND and Virgo, because the ecliptic
SOUTHERN SIGNS running through them is north of the
equinoctial; the six others are the
southern signs. With regard to the mansions, fourteen
of them are northern, namely those from Sharatan to
Simak which fall within the northern signs, while the
fourteen from Ghafr to Batn al-hut are southern.
170. Ma al-falak al-mumaththal. The plane of the
ecliptic cuts the spheres of all the planets,describing
a circle in each concentric with the ec-
PAHECLIPTIC liptlc. This is the falak al-munaththal,
assimilated orbit of the planet (the
parecliptlc of Nalllno). It is called assimilated, be-
cause its centre, plane, and divisions are the same as
those of the ecliptic, of which it is a counterpart.
171. Auj al-shams mahuwa. The auj or the sun is
the highest point which it attains in its orbit: the
circumstance that there Is a highest
APOGEE OF SUN point is explained by.the fact that it
does not travel on the circumference
of Its own mumaththal orbit, but rather on the
circumference of another orbit in the same plane but
with a different centre. This is its exoentric orbit
al-falak al-auj. The earth is inside this orbit,
consequently there is one point where it is nearest to
the earth, and another opposite to that, furthest from
the earth. The latter is known as the auj in the Indian
language on account of its height, and in Greek as
efojIyun (apogee) on account of its distance from the
W
f > ^ , „ • y
ij ^-U1 y ,i_ii' I"!* .^-^lil^ 1)^4^= ^-L

^ ' /•' ' ^ * i
P^-' _ % "* , s*
-—<^J ^=>Û '-ji=> '
Jj Lilj. ^ ^ ^-* '-^^■, >—' "i-j ^ ^' jj i
-Lv^' j î1 «r^ lj> ^JlLr41
^-*^L'V,2j j^-Wj yjQjj^lj I j ^J ,
lau* JC L
\^» Uj/ AJI^J^jljjMJ J (jlll
"^r £•£ ^>1 ^V\^sl>r-^ ^ jU.Ll^>Lîl J^-i

171-172
eartli. It Is tlie summit flhlrTOh of tlila eicentrlo
orbit. The nearest point, on the other band, Is celled
In Greek afrijtyun (perigee) and, as the lowest point
of the orbit, la known as al-âdid.^-
Heueeaarll^ there are two-points opposite each
other In this orbit where the distance tram the earth
Is the mean of the greatest and least distancea;^ this
la the burd al-ausat. the mld-dlstance, as may be seen
from the annexed figure.
0
i
V c y
\ xExoentrlo Orbiv/ Exoentr c Orbit
54414 98414
Mumaththal OrblV Mumaththal Orbl
2. mid-distance. 3. mean rate of movement. 4, point

on excentrlo opposite Y.5. sun: e. Its corrected
position. 7. line C-5 produced. A-5. mean argument.
6. Its angle. 9. angle of corrected argument. 6-7.
equation of sun. 10. Its angle.
172. Wasat al-shams ma huwa. The rate of movement
of the sun varies, sometimes It Is quicker and aome-
tlmea slower, but necessarily between
UE1H MOTEMEHT the quick and the slow, there Is a
OF SOU mean rate ascertalnable by measuring
Its progress In relation to time.
This movement takes place on the circumference of the
1 misspelt in US.
8 Those points of the excentrlo to which equal lines
C-2, C'-8 proceed from the centre of the excentrlo and
the centre of the world.
ii J-C-l^- LfelUijJ
^'^'J.^îU-l JjJ^ Jii»J »> ^' J-ijVtu^ 1^j-^3^7"
^__,'JV)>^-\^'o1 ■A—;ÂjiJ 1 Ul. ^■
/,^=tjJ»l >> ^J'
^ -V
uJI
c c=^-
L*^.—^^-•j jji-i^Ljj i_^,,
t)A> >-^»J^ L*A_^-»J M'

172-175
eicentrlo orbit, and that arc thereof 7»hlch extends
from a point In the mumaththal orbit answering to the
beginning of Aries to the sun's position there is known
as the mean movement of the sun wasat al-shams. (4-5 in
figure last page).
173. M5 al-hlssah al-wustct lilshams. The mean
argument of the sun in Ita exoentrlo orbit is its
distance from the apogee,and consequantiy
MEAN ABGUMENT if you subtract the distance between
OF the apogee and the beginning of Aries
from the mean movement of the sun,
there remains the mean argument.
174. Tardll al-shams ma huwa. If the sun is situ-
ated at the apogee or at the perigee, lines drawn to it
from the centie of the world and that
EQUATION OF SUN of the exoentrlc orbit practically
coincide. That is not the case, how-
ever, at any other point of the orbit,for then the two
lines meet at the sun but diverge so that the one reaches
one point of the mumaththal orbit,and the other another,
the arc of the mumaththal between the two is the eouatlcn
of the sun tardll al-shams.Thls is en approximate way of
expressing the equatio* so as to get an idea of it,but
a more accurate way is dependent on the proposition of
Geometry that angles at the centre of a circle are pro-
portionate to the arcs opposite them.Therefore we gen-
erally employ the angles Instead of the arcs,and as the
progress of the sun on the clrcumferenoe of the exoentrlo
orbit is equal in equal times,those angles which subtend
such stages of progress are also equal.It is therefore
the same if we describe the mean motion of the sun as
its distance on the excentrlc orbit from a point opposite
the beginning of Aries,or as the angle at the centre of
that orbit between a line going to Aries .and another to
the sun.Similarly the mean argument is described as the
angle between a line going to the apogee from the centre
of the excentrlc orbit and another to the sun,and the
corrected argument hlsaah al-muqawwemah,as the angle at
the centre of the wnri^ HeTweena lino to~the apogee and
one to the sun.The two arguments being thus understood,
the difference is the equation of the sun.and its angle
is that between lines from the two centres gaining at the an.
175. Fa mlqadir al-parakah fl kurat al-shams kam
hiya.The sun by its mean movement travels every
90
/J/>£/&'X''lj u.—sr"^#-^ I'^gi IL CX-J
1
Û—^l^Sj'JJ'^J'Icr' Z'V^j'i' jl '4 > ^ Ul rLi-'^r
îl (I '"'!l^ ^'u** ~0-^'/,1
^ IS'; i ^ ,T.
.^•u'^TT'^sjrf^cA ^lfJ-.îj'sr-^J,JI-• J/ A
j2^1 jG ôo; J(>.
'■1 ('', ^ '-^

^ ri^, J6v
fV>s^^î^W-Jîsltrs'/l(j'^t^J.ijJ
OC^jy^^ ^Î
L
^ ^— **?.<!£ 'rf's'L}^ ej!^., „ -Itj y(
-<t
P^(v
.xi
i^vi'— 9
(jy >Sj
.iL-r^y W (Jîoi ^
c3 ^
175-177
hours, fifty nine minutes, eight seconds, twenty thirds
in the order of the succession of the signs. When it
has traversed all of these and has arrived back at a
starting point, 365 days, 5 hours and 47 minutes have
elapsed. Such a period is a solar year. The apogee also
moves in the same direction, one degree in every 66
solar years as modern observers have found, but this
differs from the estimate of our predecessors in the
matter.
The ratio of the distance between the centre of
the world and that of the exoentrio orbit to the radius
of the latter Is as 2;60.
176. Ma al-falak al-ma'll. Like the sun the six
planets travel along the ecliptic, but deviate from it
some time a to the north, sometimes to the
INCLINED south, because they revolve in planes which
ORBITS are inclined thereto, Just as the ecliptic
is inclined to the equinoctial. Their
orbits therefore are inclined orbits, which have dlffe2>
©nt amounts of inclination, as well as different points
of greatest inclination and of intersection with the
ecliptic.
The centres of the mumaththal orbits and of the
inclined orbits are identical, viz., the centre of the
world,
177. Ma al-jauzahar. These orbits being inclined
to the ecliptic as described, there ere necessarily two
opposite points of intersection, just as
NODES OF in the case of the ecliptic and the
THE PL1NET3 equinoctial. When these have to be
distinguished from each other, the one
from which the planet moves to the north is called the
ascending node, ra'a, and the other point of inter-
section where it moves to the south, dunb, the tail.
Although the nodes or points of intersection or passage
of the planet from north to south on its inclined orbit
are called majaz from the root, jSza, Jawaza, the word
jauzahar is not related: it refers to the moon where
the nodes are of particular interest: it is en
Arabic form of P. gaviz'har. ,1In the M5h Yasht the
moon is invoked by the epithet gaochlthra, cow-faced.^
Haug, Sacred Language of the Parsees, p. 200. In the
case of the moon the nodes are known as the head and
tall of the dragon.
91
9
v. . *
l^lg^sJjie^LÎ j^J- »>lLlt>_^->j^Jliil.
j^"^/:^ Uii^rO!: ^ UjJi\l Ji,

-—}u— ^^w-rt
S&J&SLsr
' -• '« r
L^£=>^ Laa-^-c.? Al»k- (/jlSi! t.i;,! ^'J|
. # i u»
^l^Lfr\^^^*Le>^L-el^7A-^£=al3 'J.d
)l Sj5^' A*-ôc'
A,1 L
^ ^l—iLLuL^îL 1- « Jiygj linij) ^^>l_*> '
>'. ^ -j i 'oU^s v-1 îlfeU.iv^LU-i

177-179
If used without any qualification these expressions
refer to the moon; otherwise the planet must be
specified. The nodes are also called 'tiqdah, icnot,
(P. girlh) end mfljBz, point of crossing so that ra*s
is called mejaz al-shamal, or al-ru<ldah
r al-shamSllyyah
and the dunli, majfiz al-jenub or al- uqdah al-janilblyyeh.
Annexed is a diagram <although it is difficult to
represent the inclination on a flat surface P)
M^mumaththal, I.inclined Orbits. C.

Their common centre, AIB Northern A.Centre of world,B.of da-
half of Inclined orbit. AB North ferent ,C.of eplcycQaJDEapogpo
and South Nodes. ofdafhrentJJjnunBthtal
17S. Falak al-tadwlr ma huwa. An epicycle, tadwlr,
is a small orbit wtilch does not surround the earth, but
is entirely outside it. The planet moves
EPICYCLE on its circumference with the motion
peculiar to It. 151.
179. MS el-falak al-hamil. The centre of the epi-
cycle travels continuously In the direction ef
succession of the signs on the clrcum-
DEFERENT ference of an orbit called the deferent,
hffml1. which is in the plane of the
Inclined orbit, but like the excentrlc, has a different
centre from the centre of the world.
< „
1 }\> Ll'ji
Jj'j lJI^'-A-J1 jfe-fJ'
e- __.
JT
•i;
>
^k/jui)uir
^ff
*)s^lc-_J 5 JLJ I
f;.. :^' ,
180-181
180. Ma al-falak al-inuraddll 1 lima sir. If the
centre of the epicycle traversed equal arcs of the de-
ferent in equal times, then the mean
THE EQUANT rate of the progress of the planet would
be on the deferent, and the angles
opposite these arcs would also be equal; the angles of
the arcs, however, traversed by the centre of the
epicycle in equal times are
not equal, but are so at a
point as far from the centre
of the deferent as that Is
from the centre of the world.
This point is the centre of
equal progress, the equant,
and Is the same for Venus
and the three superior
planets. All three points are
in the same straight line. It
is necessary to regard this
point as the centre of an
orbit like the deferent, and
to calculate the progress of
the planet on Its circum-
ference from the position pf
the centre of the epicycle,
which may be done by lines
drawn to this point (without
drawing the orbitA, Centre of world.
BCD, of deferent,equant and epicycle,
E F, Apogee and Perigee of deferent; E'P1, of equant.
181. MS al-dhlrwah al-wust^ wa'l-mar'lyyah. The
term dhlrwaE, summit, Is used to indicate the apogee
of the epicycle, just as auj Is for
APOGEE OF that of the excentrlc orbit; opposite
EPICYCLE It is the perigee, ijaÎiJ. But there
must be distinguished the dhlrwah al-
mar1lyyah i.e. the summit as seen from the centre of
the world, corresponding to the line drawn from the
centre of the world through the centre of the
epicycle to Its upper part, and the dhlrwah al-wusta
corresponding to a line from the centre of the equant
In the manner indicated In the diagram on next page.
•a ^ ^
S ^ «• w? * 1
s j> T
-- , *. - ^
jjjll jJI
' ", ^ " ■' v ' *' V'
JjU
^»>Jaii'jL-c-L«i
* * 11_—5J»-• V* lA"* {,
^T'
J-^>v-
(\ / 0!>=-î|^V:>.;
'«-»JA_J
182-183
A, Centre of world.
B, Centre of deferent.
C, Centre of equant.
D, Centre of epicycle.
E, Apogee of deferent.
F, Perigee of deferent.
C, Apogee of epicycle
from centre of world.
H, from centre of equant.
102. Waaat al-kawkab mShuwa. The mean rate of

progress of a planet is the distance of the centre of
the epicycle from a point on the equant
MEAN BATE opposite the beginning of Aries. The
OF PLANET measure of the distance is the angle at
the centre of this orbit formed by a
line to the beginning of Aries and another to the
centre of the epicycle,
183. Ma al-khasgah al-wust^ wa'l-muâddalah. The
distance of a pTanetOn the orbit of the epicycle
from the dhirwah al-wusti is known as
MEAN AND the khassah al-wuat5, argumentum
TRUE ANOMALY medium, mean anomaly, and that from
the dhirwah al-mar'iyyah as the
khaggah al-muraddalah, argumentum verum, true anomaly,
while the difference between the two khEggah is
called the tardil al-khaggah al-Qla,1 equatio
argument!. The measure of the two last is the angle
at the centre of the epicycle between the lines pro-2
ceeding to the two dhirwsh, equation of the centre,
In Al-Battani, tis9?cih, portion, but as Nalllno ob-
serves II, 329, for the most part other astronomers
call this portion the proper motion, khSggah, of the
lanet.
The motion in longitude of a planet is that of the
centre of the epicycle on the deferent; its movement
on the circumference of the epicycle is anomaly.
V^ ' 1i • - ^~TT77—
Â' ^-AljU
Jjsi^gSy.
lUlljfcsJU
J£ . ' ,
0 w ^ ^V * -*
t A>=yj^
184
184. MB al-tul al-auaat iiB'l-muraddal. Mean longi-
tude la the alze of the angle bounded by two lines,the
one proceeding fiom tlie centre ef
MRAK AND the eguant to Its apogee,and the
CORRECTED LONGITUDE other to the centre of the epi-
cycle. Corrected longitude, on
the other hand, Is the size of the angle between lines,
the one proceeding from the centre of the world to the
apogee of the equant and the other to the centre of
the epicycle. The difference between these two angles
Is the size of the angle formed at the centre of the
epicycle by the two lines In question; sometimes It Is
called the longitude of the centre.
K'
A. Centre of world, B. of deferent, C. of equant, D. of

epicycle. E. apogee, E. perigee of deferent. G. true,
H. mean apogee of epicycle. K. planet. G'H' K', continued
to ecliptic, Eo. G H, equation of centre, 1, the cor-
responding angle. G K, true, H K mean anomaly, S, angle
of mean, 3, of true longitude. 4, of position of planet
In ecliptic. G K, equation of anomaly.
The other letters refer to paragraph 203.
95
' 0
-W-' Ô^vj^-J ^ O A)^ tJjj il ,\ ^ 1
^1 ^ri J^r^^^c>oôUi!
% > ' * •
? J U»Jy6 Wjl^' J
.,^2 2l 'U'-> ' 1 ^ ' j^-r*
, H? V - ^^''xIAJJ-mU
U-,.
^/ Tli'f
r.
L, iu\u
ar t
OoUk.)
_5 t-r
■V/- V j/-
14^
^V"
^''IxVX
^ ^>X ^ ' 4'4-J
L ^<î\
184a-187
184a. Ma tardll al-falasah al-thanlyyah. The
second correction of the arguaent, the equation of the
anomaly. Is the size of the angle at
EQUATION OF the centre of the world, which Is
THE ANOMALY formed hy lines proceeding thence to
the centre of the epicycle and the
planet respectively.
185. Ma taqwlm al-kawliab. This is the point of
the mumaththal orhlt which a line reaches drawn from
the centre of the world through the
TRUE POSITION hody of the planet. This Is Its true
OF PLANET position in which It Is seen among
the stars.
186. Half aflah al-camar. The following are the
various orbits of the moon:- the mumaththal or
parecllptlc, the Inclined orbit associated
ORBITS OF with It, and the exoentric or deferent
THE MOON which carries the epicycle, on the circum-
ference of which the moon Itself revolves.
187. Kalf al-haralat fl buratlhl wa maqadlrha.
The two poles of the moon's Inclined orbit are always
MOTIONS OF the succession of the signs round the
TEE MOON poles of the mumaththal orbit; they thus
move the ascending and descending nodes
3' every day In that direction.
The moon itself revolves on the circumference of
its epicycle; as soon as it begins to move towards the
west from the summit thereof It travels contrary to
succession every day 13° 14', while the centre of the
epicycle turns in the order of succession on the cir-
cumference of the deferent every day 84° 23'; this Is
twice as much as the moon be come a distant from the sun
In a day, and therefore the movement of the centre of
the epicycle is spoken of as the 'double distance'.
Then the centre of the deferent Is always turning
In the contrary direction to succession of the signs;
Its apogee moves back 11° 9' every day,
Moreover the dhlrwah al-mar'iyyah of the epicycle
Is always opposite a point, the distance of which from
1
^^ jjU'
ji^cj' zji ^ ■-&ijy-f—Ilia)
'""' u;,u ' i/oW>^f
N—' ■' <«!. ' ■" -*' ' V
/ >V .- I • >^<
*>■) >^£j- y ^^ ês^J
^ -?^ ^ J&'pv^ '-1^^ '
J 'L-^J^ ■* ' *' ' '■' ' ^j/ ' ' '* ^K \\
Ol 'jÛ- L jlj- U.,>=^> Sf-i ^jtAîlû^y-i.
j- rrci
ijS >^-,
107-188
the centre of the
world towards the
perigee of the de-
ferent Is the same
as the distance be-
tween the centre of
the deferent and the
centre of the world.
This distance
Is to the radius of
A, centre of universe and of
Inclined orbit, 7. B, centre the deferent as
of deferent; BC, olrole on
which It moves. C, point 12^ : 60, while the
opposite the apogee of the
epicycle, 0. BE, diameter of radius of the epi-
epicycle opposite C.
OH, 12^; HI, 5t: GJ, 60. cycle la 5^ : 60.
G H I J
IBS. Fa half hadhlhi al-ahwal w&'l-maqadlr fl'l-

kawSklh. All the planets are constantly revolving on
the clrcunferenee of their epl-
THESE COMDITIONS cycles; beginning from their
IK THE PLAKETS sumnlts they travel towards the
east In the direction of suocesalon,
and therefore in the opposite direction to the noon,
which travels westward and contrary to succession from
its summlt.
The dally movement of the planets on their epi-
cycles are as follows:- Saturn, 57', Jupiter, 54',
Mars, 28', Yenus, 37", Mercury, 3° 6'; it lie the
eastward movement of the centres of the epicycles
<J/
oOA
>w <jU 4/ ^ _
il /<
' ■fc/j^' ifl 5V, -^1
<21
U-li ^
u-
JJ
O t^3
^ *3 J^j^LAr'VJN1^ ^1
1^.—i C\) *~*Sj 1VJ ^1 ^-iv
• A_tJ>
188-189
■themselves In their laean movement relative to the
centre of the equant is for Saturn dally 2', Jupiter,
5', Mars 31*, Venus, as much as the sun, 59* and
Mercury twice as much, viz:- . Kereover, the dis-
tance of the centre of the equant frem. the centre of
the world taking the radius of the deferent as 60,
Is for Saturn % 3/4, Jupiter 5 1/2, Mara 12, Venus
2 .1/12, and the centre of the deferent is halfway
between these two peints. Again in the same pro-
portion the radius of the epicycle is for Saturn,
6 1/2, Jupiter, 11 1/2, Mars, 39 1/2, Venus, 43 1/6,
Mercury, 22 i/2.
189. Fakalf yanfasil 'litarid mlnha. Mercury

requires to be separately treated because the centre
of its deferent always turns on the
HOW MERCURY circumference of a small circle,
DIF7ER3 whose radius is equal to the distance
between the centre of the equant and
|the centre of the world. The centre of the equant is
halfway between the centre of the small circle and the
<:entre of the world, and all three are in a straight
!line,so that the distance of the centre of the deferent
' o^ >'-&>-> u^î
tJ—■ ■ JtJi^N.Vj u ^ ÎJ >
o Mf ^ \M '
Jjl^ÔlJ »*—2-; )V • «-^>-'
V^ ' i-I -L^jC^-' Vj
^ AI^JF-J 5-^jy L>) 5l>.'J^>1
^ ' >—***>^1^*7 J ^v-*—'^',11 i; iK_juat^ 'j*.JJZJ~£

9
* ** 9 ' ' ' f ^"
' j^Tvîy ^ ^jl—lutp ' 's3!-'
9
. pT - ' '
^rr^W 4^^^
189
from the centre of the world is not uniform, the
greatest distance being to the least as 9 1/2: 3 1/6.
As the centre of the deferent turns on this circle, its
apogee moves In the reverse direction to succession of
the signs daily as much as the movement of the sun,
59*. From this it follows that the centre of Mercury's
epicycle and that apogee meet twice every year, just
as the moon's epicycle-centre and the apogee of its
deferent meet twice a month. Also from the amount of
the movement it becomes necessary that the epicycle-
centres of Mercury end Venus are always with the sun on
the seme diameter of the world, whence it follows that
they are combust on the summits of their direct
courses as well as on the lowest points of their
retrograde courses. The superior planets are only
combust when on the summits of their epicycles,
because the centres of these move more slowly than the
sun, remain behind it, and are only beside it when the
planets have arrived at the summits. The diagram shows
the orbit of Mercury.
A- centre of
universe. B of the
equant. C of the
small circle on
which the centre of
the deferent travels
D the greatest
distance of the
centre of the
deferent fran the
centre of the uni-
verse, E the
deferent. F the
inclined orbit. G-
the epicycle. The
Copyist's lettering
must be neglected.
>iL^>
* U# V- ^ '
#
b3^ ^j.'
JÎJo^ ^ *^\J>-o.LciJlvf'
IvCU ^ i jWl^. ^JL'
êJ'' >!
'^ ^^-^''-JJ^J
190
190. Fa fi kan tatlmm adwar hadhlhl al-lêrekat.,
It has already teen mentioned thai the sun teKes
days all but the 1/111 part of a day
REVOLUTION OF to traverse the whole zodiac. That
THE PLANETS is the solar year, and it is by it
that other complete revolutions are
measured. The movements of the planets are more
complex, being compounded of that on the circumference
of the epicycle, and that on the deferent, accordingly
there are two kinds of revolution to consider. As
regards that on the epicycle the complete revolution
in the case of Saturn occupies a solar year and twelve
days; of Jupiter, a year, a month and three days; of
Mars, two years, a month and eighteen days; af Venus,
a year, seven months and five days; of Mercury, three
months and twenty-four days; and of the moon, twenty-
seven days, thirteen hours and eighteen minutes.
The revolution of the epicycle on the deferent,
on the other hand, throughout the whole zodiac takes in
the case of Saturn twenty-nine years, four months and
eleven days; of Jupiter, eleven years, ten months and
four days; of Mars, a year, ten months and seventeen
days; of Venus and Mercury, each a solar year; and of
the moon, twenty-seven days, seven hours and forty-
three minutes. The nodes of the moon make a complete
revolution in eighteen years,seven months and nine days^
100
^ Lilsg.^
rJJjL
JJ—/"-' jcli. ^LL V J.«

•* •' I ** * •
^tSjCjii.. ^ -^j—*<*\
^V-^g^Jlc-j XL- Ij- « - Vyi-V/—-^C~, ■*-—

A ,>
_l.Ui_S\£ll-^_I. KjlJ*
190-192
while each of the fixed stars and the apogees of the
planets take according to the calculations of our
ancestors thlrty-alx thousand years, hut to those of
our own time twenty-three thousand seven hundred and
sixty years (viz, 1° In 66 years).
191, Fa ma harakat al-falak, Theon of Alexandria
discussed the movement of the orhlt^ which he derived
from those masters of the horoscope, the
TREPIDATION astrologers of Babylon of ancient times,
OF SPHERE [who were regarded 1by the people gener-
ally as sorcerers.] ' They wore of
opinion that the orbit (the 8"tl1 sphere) moved eight
degrees In the direction of the slgna at the rate of
one degree In 80 solar years, and then as much In the
reverse direction; [so that multiplying 8 by 80 gives
640 years forp the onward movement and 1280 for that and
the return.] When the movement Is In the direction of
the signs, Iqbal,that of all the stars end planets Is
accelerated, and In calculating their positions, It Is
necessary to add this amount, while similarly, when in
the opposite direction, Idbar, all move more slowly and
the amhunt of this movement must be deducted. Whether
these statements are true or false It has not been
possible for any observer to devote the time necessary
for Investigating them.2
192. Pakalf rard al-qamar. The Inclination to the
ecliptic of the inclined orbit of the moon Is constant;
Its maximum is 5° north and an equal
LATITUDE OF amount south. This is the greatest
THE MOON latitude of the moon; the epicycle Is
hot affected thereby, because Its plane
Is in the same plane as the Inclined orbit. As the
ascending and descending nodes move In the direction
contrary to the signs, the greatest amount of latitude
or Indeed any latitude which may be determined Is not
at one point therein, as Is the case with the declinat-
ion of the sun, which Is constant at every point of Its
course, Its maximum declination belngâlways at the
first points of Capricorn and Cancer.
p Wiedemenn LXIV, 207,

^ Apparently Al-Biriinl shares Al-Battanl's view of the
falsity of the trepidation theory.
y4^ UaJ.VV . Uf I i Ll-itli' —> Lff'^lv_^-U«^=>—y ^JjL'
, ) A^=Aj.! Vujj^-A^ J^jjkl^ | LJ
■^tk
\ 15 U^
£2*-}^ Û^l^W>^LJ^ki=ûJkV>Lj ji
^ ^lAIÎ^vJb^JboL^l^ t*'llLj3<))c-li^k_I>JL~>L*^ U.
—j»-\ ^
c_ _ * t V * 4 ^ »'*'
(f , « ' « '
_jl«i^L— i— t// '-'ll >3
J
jU=^* 7^-Ad3^-rTAJ
6
*>^>3 J1Î^ ALa^ls^J 1
i
' '^- ■ » . . .,1 > 1'-
193.
193. Fa Kalf ^rud al-Kawaklb al-ulwlyyah. Each
of the three superior planets has an inclined orbit,
the amount of the Inclination of
LATITUDE OF THE which is constant: their apogees
SUPERIOR PLANETS are in the northern halves of the
orbits. The planes of the epi-
cycles, however, are not in the same plane as the in-
clined orbits, as is the case with the moon, but in one
inclined thereto, in such a way that the perigee of the
epicycle is always inclined in the same direction as
the inclined orbit is from the ecliptic, that is to say,
that if the place which the epicycle-centre occupies in
the inclined orbit is north of the ecliptic, then the
epicycle-perigee is also north, and if south, then
south. This inclination of the epicycle is in the
diameter which passes from the summit to the perigee,
and this for purposes of definition is called the first
diameter, while that diameter which is perpendicular to
it is called the second- Now this second diameter is
always parallel to the plane of the ecliptic. So it is
obvious that when the centre of the epicycle arrives at
one of the nodes of the inclined orbit, the plane of the
epicycle coincides with that of the ecliptic, and the
first diameter comes into that plane; then when the
centre of the epicycle passes beyond the node, the
first diameter begins to incline in the oi.posite dir-
ection and arrives at the maximum inclination at a
point midway between the two nodes, there where the ex-
treme inclination of the inclined orbit is also situat-
ed. So it results from what we have said that the
superior planets have two divergences from the ecliptic,
one due to the inclined orbit colled the first or
mean, dependent on relation to points of the ecliptic,
and a second, due to the epicycle and dependent on dis-
tance from the sun-
108
^ f
^.LÂalJ^trû;,uj$
* j '* * *
J%3
V-^» ^^j^l-j-A-Hjjt^j_ri'—i—♦PVJU^Ô'
ij^ ^bV^k<i^jLi5 >. '~.-j<*> 11^ L „l t
j' J-.U 1 \jaj ll C
^ iÂiu.^ûi uôC
^=yj f-Vf'
—"Â*^ l^1 k»\ U>/-i>, <)_jil »_S= '—^'
^—V-^'5 ^ ^ ^ '-v^J
194
194. Fa Kalf ^"arcl al-Kawkabaln al-sufllyyaln. In
the case of both of the inferior planets the Inclln-
ation of the Inclined orbit is not
LATITUDE OF constant but moves from one extreme in
LOWER PLANETS the north to a similar amount in the
south, this movement occupying a solar
year- This is called the latitude of the excentric
orbit. Thus there occur in the epicycle two lati-
tudes one dependent on the movement of the first diam-
eter, called the latitude of the epicycle, and the
other dependent on that rof the second diameter, called
the deflected latitude ard al-warab or al-iltiwa*.
With regard to the latitude of the excentric orbit,

if the centre of the epicycle is situated in one of
the nodes of the inclined orbit, the plane of the lat-
ter la coincident with that of the ecliptic, while if
it moves into one of the halves of the inclined orbit,
that half begins to Incline in the case of Venus to
the north and of liercury to the south, and reaches its
extreme point with the arrival of the centre of the
epicycle at half-way between the nodes, i.e. at the
apogee and perigee.
With regard to the latitude of the epicycle depend-

ent on the first diameter, when the centre of the epi-
cycle is at the apogee its summit in the case of Venus
begins to move towards the north, and of Mercury to-
wards the south, while if it is at the perigee the con-
verse is the case.
103
^S^kyy —t^-'î^' iltj
Ji_^jr"j^\^^^\^^ty^jj —tL*^' i-Ljj» >i^j^lj Uu^ Jj
»_>;-> j. tJt 4 £-J

»/ « .- , . » >' " ' -> ,• f*. -- i
" J jV Ij_]a^\ (♦j^ ■,u>^ >>^j^>cj\c.y
I Aj^J»j~jj>i >j6s^rÂ_^^
• ^
vi'
i,*' *' 5* u. -^ " '-
t>—l^*JJll'—j*»\^Vjilfcc/=»Jo^%JkJsV'tjlf
£ O^^^jLUi-ipj—->.^-^^^—41)13S-1'
194-195
The deflected latitude dependent on the second
diameter begins with the arrival of the centre of the
epicycle at a node of the inclined orbit, when it moves
into that half in which is the apogee of the excentrlc
orbit, the eastern side inclines in the case of Venus
to the north and of Mercury to the south, and the west-
ern side in the opposite direction* On the other hand
if the centre of the epicycle moves from a node into that
half in which is the perigee of the excentrlo orbit,
the eastern side inclines in the case of Venus to the
south and of Mercury to the north. The inclination
continues to increase until the centre of the epicycle
reaches the apogee or perigee of the eicentrlc.
The latitude of the epicycle and the deflected
latitude are continuous from beginning to end, and the
result of our observations is that the centre of the
epicycle of Venus is always to the north of the eclip-
tic, and that of Mercury to the south.
195. Aujat al-Kawaklb aln hlya. The movement of
the apogees of the planets in the direction of suc-
cession of the si gna ttirkaa 1 t, impossible
APOGEES OF to specify their position except for a
PLAUETS definite date, although the movement Is
so slow that it takes 66 years to trav-
erse one degree. At the present time, 420 A.H.,!'their
situations in comparison with the results obtained by
ITuhammad bin Jablr al-Battfinl are as follows:-
Sun in Gemini 24° 32*
Saturn in Sagittarius 6° 48*
Jupiter in Virgo 16° 43T
Mars in Leo 8° 33*
Venus in Gemini 24° 39*
Mercury in Libra 23° 43,2
1 There are two other paragraphs in wh. the date of
this
2 work is mentioned viz. 321 and 460.
The
1 above figures correspond with those in AO', AB,
AB ,except 0that Saturn has 60.46* as has AO,corrected on
margin to 6 43» - Nallino 1.239,who translates this para-
graph from AP,points out that 1the difference from Al-
Battanl's list should be 2° IS ,which requirement is
satisfied by0 the , above except for Saturn and Venus whLch
should be 24 '29 (and is so in PP). The confusion of 3
and 6"^^ and 20 and 30â3 been referred to in 118.
i ^rîr -Ol-^^ ^-eJ—^J
1
^z^—«^li' £X-Jî^ i >J 1-Jli J>
V*—:i^fjir**^ x 0
^ . *'
l^y] L-'ls Vi^ iiA^la-^ySsa^l'

^ lÛ\v ^Jjjl"jSs*J^»j»^ j-4«Yl»
i»io^5^j^Ûy ljL%*^V*Q_jL)t>J J >5^ 5 AÔitl-o sjw

I*" ' ^^ ^
-^Jt^j.^ ^-J ^-jVj

196-197
196. Jauzaharat al-Kawalcib aln hlya■ The nodes of
the planets according to the observations of the west-
ern peoples (the Greeks of Rum?] move In
J70DES OF the direction of the signs at a rate
THE PLANETS equal to that of the apogees and the
fixed stars. This is due to the olr-
ourastanoe that the movement of the ecliptic orbit Is
towards the oast as Is that of all the orbits. The
ascending node of Saturn, the distance of which from
the apogee Is 80°, Is at the present time In 26° 43'
of Aquarius, that of Jupiter, 70° from Its apogee In
26° 43' of Scorplus.
Those of Mars, Venus and Mercury, each 90° from
their apogees, are respectively in 8° 33* of Scorplus,
24° 29* of Virgo and 23° 43' of Capricorn. But the
Ideas of the Hindus [and Persians] as to this matter
are that their movements are different from each other
and contrary to succession like the nodes of the moon
as to which there la no conflict; according to their
Ideas, In our time the ascending node of Saturn Is at
23° 13' of Gemini, of Jupiter at 12° 1' of Cancer, of
Mars at 21° 55' of.Aries, of Venus at 29° 48' of
Taurus, of Mercury at 21° 11' of Aries. Hi conse-
quence of the rapid movement at the ascending node of
the moon It Is Impossible to determine Its exact place
without calculation.
197. MS al-buht. This Is a Hindu word for the ..

daily progress of a planet; they pronounce It bhuktl.
Our associates always apply it to the
DAILY MOTION corrected rate, but the Hindus dls-
01 PLANET tlngulsh between the mean and corrected
rates, (bhuktl mlyEna and bhuktl taqwim1].2
1 PL, PP have bhutkl for bhuktl.Bhaktl, faith, devo-

tion; enjoyment ac. to Burgess, Sllrya SlddhSnta 1.27.
2
bhuktl madhyama and aphufa. India II, 195.
A-f») I j
■ . • 1
ZT ^ / »/ . k" ^
^•Ui ^=j> ^-îSJ -' î.

' 5 l/> i- '
4o.vt«j > JIZ^j <t>jy^_/-^ J.<
f ^xî^lJ='j^KL-V CtU ? ^s?
^ÛLLy ^ ,^1
> Wjt' ^
ll^wi
9
, ^ . > '*'' •' , 7j"
U\_5 iXaJ ^ Ij; Lff3 ^ Ub -iak^l

197-199
VTe have already discussed the mean progress, 182, but
It Is impossible to determine the corrected rate, there
being no definite limits In which to estimate It, for
sometimes the movement is rapid and the buht high, and
sometimes slow, and the buht low, and again It ceases
entirely when there Is no buht or retrogrades when the
buht becomes a minus quantity.
198. MS al-buht al-muraddal. This Is the dlffterenoe
between the flallv prngTuaa nf the sun and moon or of
two planets moving In the same
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN direction but at different
RATES OF TWO PLANETS rates. Whenever you desire to
know the time of meeting of two
objects travelling in the same direction, one of which
is quicker than the other, you cannot arrive at a solu-
tion without knowing this difference, because the
changing distance between them is proportionate to It.
The difference is also called hlssat al-maslr (argumentum
motus) and by the Hindus bhuktântara.i Sometimes In
place of the foregoing it is neuessary to employ the sum
of the two rates of movement, when the planets are
moving in opposite directions one of them being on the
direct and the other on the retrograde path; this is
called by the Hindus bhuktl log , combined rate' - (but
we have no special name for it'Tlr
199. Maqaagt.3 Are numbers (of corrected anomaly)
applied to a planet at all points of its exoentrlo orbit,
such that when its distance from the
A TRUE ANOMALY apogee of the epicycle is equal to the
number, the planet stops and makes no
progress in the zodiac. If the maqSm is less than six
signs, it is called [the first maqam, after which the „
planet becomes retrograde, but if more than six signs,r
the second maqam after which it enters on the direct
path. Whenever either of these stations Is known It Is
only necessary to subtract from 360° to find the other.
^2 India II 195.
The paragraph refers to Ptolemy's Tables,Almagest,Bk.
III.Cap.8, In which are given these distances at the
various positions of the epicycle on the deferent, of.
also Nalllno II 138-9. The Diet. Sol. Terms p. 1228,says
Maqam has two meanings 1. the place of the station on
the epicycle (as here), and 2. the stoppage Itself for
which
3 iqamah is preferable (as often in the Tafhlm).
Line dropped in MS.
106
<* f t, ^ * « t
^^ ^ ^ * iV V% .' **
=>
m**j^4^>r
f
' * ^=^' ^ * t3>^\«J!fl^^
*V *
Ufd^r' -£■* iÂS-î/^^
U)l, I ^ k U11_) e>»l» *ji
L-J'Jij^.'
y*^>: IU)»
■— 4
>» ■» a_«=-Û3^ ^ •>) ir^J4>j U-4^|»
5- '* i»
f' 55 ,* (y t *
v' ' 1 to > \ ^ / .. ^ • w y
J
»., __ jk U C f LJ^)l^)l3>)k£^J^^JL^LJJ,
^^^wâ^âCjiu^vvc^..
S00-S01
200. Rlbatat. This Is another name for these stop-
pi ng- place s""5ut among our predecessors there were those
who considered the above described conditions
BANDS to be apparent not actual. As they knew that
the movements of the planets were related to
the movement of the sun, they Imagined that the planets
were suspended to the sun by connecting bands rlbatat.1
which were sometimes slack so as to allow of movemerTt
when near the sun, and sometimes taut, when the planets
were distant from the sun so as to prevent movement and
cause retrogression. This Is a foolish idea to which no
attention should be paid, since there is no advantage
to be derived nor results obtainable from it.
201. Nlt&qat.2 Zones or sectors of the orbits are
of tv/o kinds, those of the deferent and those of the
epicycle. The first are formed
SECTORS OF THE ORBITS by two lines which divide the
orbit Into four
parts; one of these
lines connects the
apsides where the
rate of movement is
/ / 1 4 \\ at its maximum in-
B \ equality, being slow-
e! I est at the apogee
r A j and quickest at the
perigee: at these
\ \ 2 3 / / points there is no
equation and the mean
/ and corrected posi-
tions of the planet
are equal. The other
line Is at right
angles to this and
A centre of universe. B of passes through the
the deferent. C apogee and D centre of the world;
perigee of deferent. E points at its ends the
of maximum equation and mean equation is at its
movement. 1-4 ls"t to 4™ maximum and the rate
niâqs of deferent. of movement the mean rate.
1 In addition to the original meaning of halters,ribstat
were fortified frontier stationsâfterwards convents,in
Morocco in which murSbltun,Marabouts, lived,whence Almora-
vides.Occasionally also'applied to lunar stations. Cbrcnp. 371.
^ Nijaq means both ceinture and enceinte.See Nan p.GS.who
supposes this expression to be used Ihr the Gist time ^ Bar-
He braeus.
107
^—'^JU ^ L-fe^" —J lîij- n—jj lijL L-%^1 L
•■ ^ u ^ * *
jti-31' fj^.j
• ^ 'S ' •.
^ J VÂLlj^rj i_ ai,
1
^1 j^3 UiJjlu< ^
tL
r« ^='^1
r-
w\ JS-^LjiLC
j=iV1
r
^Vs^lv
&
Uj .IU
4
ac. _^-I-l i ^rAl Ct
^La\iy» AV-Uj xIÔkLl.

!"' ^ ^ u ^ -''
'jh^-j J ,v^.
201
Of these four nlâqs the first extends from the
apogee In the order of succession to the point of
maximum equation, the second as far as the perigee, the
third from that point to that of maximum equation and
the fourth to the apogee as in the figure.
As to the extent of these areas if regard he had
to the centre of the deferent, then the first begins at
the epogee, and the others at intervals of 90°; If on
the other hand frem the mid-dlstanc0^171, which they
call the unequal centre, then the beginnings of the
nltaqs are shown In the table.
Nltaqs 1st 2nd 3rd 4 th

o » o * o » o '
Sun 91 59 180 268 01
Saturn 96 31 180 263 29
Jupiter 95 15 180 264 45
Mars 101 25 180 258 35
Venus 91 59 180 268 01
Mercury 93 02 180 266 58
Moon • 95 01 180 • 264 59
The second kind of nlâq la that which divides

the eploycle^ Into four parts also In this case by
1
Saturn In MS. has 268 for 263.
Venus In MS. has 263 for 268.
Mercury In MS. has 264.59 for 266,58.
The figures under the 2nd and 4th nllaqs should add to
360°.
108
1
i liVj *
^ £^ oj>^> t>ii>_) I>
JiVi 1>* <3^=* (^ ^^ ^jL-^V^Vjfc/^LA u

*r /
J]UllA> /rAdb^^Js-^65.^.^
—V ' ', • .. 5 ^
v/=A\JJ ^=^tj 4=*> ^>Lr* L-AîL^
JJJ^jC—SlsiJa^/i-- , Ji^jiJi^jk^l^-
'"^l
... _ -^1 '^WWST
, v y——,-r •;, a ^
&->> v>>">! &> ^li'^1 ^
) * —aj iJ, \_^ , Y : a ^
iufc. H !
—iuI \ ♦*> 1 *
S H _-A3 ^ j "V j &
1
Ji A —*J ] U j If K I
1
-» —<j k, U. « ^ gjLtffc)!
^ j »"--> K —«A • ^ V •* Sjij-tr
i ALj. « i i ^ ot T ^ •'ovi
201
three lines one of which passes from the centre of the
deferent through the apsides of the epicycle, and two
others from the same point which are tangents to the
epicycle. The conditions as to equation and movement
are the same at the apsides of the epicycle as In those
of the deferent, and the place of contact Is anew the
point of, maximum equation. These four sectors are
therefore ni^Sqfit; the first being at the upper apsis,
on the side of the
direction of
movement of the
planets proper in
1 1 B 4 ] [ 4' B 1* the order of
succession of the
V 3 3J 2'yj signs, and In that
V^ of the moon con-
trary thereto.
The others follow
In the order de-
scribed for the
deferent as
represented In the
figure. The extent
of these zones If
the tangents are
drawn from the
centre of the
'a 'A world or that of
the equant are
A centre of deferent. B of epi- different In amount,
cycle. 1-4 nltSqa of fpl- but If drawn from
cycle of planets. 1'-4* iat_4tn the centre of
of moon. the deferent
C. Points reached by tengents
from centre of deferent.
^J^LsU'c.
Jv*UJ/^_> Lji-S 1 Ul
^ ^ ^ Ui *'
^>-—^.3 ''Lt—i' • jjJ\\JA_3>—»-. i—P^Jr* J <V' >
»j J>i 1
jij -iU
3>
v^./
^ ^ 0 ~ ^
1
| —xLii-^ôv—-J^ ^^Lj—
E01-E0E
they do not depart from the figures In the acoompanying
table- When these are compared with the argument
of the planet it becomes obYlous in which quadrant it
is.
Nltaqs 1st End 3rd 4th

o ♦ 0 » 0 * o T
Moon • 103 09 180 356 61
Saturn • 96 13 lao • S63 47
Jupiter - 101 03 160 • 258 57
Mars - 131 09 180 - sse 51
Yenus 135 59 160 - 224 01
Mercury , IIS 0E 180 , 247 58
SOS. Ma al~s5rid wa al-hlblt. The expressions as-

cending and descending are used in various ways;. (1)
A planet ascends in the north to the
ASCENDING AND limit of its latitude, then it de-
DBSCENDIKG scends in the north when Its latitude
begins to diminish. When it passes be-
yond the node and gets into the southern half of its
inclined orbit, as its latitude increases, it descends
in the south until it reaches its extreme point, after
which the latitude begins to diminish as it ascends in
the south.
(S) A second use is from the point of view of the
earth, a planet being described as descending when in
the first and second nl^Sq3,and ascending in the third
and fourth. (3) Some referring to the mid-distance call
it descending whan in the second and third, and ascend-
ing when in the first and fourth sectors. (4) Again,
a planet is said to be ascending when between the first
point of Capricorn and the last of Gemini, and descending
1 Note 116. has Moon 13-09 for 103-09,
110
1 i
i—u*
J»V Nv
-fl
c..
^jl V-4
I « —«»| jc , « .
r* t' «■ ♦ «
-1
y n —fii 7~ w sr «
T rj V —" % «
1 If j\) V «
tL « — —oJ i Y ^lilV
1
•jJi'wijsu'
t} _ * ^. S'
(^t^) 1 5I. jlU ^ >—
\JJ\ *J rf-afijiW i\JitJ' Ljjjt
—V >-'t/'^ 5 ^ ^ jk£=aU_?
202-203
when between the flret point oT Cancer and the last of
Sagittarius. (5) Finally when described from the point
of view of the meridian as ascending when in the east
and descending when in the west.
203. Ma al-ziyadah wa'l-nuqsfiji. Increase and De-
crease are of two kinds,one with reference to places
on the deferent and epicycleând the
INCREASE AND other to situation relative to the hor-
DECREASE izon. Of the former there are various
sorts. 1. Increase of rate of movement,
when the planetr moves quicker than its mean rate* this
Is called 2g id f^l-maslr; when slower, naals_fV_l-
masir. 2. Increase in number.12The equations of the
planets are set down in tables opposite numbers in
two {Tertlcal} rows,one of which continues to Increase
up to six signs,and the4 other continues to decrease
from the twelfth sign. VThen you wish to introduce an
argument number of a planet into these two rows with
the object of ascertaining theT equation,if it falls in
the first row,it is called za id fl,l-radad,and in the
second ngqis fi'l-^dad.
3. Increase in equation. If the equation is in-
creased by the addition of the portion,hijâh,belonging
to it,it is said to_be 25'id fi'1-tardli.this will be in
the 1st and 3rd nltaqs,but if diminished in the others.®
^■Raiânah must have found this kind of Increase as well
as
2 3 and 4 inoomprehenslble without further explanation.
Tables of equations of planets, such as Ptolemy, Hey-
berg II 436; Ptolemy, Manltlus II 261; Al-Battanl, Nal-
llno II 108.
^Common
4 argument numbers of mean longitude,
When both are read down.^ In A they are read up.
1° 360° The argument numbers are so arranged be-
cause the equation is the same for equal
. distances from the apogee or perigee; e.g.
180 180 135 and 225 have the same equation. The
first column corresponds to the lat and 2nd nlâqSjthe
second to the 3rd and 4th-
^Ptolemy's 3rd column contains the equations calculated
as If the centre of the epicycle were on the equant; the
4th,the difference due to the fact that It is on the de-
ferent ;this difference has to be added in the Ist and
4th nlâqs,above the nodes of the two excentrlos,and de-
ducted in the 2nd and 3rd. See figure in 184. The angle
D'AZ bas to be added to the equation of the centre ADC
above the node to obtain its position on the equant;
DTAZ deducted below. See Itenitius II 413
IjIIt-J Lit j
^ 'iJajLd/»-\'_J-aJI l-.-J
JûLj1 ^Ja, —$Lf ^'i-1 31—1, |
>L«3ai^Ve>]^^L ^ QoU ^JtLoÂi
fc
t ^ . » • *
—'^Lv-31* fl^_^-^ «-- v
^ if I >L»AU j»-.i'*r^»^ v-i|j

^ "'
1
'j i
^ ^g\\i VMIKIL^'I si,

.• ^ / I '' ■ * I .
AI Ji*J ">^ •^_} j-_»'îr Cl A^-La»l.'
4, , " v ' i# '^ ' f '" -
-j li 1 JuA^jjj. jJ^lL*
o'-3*-' '^v V O^'U^WcJA'^1 ^j^*^/^-)

203
4. Increase by calculation. This occurs when the
equation of the anomaly has to be added to the true
longitude of the centre to obtain the true_position of
the planet In the ecliptic; It Is called za'ld fl'l-
hlsab', If It has to be deducted, then nSqts fl'l-hlsab.
■this Increase occurs In the 3rd and 4th nltaqs of Iho
deferent, and Ist and 2nd of the epicycle.1
5. There Is also inorease_and decrease In luminosi-
ty and magnitude, aa'ld fl'l-nur wa't-aizm. due to near-
ness or distance from the earth. Some people refer to
the Increase as dependent on the constant approach to
the earth from the apogee to the perigee of the epi-
cycle, and the decxeaae, nSqls fl'l-nur, to the Increas-
ing distance as the planet moves from the perigee to-
wards the apogee. Others speak of the Increase as being
from the perigee of the deferent as far as the mld-dls-
tance, and the decrease from that towards the apogee;
that Is to say, that the mean Is at the mid-distance,
decreases towards the apogee and Increases towards the
perigee. Consideration compels the view that position
on the epicycle Is chiefly responsible for the differ-
ence, but the custom of astronomers Is to restrict It
to the zones of the deferent. In the case of the moon,
however It Is the distance from the sun which counts,
so from the let to the middle of the month,they speak
of It as being on the Increase.while others use the ex-
pression zS'ld fl'l-nCr for the time when It Is larger
than half' i.e. from the 7th to the 22nd of the month.
6. The other kind of Increase and decrease which
Is referred to the horizon Is that the eastern quarter
between the east horizon and the meridian, and the quar-
ter opposite to It, Its nadir, are spoken of as In ex-
cess, because both day and night respectively are on
the Increase In these, and on the decrease In the remain-
ing quarters.
1 See Manltlus 11.414. The second correction of the
argument (the equation of the anomaly,185) has to be
added to the true longitude of the centre of the epi-
cycle to obtain the true position of the planet when
It Is In the Ist and 2nd nltaqs of the epicycle, de-
ducted when In the Srd and 4th - whatever the position
on the deferent. O'K' ♦ 0' gives K' ■ G'L' - G' gives
ht-
112
^jJl JEÛU ^)L,-^feuiJc,Vlfoui. e>ljl
l3 ,■'. ^ - y1: —
'.*' ' j" .
** t ^ ' ' » *
> ejJjLâti' J>j f^L»_tllj>U
^ (j
^y -rtHJ
—-Z^ UJ A>^- Ot«a<J^£=»\ •Aj\J)\^^l>U
t ' ' ^ ' '
204
204, M5 ayyam al-rala». World-days are those per-
iods in which the planets with their apogees and their
nodes take to make a complete revolution
WORLD-1AY3 (without remainder)!'; and Indeed every
nation has endeavoured to elicit them
with the object of keeping In mind the movements (and
sltuatlonslv of the planets, In accordance with what
their observations have taught them as to their move-
ments, hut the measure which Is best known Is that of
the Hindu kalna. the days of which are called kalpa-
hargan^ and are known to us musllms as Slnd-hind2 days,
but improperly so, for In their language the word Is
Sadhand (Siddhfinta), a name which la given to all their
Important astronomical works, and which means accuracy
without crookedness. According to their books there
are five SiddhSnta, the first called after StlraJ, (the
sun), the second after Tashpasta, the third after
Pullsa, 3the fourth after ROm, and the fifth after
Barflham.
These days are called world-days because the Hindus
believe that two kalpas constitute a nyohthemeron of
BarSham, I.e. nature,4 one being a day and the other a
night. The beginning of such a day Is when the planets
set out from the first point of Aries, on a Sunday,
and when this kalpa Is finished,5 the night kalpa comes
on during which all things which were moving become
quiescent, and so a night and day In the life of BarB-
hem are completed.6 Els life Is a hundred years.
The complete exposition of this question is a very
long matter which we have dealt with In another
place. A table Is annexed In which the number of re-
volutions of the planets In a kalpa are given accord-
ing to Hindu notions, not according to our astronomical
tables. Side by side with these figures, are the data
of those •thousands' which Abu Ma""shar has recorded
from Persian sources.
1 So In PL; A, aharki; PP, har klh; India, I 368.,each

kalpa equal to 4,320,000,000 solar years.
? So in PL. A, Sindhad. PP. Hind u Slnd. India I IBS.
3
4 Surya, Taslshtha, Paullsa, Bomaka, Brahma, I.e.
5 India I 94. "
6 When all are again in conjunction In 0° Aries.
India I 331. 360 times two kalpas making a year.
113
iwtj—ur^ j <_-£=> ^
Lyllj Lifc^v—4-A' » (,-^ CXAJ^LJL
v_/Vi»^'-» -1 -
4Cî uU j^jîv^fUVV^
^_j=^-ojl1 og^'J
■vJ -> S^JLtU u-j-îilk* Jt-JIajVI LÔ >JJ sJ jl, jLii\j4V^-ljJ
^j} —^ ^ wUjj
6Â'
t
204
According to Hindu notions and The Thousands of
Abu Ma'sber
1
Number of days in a kalpa, 1577916450000 1341493240
(days In world-
Days elapsed up to era of year)
Yazdiglrd, June 16 632 AD 7206358063132 1363598
Pevolution of sun.Years in
a kalpa 432000000C 360000'
(years In world-
►lution Of its apogee 480 year)
tr Of moon 57753300000 4812778
of its apogee 488105858 19365
w of its nodes 232311168 19360
« of Saturn 146567298. 12214
it of its apogee 41
« of its nodes 584
« of Jupiter 364226455 30352
« of apogee 855
of nodes 63
it of Mars 2296828522 191402
* of apogee 292
tt of nodes 267
it of Venus 7022389492 505199
* of apogee 653
tt of nodes 893
n of Mercury 17936998984 1494751
« of apogee 832
tt of nodes 521
ft of fixed stars 120000
1 v« India, II, 16.
2
3 The number of years multiplied by 365,258.
A smaller world-year is that of 36000 years, derived
from the assumption that the vernal equinox in conse-
quence of precession is shifted through the whole zodiac
in that period; the 'predecessors',175êstimated a de-
gree in 100 years,Hipparohus in 72,a sign in 2160,and the
whole zodiac in 25930. The Vernal Equinox entered Aries
about 2200 B.C.and Pisces about 100 B.C.Jeremias,Altor-
ientallsche Geisteskultur 1929,p.242. He draws attenticn,
p.303,to the similarity of the Indian and Babylonian
world-years,and believes that these reached India from
the Greeks and that the Greeks had them from Babylon
through Berossus.
Has 14 by mistake. There is a lacuna in this MS.from
paragraph 205 to middle of 209 supplied from ff,36-38 AO*.
jÂL. I 1^1 f
1 —
1 "i sv/ylli^s »»»» 1
prtral'i [ v/roirfli^nr
U ^^ » 1 >—
[ t -i» L-et»->l|
|L|rvv. | a \jw «pr
^ 1
| liri'a 1 ■f-zi/ilfa/i'M
| lin#_ rrrr '
[ irrV^ L —
i] ~ ^1
if ?J>j> 1
11
i| r4r?r_i
-In <» *KJ>- ll ||
!p | •A***
j iriiArîarrl f^'W
nn
i J n^J ■J-^.Ji'^:!
[ a tain] v.f rrîîrj
^1rt U'r>j'^ll
ili'-lf-vsi ^TLJii
r rv f
3 r\
If 4 4 « ' J
205
T
2t5. Hal yu 'raf magadlr airam al-kawaklb. The
diajneter of the moon is known in terras of the radius of
the earth; Ftolemy^ determined this by the
SIZE OF differences of his point of view (parallax)
THE STARS ikhtllaf al-manzar. He also determined
't5e diameter of tiie sun in the same ratio
from eclipses in Book V of the Almagest. The ratios of
the diameter of the planets and fixed stars to that of
the sun Is obvious to the eye. What these are is ex-
plained in the Book of the Manshurat^ and we have record-
ed them in the accompanying table, in accordance with
the opinion and results of Ptolemy since no other has
hitherto eatablisheii itself with us.^-
Sun 1
Moon 1 (at mid-distance)
Saturn 1/18
Jupiter 1/12
Mars 1/20
Venus 1/10
Mercury 1/15
Stars Ist magnitude l/20
2nd " 4/81
« 3rd « 5/109
n« 4th n 1/24
5th 2/55
" 6th " 1/36
1
PP. zlrfikl ta aknOn kasl-ra andar In sukhun va jahd
kardan nayaftlm va nah andlsha kaahldan. Because up to
this time we have not found any other person working at
this topic.
2
of. Nallino, Al-BattanI I 289 and II, XXVI and delete
na in b.
115
1
* "• / ' S S y
\J/J/)Lu~ij*}*
f' LiwJjjl,jU41>Uii!/ î-'jajaJ ,
Irr-"'3 •-P ^ 'jir1 'j11 J>bj'' '*)
jjr'j&j. Lv 'liajLo-i"
-jT^-'U-'
a -Î,
vt'e* L ^11
1 ' t **■ ks'jdj Kj

-rHJlsJoll
■^!
ts-^-trjs'j iy—'t-1'
_>.. J~iJir1> lîrOj^lc^'

i
cJlJJ 1
^r^reHj^' *
Oif i^cA^j | ^j-j U1
206
206, Fa hal kulluha mrflumat 111 qadr ka qutr al-
ârd. The distance of the sun and moen from the centre
of the earth in terms of the
DISTANCE AND SIZE earth*s radius Is also made clear
OF PLANETS In the fifth Book of the Majlstl;
astronomers are agreed that the
furthest distance of any planet is the nearest of that
which is immediately above it, and thus the ratio be-
tween the nearest and furthest distances is known in
the case of each planet.
When one of these distances is known, all are
known, as well as the distance of all stars from the
earth in terms of the earth's radius, their diameters,
and the ratio of their volumes to that of the earth.
The annexed table contains the results1 of Ptolemy, of
the accuracy of which to are assured.
Nearest distance Diameter Volume in
in terms of in terms of terms of volume
radius of earth, 1 dlam. earth,! of earth,!
Moon 33,33' 17* ,44** ,30**
Mercury 64,20* 2* ,09** 14**
Venus 169,46* 17*,49** 1»,,34**
Sun 1161,45* 5,31* 167,20*
Mars 1260,15* 1,08' 1,27*
Jupiter 9169,14* 4,31* 95,14*
Saturn 14881,29* 4,31* 92,08*
Fixed stars 20774,39*
1st Magnitude 4,44* 106,03*
2nd Magnitude 4,40* 101,53.*
3rd Magnitude 4,20' 101,22*
4th Magnitude 3,57' 61,32 *
5th Magnitude 3,25* 41,04*
6th Magnitude 2,18* 13,16*
1 This paragraph Is at the top of 37v.

116
* ^ *• J ^
1^1 ^ îii^-'-^-f ^<p» fUli^Jt^K1 U
►'■i-i-oU^jCtÔjll jjawiliâ>J
"T^sEilFn
*wr»t'O^—'-^J ^'CjjtjbVAj •wi»sAj^j^.:L'j

1
• i •'• U—^-sj»^jyjJ . y
N>J?>—--' '.. TT. " vl S»/
Nw^l gJ^j Jd'io >_;-■ . 
.S'k^ K> ^ < A3—1' A " A\
gu'j ^,. ^V-g^r^ -^L
OVJ *3-~ •>-u LJM J -i i -r^:'^^: AU--^'
1
i^j
. ! Jî'^fclj JjJ. »*->IJ ejX^
^Ju )
st-Ajj-jj llj?" 1* r . vjl •*^5fc.Vj'^ (>''\V
i , » 77 .^7 ^
»sje^'5_.~ii.f>vjJJ *x ^
7 /.■•■ • •■• '• LisÔA,u-,~>t" X
O—X'j3j Uj. ',s-73:> —'
' +f-3l-J l-> f-ala 1.1 I I lili- "^^?3Tj3IrZ .. ^
X" 't-l ** (r ^ ^ LaJt^Jy-J V1 ' :X^
>, v , •,.. ;. S /•
X 7' *■ f ?> ^ ^ v 'w7iLiJj*-*-3-'
206
Nearest dls- Diameter in Volume as com-
tance in para- parasangs as pared with
sangs compared compared with volume of earth
with radius of diameter of 166744242,
earth ,1081, earth 2163, 14'SS" cuhic
19 21w 7 *,11" parasauga.
Moon 36395 639,28' 4168606

Mercury 69416,4»23,, 45,29' 19-96
Venus 183656,2' 3" 642,29' 4353877,26'
Sun 1254638,7'11" 11936,03' 279 01869897,42'
Mars 1363361 2452,07' 241779151,30'
Jupiter 9919443,1' 3" 9880,36' 15879 610039,29'
Saturn 17914241,2'33" 9772,25' 15362702867^9'
Fixed stars 22 974394,06'
1st Magnitude 10241,13' 1768322690^17'
2nd Magnitude 10096,57' 16946773170/57'
3rd Magnitude 9375,45' 1690230003^48'
4th Magnitude 8546,21' 10254770906,37'
5th Magnitude 7464,32' 6847630221,55 *
6th Magnitude 5697,34' 3045861494^9'
This figure which occurs in all the MS3. has appar-

ently dropped an initial five, see 209, p. 121 where it
is given as 5,305,498,589 V5 parasangs. The copyist of
AO has alone noticed the mistake for he has here a note
giving Musi h. Shakir's rule for volume of a sphere
dlam."
2 x 3^/7 x Ve diam.
4 stands in several MSS. in this place. Perhaps the
inltlfil figure in a volume calculated from 45.
f^
L
rF^
H r't rnri?
4
r1
f
y c| i r ,jii>
^ ^ v-v 1 Vl'' 1UV3S
■ M
r v l^f- H 1
| r
ryiwli 41 ? f ly df-^rrî
r11 1/ ^>v
H'W fVIJ'ti ill" HlVr^r
r v ri
^rvr/'p biv 11/ vr ' ^ryi
i: * r i r
~v
*r-
) / rr JjVi
1 ^^wriv ->
SV r~
Vy? CJCI\
^ 4
l»f 3^ Vl/«1«^ ti tb\
f1 r \
i^îp'rri ^y,t
44 r r
Ûl
L^-LfLl
207-200.
207. Kam mlqdar al- ard. Measurements of the atars
can only be made by taking the earth as a unit, just as
we use the cubit or other weights and
SIZE OF THE measures. Now the figures for the earth
EAPTH are as follows:
Diameter 2163 1/3 paraaangs
Circumference 6800 . *
Surface 14712720 ^/4 square "
Volume 166744242 VS cubic «
Consequently to determine the distance of a star from
the earth in paraaangs, all that is necessary is to
multiply its nearest distance by the number of para-
aangs in the radius of the earth, while the comparatiye
dimensions may be translated into paraciangB by using
the above figures, as set down in the table on the pre-
ceding page.
Similarly the dimensions of the ecliptic can be ex-
pressed in paraaangs as in the subjoined
Table of Zodiac Girdle
Diameter 44964005 13/50 paraaangs
Glroumferenoo 141315446 2/3 *w
Length of a sign 11776287 21/80
Length of a degree 392542 9/10 *
Length of a minute 6542 23/60 •
208. Hal ikhtalaf fl miqdar al- ard. It is inevit-
able that there should be controversies"regarding the
dimensions of the earth for It is one
DISPUTES AS TO of those matters which must be based
SIZE OF EARTH on experiment at a distance and on
reports on observations. All nations
have recorded their observations in the measures em-
ployed in their own countries, e.g. the stadium of the
Greeks and the jauzhan (yojana) of the HlnA», When
therefore their books were translated into Arabic,
and the real value of their units was unknown,
'jj i ■'», ii <ujL» j L. ^
I UV
•X :.J V
\ % ^ y^ y/ * l
| tt ,
, 4/>u bj^
| '*' ft > ', y , t* *
■*JJ t—^L-jj11 *jjj j«jlt!ijtjv^wl>uif>jl J
Ju« fcL y ^yj • IsjLfj-^'j ^riii 'j J

1
jjjjw J1 j o) I ^ I
f ^,,. s. /" , ,.*/'/> ■•>.<•'
Vi M — ''
» ' J ' S ^J5

H^HMV
208-209
then the Caliph MIPmQn son or Harun al-Raschld commanded
an investigation to be undertaken anew,1 and with this
object a number of the savants of that time, (such as
Khfilld Marrudl,2 Bt?l-Buhturl3 5the geometrician4 and
b, Êsfi the astrolabe-maker ) were ordered to pro-
ceed to the desert of Sinjfir and take the matter in
hand. They found the value of one degree of a great
circle on the earth to be 56 and 2/3 miles, and multi-
plying this by 360 arrived at 20400 miles for the cir-
cumference of the earth. Each mile is a tklrd of a
parasang or_4000 black cubits; the trade cubit is well
known in ^raq, and is used in Baghdad for rland-survey-
ing; it measures 24 finger-breadths (isba ).^ i have7
investigated the matter in Hindustan by'another nethod
and have found no discrepancy with the figures cited
above,
209, Aqtar a3rranB?ir al-arba^h hal hiya. Is it
■possible to state the dimensions of the four elements
in these terms? The earth with the
DIMENSIONS OF mountains projecting from it like
THE F0UB teeth is solid, and the water sur-
ELEMENTS rounds it occupying the hollows, but
these two elements form the one globe,
whose dimensions have been above stated. Now when the
radius of the earth is deducted from the distance of
the moon at perigee, the remainder is the distance be-
tween the surface of the earth and the moon's orbit oc-
cupied by the air, viz. 35213 1/10 parasangs, When the
^ Suter, Abh, Gasch. Math. Wlss. X P 209., and Not. et

Extr. VII P 94. The history of the determination of a
degree of the meridian has been given by Nalllno, Cos-
mos di Guldo Cora, ZI 1892. He concludes that the
Arabic mile had 1973,2 m. corresponding to a cubit of
493,2 mm.
Sauvaire, Jour. Asiat. 1886 p. 479 seq. discusses
the various cubits in use by the Arabs. Two of them
seem to have been inherited from the Persians; the royal
cubit of 32 digits (i?bar) and the common, legal or comr
merplal cubit of 24 digits. The last named dhirfi*" al-
tij^rat is the equivalent of the Persian arsh-l sauda
which may account for the Arabic name of •black' cubit:
the story that it was taken from the arm of a black
t^lir j ^LrJ
î»jy lio'JVlli 5»JL( l^'j ^v
J"J' 3 J 'f^r^ IJV1Ji '.•

1
JI^j! '«-. 1^5^ tbTil' j Sr'U'jjLfcjijl
#J ^ OJjSlêU*11
t- S ,' y, "," *-
^4-MiA' j1 * I'JiLUj jl* t> 'j'jy • M11
1
•ol'fciii.'j Jj1 sJir*!
209-210
measurement of the yolume of the earth, viz. 5,305,498,
569 4/5 oublo parasangs Is deducted from that of the
sphere whose radius is the nearest distance of the moon
from the centre of the earth, viz. 200,356,656,322,333
1/Sl parasangs there remain 200,351,352,623,743 6/15
parasangs. This Is the dimension of air and fire to-
gether, hut It Is Impossible to determine the amount of
these elements separately. Above the air In the moist
vapours occur the various phenomena of wind, cloud,
snow and rain, also thunder, lightning, thunderbolts,
rainbows, haloes and the like. Above It likewise In
the dry smoky vapours are the stars with tails and
locks, shooting stars &e.
210. Kalf wadr al-malmlrah. The plane of the
eculnootlal outs the earth at a clrola called the
equator khattu'l-latlwa' Into two parts,
DISPOSITION northern and'southern hemispheres. A
OF LAND great elrele drawn through the poles
divides these Into four quadrants, two
ounueh by Al-Rashld or Al-Ma'mun Is not convincing.
Probably the neo-babylonlan eublt of 496 mm. (Jour.
Aslat. XIII 1909 p. 96, 24 digits of 20,66 mm., the meas-
ure of six barley-eorns) persisted In 'Iraq with slight
modification and was employed for this survey.
Occasionally the digit was measured by grains set
on edge Instead of lying flat, In which case 192 were
assigned to the cubit Instead of 144 (Sauvalre p. 504).
The sawadl cubic used by Omar for surveying the
blaek, lands of rIraq (Sawad) Is sometimes confused with
the blaok«_eublt,and la supposed to have bean the rojal
cubit. Idrlsl [6th climate,9th sect.) gives the maasure-
ments of the Great Vail' In sawadl cubits. According to
Sedlllot (Sol. Ilath. Arab. 11 755) Al-Qumml reckoned
4000 eublts (al-sawwaT) to the mile.
3 for Marwarrudhl v. Diet. Geog. de la Parse p. 525. Us
names In Arabic rversion.
3 Bu•l-Bupturl AlI Ibn al-Buhturl v. Suter.
4
5 Al-masa6hi
r the surveyor.
AlI b. Isa - Asturlab-Eun PL.Asturlabl PP.
6 Six English barley-eoms average 21 mm.
' Al-BlrunI determined the height of a mountain In India,
measured the angle of depression of the horizon from
the top and calculated from them the radius of the earth.
1 These figures are written out In words In PL and AO"
two hundred thousand thousand thousand thousand etc. In
AO 200.356,658,322,333.
% '/ '
1
jlisj CA Ixj Û Oi1* clW'j i-Lt
^j/Xt^j \ i_l*i \ oy^j y ^j^Xe-'j <—^ Li) i jj)i'_"
O^jI) /^V 'i!(s~*J 4wAj /«V»(jl<jC<)) jJ\
0
^ ^
^>jV)J ^ L>^>\L-Jî.uiJ ^vU\Jcy
y\^ k ^ \ C> \j5 v_j^»\i^\ (j*^-'LH
j^rfj^Vj 0 (plyi-^j*! u}k{ i'jr'Vl 3 Je
^b ^-l/JMi® -^k® V,.^^-^1

I, j | iÛt" ^ 1) uy^y o'
210-211
northern and two southern. Those who heve investigated
the matter find that the dry land does not extend be-
yond one of the northern quadrants; this Is therefore
called the habitable quadrant rub 'ma ''mira. It is as it
were an Island surrounded by the sea. In this quarter
which man are constantly traversing, they find seas,
islands, mountains, rivers and deserts, also towns and
villages, until towards the north pole a desolate treat
Is reached of excessive cold, where snows are heaped on
snows.I
211. Kalf wad''al-bahflr mln al-malngrah^ The sea
which la found to the west of the dry land, on whose
shores are Tangier and Spain, Is called
DISPOSITION the surrounding sea, the Ocean of the
OF SEA Greeks. Whoever ventures therein does
not go far from the coast, (on account
of the roughness, darkness and traoklessness of the
sea, but hugs the shore.?) Beyond the countries men-
tioned, the sea passes by the lands of the Slavs, and a
northern section of It penetrates Into the land until
It approaches the country of the Bulghars who are Kus-
11ms. This Is the Yaranglan Sea, and these Varangians
are very virile people, and have their chief town,
Balld, on the shore. Beyond them Is the country of
the Turks to the east; between Turkestan and the ocean
to the north the country Is unknown, full of desolate
mountains; no one penetrates there.
From Tanglers southwards the Ocean passes by the
country of the Western Negroes, and then turns to the
left so as to get to the other aide of the Mountains
of the 'loon, whence the Nile arises, (and there It
reaches Sofala al-ZanJ.)? Ships do not enter this sea.
If they do, they do not escape Into safety.
1 208-10 are quoted by Wledemann, Arch. Qesoh. Naturw.
u. Teohnlk. III.253, while In his Beltrag ZTTII he has
translated and fully annotated the passages of geo-
graphical Interest In 211-2, 214-5, 220, 236-9, 241.
* The passage quoted by NSlllno I. 170 from Sl-Kharaql
closely resembles this paragraph except that It Is sup-
plemsnted by the dimensions of the seas.
" PL' Palld; Baland may be Poland - Nuzhat al-Qulub.
Trans, p. 230 and 249 n; Not mentioned In A. merely
"those are people on the shore".
121
<^j ^ 1 Uu o liJ If i-t-'tu \ trj- îf^V] ^ ^-y-9
^jli-VU J i^ljl/l^-buW]^L-JcJ^
■^Vj^:>y aUL^J Qyi * ^r*' ^3 jl'l^ 1' 'l- 1 (i^---^.
cO1 UL»^ (J^ âJ^Â-iZ/i
îX^j ici \i«^ ^ ^\r* 2--^Ja[p.^^4j-i^j^jiJ\jL«J|-/»j\
'^wuy ^j u- U^J v ^./j
3 \xl.\ '. J \__=tJ
>—^ '-r'J^J^^J"-11 e/*
^ci-V^y-r <J^ »bj

ail
following the ooean from the north to the 9ast_
past the limits of the Chinese Empire (chin va maohln*'),
It Is found to he trackless and dangerous, and no one
goes there. At the southern extremity,however, there
Is a gulf which is the beginning of those seas called
after the adjacent countries, of Which the first la the
Chinese sea and the next the Indian Ooean. Erom the
latter there are gulfs penetrating Into the land, forming
as It were separate seas, like the Persian Gulf the
eastern shore of which extends from Basra to Ifekrfinjop-
poslte the latter Is the port furdat A'hargShP oftlmman.
Leaving Ijniman and proceeding south the Arabian shore
(shahr) Is reached whence frankincense Kundru, luban
comes, and then Aden. Thenoe two great gulfs project,
one of these [the Bed Sea) Is well known at Qulzum, and
passes by the country of the Arabs,which Is In fact an
Island between this sea and the Persian Gulf. As the
Abysslnlans are opposite Yemen, the sea Is hero called
both the Sea of Yemen and the Abyssinian Sea,while near
the Hij&z It Is known as the sea of Qulzum. This Is a
city seated on the shore of the Sea where It ends towards
Syria, so that the traveller must turn here leaving Syria
behind and sailing along the coast of Egypt and the
Beja territory.
The other gulf Is that which begins at a point,Has
Berbera,opposite Aden and Is called the Berbera Sea.efnd
this great Sea goes as far as Sofala above referred to.
No ship passes this point on account of the dangers of
navigation; beyond Is the Western Ocean (but the nature
of the connection therewith Is unknown.)r
In the eastern part of this sea1 are numerous laands,
first those of ZShlj.!" al-zanj A al-zanj then the DlvaP
Dlbajat A and Qumalr^ groups,(small In size,some of them
arising anew out of the water,others as a result of
erosion,becoming Invisible) .PS Then there are the Islands
1
of. India 1.210. "The gold-Islands Zablj arelnthsEast,
those of the Zanj In the West and the Diva and gumalr
groups In the middle"- the assooletlon of the Qumalr
with the Diva group (taoeadives to) points to the Comoro
Islands and Madagascar - of. De Vie fays des Zenj. Fer-
rand, Jour. Aslat. 1910 and Storbeok, Mltth. Orient.
Seminar Berlin XVII, 1914. In these MSS. there Is the
usual
2 confusion between Zanj, ZSnlj and ZSblj.
3 AO' and AB" have Qushmlr.
Cf. India I. 233 and II. 106.
^ ^ ^ ^ CTUi
iCj ^ ji CJI U,'^ \ >jVl ^
jjUi>i» 0 u ^Âk-> u H-jj-J® ij ji\
oliifU* Oi.j^ L u J* j «x^* |vc_rV^ 1^ \
(^"Ô
IfV^Vt^-l? ^ U^-J ^ ' J6 Û - Oe
♦îiu v—U-VJ ^3 \ AU- ^
^ ^ V. ^ ^ ^ ^!»' ^^lirijj^^î.
yy^>\ J >j- \itl

jj^Lui^j ^c/W^ I oWW-'/A^^J^ Ul
j ^ji jj^^J
Ell
of ZanglstSnF al-zanj A^P and A maps al-zanlj, large
and oelebrated Islands like 3orandlb (Ceylon) known to
the Hindus as Sangaldlb. Prom It oome various precious
stones and diamonds. Then the Island Kalah from which
tin la obtained, and Sarbuza?, sarlra A from which cam-
phor comes, (and other Islands from which cloves,
sandal-wood, coconuts, ebony, barhank (KanbarJ coir.),
rattans, aloe-wood end the like ere obtained.*1)
In the middle of the habitable land Is another sea
called Fontus by the Creeks In the country of the Slavs
and Russians. Our people call It the Sea of Treblzond
from the Creek port on Its shore. Hence a great body of
water proceeds which becomes narrower as It approaohes
Constantinople, and still narrower before It opens Into
the sea of Syria. On the southern shore of the Syrian
Sea are the countries of Uorocoo and Ifrlqlyya (Tunisia)
as far as Alexandria and Egypt, opposite these are
Spain,the Roman Empire, Asia lllnor and Antlooh, while
between them are the cities of Syria and Palestine.
This sea constantly flows towards the ocean through a
narrow place Jmown as the Passage of Hercules and now
better known as the 'zuqaq'. The sea contains several
well-known Islands such as Cyprus, Samos, Rhodes and
Sicily.
Near Tabarlstan there Is another sea and the
Capital town (bargahF furjet, port A) of Qurgan. On
the shore Is a city Ablskun by which name also the sea
Is known. From this point the ooast-llne follows
Tabarlstan, Dallam and Shlrvan, Derbend of the Khazars,
the territory of the Alans, and arrives at the city of
the Khazars where the river Itll (VolgaJ_flows Into the
sea; thereafter passing the country (dlyar,habitations
A) of the Chuzz It reaches Ablskun again. The sea Is
also known by the name of the adjacent countries, per-
haps best after_the Khazars; our ancestors knew It as
the Sea of Ourgan, Ptolemy as the Hyrcanlan Sea. It Is
not connected with any other sea.
The habitable land contains numerous lakes.batalh.
1 Wledemann quotes a parallel passage from the MBsHdl
Canon. Beltrflge ZZXZ.
ly V* ^ ^!
f L^vii ' ^ LB £*_iJ^^ La* -i\/V) XVwAÛlk-Jj
Z^rj(y^L^-f pliil
^j^-rf''^cA.VKjlsJjJ.^1
^ L" y-i^.ouj L jU
V^'-,^/''3-,-;-Lr'
J ,V"j;> (Jv^. Wj v. ^ ^ yj
"X e) V^ 0*1 J y--* ly Vi J (J ^ J ^ ji\ C/'J IJ
1/vj^1 jL 0\_f^ ^-J6
-,^"^ y>-^ O ÎC- I ^ £-—iVT I* ^^ L (^y
jô Ly \} ->l^ ^y^—0 IJ (S) 1_> V^jJ^ j
^ ^ ^1 0 u. ^ L Ul»" ^-\jc.S^^
£}^[j O LUjI—^
211-212
33
32
11
12 23
14 16
27 25
26
28
30
1. Caspian, 2.Turks. S.China. 4.Java, S.India, 6.Makran.

7.Persia. Q.Khurasan. 9.Persian Gulf. 10.Oman. 11.Aden.
l2.Qulzum. 13.Syria. 14,Iraq. IS.Pontus. ^.Mediter-
ranean. 17.Alexandria. 18.Egypt. 19.Sudan. 20.Has Ber-
hera. 21.Mounts.of the Moon. 22.Sofala al-zanj. 23-Mor-
oooo. 24.Zuqaq, 25,Andalusia. 26.Rum- 27.Constantinople.
28. Slavs. 29.Kliazar3. 30.Baltic and Varangians. 31.
Surrounding Ocean. 32.Dlbaoha Islands. 33. Islands of
the Zanj Empire.
and sometimes they are called small seae, 1buhalrat,like
those of Apamea, Tiberias end the Dead Sea In Syria,
and the Sea of Khwarlzm(AraD and Isslq-tul near Barsuk-
han.^ The above figure approximately represents what we
have described.
212. Aln khaft al-lstiwa' wa mg khawSsshu. The
ecuator nasses from the east into the Chinese end
Indian Oceans and through several
EQUATOR AUD ITS of the Islands there. After having
CHARACTERISTICS traversed the boundaries of the
1 Bahr Zughar, instead of Ba^r Lflt derived, from the
town'Zoar or Lot1s daughter. Barsukhan, v- Tarlkh-1
Rashldl 350n.
l \;J>L. Ur^^wyJI;
Cfjl^ A\ o^^-UJ ,)>^- ^ |
0^ Ci j\r \ ^ ^ ^ j jV Îjr ^ (j^-
c/^'TtP' '' *\sr 'j ^ «-^(ijj 1 Uîl

2X2-213
Zanjlin arrives at tiie deserts of the Sudanese, who are
engaged in the slave-trade, and thence passes Into the
Western Ocean. Those who dwell on the equator have
their nights and days always of equal length, hoth north
and south poles are equidistant on their horizon, and
the parallels of latitude are perpendicular to the hor-
izon, not Inclining to either side. The sun crosses the
equator twice a year, first when at the first point of
Aries, and second when at the first point of Libra, on
which occasions it passes to the north and south re-
spectively. The equator is called kha^t al-lstlwa' and
khatt al-irtldfil on account of the complete equality of
day'and night. As for the opinion expressed by some
people that the nature and constitution of the inhabit-
ants is of even temperament, there is evidence to the
contrary in the burnt-up condition of the people and
their neighbours because they vary much in their com-
plexion and their hair, and are not alike in their
physical characteristics, although all of small stature.
Who, Indeed, could be of equal-tempered conatitution in
a place where the sun cooks the brains of the inhabit-
ants from above, till It moves out of the zenith at those
two periods which we oai; summer and winter, and brings
about a little coolness and relief.
213. Kaif intisab al-qamat'hid walh al-ard. Anyone
who considers the question of the erecx posture at one
place naturally thinks that his
ERECT POSTURE ON posture is parallel to that of eveiy-
SURFACE OF EARTH on® on earth, and that the same is
the case with the line of falling
bodies. But whoever reflects on the matter at differ-
ent places, and gives some consideration to the sub-
ject knows that the erect posture is in a line with the
diameter of the globe, the head directed to heaven and
the feet to the centre of the earth, {For this reason
everyone prays to what is above hlm.P) But what Is up-
right to him is not upright to others and may be quite
inverted. If we consider the situation of the Chinese
1 Cf. Wledemann, Arch, gesch. Naturw. u. Tech. V. 56.

'jCîjjijj Wy^-u c-y b îi ll* ij»» ^fl^y_y--~^ \
^/-JJcAj JlW J ^ Ij^ <JJ
!_,\)^*s ii \_j j ^ ^ v—i^lx-'^j ^"j—-^*"
J ^"iUpy lÛj lj) (£^-;*k* * L^.l^Vai
VÛîÔLAL «u\ ^^y- ^y- JjJ^,
u>U»^ erL? ^jlr* <_^=^-J c>* ^J6
2—^pljICU ju» LiA^ li^/Ap ^ u* LjJ^ <—'JJÎA* Ix^- L*yt
r^^J^^cX. c>ÎA\ k^y^livyou'* i^ly*

213-215
and the Spaniards who live on the two opposite margins
of the habltahle earth, the one on the east, the other
on the west, (and we are watching the phases of an
eclipse of the moon with theni,^) we find that the soles
of their feet are directly opposite each other. If one
of those logicians who are accustomed to Judge matters
high and low by their own standards, not according to
their actualities, were to picture to himself the
situation with a ball made of wood or other material,
whose centre is outside the centre of the world, and
were to observe the conduct of an ant creeping on the
under surface, he would feel faint in contemplating the
condition which he calls falling off, but which we
regard as leaping or flying.1
214. Ma al-balad. The latitude of any town Is
Its shortest distance from" the equator In a northerly
direction, because all towns are thus
LATITWDE situated. Corresponding to it there is an
OF TOWN arc of a great circle. Its meridian,
between the zenith and the equinoctial. The
elevation of the north pole la equal In all places to
their latitude and therefore this is sometimes used
Instead of the latitude. The depression of the south
pole, although it Is also complementary Is concealed
from us, and we are not cognisant of It.
215. Mi tul al-balad. Longitude on the other hand
Is the distance from the extremity of the dry land
whether calculated on the equinoctial or
LONGITUDE the equator, or on a parallel circle,
OF TOWN because these having comparable parts can
be substituted for each other. In con-
sequence of the fact that our astronomers have adopted
the customs of the Greeks In this matter, and that the
Greeks have selected the western extremity of the land,
the longitude of towns is now calculated from that
point. But there Is some discrepancy as to this ex-
tremity for some people take It as the shore of the
Western Ocean, while others adopt the Fortunate or
1
Quoted by Wledemenn, Beitrfige, LZ p. 57 Bd. 52/53.
126
u \i ^ U-4 ^1
oC/* \j L
UXi-LJl Jj^j6 ÛUjf^
s- lA^y-i U? 'v^10 j ^ !aU^ jv^ ''"iv-v
^J_r O1. a-J^J ^-yj^ ^
^ 4^tJ^*1 1- -WJ 1 ^l^jl
v~>u*JS^\ j> U kil. u iji. j i,

* f*—~^ m *
(V\'i>- OU-Jl
^\ju» ^j^VA3 ^
tA) ^--îjA s£\^' y AA^.^yV^yM

A>u \i Âl/yj-ib LA 1 j; W ^ J A 2- 'j A-y j
Ay A1 ^ lt* JjA i
o 'uJJ l> lyy A'u ur Â/:-1 'A-v

215-218
1
Eternal Isles - six Islands situated 200 parasangs off
the coast of West Africa. This is an unimportant matter
as long as all longitudes are measured from one point,
but in those cases, some of which have been measured
from the one and some from the other point (or where
two longitudes are given in the books for a place with
a difference of 10°)-A-, people -who have not the requisite
knowledge and are not proficient in this science are
unable to distinguish the one from the other.
216. Ma alladhi yusamml mabain al-tulain. The
difference of longitude between two places is arrived
at by subtracting the smaller from
DIFFERtlNCE OF the larger, the result is equal to
TWO LONGITUDES the difference of tlnw units between
their meridians, calculated either on
the equinoctial or the parallel of either of them or
some other parallel.
217. Ma alladhi yurri<; min ikhtilaf tulaj al-
baladaln idha tasSwI rard5hamfi. Should the latitude of
two places be the same and the
WHEN LATITUDE luiigilude different, there is
SALE AND only the difference of time
LONGITUDE DIFFERENT between them, for sunrise and
sunset do not occur at the same
time, being earlier in the eastern place proportionally
to the difference of longitude; the climate of both
will be alike unless proximity to the sea, or mountains,
or sandy desert, or a difference of level occur to
account for a difference.
218. Ikhtilaf rardal al-baladain idha tasawl tula
huma. If on the other hand two places agree In ' "
longitude but differ in latitude,
WHEN LONGITUDE midday and midnight occur in
SAME AND both simultaneously and all stars
LATITUDE DIFFERENT which have no declination rise
and set each at the same time as
does the sun during the equinoxes; when however the
1 Canaries? Palmals some 400 miles from the coast.
Al-BlrUnl does not distinguish between the rFortunate
Islands (Isles of the Blest) jazaMr al-aa adah and
the Eternal Islands jaza'ir al-khalidat.
See Blochet - Lea sources orlentales de la divine
com^dle - 1901.
127
r^l JUJ ti ^ ll^. ^ or 01 k>
' J^LA. ^
jl^J O^-I-A-lo ^jVi(_j'l<Yj\vc^-a,v^*k-,!'^J!y—'
^jr^0. ' t« 'u^Cj 1 0/ji-^ ' ^^,,"\^^^->

o
-vl^/*- L» J ljL«-f Wc/ti U-A^j^Str^3^^-5
aI-A-V^ IT ^ or
. ■ • % *^
'iflVje <Sj U * ij^f- ^ ^ "ji *
^Jij) '
^l/yUtWôr lj(3'—■ ^ ^ ^ t^"
k/r-j>j JUP ' 3 -^T

818-219
sun or planet leaves the aqulnootlal, If to the south,
then the rising Is earlier and the setting later In
the plaoe of loser latitude, end If to the north,
then the reverse Is the case. The anount of difference
between rising and setting In the two places Is
different with each parallel of latitude, as are the
length of day and night, the ortlve amplitude, the
meridian altitude, the shadow at noon and the number
of stars of perpetual apparition and occultatlon.
The place with the higher latitude Is necessarily
colder, unless some of the circumstances enumerated
above Intervene, as e.g. GurgSn which has a higher
latitude than Ral, but has less air, and Chazni
(Ghaznah A) which although on the same parallel as
Baghdad Is a cool place while the latter Is hot.
219 . Hchtllaf al-tulaln wa'l-'"ardaln. If

latitude and longitude are both different, then
the natural uharautei'lstlos of the
BOTH LATITUIlI two places are compounded of the
AHD LONGITDDE factors adverted to above. The
DIFFZHKNT rise end setting of any star
never cccur at the same time,
unless at one of the two points where their horizons
are In contact with each other.
J \f ' si ' ^ O-*-1 ^ —i^'jl
U^ UP^ xô^V-3 j_^_U^S- o-AiJ 1|
v-i^^jj, i ^ ^01 ^ u> L^^=> i jw
^ ^ ^^^ O'^ Lr
^Îv-j^''C^>JA>Uj^ /Âv(juU 1
^TViL^ I" yAJ J J<»y ^ jW 1 jlv-*
"illpj o yju lii^yC»-
V"ly* 2j\ Ji» VIj J-V
ir L^>r-^=V'j o\
U Lf>j r'Ji/*) ■> 'o^ j^4jr^ U(^j W
O'^/--^»J —JHUi ^r,(>y^'-^ît* ay Li.
îjL UvL \Sj' i_^ 'Xi'V't/ ^(Jr* ^rji
^ U J«I!«p L/» IjJ \ ^ ^

220
220. Ma aa'at al-maahrlq. At the equlnoxea the sun
rises and sets opposite the ends of the equinoctial
line which we drew In the Indian Circle
ORTITE 131, but when It moies to the north, sun-
AMP1ITUDE rise and sunset occur at two points of the
horizon north of the equator, the ends of
a line parallel thereto. £7017 day this line becomes
more distant from the equator until the sun enters the
first point of Cancer, when the points of summer sun-
rise and sunset are known as mashrlq wa maphvlh al-
salf. The rererse occurs when the sun moves south, and
irESn It reaches the first point of Capricorn, the
points of winter sunrlee and sunset are called mashrlq
wa maghrlh al-ahltS'. The arc between the point of
rising of the sun on the horizon and the equator, the
ortlve amplitude. Is called aa'at al-mashrlq, and
similarly sa'at al-maghrlb Is the arc between the point
of setting and the equator, the occaslve emplltude. In
the case of places with latitude the amplitude Is
greater the higher the latitude. A diagram follows.
Aboye Is the S. point, below the N. the rertlcal
line Joining them Is the Meridian, khatt al-zawal. The
line joining the I and W points, khatt al-l'tldlfTj has,
right and left, the equinoctial sunset and sunrise
points; the lines parallel to It abowe and below
respeetliely the winter and sumner points. The copyist
makes the summer sun rise In the West and set In the E.
E, W, Equinoctial Sun-
rise and Sunset points
A, B. Summer, C.D.
r Winter Sunrise and
¥J Sunset points
f
A. E. and C. E. Ortlwe
7 Amplitude. B. W. and
D. W. occaslre do.
One folio Is absent from this US containing paragraphs'

221-223: these are supplied from Afll ff 4l" and 42r.
129
J'k* C®c)\>\^j J^jJcV-^t)^j* VI
i__^Jl l^JL^. \^»»^(_tf y U»p\\crliî^^-J I
»\yys'j
[v.cVvCpV^-^Jcylil:^ 2-^cL»,'
Î^LiVjir
<i. ■J>y
^>1 f
' Js. -V i,...»j.»iL_"]3 ^fl r-^"' /*
\ /)
ZZ1
321. galf yatulu al-nahgr to al-lall fl'l-bllad.
Th« dally rayolutlon or the sun tafces plaoa eltber on
the equihuotlal or on circles parallel
LEHQTH OF thereto; all haying the same pole, the
DAT AND MIGHT pole of the universe. When the horizon
passes through the pole (It Is only at
the equator that this occurs) It outs these circles
Into two halves, that above the horizon being equal to
that which la below. It Is for this reason that at the
equator day and night are equal. As soon as a place la
away from the equator the north pole rises from the
horizon proportionately to the latitude of the place.
When the horizon passes beyond the pole. It la only the
equinoctial that Is cut Into two halves, both of them
being great circles; It Is on this account that day
and night are equal all oier the earth when the sun
la In the first point of Aries or Libra, because the
sun la then revolving In the equinoctial. But the
horizon cuts the other circles unequally, the result
being that larger parts of the northern circles are
above the horizon than below, and consequently when the
sun la In the northern constellations the day Is long
and the night short. With regard to the southern
circles the parts above the horizon are shorter than
those below and consequently the day la short and the
night long. If two circles be tahen at equal distance
from the squlnoctlal, the excess of the day or night
In the one will be complementary to the deficiency
In the other, I.e. that the night of the one will be
equal to the day of the other.
130
l
»t;-^*
'<.>- '
I^jU-.
JjyL JjL<>^»'jIA1^»*jIj to jVD >>»

Vol j jU jlj-jîl LajI^
sJlyb (**jl^LJ»vvj. '*4^3 ^•jî'tjijl'
Jip1 ^jjjij
J^lj^fJjJ li 'v' L^LIj^LI^j

i4»jrJjl>l uÔ '^~
222-223
222. MS qaus al-nahar wa fadlhu wa ta^dllhu. The
arc of day Is as mudi of the circle as Is ahore the
hn-M «nrt tVio aTi. uf Ulgllt a3 fflUOh
ABC OF DAY as is below. The comparlaon of this
ITS EXCESS AMD arc to a bow is particularly appro-
EQUATION priete when a place has latitude.
Its length can be expressed in
degrees of the parallel of latitude of the place, or in
hours, the equinoctial day being 180° or 12 hours. The
difference of the length of days ris the excess oTer or
deficiency from this, and the 'ta dllu 'l-nahar' the
equation of the day is the half of the difference.
MS North and South Poles
ZNa Zenith and Nadir
ZH Height of Pole
DE Seml-dlumal arc of
equinoctial EEl
CA Semi-diurnal arc of
Northern Parallel AAl
FB Semi-diurnal arc of ,
Southern Parallel BET
CG,HF equation of day, the
amount to be subtracted
and added to make
Na equal tc the equlnoo-
lal semi-diurnal arc.
DC ortlve amplitude
223. Ma al-kawakib al-abadiyyah al-zuhflr wa'1-
khafg. If an imaginary circle be drawn round the north
pole, the circumfereuee uf Which
STARS OF PERPETUAL touches the horizon, then all
APPARITION AND circles within that do not touch
0C0UI.TATI0N the horizon, and consequently all
stars which re to lye on these are
always ylslble, i.e. are stars of perpetual apparition
and neither rise nor set. If they are not ylsible it is
due to the brightness of the daylight,while darkness
renders them ylslble.All the stars of the Great Bear are
always Tlslble throughout Tranaoxlana,e.g. while at
Mecca and Aden the three stars of the tail rise and set.
Similarly round the south pole there is a circle the
nadir of the aboye,within which are stars of perpetual
occultatlon for the aboye mentioned places. Canopus may
be taken as an example which is neyer ylslble in
Transoxlana,while for a part of the year it does appear
aboye the horizon in 'Iraq and some parts of Khurasan.
131
k
. , ,-r x*- •
AioSJ
x
-<^ j-î^ /\
\ jîyA / 'u. •,^_.imi.*:
* • ^»' '» «»*

iu Ijj Miiy*' ^' •> i^1, '•ban ?' bUj oy b > s' ^
64 JJ> »jyî
V^WirbJ]^'—^^".liilii^ JV3**-^51
» ♦*'*»» i^,1"* »*
**> liliîJjyUWj jAJij I *-
I Jli ' j^.lirAli! j J^ll li!

|J>U4j>jlil ^'Îjjt^-jCV I^C'lijj^1
j j&j, >?Llu^ Vj»^ »-» -$ jM I i-jld
j j^-J'-Ai J* l*''' ^•U>^!

^yli^Jj^yjalJ j jV'l j >
224-226
224. Hadha^-taâbbud f^l-guhur wa^-khafa haqlgl
am lahu taghayyur. Tbe dlatanoe of eacb of the fl'ied
~ stars from tbe pole of tbe
IS THIS PERPETUITY REAL eollptlo la tbe same and la
OR SUBJECT TO CHANGE never departed from, because
tbe movement of tbe flêd
stara Is with that pole, but tbelr distance from tbe
universal pole is not uniform. So It Is possible that a
star wblob baa never been one of perpetual apparition
or ocoultatlon, and bas formerly risen and set may move
eastwards Into one of tbose two circles touobing tbe
horizon and tbere carry out Its circular movements,
wblle one tbat baa been In perpetual apparition or
occultatlon emerges from tbe circle on tbe otber side,
but auob cbanges of position can only take place In
Immense lapses of time owing to tbe slowness of tbe
movement of tbe stars. Indeed tbey cannot happen to
every star, and tbe rule for tbat Is tbla;- To decide
whether a particular star which Is permanently visible
or Invisible at a locality may sometime rise and set
over It, deduct Ite latitude from 90° and compare tbe
remainder with tbe difference between the latitude of
tbe place and tbe obliquity of tbe ecliptic, if more^
then It Is possible; If less, tbe star will never alter
Its position with regard to tbat locality.
225. M5 al-lrtlfar wa»1-lnbltat wa tam&mahuma. If
a great Qlrcle bs imaglnftfl paafring ihrnugfr tbft zenith
and tbe sun or a star or any given
ALTITUDE AND point In tbe heavens above tbe horizon,
DEPRESSION It la perpendicular to tbe horizon and
tbe altitude of tbe body Is the arc of
tbat circle between It and tbe horizon. Tbat portion of
tbe same circle between tbe body and tbe zenith wblob
is one of the poles of tbe horizon Is called tbe
complement of tbe altitude or zenith distance. If tbe
body Is below tbe horizon the arc between the two is
named Its depression Inbltat or Inkblfad, and tbat
between tbe body and TEe nadir fHw nnmpTfimBbt of tbe
depression.
'j2^*ic\» >U\ 61» J ^ >3» "-r^* J^ ^1
ojl lj^t\
jl-I ^J/-J ij6 k

-rV^J^ -^V
^ ^ jC >u U^ L>u\ u J > L.\^l
û[>!:V> ^ > oy lij-Xi ^ j J. -J g
Wo ^ Ajv^ j\^ l/; l» ^ v.yj.i.- aui
- Ultj)»lii^-V^j ^\_ii>jMl- ^ ,1 \*»ôljJ* ifj
caj *>V ^ u ji* •jvL&yrJr u] *
Jj^'u'O lûA. Jp ^ >c/'.^-» W ^tP ^ ' ^'•>'
—îiSj ^ (j^'1 o Wj\j^\^jviî>|'\*ja(^V^»»>\j«
'-^3' VijAj4--^'.0A}j^^>fU^,(j>
226-229
226. Ma al-lrtiffij' al-ausat* The mean altitude Is
the arc of such a olrcl© between the horizon and the
ftqninnnt.i ni j nnd its complement that
MEAN ALTITUDE between the equinoctial and the
zenith.
227. Ma al-mlqyas wa^-zlll. A gnomon and Its
shadow. The style, shams, in&y be made of nood or other
—naterlal sharpened at each end and driven
GNOMON like a peg perpendicularly Into Hie
AND SHADOW ground. When the sun la out, the shadow
of the style with Its divisions Is
measured to see how they compare. The line Joining the
point of the style and the point of Its shadow Is oalJed
the diameter (hypothenus©) of the shadow.
228. AJz5* al-mlqyfts kam hlya. If the style la
divided Into twelver equal parts these ere named fingers,
agahl > If Into sixty, divisions,aJza*.
DIVISIONS ad if Into seven, feet.aqdSm (Some people
OF GNOMON use 6 1/2 for the last).
229. Anwfiral-azl61 kam hlya. There are two kinds
of shadow, the one cast on a horizontal, the other on a
vertical surface, when e.g. the gnomon Is
KINDS OF fixed perpendicularly to a wall. The former
SHADOW shadow Is called mustawl (umbra recta),
while the latter Ts named muntaglb on
account
r of being perpendicular to the ground, end
ma kCl3 because the point of the shadow Is directed to
the ground (umbra versa).
(• ^ VY is'jb a^-\-j*VUÎ
î\^li>j) v} ^r" J V'^LiijVlU -Vlla^vl >
(jÛ Vû^J 0^>*•c^'-
v^ \ ^ ^ lt ^ ^ iy]^1 cm <>
^\i U ■>^^--0»-^
fa-ftir*\jr\^ -Mlt W1 ^ ^^-r^-.
r l» cr ^ ^"crtp"^ * ^ Uli ■Myi
b Ij Jy-^ >\
C*^J li-^^j^SrCjL ^ ir
^ \)>V|J^\^^^6WO^L»-Vt
^X^crP^^—^ ^ 3 ^ iîi bj lial-j VI ^J

61 c
i,^ ^ ^*^ <j'l-jj'^\j •!■' ^
-•' V^-'>^'<iWi^ly-^^y*-'^L5^ ^jj^Jcyj^

230
230. Ma al-aamt. The point of Intersection of a
vertical circle of altitude of the sun or a star with
the horizon is called samt (azlmuthal
AZIMUTHAL point,1 If the distance of the samt from
POINT the equinoctial is taken, then the com-
plement of that is the distance from the
meridian, (azimuth) and vice versa. If from the centre
of the Indian Circle you draw a diameter through the
middle of the shadow, that end of the diameter which
la towards the sun or star la its samt, and that end
of the diameter which is towards the point of the
shadow la the nadir of the samt, and the distance of
holh is equal, but in different directions, i.e. if
the shadow points west the samt is east, If east,
west, and similarly with regard to north and south.
Z
Eq
Eq. Equinoctial, H H-1. Horizon. E its east point.
U. North Pole. Z Zenith. HZH1. Meridian. 3. a star.
DS its declination, SN. complement of declination,
A its 'samt*, Azlmuthal point, AE its distance from
Equinoctial, AH complement thereof 'azimuth',
3Z. Zenith distance, AS. altitude.
1
Chaucer 1,0. p. 31 'Senyth'.
i,:'^ ^, Îc-M ^ ^ J^Vf
^\v «*
LJ-r; ^v
<0
t
-O^lj
y V
s-
.^-—-ftiov SMJ
231-232
231. MS dhallka fl niaf al-nahar. All great
circles whioS -paas through the 7.p.nlt.h are1 called
circles of altitude, and the
MERIDIAN ALTITUDE meridian Is one of these
AND SHADOW distinguished by passing through
the zenith and the pole of the
universe. When the altitude of the sun is taken in the
meridian, it is the highest of all altitudes, and as
the shadow corresponds to this, the meridian shadow is
the shortest of all shadows of the day. The meridian
intercepts the horizon at two points, north and south;
these are the meridian sumilt, but the distance of any
point from these is not taken notice of.
232. Ild kam yanqaslmu azlal nisf al-nahar wa
irtifSThu. The extremity of a meridian shadow always
points north in those places
DIVISIONS OF whose latitude is greater than the
MERIDIAN ALTITUDE obliquity of the ecliptic, and the
AND SHADOW meridian altitude is south, its
complement being the distance from
the zenith southwards to the sun. The meridian altitude
of the sun is of three grades, 1. highest in summer,
when the sun arrives at the first point of Cancer - the
shadow la then at its shortest, 2. lowest in winter
when the sun reaches Capricorn - the shadow then is
longest - end 3. both altitude and shadow are inter-
mediate between these two when the sun is at the first
points of Aries and Libra; the shadow is then known as
the equinoctial shadow, and the altitude is equal to
the oolatltude of the place.
In those places whose latitude is equal to the
obliquity of the ecliptic, the conditions are as we
have described, except that the altitude at the first
point of Cancer, which is equal to 90°, is neither
north nor south, and then there is no meridian shadow
In those oases where the latitude is less than
the obliquity of the ecliptic the conditions of
1
As distinguished from parallel of altitude.
135
IjL. J UjJ ^ v_L<r- ^-LtJ jVW^-a>j 1
«/] 5 <_JYJf
J>» —CJ* U11
Jt-*1 —^^li-' *-*^y 'L^'
-L-ppi
l
. Ji :> 'JL^1 (JjUÎJ ^j-*^ ÛJ j ijS^ r
P _j'piî .t^j^-j ^^Lôri^xjixYvi
—ÎtLYj pic. ^ Ijj si j-L. L ^^>^15^*^-1 ^ Y ^

> , -• t > *
-1
a^ s-* 'Spr^--- ^ ^ <_j|J»<
J-J* A- '
232-233
altitude and shadow in winter and spring are of the
nature already indicated, but the altitude at the first
point of Cancer is in the north not in the south, and
so when the sun begins to ascend towards the North and
also to descend from the North, and when its
declination la equal to the latitude of the place, it
stands overhead and there is no shadow. When its
declination increases beyond the latitude of the
place, the sun passes from the zenith towards the
north, the meridian altitude changes from south to
north, and Its complement is the distance of the sun
from the zenith towards that quarter. At that time the
meridian altitude decreases as It Increased in the
south and becomes less until the first point of
Cancer Is reached, then It begins to Increase. When
the altitude becomes north the point of the shadow Is
directed south. Therefore, those places are designated
as 'of two shadows' because the point of the meridian
shadow is sometimes directed north and sometimes south-
233, Ma al-irtife'- wa'l-zill alladhl la samt
lihuma. That oirole of altitude which passes through
the two points of intersection of the
PRIME equinoctial with the horizon Is known as
VERTICAL the circle without samt, and also as the
circle of the beginning of the suinut
(prime vertical). When the sun Is In this circle its
altitude and shadow are described as without samt,
because it is then over the equinoctial point and
there Is consequently no Interval between the samt
and the equinoctial point until the sun diverges
northwards.
t «« 0 *•
lr^-« vJ^ll UJf«tXLi 1
^>U\y f ji^J«-L«l-ti>^»L-' y *.»
T^ > <jls=>L^= .J^<Aju"j\>l >j |.«JL^J
t 4J % i0 ' ^ • . ^ •
L 0 "* w h ^'
^j^VîL^_î»)\A I jfijj UrLtt«" £-Li>j\ J*
—iyîl Jli Jj^
—S^s» >^»>ijL^^,^v*Li"^\lj^lv^t
>\Vl_4Âj^c^Jo. yiJl Vib * -*^£. Ljw.Xx-VVJai.
4
IC *" L ** * ^ t *
234-236
234. Mq zlll al-âsr. This in tlie opinion of the
ImSms ia the length of shadow which determines the time
of the end of the early afternoon
SHADOW
r OF THE prayer zuhr, and the beginning of the
ASR PRAYER late afiernoon prayer, ra3£.» and its
end. If the length of the'meridian
shadow is known, called fi11-zawgl, then the shadow Is
observed until it r ia twice as long; this ia the
beginning of the a3r according to the ImSms of the
Hijdz, and is called, zlvSdah al-mithl and Is marked on
the Instruments, awwal al-âsr.
If the shadow is oCserved until It is twice as
long, thisr is the time of the_ra9r according to the
*nflma of Iraq., is called zlyadah al-mithlaln, and is
marked on the instruments akhir al-rasr.
235. Ma samt al-qiblah. The folnt of the horizon
corresponding "ko ihe qibla la that where the horizon ia
intersected by the circle passing
throuî the zenith of the locality and
that of Mecca. Its distance from the
equator or the meridian is the measure
which it is incumbent on
any one at prayer to use
in determining the
situation of the qibla.
Eff. Equinoctial. ZM, Zenith
of Mecca. ZT. of a town.
3N. Meridian of Town.
ZU P. North Pole. Q,. Samt of
the Qibla. Q3. Distance
from the meridian of
Town.
QW. from the equator.
ZML and P. Latitude and
Colatitude of Mecca.
ZTP. Colatitude of Town.
«
^ In a modem Arab dally calendar the.times for prayer
are marked thus:- e.g. March 21st, for fajr, dawn
4,19, ^ for shar'Qq, sunrise, 6,01, f for gharQb,
sunset, 6,07, £, for 3,30 and ^ for Tshd,
2early night prayer, 7,37.
There is a lacuna in this LK. involving paragrajii 236
which is supplied from 44v and 45r AO1.
'J ,
A! > ';—Aii ^jrvVj

—^ -,_; I ^ li^JJ' jAVVj-Jt ^J^^yj.1 ^li
^r-'"li' >^l\lL4^-' -■.g?c!^j--A'l-*^'

10
> r^" ^ * > ' ' .' ^ ■' > .• /
^ t J51 t/Ul
' —-A^vJ £>«• vJLto-^
v; W/U
SJ
jjA]\J.I>
u
ly^
AUXL. »iiu,^ Lliu
^J Uy
1
oi'
236
236. Ma al-BQellm. Members of this profession thviiie
the habitable land into seven long strips from east to
, west parallel to the equator oalled
CLB<1ATB3, ,ollmate8,. The principle of the division
is that the middle points of contiguous
strips differ from each other by half an hour in the
length of the lQn£pst summer day. For the change in these con-
ditions is dependent on latitude and is not affected by
longitude #iioh only causes differenoos in the beglnnl^
of day and night,5 matter which is not obvious without
consideration. In the central climate» the fourth, the
longest day,is fourteen hours and a half,in the first
thirteen and in the seventh,sixteen. In view of the flact
that the books contain contradictory statements as to
the latitudes of the climates.dependent on differences
of opinion as to the obliquity of the ecliptic,dlfibrent
methods of subdivision determining sines .and the ability
of the calculators to distinguish between truth and
falsehood,1 have made calculations myself and recorded
them in this table with the utmost accuracy.
Longest summer Sun- summer
Day LatltJiadet rise Pc int Shac OWt
The Climates. hr. nln. o 0
[Equator 12 ,. . , 23 25 •, . •
Beginning of first
climate 12 45 12 39 24 13 S 2 19
Middle 13 . . 16 39 24 42 1 28
Beginning of second 13 15 20 27 25 17 39
Middle 13 30 24 13 26 N. . 6
Beginning of third 13 45 27 28 26 49 49
Middle 14 . . 30 39 27 41 1 29
Beginning of fourth 14 15 33 37 28 44 2 27
Middle 14 30 36 21 29 48 2 43
Beginning of fifth 14 45 -*38 54 30 57 3 17
Middle 15 ,, 41 14 32 9 3 49
Beginning of sixth 15 15 43 23 33 25 4 19
Middle 15 30 45 22 34 44 4 48
Beginning of seventh 15 45 47 11 36 5 5 15
Middle 16 ,, 48 52 37 29 5 40
End of seventh 16 15 50 25 38 55 6 4
In the minutes of shadow P 28 was skipped and an addit-
ional 15 introduced lower down. Ao has moved 2.19 into
the equator line,and introduced an additional 4.19 to
fill the gap.The first three shadows point south; jirm
in AO and iOl for jantlb: US has 8.17 and 49 for 3
Cf. Wledemann Beltrdge, XX7II p. 11. Bar-Hebraeus ie-
fines the length of the day at higher latitudes.Nau,pd2B.
138
P âI—^-.um't-
•"^W u^LL^, jj I JjilJ^ j J1 >'o' 'a J^cXUJI

4
• • ^
—jt '^MLl «4_r<-! J-P'-"
Wl—^y -i' i^W'-,l>s-'J Ur-^
A-
J^j.
w- Vi,
% tfo </
v
II -AN 1 ^ I J •n "1 —v iw.MJku.
1 ia-^l wl j. J-- l ni V_*l -jv^-esi j;i|
,i r. i i i _ii i i» • •4>
t J" .i J A f-
î< -i
j_JI wa J J ^ CX~- 1
la* "t 1
J A. ^lauswjj
Jai- I L JaJ J Mi
—-» jL J V A wl
* w' f -a> li J j ■M I A _ -Q J
-A c j J a J <KJt, L-i^ ^yuji
..-la. z: )p i -4. I 4,
11 Ja» . A> +- ; 4- A. 4
-f 5 —A-4 J 4 1 ^ ., ^
A • 0 L ~r tu A, |
_» 0 aT j ^ f V 1 S '-J .1
4 A * 1 v-^^
h
237-230
T 237. Ma alladhl ru^rad fl*l-aqalim wa hal bardha
ara5rah. Ptolemy considered td.at the limit of tlie
habitable land is the Island of
CHARACTEHISTIC3 Thule (situated in the country of
OF CLIMATES the Slavonians in the Varangian
Sea.P) Its latitude is nearly the
same as the complement of the obliquity of the ecliptic,
viz* 66°. As for the people who live in the last part
of the seventh climate as far north as the Island of
Thule, they are more like savages than human beings and
as regards the conditions of existence, are living in
the extreme of misery. The further you penetrate to the
north the more do the conditions described prevail. The
points of the horizon at which the sun rises in summer
and winter keep getting further apart until eventually
they coincide with their sunset points at that latitude
which corresponds with the complement of the obliquity
of the ecliptic. Then the parallel of the beginning of
Cancer is always visible, and the longest day is 24
hours [without night: that of the beginning of Capri- ^
com is never visible and the longest night is 24 hoursr
without day. There also the pole of the ecliptic passes
over the zenith once every day, at which time the zodiac
belt coincides with the horizon, (and nothing is seen
of it until the pole passes away from the zenith,)p whai
suddenly six constellations rise altogether. Here also
is the beginning of those places where the shadow of a
gnomon revolves round it uninterruptedly(ytfien the sun is
at the first point of Cancer, and the further you
penetrate to the north the number of 15circles in which
this condition obtains is increased.)
230. Fama alladhl yuâd flma wera hadha el-mamjl ^
Beyond this point in adoltlo." to the parallel of 0^
Cancer, other parallels become visible,
BEYOND 66° and, as long as the sun is there, day
persists, and the longest day instead of
being one of 24 hours, lasts for several days, and
increases in length until it becomes a month or months.
In the south, the parallels round about 0° of Capricorn
are invisible, and when the sun is there, the longest
night in the north becomes first days and then months
in length,in proportion as you penetrate further north.
^ Line dropped in MS."

^* *^y ^ » 1 I 'I ""''j l * .* '
» • 1** 59 *' «
4 m
^ i ' :«
•>—^3 Uv-j-^-ô ^ MJi\i/i—^!>^£-->r > jUlj
—3^_^v A' ^ ^li^x"-^1,? >^.) LJ^ aA-^J -(Ji-i-»A_*jj]
f7A AJj3»-^ X^J-jyX^-A '—

< ,
* - f ' \. '•
ij Hi Ml ' 7-. ♦ j; AHJ
CL ' ^ •- '
^.' ^J54L-HV5VVy3> 1 >^-1 jlt.*5V)rl'
.v •. J;, "
y\_^y
238-239
In guch places at certain times the rising of the signs
takes place contrary to the order of succession as e.g.
Taurus, Aries, Pisces, Aquarius.^ And just as at the
equator the circles of declination are perpendicular to
the horizon (for that reason the orbit here Is apoken
of as the erect sphere falak muataqlm or kurah
muntaglbah, f guy rast1'], so In places possessing
latitude thaafl pnraiiflifl become inclined to the horizon,
and the revolution of the heavens is then oblique like
a shoulder belt, hama* 11.
The highest latitude la when the pole Is overhead,
and the equinoctial Is on the horizon, the parallels of
north declinations are all visible [and coincide with
the nruqanteras of altltude]P, those of the south are
Invisible [and celnclde with the muqantares of
depression]^ and the movement of the heavens overhead
is like that of a millstone. As soon as the sun moves
north from the equinoctial It becomes visible; while
when It moves south It disappears, so the period [dur-
ing vdiioh the sun traverses the zodiac andj^ which we
call a year Is like a single nyohthemeron^day lasting
for six months and a night for the remainder of the year.
239. Q.ubbat al-ard. A central point of longitude
between East and West of the habitable world la called
the cupola of the earth qubbat al-ard.
CUPOLA OF Sometimes It Is described as lacking rard,
THE EARTH latitude, because It Is on the equator.
We do not know whether this Is an
expression of opinion of the Persians, or others, at2
least the Greek books do not mention It. The Hindus
however say that It is a high place named Lanka, the
home of (devils (shayfitin) and perls)^, and that under
the North Pole there Is a mountain called Mlru, the
abode of angels. On the line Joining Lenka and Mlru la
the city Auzln (Ujjaln) In the Melwa Kingdom, the
fortress Ruhltak (Rohtak), the plain of Tanlshar
(Thaneshwar} and (the district of the Jaxoan (Jumna)
where are)? the snow-clad mountains which separate
India from Turkestan.3
12 Jagmlni, Zelta. Deut. Morgenl. Gesell. 2LYII, p. 204.

3 India I 316.
v. Sedlllot, Uaterlaux II. 651 seq.
c^ I _iil j ^ j^y,! ^=.3 jiji i jr
>yj, ,0^Jiu f-t-J-*

** j >- '* ' '^ ^
jCl ^ 141^=^^ l-Â^ J ^ ^^V^-Li2al^,L^,
jjlitf .yÔLll Urj -3 î/i^£jJ^Lj\ 5^$ ' ^" -J J 3> >
^*-l2-lv^ iJ J U y iJLa V^ ^ - jj UJt A-a.-^ ^lf=» 4

I* J
^ •' O f ".
-- ^
f—«-—A_J lia loj ii?_)-iAl/L.! l^J
J ' ' '' '
* ^ 9 • '
i2--o jt^^lVyi^—l.y* Ir-'V ■'k'a\I JJyl'
. • . . - ' ' 1
240
240. rahal qlsmat al-ard tlfihayr al-aqallm. OtOther
me thodds of subdividing tne TancC exist beslcfes tiiat of
the seven climates. A tale is told
OTHER DIVISIONS of Afrldun, one of the Jtlngs
JabShirah of the Persians, that he
divided the world into three portions between his
three sons. The Eastei'ii part including Turkestan and
China he gave at his death to Tur,1 the Western oon-
taining Rum to Salm» and the Central part embracing the
Iranian countries (Irinshehr) to Ir5j. This is a
division by longitude.
Then there is that of the Prophet Noah {on whom be
peace] which Is by latitude, but also Into three parts.
At his death he gave the South where the Blacks ere to
Hmm, and the North where the Whites live to Yafeth, and
ihe Central part the abode of the Browns to S5m.
The Greeks also, have a threefold division, differ-
ent from the foregoing. In the first place they divide
the world into two through Egypt, the Eastern part
being spoken of in a general way as Asia,2 while that
towards the West and the Mediterranean is divided Into
two, Libya to the South including the black and brown
inhabitants and Europe^ to the North with white and red
inhabitants. In view of the fact that Asia is many
times larger than the two Western divisions, they
separated rIraq, Fars and Khurfisfin from It under the
name of Asia Minor, the rest being Asia Major. These
methods of division are represented below,
3 S
Turkestan Ir5n-shahr RQIQ Blacks to 9am
E to to to W E Browns to S5m
Tur IraJ Salm Whites to Yafeth
IT
Division of Faridun Division of Noah
1 Libya
ASIA
livislon of 1
the Greeks. Major | Minor Europe
1
APL TOJ. PP TUgh.
2 Aisiyya AO. Ansiyfi MS. Absiya PP.
3 AuraqI.
141
"> , J'' ' ti •-
Sîjji. '< •' \i
-r^}) ' ^r^^/Ao^}-^--A^^ji«l^
JU^b ^LJ
OrLyftj f >-jl1/o^l)U^^j
--w--/- L uW ^QÛ ii
^ ,_/t-^ jl*1»J i-^ sOLv.)
^y"-'Vtj^*W' * i-J
ij- i 1 f .>Û)| -Pr^1 'Si

sJir"
fLxijz .^.! |
J>L' 1
rvli P
•> JI> v^J
—r,«^rl
/ W—'' o r
I- -O' VP' ^
te'
240
The Persians divided the world by the kingdoms
into seven regions (kishwarat) and attributed this
division to Hermes..It is represented in the following
figure.
SnS Eishwar
I-o roc co
st Klsnwar rd Ki shwar
India Syria
4 th Elshwar
Iranshahr
rth Kishwar 5th Klshwai
China Sum
& £
Tibet 6 th KMiwar k Slavonia
Khaearla
&.
. Turkestan >
The Hindus divide the world into nine portions
called nukand (navakhanda) to eight of which they give
names in their own language corresponding to the points
of the compass, while the ninth is the central part as
represented in the figure.1
E B S
s W
ignlya Dakshlna Nairrlta
Madhya-
desa
E Pftrva Centre Pashchlm w
of
Empire
Esh&na Uttara Yayava
H w
1
.1 N If
India I 290. These names really losan North South &c.
the Khanda are represented in India I, 296.
-ifciUt
vXJi Ûji
£p ^-^vJ
Ijjî
aJLUI
>•
tK-Aj Wj —~^X
^vJ*i.Lv
841
241. MB fl'l-aggltm mln al-bllBd. Since the latit-
udes of the heglimlng and end of eacb climate are given
in the table in 236lit is easy to know In
CITISS IN which climate a city is situated if its
THE CLIMATES latitude is known, But the latitudes of
such cities as are recorded in books are
very Inaccurate. We have hitherto not had the opportunity
of getting accurate results,except to a certain extent,
accordingly the following list of the cities situated in
the various climates is only approximate,but certainly
nearer to the truth than has hitherto been published.
We have stated that,following the equator from the
east where it begins in the1 sea to the south of China,
it passes through the ZanJ Islands (zavahjP known as
the Iftnd of gold.then moves between the two islands
Kalah8 and Sarfra (Sarbazah)1*' to the south of the Island
of Sarandib (Ceylon),and through the Dlbaiat Islands
(Dlvap4 to the north of the ZailJ people,5 their islands,
coasts and low-lying grounds," passing thence north of the
Mountains of the Moon© to end in the Western Ocean,
The first climate begins with the east of the
Chinese Empire,traverses the Chinese Sea,and contains
those cities which are Its ports, and where are the
rivers on which the merchants' boats ascend into the
interior like Khanju and KhXnqu.0 The Island of
Sarandlb belongs here,and of the Yemen country every-
thing
r that is south of ân^^llke Dhofar.âdramaut and
Aden; then in Africa it includes Dongola.a city of the
Nubians, and Gh^nah of the Western Sudanese, after
which the Western Ocean is reached.
The second climate begins with some of the cities
of China, traverses Hindustan north of the Qamrun
Mountains and contains KanauJ, Baranaal, and UJJain^
and several of those cities which are on the aea-coast
like Thanah.jlmur and Sindan fSahlan^-also cities of
i But in other K3S^ zabij. P hass quite clearly z«vah (J&va
froup)-, 2 Malay Peninsula, Sumatra. J Maldlve I si.
ZanuJ, P. ZanglySn, 6 like Zanzibar. 7 p has here
Sofala al-ZanJ which Is far south of the Equator.
8 Or White Mountains,qumr,instead of qamar,referring to
the snow-capped Ruwenzori,Kenya and Kilimanjaro. See
Storbeok,l.o, p. 19 and Sedlllot, Mem. II. 752.
9 These names suggest Hang-chow and Rang-kow; the latter
might be Khanfu the port of Hang-chow. Devio,Llvre des
Mervelllos de I'Inde,I885,p, 215 - Nallino, however,
thinks both refer to Canton (Khwang-chowfu,) and Hong-
Kong,Atti Llncel 1894 II, 43.
143
LIU La ^
^ . •■v 'V—■.* .' *

' > li LUU^^* ^ -^'LT<41^fi^^'^-r*£=,|L=-(Ji
5
- J 4s»J Z_r=>± U^^^'Û-Lloj
' .' L > *
v. ^L-> ^L/1 UU ^ jtLvLL) ' J >tj LiL^j ^jc. Lc—1_^
^ v' ' * .• * '* '
^ \Jj^h i ^4^ ■ ^.-^^'•?tuJI
vLL»U«-jLL- <*,LÛ'' vu Ul
^>*3< LJC^-VU^3
tiÛV
v
y ' ' % ■' ^ (- .* #
-îCJLôLlLJu jjL^< 4vtJ^^!M[t!j^L,;.3r>''

' ■ » ' f
241
Sind like Mansttredi and Dalbal; thereafter fUiiiman and the
Arab districts of HaJar,Nejran,Yemnmn,Mahra,Saha
Tabalah, Al-'Jalf, Jlddah,Mecca end Madlnah Yathrlb.
Then the Abyssinian Kingdom and the country of the Bejeh,
the cities of Aswan and Qua, Al-Sa'Id al-a**!!, and
south of the cities of Ifrlqlyya (Tunisia) and Morocco
before arriving at the Western Ocean.
The third climate begins in the east of China
and includes the Capital of the Empire: then comes the
centre of the Indian Empire with Tanlshar and Qandahar
and the cities of SlndjMultanjTahama,! and Karar; then
the mountains of the Afghans,on to ZabullstSn,2Wallstan
Sijlstan, Klrman, Pars, Isfahan, Al-Ahwaz, Al-Basra,
Al-Kufa, and rIr5q and the cities of MesopotajniajSyrla^
and Palestine, Bait al-maqdis,* end Qulzum,5 AI-Tlh and
Egypt, Alexandria, and the cities of Barqa and N» Africa
the tribes of the Berbers and so by Tahart and Sus to
Tangier and the Western Ocean.
The fourth climate begins with China and Tibet,
Qital and Khotan,6 and the cities within these, contin-
ues across the mountains of Kashmir,Balur (Bolor) WakhiSn,
and Badakhshen towards Kabfll and GhQr,Herfft,Balkh,
yokhfiristfin,7 Merv, Quhlstan,® Nlshabur, Qumis, Jur^Sn
(Gurgfin)^ TabarlstBn,Bal,Qumm,Hamadan,Mausul,Adarbai
1 jan,
(AdharbadgSn)p * ManbljjTarsuSjârran,the Passes (of the
Chrlstlans) and Antloch,the Islands of Cyprus,Bhodefl
and Sicily,ending at the straits separating Andalucla
from Morocco called zuqaq.
The fifth climate begins with the country of
the Eastern Turks, and the territories of Gog and Magog,
Yajflj and Majflj,wlth the surrounding wall,® pasees the
mo tains uf the Turks with their well-known tribes,
1 Several MSS have nlhgyet.
2 p. MSS have ZSwulistan (according to TUllers a
colloquial form), WBlistan or WSlishtfin absent in PL
but Waltlsan in PP,perhaps a fragment of the coll. form.
43 MS has shapilr for Al-Sha^.
5 Jerusalem, MS has muqaddis.
Near Suez.
6 Misspelt in MS. Khital,Northern China,from the Khltan
nation which ruled over'it in the 10th and llth centur-
ies, the Cathay of mediaeval Europe,still used in Bussian
and Turkl for China.
87 South of the middle Oius,v.Marquart,Eran-Shahr.
s Kdhlstfin P.
The great wall of China was attributed to Alexander,
wa aadd-1 Slkandar anjast PL1.
144
Ai=>4r*.1 2>»> tJuLiJlj^lL j
îjc^cJO'^ldYl Ulj
^r jî l«r=^^'-*î>L-^liJ L-i') J!U-J i*»V5 JL-jj sj=*}
^rluis i j y_ L-Ab ej)4

. <k » v ^ » ' ) J » ;!•
5 V^y-^/3-1 Ij>-^W|4_X-^Jj»/A»i^ —IJ;>
5 * * v , •»
IaIsYIL^.?
'^"y {y r; ' i
^y{jj kUy-UÛy^JJj_5LJ' »
y '' ' ^ ?
311^ > j^JO^*- ^ -'"ii-J4l_r '*^îl'^=>J
) > AAJ
•* ' V " •' » V
^ * *• ** ^ * •*
241-242
andârrlyes at KHahghar, Balasaghiin,1 Thasht, Ferghana.
Isbijab,3 Al-Shash,? Ushrushna, Samarqand, Bukhara,
Khwfirim. and the Sea of the Khazare (known also as
Abisldin)^[the Caspian] and passes Bflb al-abwEb (Derbend
of the I3iazars)p, BardaTa, MalyafBrqln,5 Armenia, the
Passes Into Asia Minor, the oltles there,then crosses
over Rilmlya the Great, the country of the Gallolans^
and the cities of Andalus to end in the encircling Ocean-
The slith climate begins among the dwelling-
places of the Eastern Turks with 8the and Q.tln, the
Khlrkhlz and Kamak and Taghazghaz towards the Turcoman
country and FSrBb, the city of the Khazars (Xtll)9 to
the north of their Sea and the Alans-^-0 [and As]P who
occupy the country between that sea and the Sea of
Treblzond which leads to Constantinople, BurJan,11
France and Northern Spain where It ends In the Western
Ocean.
The seventh climate contains little habitable
land; however In the east there are forests and
mountains which shelter groups of Turks In a miserable
condition, then the Bashkhlrt mountains are reached and
the boundaries of the Ghuzz and Peohenegs,the two
cities of Suwflr12 and BulghEr, Russia, Slavonla,
Bulgharlya end MaJrar,13 and finally the Western Ocean.
Beyond this climate there are few people living, except
groups like the Ansu, the Varangians,14 the Bardah and
the like.
242. Ma aatall*' al-burul wa daraj al-suwa* The
daraj al-suwa are the equal degrees into which the
ecliptic is divided, each sign having
CO-ASCENSIONS thirty degrees. Since the ecliptic Is
related to a pole different from that
of the first movement, the degrees of the signs as they
ascend do not correspond to the divisions of the equi-
noctial, and so in the case of each sign the arc of the
1
See the long and Interesting note,Tarlkh-l RoahELl p.361.
2 There Is a KhBaht on the frontier of Ferghana, Lands
East.
3 Caliphate p. 485.
Sip Jab or SlpIJHb ? Slpenjab In Shahnfimah, Modern
Salram near Chlmchend.
45 ChSch P. Old Taahkend.
6 Now Farkin near Dlyarbekr, Martyropolis.
v. Lopfea, Trols falta de phonetlque hlstorlque Arab-
Hi span! que; Internat. Or!en. Congr. 1905 p.245. PP has
Jallqiyah for Gallcia.as In IdrlsljEome 1592,Sheet 32
145
.•' * 'x's • i i • * ■ ■> " '
_ l»L»j At >> J —->1 yVT —T'ci'-' ^Jj4^ J/* J jlij Aj^. j
u.'' t ' '
^j\ \cf ?' J>t X-^-J
" • W- ' *#\'"* f '' ■'
j i-UU <J> il J> J, U=. j^h
If-1 *£-_? [^3 L, jijt

, ^ '•* '' * "^ *'
^^ ^ ^ ''
^ * • 9^ * i
A. 5 * JtajlJiAjjl ^_$ aI * ^ 1"
4
iy > JJJ 3 '^^drcJd' f^.-"
3 3 ^Ll*} I ^3^)13J, IAfea^J

242
equinoctial which rises with it is different from that
which rises with another sign. [Similarly the degrees
of the signs as they set do not correspond with the
divisions of the equinoctial.]^ At the equator the
ascensions being vertical are said to occur in the erect
sphere, and there the ascensions of sets of four signs
are equal if the signs are equidistant north or south
of the equinoctial points. Thus Aries and Pisces which
are at the same distance from the vernal equinox as
Libra and Virgo from the autumnal,have all equal
ascensions. The same is true of Taurus and Aquarius and
Leo end Scorplusjas well as of the four other signs.
Again the descensions of these signs are equal to their
ascensions. But these facts are only true at the
equator; as soon as a place has latitude the signs equi-
distant from the equinoxes have still equal ascensions,
this is true of Aries and Pi sees,and of Libra and Virgo,
but these groups are no longer equal to each other. If
however the ascension of a sign be added to that of its
nadir,the result is equal to the sum of their asoensiais
at the equator. Moreover the descenslon of any sign is
equal to the ascension of its nadir. The table shows
the ascensions of the signs at the equator and in the.
middle of each of the seven climates.
^ Qay occurs in a list of Turkish tribes, Browne Vol.
Orient. Stud. p. 407. Kien-Kun? Gzaplloka, Turks of
Central Asia. p. 66.
B Kirghiz, KlmSk and Tughuzghuz (Toqquz-Oghuz) (MS has
initial B for T} PP has Klmak, all three neighbours.
9
Near Astrakhan.
10 P Alan, T,S Allan both without '"ain. MS has al-sarir?
between the Caspian and Black Seas. The Alans and As
are represented by the Ossetes.
11 The Bulghars on the Danube were also called Burjan,
Encycl. Islam I 806.
12 suwSr and Bulghar were two large cities of the
Bulghars on the Volga south of Kazan.
13 A has Bulgharlyar alone,PL MaJ rar alone PP both
Bulghariya and Maj ar. Bulgaria lies south of the 44th
parallel and is therefore largely in the 6th clifflate,
while a large part of Hungary is in the 7th. Hungary
is generally spelt Ma Jar without rain.
14 The sjelling of these names la so varied that it
is impossible to Identify them except the Varangians.
^/i^£:>J&i\J>J ^--*'. ^-J' (Lr^'
-OÛ-
^ _V)' _jlj)U_J^^lii- Jiljtfeij ~i 1 -A.LjJ\3»jjl»
-y J L-^J^ru
"-"Sj^jîLllLallj ^îi^'^tJ-^'
J
^îL»LiL**rl 5lX_i»-i\ykj Jd.-jlLi1 ^r>
JjjJJ U-*^.
f 1 • ^
ll i— *
—CaJ-"®^'
242-243
Cap ri- Sagit-

krles Aqua rlus CO rn tarius Scorplus Lit»ra
1 and a ad an d and and arid
Pisces Tau rue Gem ini Cancer Leo Vlr go
311matea
10 ' 0 * 0 * 0 t 0 r 0 r
Squator kv 53 29 54 32 13 32 13 29 54 27 53
ildule of!
First 134 20 27 4 31 6 33 26 32 44 31 20
Second La 37 25 38 30 30 34 2 34 10 33 3
Third ko 53 24 12 29 55 34 38 35 36 34 47
Fourth tL9 21 22 53 29 17 35 7 36 58 36 25
Fifth I? 38 21 20 28 39 35 53 38 31 38 6
Sixth lL5 55 19 52 27 58 36 34 39 57 39 44
1
Seventh tL4 80 18 23 27 17 37 15 41 25 41 20
_ 243, Ma dara jah al-kavrkab na darajah m&marrhu wa

tulu_rhu ws pjiurabhuv If a star has no latitude, the
degree of the ecliptic on which it
'DEGREE* OF la situated rises, sets end passes
A STAR the meridian with it. 1But if it
has latitude, Its degree is that
point of the ecliptic which is intersected
1
epoch according to Nau p. 153 and Delamhre IX 575,
but not Ptolemy's ôxn-
147
\A^x^fs^
yKt
U" ^ Û0!L. I/ |;V ^ 1 Cj- -q <v
■d^ ^ zts-fbi _ %
fj
v
/ ^ / ^ r^ WU ^ f1^/
-Mv+y^^1 er /Z/
{ v|vjvy VjV i v^j^s. ^ ■ lllM
^ >|^>| ^ >|^t/ ^ t ^>0i
' TT^py yfet p pL ^

' x'"y ^ V* y -!<* ' P^lji
f/ <ps. 4 ^ ^
i c^1
9 ^
^ ^' "■'ft î. ,' ° ^

243
by Its olrole of latitude, i.e, the great circle pass-
ing through the star and the poles of the ecliptic.
If the latitude is north, the star rises before Its
degree, and sets later, while If south, it rises later
and sets earlier. So It is plain that the degree which
rises with a star is different from its ♦epoch', and
must be distinguished as the degree of Its rising, and
similarly, that which sets with it as the degree of
its setting. If the degree of the star with latitude
should be on a solstice, the arrival of the star at
the meridian will coincide with that of its degree,
whether its latitude be north or south. If the degree
of a star, not on a solstice, is on the ascending
half of the ecliptic, 377, from the beginning of
Capricorn to the end of Gemini, and its latitude is
north, the star arrives at the meridian before1 its
degree, if its latitude is south, after its degree.
On the other hand if its degree is in the descending
half from the beginning of Cancer to the end of
Sagittarius, and its latitude is north, it arrives
at the meridian after its degree, if south before.
So it is plain that the arrival of a star at the
meridian according to the above-mentioned conditions
takes place with a degree other than its own, and
that is known as the degree of passage, mamarr. The
condition at the meridian under the earth is the
same as that above it, the degree of passage being
the same in each case.
^ Cf. Jagmlnl. Zeit. deut. morg. gesell. ILYII, p. 868.

Both A and P MSS have 'after' Instead of 'before' and
v.v. in this passage. Correct in Nau, I.e. p. 153,
148
1.
>1L> I
^.^Z73^
^,14 ^ ^ 'S , i
•> \ [^\^ô/^Jt\^=J> îj^/^ltyj'^*'^
TV- * * " * ' ^ ' s- 6

^ ^ - •*
/-^J> «JLj^ ^ l-.l^l
V^ ,» * -" * J*
-i»>li\_jt^J_|jA^JS 3 ">Wj^-*^ -JjfrLj^-JLiaiJ

s" • t ' „ ,f • ■* ^
i-iy>5UlUi
*> Lj^LJL-J wjfl- J

244-247
244. Ma &l-da*lr mln cl-falak. When you know how
many hours of the day have pa seed}then if they are ecjBl
hours 135 multiply by fifteen, and
ARC OF REVOLUTION if Hindu1 gharls 137 by six, and if
brooked (unequal) hours by the
number of degrees of the equinoctial contained in one-
twelfth of the arc of day, the result is called the
d5f ir or arc of revolution of the orbit,or the number
of degrees (azmEn) of the equinoctial which have risen
from sunrise till -that time. The same procedure must be
followed with the number of night hours elapsed, only if
these are crooked hours they must be multiplied by the
number of degrees in ^2 of the arc of night,or which
is the same thing,by those of the nadir of the day.l
245. ys al-talir. That portion of the zodiac which
arises on the eastern horizon at any particular time is
called the sign of the ascendant or
ASCENDANT horoscope,2 and the particular degree
thereof, the degree of the ascendant,
246. Ma al-buyut. If starting from the degree of
the ascendant the zodiac belt be divided into twelve
unequal parts,2 the first of these
THE TWELVE ,H0USES, is known as the first 'house' the
second in the order of succession
of the signs as the second,and so on to the twelfth
which comes back to the ascendant. The degrees of any
house are identical with those of the seventh from it.
This process is called the equalization or adjustment
of the houses.
247. Ma al-autad wa ma'lllha warl-zawa'11. Those
houses which are situated on the east and west horizons
and on the meridian above and below
ANGLES 3UCCEDENT the earth,are called the four angles
AND CADEOT or cardlnes or pivots (aut5d>; the
first of these Is the ascendant,the
second.the
ee
fourth house,also called the earth-pivot
12 5 after 390.
mpdj the degree ascending - Garnett Class. Rev. 1699.
Horoscope later used for a figure of the heavens at a
nativity. Figs, on pp. xou, 190, 191.
^ The houses are twelve equal parts of the visible
heavenr divided by great circles passing through twelve
equal divisions of the prime vertical, 233; as the ecliotic
is not In the same plane they are unequal divisions of it.
149
^ >11—l\-»
ti-'
L^) \t u L^-^rJ—> >_jua'A-i2Â^) It L.lj^|

J
' ' ^
Îa'I 5 y4-3 -*—'
Cj) ^^=4 r.*— _Ju) U-^-j ■4^r<Al^
p^/4^ -W? ^
uu>v^'Û> J5vî
3] L&LLol & ^ l»
^ ' ** * <* „
J
^^ 0' l-*-^J '-%/* '^-"^r"
10* ' •*^' •. •" ^ ^ (03 -f « '"
^liiiij^jjVjj»Ll>yii^VJî-L LiU^Ma^LJub
247-250
(Imum medium coelum) I.e.,the third the seventh or
Occident angle and the fourth the tenth house or 'medinin
coelum1 M*C. Those houses which follow the angles in the
order of succession of the
MC signs are said to be Tma'ill
al-nutfid'(succedent), they
/"X x II / X are the 2nd,5th,0th and llth,
/ XI V— vim. and these are ready by the
diurnal movement to occupy
the cardinal positions.
Those which are adjacent to
\ YIl\ the
f II1/ angles in the contrary
direction viz. the 3rd,5th,
1
1 v / V! / 9th and 12th houses are
called ZawB11, ( cadent),
because they Lave already
\ 11 V / been in the cardinal posi-
x / in iv \ / tions. Some people use the
expression 'SSqit* for
za'iljbut I prefer not to
do so,as that has another
A, the Ascendant is at the l3-^ meaning (inconjunot) and
degree, cusp, of the Grst hcuse. ambiguity is apt to arise.
240, Ma al-autad al-oaTlmah wa gbairha. The cardo
of M.C. is tne tenth house,if its degree,cusp,should be
in the tenth sign from the horoscope the
ANGLES ERECT cardinCs are called c^1 im,erect;if in
OR NOT the 11th,succedent,ani if in the 9th
cadent.
249. Ma tahwll al-slnln. A solar year is the period
during Tdiich the sun maxes a complete circuit of the
ecliptic,and by universal consent of
ANNIVERSARY authorities the solar year is completed
by the return to the first point of Aides.
A year of life (the anniversary of birth) Is completed
by the return of the sun to the position It was in when
the birth took place. Similarly with the beginnings of
other affairs: the ascendant of the time determined by
the Sun's return is the ascendant of the annlversaiy tabrll.
250. Ma al-qlr5n5t. Conjunction occurs between two
or more planexs wnen xney meet at one point within the
length of a sign. The conjunction of
CONJUNCTIONS Saturn and Jupiter which occurs once
every 20 years is the qiran par esoellgpe
' h- ^
jg-^y >i>^ i^j.}yi',
ji ^ 1 ■> l ^ ^ Ifeajtfj y. .'•■£• U^^^LiW/oV—Ai i_JW^-l ^»j—J)
^ U^îiûVfL tiu>.vi
^ y"*-'- jlj ÛUUV. '^..Ill-.U
^ji, \i >UV. 1jjvU3caII« >1<V. ■• /-Îkil
Jîr
^ ^c—AjTS
^llist'
y]r=&)J=*J
250-251
,
lInl^laq• and Is known as a lesser oonjunction.1 If this
be studied In relation to the mean rate of progress of
the planets,2 it will be found that the next conjunctlcai
will take place In the 9th sign from that In îloh It
last occurred,and thus the situations of consecutive
conjunctions proceed In the same trlpllolty for 12
tloes.after which conjunction occurs In another
trlpllolty. For example,if the first conjunction takes
place in Aries,the second will be In Sagittarius, the
third In Leo and the fourth In Aries. After the twelfth
conjunction has taken place which occurs In Leo, the
next meeting occurs In the trlpllolty of Taurus, the
first In Taurus,the second In Capricorn,the third In
Ylrgo,and so on for 12 times. The changs from trlpllcity
to tripllolty takes place In 240 years end Is known as
the middle conjunction or transfer of the passage to
the new group of signs (Intlqgl al-mamarr), while the
tahwil (249) of the year In TOiich It takes place Is
called the te^wll of the trausfer. As there are four
trlpllcltiea,vlz- those of Aries,Taurus,Gemini and
Cancer,it takes 960 years for Saturn and Jhplter to get
back to conjunction In Aries,and this Is celled the
great conjunction.Astrologers also make use of the con-
junction which occurs between Saturn and Mars,but only
In one sign viz. Cancer; this takes place every 30 years?
251. Ma al-mamarr alladhl yustu^ll f^l-qlranat.
The expression transit (mamarr) In relation to conjunct-
lons Is not used unconditionally with
TRANSIT IN regard to the superior and inferior
CONJUNCTIONS planets, because If It were so, no
Inferior could be said to pass over a
superior one, since Its orbit Is Inferior, as e.g. the
passage of the moon over Mercury or Saturn Is absurd
and Impossible. However as It Is constantly said that
the moon passes over Mercury or the Sun over Saturn,the
meaning Is that regard must be had separately to their
positions In relation to the mid-distance on the
1 Cf. Chron. p. 91 on the connection between length of
life and these conjunctions,
2 Jupiter moves 30° In a year.Saturn 120*therefore when
Saturn has traversed 6 signs from a starting point
Jupiter
3 has made a complete circuit a signs. See 190.
The explanation Is that In 20 years Saturn traverses
2^° more than 8 signs of the zodiac, which In 240 years
amounts to a complete sign. Cf. fig. 373.
c/Ji^YizJ)CSx\ir^\,J.î- Viiiû,
a
••.' '> ' Cu , ^ " ^ . "'
îjui^jii^-1Liiîi:. j"
J^;
f^ tff^J i > v^r* ^ J—** ^J'. i_J^L«^

fîpv^îu;
1
J^-j^jl ^ ^k»-ic.^ ASal»p
LiJi^j^j di-'f
251-252
deferent and on the epicycle. If both planets were at
their mid-distance on the deferent, or on the same path
on the epicycle, the one would not >ass the other but
If one were in the first or fourth quadrant (nlt^q) of
its orbit, it would pass over that which was in the 2nd
or 2rd quadrant, although the orbit of the latter were
aboYe that of the former. If both were in the same
quadrant, e.g. the first, that which la furthest from
the mid-distance, would pass over the other which is
nearest to the mid-distance. And if both were in the
3rd quadrant the one nearest to the mid-distance would
pass over the other which was furthest from.lt. You
have to imagine, that both are in the one orbit, and
then Judge by the distance from the earth. But the
knowledge of all this is a separate science.
252. Ma alî^tlmS^wa^l^gtigbSl. The conjunction
of the sun and the moon takes place at the end of the
month; it is called in the
CONJUNCTION AND Almagest IttlaSl. the degree and
OPPOSITION OP MOON minute of~nre*srgn in which it
occurs being called the juz* al-
ijtlma^ and the ascendant of that time the tallr ql-
Ijtlmg''. This conjunction takes place when tie moon
la under the rays of the sun and is therefore
invisible; it is on this account called in Arabic
slrdr and muhaq. Opposition, istlobsl, occurs when the
moon is in~Tie seventh sign from the sun, and the
degrees end minutes of both are equal. This is the
time of full moon, imtllg, and, badr called so on
account of its haste to rise at sunset, and the
ascendant of this time is talir al-lstiqbal. The
juz* al-iatiqbal is generally understood to be the
exact degree in which the moon is, but astrologers are
in the habit of taking it from moon or sun, whichever
Is above ground.
t * '—ft3 ^ J, ^ '-^''t
^ * *' X
** ■-'' < ^ ^ "
W i^yj^lj^Jil j]ûi-^îîjfcj-
3
^-*^;c>. *jUJ IJ-^Jl V!>i!j^»^ »J>^^X^
•* ^ .. t* m * ' ■*'*'*' t-
•1 « ** V ' - WJ >' & wf

J to-1»,=- U i»' J Lil—
?\^3U=! »
❖ •
253-254
253. Ma al-nlmburln. 'iVlien tlie moon Is In tlie
fourth sign from the sun, and their degrees are the
qpniR) t.M r is the first quarter, and takes
HiU-MOON place approximately on the 7th night of
the month; when in the 10th sign, about
the 22nd night, this is the seoond quarter. These are
called by the Persians 'nlm purIn*, half-full, because
the moon appears to be out in two. The degrees of the
ascendants at these quarters are noted Just as they are
at conjunction and opposition.
254. Ma al-fasIsSt.^ The phases of the moon are
due to Its yarlous distances from the sun. As these
effect changes in the atmosphere and also
MOON'S crises of diseases, astrologers study them
PHASES from the angles of an octagon from the
position of the moon at the beginning of the
disease by Internals of a sign and a half, viz. at 45°,
90°, 135°, 160°, 225°, 270°. 315° and 360°. The phases
of the moon are as follows:- conjunction and opposltlcD,
12 degrees each side thereof, erery 45 degrees and both-
quarters, so that the result is, taken in the order of
sucoesslon of the signs, 0, 12°, 46°, 90°, 135°, 168°,
160°, 1920, 225°, 270°, 315°, and 348°.
1 Trnm mSg<e;. heTa fBshTshat, PT.1 r tHslshg. AbT

ta'sIsSt, as has Chron. text p. 340, line 22,
translated 'foundations' p. 342 line 13 and 447 n. as
if from assasa. For the same distances from the sun,
Wilson has Athazer: this can be explained from
Albohazen Haiy Vlli. 29 Basllea, 1571, where it is stated
that the athazlr, al-taaylr8t (apheses for obtaining
forecasts as to rain Ace) must be made at these phases.
Also p. 578,atezic.
'W^'^ti^l(?^'>' ^?' ^'il L^/ll
>u:,v,__ j^jJrr.A_--j L^^l-Hj il li^ >■ vOfV^^j

. > •- • r' 'fi •' * ■ •
'■. L-A—' la^ U^)LLLî * ♦^L-3:^' ^< '^.i
^ it? *_r»
ft^c-L-i.UjI »• -^J!j
- ■ ■' xf ^ o? if 'r^ r-'V ^ ■ -■ * . *'1^1
ÂUâifcJJL£=> ^^^
255-257.
255. Kufijif al-ganîr ma huwa. As the earth Is a
solid opaque body which vision cannot penetrate, the
radlanoe of the sun falls upon one surfaoe
ECLIPSE of it and the other is in shadow, Just like
OF MOON a solid body between a lamp and the wall on
which it is shining. Further as the earth
la round its shadow la also round, and falls on the
zodiac belt opposite the sun. Now when the moon at the
time of opposition has no latitude either to north or
south Its face is necessarily within the circle of the
earth's shadow, the earth intervening between It and
the sun. The radiance which always reaches it from the
sun is therefore cut off from it, its luminosity
ceases, and it la said to be eclipsed. When however at
the time of opposition the moon diverges from the
ecliptic if only to a small extent the eclipse Is pro-
portionally partial, and if to a large extent does
not occur at all.
^56. Fam5 lll-ra'a wa'l dhanab flhl mln al-athar.
The latitude of the moon la dependent on its distance
EFFECT should It be at one of these when in
OF NODES opposition or be as near it as less than
12°, there would either bo no or very
little divergence from the ecliptic. Its noarnoso
therefore thereto at the time of opposition brings all
or a part of it Into shadow and therefore the moon is
not eclipsed unless the nodes arc near the sun.
257. Kam anwSr kusuf al-qamar. A lunar eclipse
may be partial or total, if the latter, it may
continue for some tliaQ (delayed captivity,
KINDS OF makthl or as soon as it has become
ECLIPSE entirely dark. It may again begin to appear.
9
' ■ " .>

\>' ajL^sai'
_j/-, ^ j LÂAJ LljIJV^jx?^/^

■" ■ " « ' •■ > ' ' '. "
XJ^Laij «^«^jrPJ
j.>-.
^Jl^[£|_/'X> a*1 •^y^-'ti'

* -" * • ^ fc"
sJ/tf^J >U> ««»>^ JJL^L-AJ I
V , ^ V \ ■' > ^ /
<^11 j^=-
U'^^C
£<J2^~£=A 5 \ 4/^
1 ' 1 ^ ' * "' ^
•—'-^<-9L.* ri' ^-ii-*A^=V"C
258-259
858. Uln ayyatl Jlbat yabdu al-lqlsuf ■ The movement
of the earth's snadow on the ecliptic is the same as
the movement of the sun, but that of the
BEQIUNINQ moon Is quicker. The moon therefore at
OF ECLIPSE the full continues to move through that
shadow, first coming In contact with It
by its eastern margin. The beginning of an eclipse Is
therefore from the east, either absolutely or with
slight declination to north or south. Anyone who
remembers this will know that the end of the eclipse
will be on the westem margin, the beginning of the
luminosity again on the eastern, and the completion
thereof uncovering, inJIU' on the westem margin.
259. Earn auqBt kusQf el-nanmr. If the eclipse Is

partial, three periods may be dlstingulsbsd, the
beginning, when a notch appears on the
PERIODS OF margin of the moon, the middle, when
ECLIPSE the darkness has reached Its maximum
(the exact time of opposition), and
the end, when the meon has become entirely full
again. If It Is a total eclipse five stages may be
noted, the beginning, the complete obliteration of
Its light, the middle of the delay, the end thereof,
with the beginning of the Illumination, and finally
the escape from the shadow. The accompanying figure
will help to make the matter Intelligible.
<0
' ** sJ * * ^
(■ jl Ji^1 l_^,o'c^«-J T^-/
—^^jciû.j^Lfeajy |.jl jk=>-c_»>-fc=\^;:.)L i ;i

» . • , » ^4
3
^-.5 aL UU V ' -^Li i I
£ • fl-w. _) LtJl_LJa>iC
3" jj^jwr^\UVÛ^JUI j
Û Z. UL. Jc ^J>^_£=>1LJ^-^-''-
" ' '• ^ '' <
ivJ»l 1&J -J J vJi^»^—-jW i—>■»1
^ J ja—J L«1>1 r4 J^Jj <—t=J , .Vjlj
Ûi'^»"V ^vyiL».__îi_p.
- jL< (K .. ',
258-259
Circle of Stedo*
Partial eollptlo
eclipse
/beginning
lidle
end
Injlli"
Inollned
orbit
'Xlrcle of Sta
Total / eollptlo 1 Nod>--

eclipse t
\ middle L\- /beginning
end/
Inclined
orbits
'u
Ut
k
%
7
lJ
>ll'U
' 7>
Mt-Vt
260-261
Circle
1.Beginning of eollpse,
shadow
2.Beginning of delay.
Total loliose or) Bnllntla Wjji 5.Middle of eclipse,
Hoon with delay 1
4,Bud of delay.
6.Complete olearance
'injlia'
260. Hal yakhtallf kusuf al-gamar fl' l--bllad. The

events of an eclipse have nothing to do with the body
of the moon, consequently to all
APPEARANCE AT observers Its condition Is In the
DIFFERENT PLACES same state at the same time.
However, since the hours of the
night which have elapsed till the eclipse occurs in
different regions on account of the different time of
the moon's rising in these, the hours during which it
is eclipsed are less in one region and more in another,
and the eclipse is visible in one place and not in
another because the beginning of the night in different
places is not the same except accidentally.
261. Susuf el-shams ma huwa. The moon at the end
of the {ArabioJ*' month appears in the morning as a
slender crescent to the west of the sun and
ECLIPSE then exhibits the same fonn in the evening
OP SDN at the beginning of the next month E. of the
sun. When however the new moon appears to
the east of the sun it is obvious that it has passed by
the sun. Should this passage have taken place in a
position between the sun and our vision, the sun would
be partly or entirely concealed from us. Consequently
that blackness which we observe in an eclipse of the
sun la due to the body of the moon which conceals the
sun from us.
/> Y.\->
a
y »
✓ " f' 3" «? *
■^lii >
u,
/ ^ - " .- ; 7
ilyjari ^-_>s
^}^0j^J)yJfJ^ A^ J*"'
N»_> ji' ^V>lii»ly»l.l • l^b UvWlC-oL-jlfci/"-^-ryl^Ljt.

262-263
262. Fahal takhtalif dhallka flrl-bllad. Eclipses
of the sun also offer different aspects at different
localities, firstly, due to the
APPEARANCE AT same reasons as have already
DIFFERENT PLACES been referred to in the case of the
moon, (time of sunrise) end
secondly, due to the point of view of the observer,
(parallaz) for the noon which conceals is near to us
than the sun which is concealed distant. The
phenomenon of the eclipse has nothing to do with the
nature of the sun, but is solely due to our vision of
It. Moreover the passage occurs everywhere at the
same time, but is observed at different localities at
different times, and the amount of the eclipse ob-
served at one locality is different from that at other
localities, in one case the eclipsed area is two
thirds, in another a half, in a third complete, and in
a fourth there is no eclipse at all.
263. Ma ikhtilaf al-manzar. This is the observat-

ion of an object at the same"tine from different places
involving different points of view.
PARALLAXI3 Calculations as to eclipses of the sun
are made from the centre of the earth.
There is therefore only one point on the surface of the
earth where the calculated conjunction will be identical
with the observed conjunction. At any other point there
will be a difference of time, the observation being
either before or behind the calculated period.
Similarly it depends on the place of observation whether
the eclipse will be total or partial or not visible.
The accompanying illustration will make this easy to
understand.
u ^
if ^ ' * tw, ^ --
J >-1 > V^r" ^--*i lir^-> w^-ai _.ÎJ il* c^<tj,Ll^jV
4
LtjL^L Is^l ^ tjLai\
Jf*? ^7<~-a."'^*»^Ji<U=>-j^(jj >!li.j^\ i_ jA_juo)l^BJ^
^jll! jMi.il
* %
y^'-y* jj jjyi'jXAl I
V^ J vjiifj liy it t ^ 11|4?^ ->1 »t
-^y^âXjU-^JiL^ J\i£=»» A_ls-îj io^' ' J^V ^

^ V '»,"*.!
—^ ** tJ «>*
864-265
P
A centre of earth. B Its surface■

II Moon on its orbit.
a orbit of sun.
P Position of moon from both centre end surface of earth.
P' Position from centre.
P" Position from surface.
284. Kam auqSt huauf al-shams. Eclipses of the sun
exhibit three periods, for as there Is no delay, only
the beelnnlng, middle and end are
PERIODS OF distinguished.
ECLIPSE
265. Famln ayyatl jlhat yaldin baduhu. Owing to the
moon's being cause of the eclipse end to Its more rapid
movement—It evertafceb the sun from the
BEGINNING west so the eclipse always begins with
OF ECLIPSE the contact of the moon from this quarter,
contrary to what was said of eclipses of
the moon, and ends by the complete clearance on the
east, but there Is always a slight declination from
these two points of the compass.
ISO
' '1 v ' w ,% A \j, " ■' ti Y
\v\i-'r
Is^ * j+AJe-*
> f J l^fr^^===^
1
u ' \~>^
5>m£=>J-XJA^jUjÂjA—Ajh-if J3I
ijUU1 Jis»1 ^»
256-267
26 6. Lima la yankaslf al-shams fl kulli l.ltliaa^
wa'l-gaaar yuroarr ia^tha. That there should be an
eclipse or the sun It is necessary that
CONDITIONS the niuuii should have no latitude at
OF ECLIPSE conjunction, or so little that it comes
between the sun and our vision. It is
consequently restricted to the times when one of the
two nodes is near, because when distant the moon
cannot conceal the sun being either further north or •
south. The condition is the same at opposition in the
case of eclipses of the moon.
267. Hal ya*Yid lighalr al-nalylraln husuf.
Occultations or the planets and of a number of the
fixed stars are ouuaaluued by
ECLIPSES OUTSIDE the passage of the moon, the
SUN AND MOON? phenomena beginning on the east
side and ending on the west.
[You have to consider that these originate with the
moon, that they occur frequently and are generally
unnoticed.Further, planets occultate each other
or a fixed star, or two planets end a fixed star may
all appear as one to the observer. Of course the
sun conceals these by its brilliance whether it
covers them or no, but it is not affected by them in
such a way that any portion of it is concealed.
268. Ma Bl-Hyyam al-wuata al-mu'addalah. If

the sun had no eastward movement and simply contin-
ued revolving In virtue of the first
MEAN DA? movement.
îli-Ltojfc*«—'âDU^ ^ ^r0^'-^-^ jil/iJi '
I* »''
iArt_'f!jaljU^13 **L-* ^l^l.i^l^
K rn»i< cj*^^- a..g—t'Jt
4"^ ^M/ y' ^ '
^<£=J^3 ^^XAljcjSty*
> _JAf."^,'c 1^jS==OU==^^JJ!—t<r

1
Z KJU^V/y L£lj^= Uj 1 e/c_jL».Iîlj<.
'"' IV f t I * * '•
>wJ^_), >V5£=»^ l#=»J ^ ^V^j£=>ÂJ_ A£=^<s^J»c/^Jli^ JL U=»j!

266-269
It would regain any great circle from which it set outj
after having passed the 360° (units of time) of the
equinoctial. The sun however during that period moves
east at its own rate of progress and only regains the
circle from which it set out, whether horizon or
meridian, after having traversed the 360° of the equi-
noctial plus the amount of its movement in the contrary
direction.! 175. The rate of this is not uniform, being
sometimes quick and sometimes slow, and in consequence
of its varied character the sun does not pass all circles
at uniform times. But it passes the east horizon in
aooordanoe with the ascension of the locality, the
westefn in accordance with the desoenslon of the local-
ity and the meridian in aooordanoe with the ascension
in the erect sphere, for this circle everywhere on ac-
count of its passing through the poles of the universe
has the equator as its horizon. So it is obvious that
the true solar day is that time during which 360° have
been passed according to the Sun's observed rate of
progress, and that mean day is that time during which
360® have been passed by the dally mean movement of
the sun.
CHB0N0L0SY8
269, Ma al-ahahr. The month is of two kinds,
natural and conventional, the latter as agreed on
between people. The natural month is that
MONTH period of time required by the moon, situated
at a particular distance from the sun east op
west, to travel until it reaches the same distance.
As the shape of the illuminated part of the moon
corresponds to its distance frcan the sun, the month
is that period during which the moon gains the same
shape, and the■same side of the sun, and has not a
third time shown the same outline. People customarily
speak of one of these phases as the new moon, because
it is the beginning of that series of figures, and
there is no other similar to it in shape and position.
The period is 29 1/2 days and a small fraction; as it
is impossible to deal with a month containing half a
1 59'8", According to Jagmlnl the amount of time
2neueaaary lu traverse 1 la uwn diameter. Ref, p. 148.
Paragraphs 269-323 may be regarded as an abstract of
pp. 199-334 Chron,
v ^
—ft j) > i_ tj« I
û i>< i_; ) LL i
,1>\1
"v* ^ iM
■ ■ ' '' ^ '■ . "

V-^jM £^\f- «Ly J ACj-li U\ ijJ- X*. 'r—
■—>*j 1*^ i—'/*^_y^ J Ai' »^v 3 L-i* 1
v^L~i» ^jjbi ^niIA\ 1_\W>^ IjL^V ^luÛ-
I J) Û I iJjjr-l j)
.' * t If
^_Js=>ij viA'j f>^-l
L
9
v k . •»■
269-270
day the sum of two days, 59 days, Is divided Into
periods of 30 and 29 days. This determination Is
based on the mean progress of the sun and moon or
by their oorreoted rates of movement, for It agrees
with the determination of the months by the
visibility of the new moon, whether there be a
suooesslon of two or three months greater or leas
than the average or no. The conventional or
teohnloal month, however, Is the twelfth part of a
natural year as near as possible.
270. Fama al-sanah al^tabl^lyyah wa gbayrha.

The natural year Is defined as that period of time
during will oh the fum aeasons (hot
NATURAL AND and cold seasons, harvest and seed-
OTHER YEARS time) are completed once. It la
measured by the return of the sun to
a particular point of the ecliptic from which It
set out: It Is therefore called a solar year. Its
extent Is 365 days and a fraction of leas than a
quarter of a day as we have found, but more than a
quarter aocordlng to our predecessors. The natural
year being as described, Its months, the twelve
equal parts Into which It Is divided, are the solar
or conventional months not the natural ones. On
the other hand the conventional year is composed of
twelve natural months, Its length being 354 days and
ll/SOths of a day; such a year is styled lunar.
3
'^r <^p^>V^J*u[j y <^1
£ LaaC-^ Jus^lj-i IaIHJ ^ ÛjisV
* f ^ ^ i
^ JJjlj ^ jg>L ^kJi-UD ^^>e/
L^c);) ^ 4f-«?Ul L>»»-) v—

xlJU, ^ ^ .^\ i
' .' '^ » '-> . ^ '•
LajIu^J ylr-'i Lu4.1 J
i ^ ** *» '. -
271
271. ya tustu^ll hadha al-kusQr fPl-slnln.
In the case of the solar year the fraction of a day
above referred to Is Ignored for four
LEAP-TSAR years until a complete day results,which
Is then Incorporated into a year of 366
days. This is the custom of the Greeks, Romans,Syrians
and Copts of Sgypt since the time of Augustus Caesar,^
Klng of Rumând this leap-year Is styled In Greek (the
royal year)^ and the regulator (al-mlqyas)^ and In
Syriac kablshna, which when turned Into Arabic becomes
kablsah, I.e. filled in. The Persians Influenced by the
Maglan religion, which forbids the Intercalation of a
day In the year,abandon the quarter days until a whole
month Is arrived at In 120 years. This is then Incor-
porated as a thirteenth month In the year, the name of
one month being used twice. This year is called
'blhtarak',4 but after the destruction of their
dominion and religion this blhtarak has not been used.
Before the time of Augustus the Egyptians allowed
these quarter days to accumulate until they made a
whole year In 1460 years and then deducted a year from
the date, because It comes to the same thing If you
deduct one year or If you add one and then reckon two
years as one.
As regards the lunar year, out of the fractions of
ll/SOths of a day, a complete day la arrived at In the
third year, which has then 355 days, similarly in the
sixth and so on, till after 30 years, and the
Intercalation of 11 days', the fraction has disappeared.
These years of 355 days are called Arabic kablsah
years, not because they are In general use In Arabia,
but because the authors of astronomical tables,
In which they are necessary, calculate by them.
1
Chron;53/20 refers to the fact that the Julian
Intercalation was not regularly introduced till the 6th
year of the reign of Augustus.
« mallk al-sanah for Sanah al-malik? Not In P.
^ au 11 qlyas P. Not in Chron. I have not found any
other expression in Greek for leap-year except
6 ice ktov cto<; .
4 bhlrk P. and AO^-, of. Chron. p. 54. bhlzk AO Of.
274 for their method of disposing of the 5 days In
excess of their 18 months of 30 days each.
163
1
^ r-.^^' c 5)^
i^-L^_rLai>' \\
to «* ■ * *•
> yi'**--^:^^'îL^r"/"' ^J i UÛvL^râ-^f il
—; 1 r—
^ r6-A_«
' ' Ik"! r^ ■»■ !'''«'■■
*J j'-'^'^y*1' * 1 u_' fu-ae X—^' —\V'' Ur* ^ J
-
* —r^ " ' ** "^ U
v
' '} t"
15—'»e'»-^J A—»■
t* " Y 1 ' »^ 5- ^-
' ' t ^ '■

A',—>—-Jf'l-.f
'—'-Ô^15 ^ 1 ^ La -t\?^—
^ ^-Jf-L> r) LkÛ ^^-*r ''-j^-A'

272. ramfl al-nasl1. The word nasl' means interoal-.
ating or postponing, and is used In connection with the
fact that the lunar year finishes about
INTERCALATION II days before the solar, and con-
sequently the Arabic months change
through all the seasons in about 33 years, any month you
name occurring in any season or part of a season. The
Jews are commanded by the torah (the Mosaic law) to
keep both sun and moon natural; this they did by arrang-
ing a leap-year containing an additional month made up
by accumulating (for 3 or 2 ye^rs) the difference be-
tween lunar and solar years, so that the year returned
to its proper position after having been too far in ad-
vance; their leap-year is called in Hebrew rlbbur i.e.
pregnant, because they compare that 13th month which is
added to the year to the fruit which a pregnant woman
bears in her womb.
The Jews were neighbours of the Arabs in Yathrib
the city of the Prophet. Now the Arabs not only wanted
their pilgrimage to occur in the proper month (dhu*!-
hijjat) but also that it should be fixed at the pleaaant-
est time of the year, so that they might set out and
find travelling and commerce easy. They acquired the
Jewish method of intercalation not in any learned way,
but in one suited to the people generally. It was com-
municated to the public by the voice of the qalammas or
intercalator, a hereditary office (before the new moxin,
and, the calculation of the period when it was desir-
able to Intercalate the kablsah having been carefully
attended to, announcement would be made from the pulpit
that such and such a month would be postponed.^) Sup-
posing that were a sacred month, e.g. Muharram, the
intercalator would say "I postpone Muharram and make
this month free from obligations" so there would be two
MUharrams in the year, the first free from restrictions
anA from war, while the second (in reality §afar) would
be observed as the real Muharram, This practice was
adhered to till Islam put an end to it in the 9th year
of the Hljra, known as the year of the Farewell Pilgrim-
age, when the Prophet (on whom be peace) bad© farewell
to the world and to his own people.i
^ Chron. p. 73.
' I?'
• ' ^ '' ' ' " ' >. •

*^5 ^ s1. ^ ^ Lvo"-^_rV" '>^,
1
A»\j
[ !. filv ■K—^ 5 ^ O^ £> ^v ^ '

^ T* • ^ '"
' j ^^bWwj
UU-^ * 5- v_^'.
jA^Jy^ xi' ^ ^ *
^ s ' * s
wLi} îJ\X^l^5îJ!j^ JSÎ y'jiy
wN^Jl ML-t^ ,jLf^ ^
w '"A'Îi ^-
J
^Xt^--' 'J^'-'^vîrX-",06^=', f
■*—'
1
v .* ' vM^. > "^ w ** * J *
3
—^ LX- ^ 'v_J J> -> TXV"*' ^' * ' ^,^VtrjA
272-272
Whoever desires to associate lunar months with solar
years cannot dispense with the Icabisah; the Harranians
of Harran and of Baghdad,known as §abian3,l who are a
remnant2 of the Greek pagans, also employ it, although
we are Insufficiently acquainted with their methods and
opinions.
The Hindus also duplicate any month when necessary
to
r complete the reckoning,^calling the year in question
am malmSsa,^which means a year with a month to be dis-
carded. This word is,5 however, replaced in the literary
language by adîimfisa.
272a. IsmS1 al-hlnd lilayySm al-3abrah. This para-
graph, present in the Arabic versions and in PL*, is
absent in PL and PP. These Hindu names
HINDU NAMES for the days of the week are names of
DAYS OP WEEK planets followed by wfir or b5ra (day in
composition). See India, I, 213.
Adit [ Son Manga1 Budh Srihaspat Shukr Santchar
war | war w5r war wSr wffr wSr
Sun [ Moon Mars Mercury Jupiter Venus Saturn
i ) n III IV Y al- jum'ah al-sabt
273. Fa kaif asmg* shuhtlr al-umam. To explain in
detail the various characteristics -of the months among
the diffij-'ciit nrrtfOTTS -would take too long;
NAIKS3 OF I have accordingly constructed the
THE MONTHS following tables which will make their
names clear and easily comparable.
^ See Nallino. Vol. Orient. Studies, Browne, p, 388.
Hot to be confused with^the real Sabians, Mandeans, of
Southern Mesopotamia, Sabi'a, pl.'Subflt, sabi'Qna; for
an excellent description of the present day Subbl see
S.S. Stevens, By Tigris and Euphrates, lS23,*pp. 204-
219, and not to be confused with the Sabeans, the
ancient inhabitants of Saha', Sheha, in Yemen.
22 PL and PP have naqTbat for baqlyat,
It happens once in three years when two lunations
occur
4 In wne solar month.
Mai is the pellet, fatil, of dirt which is rolled
between the palms and thrown away; m5s ,is month.
5 Adîi, super- in composition.
165
^ , m ^• ' 5 "
. lJ> .JLU-* !. (^jli
«Jjl
^ fL\BjLi^'
#
:
„,3 *■* i
JIJ y.| ■t Jj
r-1
(,. -'
V i1, ^Vv**
1 V-
. ^
>
"3
\
J* y 'VV
iv,
v
1
273
Arabic Month 3 Pre-Islamio Jewish Hindu months
under Islam NO Arabic No Months NO are lunar No Syrian No
are lunar. of Months of also lunar of as are also of months of
Usual order. Days' also lunar Days Usual order Days the days. Days are solar Dura
Muharram 30 MQ*tamir 30 Tlahrl 30 Chaitra 30 Tishrln I 31
Saf'arr 29 Na jir 29 Marheswan 29 Baisakh 30 TlahrJn n 30
Rabrr I 30 KhaTwan 30 Klaltw 30 Je$h 30 Kanun I 31
RabI II 29 Wan§an 89 TIbath £9 Ashafh 30 ESnOn II 31
Juiaad^ I 30 ânln 30 Sheba); 30 Shrdran 30 ShubSt 28
JumSdrf II 29 Zubbfi 29 Adar 29 BhSdra 30 idhSr' 31
Ra Jab 30 Aaanua 30 NTsan 30 IsOJ 30 NISBn 30
Sha ^b5n 29 rAdhll £9 lyyar 29 KSrtlk 30 Ayyar_ 31
Ramadfin 30 Katlq 30 SXwan 30 Ma rag 30 {Jazlran 30
Shawwal 29 Waghll £9 TammOz 29 POs 30 .Tatmuuz 31
Dhu^l qi'dah 30 ■.V a rannah 30 Ab 30 M5gh 30 Ab 31
Dhu*l hijjah 29 Burak 29 Ilul 29 PhSigun 30 Aylul 30
They work entire They pra.tlsed The month The repeated ShubSt is
ly by the new intercalation, which is re- month whloh re- the Kablsah
moon: do not JudGing when peated in the stores the month and
intercalate and necessary by Jewish leap iifferenoe be- has 29 days
haye 354 days the position year is the tween lunar every four
in the year. of the moon. month Adar and solar years years.
•For sanl min They ware ig (We-adar) is called
al-sanl read norant of adiiisfsa of.
3hal, min al oaloulatlon. Chron. p. 371-
nasi' and 354
2nd column:- Chron. p. 71-2 has juwan for wsnsan, zabba, ''Adll, NSflq, or Nflfll,
Huto'' and Rannah for Warannah.
3rd column:- India I. 217 has older forms.
r-a—
C > lc- ■ • *" t -i-

lr J ^ 5
Jp uljjV ut-U.V
yj^, ^ ■-I J y*.^
J I "H^n'J a.ci pA Jjt? ^
V^lrffir ^ ^ ^ -i
Jliff ^ Jl^p^ L>L>J
:
^p J ^ J <J 3^1
, Vf j\ >\ J j.>) iia ^r-a ifj vM
j J jpL^ J c.r-l' LjrrZ "J
1 y fl JÎ J -/] 2^=3
["jJÔ-K J ^ ^ j
W -lyf J ^»; ^ J^J J-fa
ry~T >! j £*>[? jj —ff\ J ^JJ ij
J 1 Jji-l J j^\. ^ _j!b\ ^ 2*s Is.
• vftlu
KiJ*
C^r"' 4UV1
■r '*''i*i
Uv X'^Jt
273
Oreek months No of Persian nonths No or r Soghdlan months No of
^yptlan months Itoof
are solar Days are solar I>ay« are aolar Days are solar Days
yanwanna ai TQth 30
iFarwardln mflh oD NUsard 30
FebrarlOa £8 raaft ArdTbahlflht ♦-ah 30 Khurjan
30 30
MSrtiaa 31 Atnr Khurdsdh mah
so 30 Nlsan 30
ifrriXOs SO KSSq Tlr mah
30 30 Biayfik 30
MBIda 31 Tub! 30
Murd5dh nffh 30 Ishnakhanda 30
TinTna so Miklr 30
Shahrlwar mSh 30 MuzhnaîTia 30
luliaa 31 Feminuth 30
Mlhr mSh 30 Fughgan 3o
ATghustua 31 FarmuthT 30
Ab5n mfih 30 JbanJ 30
Sentemblrus 30 FSkiln 30
Idhar mfih 30 FHgh 50
Aqtubrlue 31 FaunI Dal mSh
30 30 Maafifugh 30
tJuSmbrfQa 30 Aflfl Bahraan mah
30 30. Hind 30
Duqamjrlus 31 Ifahaurl 30
IsfandSmq^h mah 30 Khaahum 30
February baa 29 The five extra The Kablsah by turns The five following
days In Leap Tear da ya fo m a sraa] 1
In these months. The (lawqhlq) days at the
like 3hub£^ but 13th month at the five 'stolen' daye end oi" the year. The
tbe beginning of end of the year mustariqah In excess Kablaah in one of the
the year la and are called of 360 are now In- 12 months.
different. Afu-Thflmln serted after Sbfln.
(' eTrayopevai) Schram saya until
Yazd. 375 thareaftei
end of year but Al-
Plrunl wrote In 39G "ifezd
^ ■ " -• I J WI oWTo «"
Ti A.WT1
AO ftTTI ^»w-
have the modernized namea interpolated:-Tilth (Ighmana}jBabahjHatdrjKTyak.Tuba,
Amahrr.BamahfitjBarmudha.BashansjBaHnahjAbTbjMlsreLSee Lane,Manners &; Custnns
4th oolumn:- TolloTia Persian Custom, the beginning of the year ta the 6th of
ârirardln viz. Khurdfidh, v. Chron. p. 56,
aCA has also p. 65 a marginal note on the Armenian months.These are solar and the
year hae 365 1/4 days. Each month has 30 days except the last whloh has 35,and in
a epeoial year 36,
1. NSfsartI {Nauraz 1 2.HUrI;3.Sahaf;4.Dart;5♦ KHghae; 6.Arana;7.Mahlkl;8.Arik;9.
2akhfinI;lO.MRrIdI;ll,ITarka8;12.HarUr. of. Enoyol. Brit. VI,316 and Sohram, Chron,
Tafeln; Leipz, 1908 p, 175.
r:
ill
— ^ f ^ K iOJ!
• V ...» . .^ j
"t1
'i—-y. J ,J —y
Jj'i^jîjj V--> ] t
_^-i. J ; J -.^1 : iJ k
^ C—' , J j i; j.
u
-=■1—11 J - * ?ly-; J 'm : "
_J l>_-ikJ* ^ J 'U y iv- _J _ ^Jv£=i U
J J ;[£—=' J » Uj^r- i J :- <y-i •
JT t:LVj j JuJiU ; J \lXfO
J tl*' \ <J i'-J-l ': —iy=J
J J; j 'yî)
1
J ^ Jv^-J j Jpt
J -JLr-^ I ,_( ^WWI J
274
274. Ay hadhlhl al-shuhPT tattafiq awji^llha. Tiie
Jewish and Arabian months are equal, and there is no
diffureiice between them ex-
"WHICH MONTHS CORRESPOND oept for one day ocoasionally
AS TO BEGINNINGS on account of religious con-
siderations among the Jews.
But the same name would not be applicable to these
months,beoauao the Jews intercalate and the Moslems do
not. Similarly the Hindu months are of the same nature
as those of the Moslems and Jews and their beginnings
nearer to the latter as they reckon from the time of
conjunction of the moon. The Hindu and Jewish months
also correspond for two or three years until ad,hli!i3sa
is made,when they become different,after which they
again correspond for two or three years until the next
adjhimAaa- So the months of the Hindus do not coincide
with those of the Arabs,while they do from time to time
with those of the Jews, but not invariably on account
of the intercalation being carried out in different
years,
On the other hand the Syrian and Greek months do
correspond both as to number of days and name for name,
only the beginning of the year is different,the Greeks
taking from MnQn II.
The beginning of the Egyptian year coincides with
the Persian month Dal,and from this point the months
correspond till the end of Ibfin^- when a difference
comes in due to the fact that the Persians then make
their intercalation of five days (not as belonging to
that month as some people think) and the Egyptians at
the end of the year. The last Persian Kablsah,
blhtarak,p occurred in the month Ibffn,and th0_five
supplementary days - called andargahanp - lawahlq A -
are inserted after ibfin,aa an indication of tne month
which was last duplicated as blhtarak.2
The beginning of the year and the first month of
the Soghdlans (who are Maglans of Transoxania^) is on
the sixth of the Persian Parwardln,from which point
onward the two calendars progress regularly to the end
of the year.
12 P omits AbSn.
Fills lacuna in Chron. p. 55.
^--iî Jr^^y iy\ ,i ^\£L
* " * ** '
^ U5V-J ^5^^-L« Ljv|^ ^ J
^ (t ' +1
' . -r .
f A^^yÂ^L.l^=» t ôLl Jj^

♦ 1
** ^ T>
U' 5V-W» ^ >_ ylfe*
, nv'
4
? il-/?J ^ ^ V y-ijr
•^ V ' "» "* I ( " ' .*• » I J." " 1 .' 'l'^'
n^vs ^3rY^y\^t^+*y>
a^'
£75-276
275. Hal yataehayyar maaadlr shuhur al-yahud. The
Jewish vear Is of two fclnds ordinary hashltS I.e.
baslt and leap flbbCIr I.e. Kablsah) ,
LENGTH OF and each of these has again three
JEWISH MONTHS varieties; 1/ JjasSrln (baserah) or
deficient, 353 days. In which
Marbeswan and Klsllw have only 29 days, 2/ shalimln,
(Shelemah) complete or rather redundant 355 days In
which both months have 30 da-ys, and 3/ kasdaran
(Kesldrah) or Intermediate, 354 days, where they are
as in the table, Uarîeswan being deficient and Klsllw
complete. The variation of these two months Is
necessitated by the fact that the first day of the
year must not be on a Sunday, Wednesday or Friday.
No other month departs from the number set down.
876. Fatelf yuwiflo shuhur al-hlnd shuhur al-

qamar. The Hindus have jeya nf different, lengthe 1/
suryamSna or the solar day, I.e.
CORRSSPOHDENCS l/360th part of a solar year,
OF HINDW AN® 8/ ohandraroana, or the lunar
LUNAR MONTas day (tlthi) i.e. the l/360th
part of a lunar year, 3/
nakshatramWna, measured by the mansions of the moon.
I.e. the time spent In each of the 27 mansions, and
4/ sabamana (s37anam9na) the time between two sun-
rises. This is the generally recognized day, the
people's day. To any one who knows about solar and
lunar years It will be obvious that the solar day Is
longer than that between two sunrises and the lunar
shorter.
What has been said above with regard to the length
of a lunar month means 89^ days as determined by sun-
rises, but with regard to Hindu months of 30 days, as
In the table each of these, la the 30th part of the
interval between two mean conjunctions.
T • V mi. ' »B -■ *'3- '*
f kj^'-j")—ûl»A»^>yVjL»jj^y^>J^
^ ^ J>Uj
»U*»J ^
■ . *^L»i|j^3?^—Jjl^y"l>_r=^\5jil{j£jO
. / y^ C^ vvyi^îyy* ^»^^=>^'<4^1 ^ ! (. L\t y*,,
S>>J Afsu^1 ^JLU-^J' ^ "LhJ t 1

277
277. Hal 11 ayyam al^sbuhur asgml. The Hindus have
names for each day,and the guardians of these are the
Celestial helnga,dalva,who are their
NAM2S OF angels. Similarly the $oghdians and
DAYS OF MONTH Khwttrtzmians and the like have names
for euoh day of the month ¥ut these are
not very well known,and become rapidly altered by fre-
quent copying. Philologists have succeeded in tracing an
Arabic name for each of the thirty days of the Arabic
month, but these are not knoim to the desert Arabs, they
are not current, it is an effort to remember them and in-
difference with regard to them is obvious. Among the
peoples of the earth the use of names for the days of
the week is general,and differences tend to disappear,
but the Persians do not^- use this method; they have a
separate name for each day,and 2they regard these names
as those of God
Gpd and the angels. They are set down in the
accompanying table.
Names of the days of the Persian months.
1. Hurmuz 11. Khur. 21. Ham 1. Ahurfivodh)®
2. Bahman 12. Mah 22. Badh 2. Ushlavadh)^
3. Ardlbahiaht 13. Tlr 23. Dai-ba-
4. Shahrlwar 14. Jtlflh _dln 4. Vahisht-)^'
5. IsfendBiwBdh 15. Dai-ba- 24. Din ashatra)?.
5. KhurdSdh mihr 25. Ard 5. Vahlsht}8
7. Murdadh 16. Wihr 26. Ashtadh
8. Dai-ba- 17. 3rush 2 7. Asmfin
adhar 18. Raahn 28. Zamyadh
9. Idhar 19. Farwardln 29. Maraslhnd
10. Aban 20. Bahram 30. Anlran.
^2 Read lam for thumma.
The first seven are devoted to Ahuramazda and the six
Archangels, Ameshaspentas, and the remaining 23 to
Angels, among which the names of the Sun, Moon, Mercury
(11,12,13) and Mithra (16) may be recognized. -These are
worshipped in the Yashts which correspond to the names of
the days - (Haug. p. 194 seq.) The names of the five
supplementary days given above may be traced In the
five Gathaa (l.o, 142 aeq.)
1. Ahunavalti
2. Ushtavaiti
3. Spentflmalnyu
4. Vohukhshathra
5. Yahistoisti
Nos. 4 and 5 transposed in the Tafhim.
^ ^ it 9 *'
ji, îJO s^LK)^ 1\\^LZ\lI^^
^L^jjlii W ^_> ^ uii'^ Jj W '
i^jLUjf '-v^y î
r. ■ V ^r.
U^xvii ^LVi ^LVi ^jfLVf
1 4 •1
1 lf=> r ->*-^ Ll ) |
6 ^L- >u — «
: ■t' ?
--*_> hi
*) ^1
.>->> 0>-V
î a
-J TT
^1^.1 .> j
V j' j
1
•• r-. ^;ui >» i
:.U, 4? o^" -jiU>
JutAW .ifciii y^jfj -2- jit -t ii
5 V.'v^. fi
1 OUllJI rl^.l H vJuSî
E76-279
278. Kalf aunly haTulaTl al-"™«Tn prom what has
been said above in regard to montiis, interoalatlon and
leap year it is olear that there are
TSARS OP two kinds of year, solar and lunar, and
THE NATIONS that of the latter there are two
varieties, the first, simple, formed of
12 months such as the Moslems and Turks and orientals
use, each having as a mean 354 days, but occasionally
353 and 355, this excess and deficiency being outside
the control of man* The second, that where Intercalat-
ion is practised, and 13 months result as is the case
with the Hindus and the Jews as well as the Greeks in
ancient times and the pre-Islamic Arabs (and
Kafirs)?, On the other hand the solar year has 365
days and a fraction which is nearly a quarter; it is
employed by the Greeks, Syrians, Egyptians, Persians
and Soghdlans, but these differ as to their method
of dealing with the fraction.
279* Md al-tawarikh, A •date* is a point of time
well-established at which something has taken place,
knowledge of which has reached and been
DATES diffused among the people, such as the
fonnation of a new religion or sect, or some
occurrence in a state which, like a great battle or
a devastating hurricane, has arrested attention to
such an extent that It Is taken as an artificial
point of departure from which to reckon years, months
or days, so that whenever it is desired, the amount
of time which has since ©lapsed can be known, or the
relative dates of events fixed whether before or
after,
280. MS al-adwSr. Cycles are periods of years
which separate recurrent events, like the 33 years
required by any lunar month, a Muharram in
CYCLES the beginning of spring, for Instance,
to regain its former position in the
171
rvv«r^_
; i'1 I? ^ -t/^■*—^LiLj^ ^ r1 Lfa>i'i
i-jVl^j!^ j S^jj ^tL-^'1 'UU^' i
-** y IB * ^ ^
X-i'U* J --'ttfj? —^J'-;1 T-liJ J'Jli'j Jyil J> Îj

v.' ,' * ' ' ' r> . < •■
^J^)'JLr-£=t,^^C> +-"■ '-—f4
-> ajvi- Û^L—^ 4^ I_yM U
jL^J }ljJll^=>oW)^ »-fl^ ^.j|

,• ,* ^ " ""-^ * *
^^r^*-' >ji' J :> L<> >.L*)^^> J/-• J9l>^)),
• *' . ^ X*'' / ** (ff
,
Â-J*Ur-^fjlitsV'_Jj_^25 V^jli* ItV^J U!a1> i» iV'.^ _
\A^- ^J) )\\) ^ '

280-280a
seasons of the year, or the 30 lunar years required by
Saturn to make a complete tour pf the ecliptic, or the
time required for disposing of the fractions of a day
which occur in every year.
Again when the number of years in an era becomes
high, cycles are used1 like knots in a rosary (such as
decades and centuries } together with the remaining unitat
2aoa. Ma tawflrlkh al">uinam. The Mussulman era [Al-
Hljra] dates from the year [16 July 622 A.D.] when the
Prophet (God he gracious to him and give
ERAS OF him peace) removed, h5.1ara. from Mecca
IKE NATIONS to Medina: its years are all lunar. That
of the people of the Book la the Greek
one known as the era of Alexander, although it is frcm
the beginning of the year when Seleucua was appointed
King of Antiooh [1 Sept# 311 B.C.]. Christians employ
in it Syrian or Greek years, while the Jews use their
own lunar years with the necessary intercalations, and
the HarrSnians, who call themselves âblans1 have cus-
toms* similar to the Jews. Other eras are known to the
people of the Book such as the creation of Adam (on
whom be peace), and the deluge of Noah (on whom be
peace), the drowning of Pharaoh (may the curse of God
be upon him -)^ the erection by Solomon (on whom bo
peace) of the temple in Jerusalem, and the destruction
of that temple by Nebuchadrezzar (Bukhtlna^sar), but
there are controversies about these, consequently it
has been agreed that the era of Alexander is most
satisfactory by reason of the fewer difflcultlea at-
tending it, and the smaller number of years Involved.
During the ignorance the Arabs reckoned frcm cele-
brated battles among themselves, and before the Hljra,
the year of the Elephant whenr the Abysslnians coming
from Yamen to destroy the Ea ba were routed and In which
the Prophet (the blessing of God be upon him) was born.
The Persians have been accustomed to date from the
beginning of the reign of their reigning king,and on his
death to use that of his Successor. At the time their
empire was destroyed they were dating from Yazdiglrd bin
Shahryar,lbn Kbusrfi Parvlz the last of the Khusrawa.the
years being without intercalation [and bihtaral^] The
majority of the Magi2ana date from his murder 20 years
after his accession.
1 The Harranians were entitled as Gnostics to call them-
2selves*§ablan3,Ped0r8en,Browne,Vol. Orient. Gtud. p. 381.
Murdered at Merv. A.D.651.Era of the Zoroastrlans;cf.
Chron, p. 138.The Parseea date from his accession l61hJVne632.
172
, •
^^l^tjfcJUlvftU-ylit
^.0' ^*jJ^=k-^~*s£,
j, UJ^J ?,^4b ^ ^,
^ >&■Jif'j^ j»J '^j*
JtU-j ^j^^^'jL^^ltiJ.
f^jpJc^^JUjiÂj <-~?~*\ I T?1^'
WLs U ^ li ^v» f f LL ^jf^j y^yi-o ^ 111 ylfca^j jjjtl Ll»
> <> Jo-j^vA3>i_>L*'>-Jji«JHaJf ^>^L1|.

260a-281
The Egyptian® on the other hand date from Bukhtln-
agâr the First (Nabonaj?ar),a practice which Ptolemy
followed In the Almagest In determining the mean motions
of the planetsjWhlle in regard to the fixed stars he
dated from Antoninus the then King of Greece. At the
present time,however,the modern Egyptians who Intercal-
ate along with Rome date from Augustus the first of the
Emperors, In astronomical books the era of Diocletian^-
Is always found. He was the last of the pagan Emperors
of Rome; after him they became Christians,
Among the Hindus many eras are In use,some old,aDnie
new. The best known and most current of them Is ahakalala2
which moans the era of Shakajthat man who became vic-
torious and all-powerful at that time,and tyrannized
over the people; when they killed him they made this
ara from the year of their delivery from him.
Neoossarily every nation has one or more eras;they
are only of two kinds,either knowledge of them has
reached us or not. However this is a long story,and has
been dealt with more conveniently in another place,
281, Fahal yurlam mabaln hadhlhl al-tawarlkh. In
comparing two eras,If the words year and month are used,
it Is neoessaty to remtfiuber that these
HOW TO COMPARE terms do not necessarily mean the same
THESE ERAS period; there Is however no ambiguity
with daysjand so In the accompanying
table In '111111^®^ form the number of days In each era
till the succeeding one Is set down,and these numbers
are added together so as to show the entire number of
days in any era till the beginning of any other down to
the Persian era. This table Is extremely accurate and
very useful to any one who wishes to translate from one
era to another,If he associates the data with years and
months In the manner whloh Is necessary.
T The Bra of Diocletian [beginning""29 Aug. 2^4 A.D.J

was adopted by the Gopts as the Bra of the Martyrs -
ahuhada' - although his edict of persecution was not
2Issued till 303 A,D. of. Chaine, Chronologic p, 14.
The time (Kal) of the Shakas (Seythlans) who accom-
panied the Parthian Invader,Nahapana,who reigned from
78 to 125 A,D, The Era much used by Astronomers,
begins In 76 A.D.
9 ^
</>•■• ^ n % •"
*h^vj^*«^^r^ff<As=yd
I ' I " v ^^'U, ^ ^ 4 ,
û. *-»*>^ 1*4

262
262. Ma a^yad al-uman aTygmhtan. As the years and months
of tie various peoples are different, so the special days which
they ohaeive as feasts or fasts are also
TKASTS
OP TUBAND FASTS different.
NATIONS dress gailyInandthepractise
former various
they makeoustcrao
merry,
transmitted frcm their fathers or belonging
to their religion or sect. In the latter they are looking for-
ward to future rewards In accordance with the oomffiflnds of the
holy law which explains the vlrtuee of auoh days, or else, on
account of events evoking anguish and grief which by common
consent are held to have occurred on these dates, keep strict
fast therein.
Of such special days another kind Is characteristic of
Christians who on these pray In the churches to their salnte and
martyrs, and desire to approach them for intercession.
As the year
the festivals fallis naturally
divided into
Intoeeasons,
these at Ifa definite
It la a stable
time ofyear
the year, but If it begins
(Nabccapsar)
Bukhtlna^âr
In each Alexander
Greek year Augustus
from Roman year Antoninus A.H.
565 days Tishrl 1 from Roman year Dlocletien
Reman "Yfear Lunar
159101 | 365 _ Kanun II from Year
362193 103091 365 days 1/4 Kanun II from rrom YhMigl rd
322824 163723 60631 )365 4 Kanln II Huharram Persian
376516 217415 114323 ssiis^ 365 oontainlng Year
499802 340701 837609 176978 TZ3 554 II Bontainlng
503428 344324 241232 160601 265 days
1 This la the lower half of the table in Chron. jT 133,with the
omission of the Era DlluviljEra Phlllpll and the Era KU^tadidl.
The upperaoat figures Indicate the number of days In each Era
until the beginning of the next; the vortloal columns, the addition
thereto of the lengths of subsequent Erae,while the lowest row
ehows
that oftheYazdlglrd.
number of days from the beginning of each Bra until
The accepted dates for the beglnnlnge of the Erse in this
table are:-
1. Nabanaaear 26 Feb. 747 B.C. 1448273 P- 19 Number of daye^fe
2. Alexander 1 Sep. 311 B.C. 1607709 * 87 to Sohram p. xmil
3. Augustus 14 Feb. 27 B.C, 1711241 " 33 from 4712 B.C. the
4. Antoninus 25 Feb. 138 A.D. 1771518 36 date to which he
5. Diocletian 29 Aug. 284 A.D. 1825030 *ft 39 has carried back
6. Hljra IB Jul. 622 A.D. 1948440 46 the Julian
7. Yazdlglrd 16 Jun. 632 A.D. 1952063 n 11 reckoning.
Deducting the first day of each Era from that of the euooeedlng
one we have the lengths of the Eras in days.
a/o to above a/c to Tafhlm a/o J to Chron
155435 ' 155131 IbllOI
2. Alexander 103532 103092 104794
3. Augustus 60277 60631 58805
4. Antoninus 53512 53692 55643
5. Diocletian 123410 1232B6 121459
6. Hl^ra 5625 3623 5625
503790 503425 503425
»j^*U\U (A^_jjCr.J
IVêV JU» A^Jiy^*J
'■ ^ to»A'dy-"w
|<i1l»i
i»r"T r^rltr
l^Vrr Trrlr^
Tt» rra
Km Srilr U fffi f'VuB rî«h
Vi! ojrre,
ê**-
\vii\Jl r rVvi, ^•v.i f-nrr
/>^r
r Vr n^'1 H*n'i|jrfirr(ftfnf|Wnj
282-285
sometimes later and sometimes earlier with regard to the
seasons aa is the case with the Jewish and Hindu years,
then the feasts change also.
Those people who have a stable year have also
festivities of another klndjnamely those in connection
with agriculture, viticulture, planting and sowing,
harvest and breeding,also with the atmospheric signs
such as heat,cold winds &o which form a normal series
In such a year. Those communities have similar festivals
whose year Is movable,,for an earlier or later beginning
Is not such as to make an appreciable difference.
283. ?*£ al-flgh fT arySd al-yahad. Of the Jewish
festivals^ Passover; fish (for pesakh),2 is the 15th
of Nlsan, and Is that day on which the
JJ5W13H Children of Israel fled out of Sgypt, were
PAS30TER delivered from bondage, and made sacrifice
as they were commanded. It Is the first of
the seven days of unleavened bread during which It is
not permitted to the Jews to eat or to keep In the
house leavened bread. On the last of the seven days
Pharaoh was drowned In Ba}ir 3uf3 the Sea of Qulzum, and
that day Is known as al-kasa.^
284. MS al-ransarah. The sixth day of the month of
Slwan la called rrl3hrat from their assembling together^,
ass5rfi, ''assereth, and Is one of the
CONGREGATION Jewish pilgrimages: It coincides with
the ripening of the crops.
285. MS al-klbbur. Klppdr is the tenth day of
Tishrln, It Isr some times on this account called
aahiXrfi5 (♦'fisaCr). The word klppQr in
ATONEMSNT Hebrew means expiation of sins or atone-
ment; fasting Is obligatory on this day
and non-compllance is punishable by death. The fast
lasts for 25 hours beginning {half an hour)P before
sunset on the 9th and ending half an hour after sunset
on the 10th when fast is broken. Kippdr must not fall
on Sunday, Tuesday or Friday.
Chron. p. 268 aeq,
MS has faslh by mistake and P sin for âd.
Cf. Nail. I. 177. PP has sdb, PL suwaia.
As In AO; Kabas AO^-; al-makaa, Chron. p. 275 and 432;
rakas,
5 PP. absent PL.
Cf. the 'ashnra of Muharram, 301.
ji-l f ll J
y îh
JVhsJ
^S'S~\}--*\ yyf ■£ 4*' fj^l
C WI f i4!j Û
7 9
^ " • • /1 . fc '
"J - ' 1- '"*''»
,• •' <* ^ ^ V
286-290
266. Ma al-magallah. The Hebrew word mesulla means
a shady olace: ^liis, the feast of the TabernaoTes
(Sukkoth), lasts for seven da jig begln-
FKAST OF ning on the 15th of Tishrl, during which
TABERNACLSS the Jews are oommanded to live under the
shadow of booths constructed of reeds,
willow and olive branches,and are forbidden to live untfar
a roof, in order to commemorate the cloud which the Lord
commanded to shade them in the desert of Al-Tih,
267. Ma raraba. The last day of the foregoing
feast is called (in Hebrew) rarab,1 whloh means a willow
tA.khilaf, P. bid); it is the 2l8t day of
WILLOW Tishrl and is also a day of pilgrimage.
266. Ma al-tabarrlk. Tabarrik, the feast of
Benediction, occurs two days after
BENEDICTION ♦"'arabff.2
269. Ma al-hanukkah. The feast of Hanukkah or Dedi-
cation3 lasts for aIghtodays beginning hrom the 25th of
Kislew, On the first night they light one
DEDICATION lamp at the door of the house,on the
second two,and so on,till the eighth when
they light eight lamps. This is to ooBnDemorate the fact
that a certain king oppressed them, and deprived brides
of their virginity before they went in to their husbands.
Then there were eight brothers who had a sister who was
asked in marriage,the youngest brother from a sense of
honour dressed himself as a woman,went in to the king,
killed him and by his action purified Jerusalem.
290. M5 ol-btlrI. Purim which occurs on the fourle^tli
day^nf Idhax nnd 1 .s also called the feast of MegillH,5
derives its name from the casting of lots. Its
PURIM origin is as follows: Halmun wazir of AtaetowLrus
or Kisra was badly disposed to the Jews then
captive In Babylon,and plotted to extirpate them. The
order however recoiled upon himself,he was killed on this
day and crucified. The Jews therefore on this day QTalmun
sur (feast)13} hang and bum him in effigy,expressing their joy.
T
2 mpans a dftaftrt. plalrijand is transIrtftd telcBTlnK-l
3 Chron, the day ^fter.
The root means dedication,not purification (tan?if).
Really to oammeinorate the re-dedication of the Temple by-
Judas Macoabaeus after its pollution by Antlochus Spi-
phanes who had set up a pagan altar there..eJaD Pastivai cf Llghte.
4 And fifteenth and the Past of Esther on the 13th.
5 The MegUlah or* roll* of Esther which is read at this thne.
176
—^Lj^SV
290-294
In the other months there are supererogatory fasts,
occasioned hy new grievous trlalsjOn which mourning and
abstention from food aje incumbent on them.
291. Mln aryBd al-nasfirl mB al-mllSd. Of the Christ-
ian festlvals-t MllHd Is the night of the birth of
bin Ifarymn (un Him be blessings and pefloe),-^
CHRISTMAS which occurred on the 25th of Kanun I at a
village called KSslrah al-jalll near Jeru-
salem which is Bait al-maqdispeople were In the habit
of calling him Ishar al-na?BrI(® whence the Christiana
are called nasSrd.
292. Ma al-dlnh. Dln{i la the 6th day of Kanun II on
which day Tahyd5bln ZakarlyS baptized Jesus the son of
Aary I.e. immersed him In the river Jordan.
BPIPHAKY John was accustomed to baptize people to un-
burden them of their sins,and was therefore
known as Yuhana ma ""ma dan, John the Baptist. The baptianal
water ma al-ma•'mudlyyah is that with which Christians
christen their children and converts from other religlac.
When Jesus issued from the Jordan the Holy Spirit
descended upon Him In the form of a dove.
293. MB Saum nlnuwt. The fast of Illneveh is called
from the Syrian town of that name,which Is also the town
■ of the prophet Jonah (May God bless him). The
TAST OF name Jonah is a Greek one;* according to the
HIMSvau Christians he spent three days and three
nights In a fish's^ belly,and this is regarded
as a sign that Jesus would remain three days and three
nights under the earth. This fast lasts for three days
and precedes the great fast by three weeks beginning on a
Monday.
294. M5 al-saum al-kablr. The great fast of the
Christians lasts for seven weeks; It always begins on a
Monday and ends on a Saturday,but Saturdays and
LENT Sundays are excluded from the fast with the ex-
ception of the last Saturday. In this fast no
meat or other animal product Is eaten. The following are
the conditions determining the time of Lent, It must not
begin before the 2nd of Shubat.nor later than the eth of
1 chron. p. 262 seq.
2 Iahnr Is an Aramaic form of 'larf.
3 Yahyi and Yubana are Arabic and Syriao forma for John
A An'etjmology suggested by the resemblscce of TQnah to yuzfin.
5 MS has 'ummlhl ! for fut.
177
y
' "> / \ * ^ .' .> ^ M * ^-C
->^1 j:L
v>iy'
^ ' l^c^l-^J*Juyui/ûXJ'eXv'k25jLJl9-3--iL
■ — k . ^
1
f z*
^ •^^r'Y ♦—»(• ILLi

" I I \ Itl-- »' ^ >
■> —ilil ^"^-. -l jf^t' *

294-297
idhar.and the generally accepted way of calculating It la tnat It be-
gina on the Monday nearest to the conjucotlon of the soon in ShubSt aa
long aa that ia not before the 2nd. If It iajthat conjunction loaea
its validity,the next oonjuuotion after ia adopted.and whichever lion-
day la nearaat to it ia the flret day of the faat.i
295. Itf al-aha'Snln wa m& yatluhu. The last Sunday of the great
fast ia 0aTTfl3 ana'gnrn.mwaning praôn that day Jeaue (on Hin be
peace) entered Jeruaalein on a ahe-aaa^the foal of the
PAIid-SUMDAT aaa ran after iând the people kept shouting Hoaanna.
[He entered the temple] ordered the performance of the
lawful rltee,forbad reprehensible praotloeaS and rebuked the prieata
and acribea, (who aaaailed Elm so that) He concealed Himaelf. On the
Wednesday He washed the feet of His apoatlea^who were Hia friends and
disciples as a sign ofphumilltyfand on Thursday celebrated Passover
with (His sacrament of ) bread and wine .and announced to them His ap-
proaching death- Then on the eve of Friday (Thursday night) He ascend-
ed the mountain,and one of His disoipleB,a Jew (who was a religious
leader,pointed Him out.and^1) delivered Him to the Jews,who seized Him
and tortured Him all night. In accordance with their representations.
He was crucified at midday on Friday, This Friday is called the Friday
of the Crucifixion. He was then burled and remained in the tomb during
Saturday (which is called the Glad Tidings of the Dead from the MesalaU
and rose on Sunday at dawn. This Sunday le the end of the Christian that,7
296. Ma al-Shud al-hadltfa. New Sunday is the first Sunday after
the fast; on the previous Sundays during the faBt1people were oooupled
therewith,but on this Sunday utensil a,household
DOMINICA IN ALBIS furniture and clothes are renewed.and deeds and
contracts are dated therefrom.
297. Ife al-aullaq. Ascension day ia Thursday the 42nd day 140th
Chron. ilaWJ from the breaking of the fast. On this day the Messiah
ascended into heaven from among Hia diaoiplea, and
ASCENSION DAT promised them he would send them the paraclete
(faraqllt); this la the Holy Spirit.
^ From a marginal note In PL. "Another way of oaloulatlng it is frcn
Epiphany, the alxth day of Kanun II; on whichever day ba ohandum rOz
bgd (ordinal 'um' added to ohand.aa to dlgar in 517) of the Arablo
month this falls,subtract the number from 32 and count en aa many days
from the beginning of ShubaJ. If this arrives at a Monday,it is the
beginning of the fast,if not,then it is the Monday next thereafter.
If the latter should be after the 8th of Adhar,then the Monday before
the day arrived at will be the first day of the faat." The day of the
Arabic month gives the phase of the moon from which the ocmjunotlon of
Shubat (February) la oaloulcatedL The method can be used to determine
Sasterj e.g. Jon. 6,19S3 ■ Ramadan 9,1351. 32-9 > Peby. 23 a Thursday;
the following Monday,27th is the beginning of the Eastern fast,March 1
(Ash Wednesday) of the Western Church, Counting on 46 days we have in
March,30,in
2 April,16 days making Saater 1933 April 16th,
3 The phrase la a Qur'anio one. III, 109.
Lacuna in Chron, p. 304. A marginal note of the Copyist of AO (a
Copt) reads,"The washing of the feet took place in the afternoon of
Thursday; He then celebrated the Paaaover,but waa aelaed on the night
of Friday (Thursday night) in a garden near Jerusalem and waa not
tortured then but was scourged and crucified on Friday."
17ft
J
f^ciLkl' W-^di^"-
» UA^^yalj^
^Jt'JJ "J^9 's^lr^ ^ ^' f ^
*J ^»»' 9 W ^ ^* » '"j 1
'jas^yLoJI A^«!^JJka^ JW.Ju-^yfO; H_y-J«»
^ l-ta; Ûi114* ^
^ / ' \ * ■* '
298-301
from the breaking of' the'Tast; the wordIs IsSunday
298. Mg al-bantlooatl. Pentecost the from
derived fiftieth day
the Greek
for fifty. On this day the Holy Spirit descended co
WHITSUNDAY the disciples of Jesus,fortified them,(Pi has "they
acquired strength from Hla radlance.va &z nOr-l 11
nlru Klrlftand"j and conferred upon them the gift of toopjes.after
which,
re fe yqnnrpnout
each set the topeople
that country where his lammace was used.
to the Messiah.
299. MS savan1 al-aallhln. The Tast of the Apostles also lasts
for seven weeks. The aanînna are prophets anblyg1 .and the fsitti
of the Christians In the Jêsslah is ouch that It
JAHT OI' THE Is neoeseary that His aiisalonarlea soattared
APOSTLSs throughout the world should be [prophetoj.
300. MS al-mgahnsh. This Is one of the Impudent statements
made by people Ignorant about the Christians to the affect that
MSahUsh Is a night when men and women meet together
MSsHtteE to aeak Jeau3,when promiscuous intsroourse takes
as chance determines In the dark.3 We take refuge lo
God from offending anyone whether friend or foe,and especially
the sect of the Christians,whose dlapooltlon.ln spite of their
false doctrine. Is eminently distinguished by modesty (road
slyffnat), uprightness and kindness to all.
They have many other separate fasts and oommemorationa of
their saints,devotees and martyrs,which are distinguished by
their nomee.
301. fema lllmualiBiIc ft ahuhOrhum. As regards apeoial days
In thf. MmllS monthft. tha is called ^shorH;4
It was appointed as a fast In tha flret year of
MUSLIM FASTS the HIJra but was afterwards abrogated by the
AHD FSASTS setting apart of the month of Ramadan. It romlns,
however,a very advantageous day for voluntary
religious aota,and then it colnoldos with the date of the
murder of Husayn bin rAir, ao ttat the Shi^ltes of Baghdad mourn
for him on that day.
The fifteenth night of Sha^ban Is much esteemedilt Is known
as the night of exemption,barttt,and I think that barfit In this
case means delivery from tha fire.
In Ramadan Is the night of power, qadr, mentioned In the
our'fln £the majesty of which Is apparent from the Qur'fin]^ (XCyn:
1-3). It Is said that It must be sought among the laet ten days,
and Ihdaed among the odd days of these ten; the opinion of the
majority la In favour of the 27th. _
' It begins ten days after Penteoost. The yeast which terminates
11 la celebrated
2 anblyfi' dropped. in Egypt on 5th Eblb.July II,June 29 0.3.
3 yatahSra jUna. Lane p. 2890. Bar Bebiaeus quotes fran rootor not speci-
fied work of Al-Blruni a similar story of prcmlsouous Interocflirse aaac-
olated with a rellgicua rite (which the Psralana call MSshush) In th«
case of one of the peculiar secte of Meaopotanjifi (Chroa. Booles,!,
219;HofniiQnn,Abhand. fdr die KUnde d. MorgeiilaideBJVII,125,seq. emd
aee Enoyol. Islam under Shahak and Sarllya). Lailat al-mSahQsh la
translated "the night of the spy" in Chrcc, p. 310, but the word aooarding
to Juynboll, Mara aid al-lttllB* V,54A la probably frcm ashsh
Ma^shush. The date of the feast Is uncertain,Chron. prefars autumn,
but that of the Crucifixion Is also mentioned. possibly the feast Is
a4 vestige of a pagan Syrian festival of death and resurrection.
Cf. Jewish fast 285.
A y ,*>&.. a. A-,.) ) U
^V'^J 2>Uijii I -►»j
t^v jryjb*^ ÂJJ)*,fr-jllîS
—Aj UJ^ a^-LiIjb
^ vi i C*J Lrl jJJ-J^jSI Ay J^Xi Jl

"* ^ ' *' >
Ji iy LJ JiJ ^ J-1
I". \ '» . v
• .*■ i .■' —* ■' •"'
" ■"" . * • ^
J AS U=J^-A«_JJ I j xLVl»*e.Ljj^L^L^S^VjLy^blJJe-l
Ti ' 'y • y
• ^
?L.
rf1^1 ^ <CwJj3*«yej>i/_wj\j5i.U
jc£=»^Lii Jjlit
I *4 * ' " ^ ' •* ^ *
W^ !/^V-J^LVl J>U-
^JV ■ J)!-. ti J-^J tJj, -Ar-J J J i^J*

•* " w i »-"
'jS -i' » JL^ J V-^ '<j jV^'j ijjj
301-302
The flrat of 3hawv«l Is the feast of fast-hreaklng oji itloh
day It Is forhlAleii to faat;l but there la a reward for anycne who
baa fhated "OiroughDut Rama(Jan if he also fasts for the next six days.
The first ten days of Dha al-îjjah are the days of the tergn,
the aaored territory of Meooa;the eighth la called tarwlyah2* be-
oauaa
r on that day the pU^rlms have their thirst quenched;11ie nlntli,
arafahiaa the pllgrliaa are then "standing" on Mt. '"ArafSt during
the Great Pilgrimage.while the tenth le the_feaBt of the killing
of tha aheap whloh the pilgrims eaorlflce,îd al-adhB.S Qn this
day and three daya thereafter fasting is forbidden and festival
raiment la donned to close of the oeremonleB,Idbar
al-aalat. (Tbrqe days4 after the saorlflge of the aheep are
called tha days of flesh-drying,tashrl^,5 and theae are counted
daye on whloh,with wi ghw, hwi d after every prayer^
There are oontroversies as to this among the authorities,to
describe the nature of whloh Is difficult and here out of place.
There are also In the iiablo raontha certain daya agreed on to
oommenorete the birth/lea th or ntirder of great people. These are
acoettoes naglsoted,or obeerrod with zeal mnong Banters of jmrtlijular aeata.
302. Pang al-Nawrttz mln ruaum al-fura. Among the oustome of
the Persians la tê obaervanoe of Nawrflx;®"It la the first day
of tha aeuth Pax■aj.dlu.aud la called 'new* being the
FXRSIAN first day of the New Year. For five days thereafter
NX* TKAJ) there Is fsaatlng and the sixth la called Great Mnmz,
beoausa the Khusrevs In those five days ware aooua-
tomed to deliver Judgmenta on the raqulrementa of their ratlnus
and tha people7 generally,while on the alxth they received their
relatlona and the nobility.
The Persians are oonvlnoad that the flrat Nawriiz was tta ftrat
day of all time,and aseert that the epbsza began to rerolve on MjbX, day
303. Ml al-tlrjgn. TlrgSn Is the 13th day of the month Tlr,®
and derlvea Ita name from It,88 Is the oase with other daya ifcoae
names are the same as those of the months In whloh they
TIRGlH are. This la a feast day,and It le reported that on
this day Arlsh shot an arrow with reference to a treaty
between IMntlohlhr end AfrSaldb.to the effeot that the former's
dominion should extend as far as the shot. It Is aald that the
arrow went from the mountains of Tabarlstin to the highlands of
Tokhgrlstdn.
12 rId al-saghlr or Rana^fin Balram.
A reoent pilgrim thought it was yaum al-tarwih (repose).
HaJI Khan with the Pllgrlaw to Mecca 1905 p. 178. Cf. Burton,
Pilgrimage, II, 289, and Snouok Hurgronje, Het Makhani sohe
Feast, p. 64.
43 Td al-kahlr or-qurWhi Balram,
The flrat of thaae la called yaum al-qarr, day of repose,
Hurgronje,
56 Burton II,I.e.p.114. IB IsHurgronje
219 and 291, defectivep. here.
113.
Newyear'a day was the time of the vernal equinox, the sixth
being then ttie time of the entry of the sun Into Ariee: the
astronomlosl Hew Year. There are varloua accounts of thw
observandes of Nawruz, Richardson, Dissertation, p. 156; also
Al-Eisrawl, trans. Nerlman, Armaghan Nawruz.
67 Ahlhum, ehl al-sahm, P. Khaesagfln,
Coincided with the sunnier solstice; also known as abrlzgln.
180
' ' « S f
5J»i I Ul^lj^^VîilgÛt^Jb
tL Jîlj» jii I
a
^ ^îy
sT'ljL-i^j-* AI— •-—A'Ai-«(l/^J
oWMJl-
304-307
304. MB al-mlhrjan. Mllirajan Is the 16th day of the month
>Uhr: on this day ATrldun obtained victory over BTvarasp the
raagiclan,who Is known as paîhBk (EohSk) and inpriflon-
XTHRGlÎ ed him In Mt. DoaAvand,1 The following days are also
feast days aa was the case with Naw^Qz, the sixth
being Great Mihrgfln which Is also known as Rfim^-raz.
305. K8 al-farwardajgn. The last five days of the month
Abfln are called parvardagSn (nourishing) because the Maglans on
these daya act out food and drink for the spirits
PARVARDAGiN of the dead,3 which it is said is all taken and
consumed. Since five days are Intercalated after
IbHn, called andargSh, some people thought that theee are the
five parvardagSn, and controversy arose about It, a momentous
affair In their sect, so to make sure both sets of five days
are celeirated, the first being the 26th of Iban mah, and the
last, the last of the 'stolen* days, and thus the whole of the
parvardagSn lasts for ten days.
306. Ma rukub al-kgsBj.4 The month of idhar at the time of
the Khueraws was the beginning of spring. On the first daj of
the month,as a kind of comedy (read naooal)
MOONTING THE CP.fBl omen], a beardless5 man used to arrive
BEARDLESS MAN seated on an aaa, a crow grasped In one hand
and a fan in the other, with which he keeps
fanning himself, thus bidding good-bye to the winter, while he
aska for contributions from the people. In our day they have
kept up this custom in Shlrsa. With regard to the tribute
levied whatever has been collected from morning till midday la
handed over to the governor, while that from midday till
afternoon prayers la retained by himself. If thereafter he Is
found, he la beaten by the people and ill-treated.
307. Ma bahmanjah. Bahmanjana la the Bahman (2nd] day of
the month Bahman. On this day thby eat white radlsheso with
pure m-Mv< nn account of the fact that it
BAHMANJANA strengthens the memory. In Khurasan they make a
feast by putting all kinds of edible grains In
a pot with the flesh of all permitted animals, and Indeed
everything available at that season end in that district in
the way of [animals],? vegetables and garden herbs.
^ DlbSwand Diet, Geog. Pers. 224.
3^ The Autumnal equinox RHm, Slat v. 277.
4 Fills lacuna In Chron. p. 211,
P. Bar-nlshastan Kdsah or Kusak niahln. Lacuna in Chron. p.
211, See Richardson's Dictionary under mBh for a more detailed
account or his Dissertation p, 159.
5 As he has also a scourge and a pelnt-pot the crow must have
been difficult to manage. P. has KulBghl badaat girifta perhaps
reminiscent of1 Kulagh ba daatash parlda, 'The 'bird' has flown
Into his band , meaning he has got money for nothing.
6 bahman al-abySjL centaurea sp. or the flowers mixed with
sipand, harmala "rue for remembrance".
^ ^ SJJJ yNl^=> 51 ^ l^.
JLiMl*
V i^y ^ i\}-{}£
s *' ' ' f ' * "t »• • *■ ^ ^
-^__)U=. lULîijSxj»-,i-i j^l ^-"ljA?2»lL»j
UÛ->_) j^_lai \ -uuVl <-»r* sUjll
kL~ • 1 j .*.1 ±JL $ i^^vJl ^)W.j jyij
->'—iaj *1^1 Ls.j»-1 J j ^\J L-

V « • f ' r ^
<8 t__» ^=^1*
J^> (•> sUj^VjbajI
,,
' «# • f#'' ^ p
^ ^^ ^ "/ ^ ,' ' '

J-^jO ifeai^-t-yU ^
* ^ ' '-.V ' + .'Ci <
t OJCiÛ
308-310
308. Ug al-aadaq. Sadah (the Persian form) la the IMn
day of the month of Bahman, I.e. the tenth and on the night
hetwoea the LOth and nth they light flrea [with
SADAH walnuts and almonds,drink,
themaelTesJP round about them, (play and enjoy
and aome drive In
anlmale to "be burnt.^ The name la derived from sad, a hundred
seeing that It la fifty days and fifty nights to Nawrds: they
also say that on this day the first father' completed hla tale
of a hundred children. But the origin of lighting and keeping
up the fires Is that Blvarasp conscripted two men every day
from his domlnlona In order that their brains sheuld be placed
on the two wounds on his shoulders. He had a vamlr called
Anainlk (a™b,I1),p* a benevolent man who, of each two,
concealed one alive in DamaTand, When Afridun seized him and
reproached him, AznS'Il said "the extent of my power was, that
1 always saved one from being killed, and all of them are
behind the mountain." So a faithful follower was sent to
examine this olalm, and Azofi'll sent ahead an order to each
pereon to light a fire on his roof, beoauae It was night and
he wished that the large number of them should be evident.
This was therefore reported to AfrTdun who set the prleoner
free, placed him on a golden throne, and gave him the name of
Hansughtn* (i.e. MUghmughlnP Chief of the Magiams), Plvs days
before Sadah a day is eallsd Bdr-3adah or New Sadah, but wo
have no deflnits ihforaatlon about it.
309. kltbat ruqgr al-raq8rlb. On the fifth day of
TBfandimQilti, tHn writing of Bapnr'a~tn ward off the etings of
scorpions takes place. The papers are attached to
SCORPION the doors of houses in the evening. This la not an
CHAR1B original Persian cuetorn hut has been introduced
anew by the common people. It is also a day,
mardglrNn,6 on which wives Have authority ovar their husbands
and claim the aatlBfaotlon of their wishea and extravagant
dnnanda (iqtirtfrrq.
310. Ifi al-kuhanbarlt. There are various divisions of the
daya of the year at the baglunlng of eaoh of which five daya
are known as the KuhanbSro, In aaoh of
SS130NS OP CHSATION these Zarddusht oonoelved that God
Almighty created one species, such as
the heavens, water, land, animals, plants and man, so that the
creation of the world was completed in six days.?
1 dhswSt al-adhdn wa'l-lubtlb.
? Birds with Inflaimjable material attached to their feet, so
that fires should be widely spread. Vullers II 240 also Chron.
p.3 Kaythaarth,
213. the flrat of the mythological Kings of Persia,
ml'at dropped.
4 Iraail, Shahnamah.
56 P. sin.
The word muzhd girSn Chron. p. 216 229 or muzdglrfin Bmphaolzaa
the resultant preaent-glvlng while mard glrCn of the Tafhlm
account refers to the mastery of the woman. (energ. V of
7salat) tataaallatanna. Hlchardson I.e. 160.
GahanbBra, Vullers k Haug. p. 192, Hyde,- Rollg. Veter.
Persarum Cap. 19 &. 20. Jaoksoh. IrSnleohe Religion p. 676.
4 * * 9
^ -r—- ^ V-t>-'-OM y«>
>0 ^_r- U[»riuJsVw.V ^^y-i^jljU^jr-^

^ ^ ** 1 ^
1
^-jU- l(vf-l»j; ^ 'ULî f ^J^-îk-> ^-T-J ?;
c/J^J)ks>^
J / V ^ ^ 9m ^
^* *•"••'» . v „ i i
C-^.J Vc^ ^y ff-^y^^jOJ—
OljifeoJ!.l£=») tf\^j\>Jj--l^lXy^<tC3\ Li^J-J
^-i'-1 -> f-j Jj L^=^f I'AIPW

311-314
311. Fama al-Jamrat fl shuhur al-rum. Wlthregirdto
speolal days in tne lireek months,the name Jamiah'- Is given
to eerealn days at the end of winter when sprir^
JAMR4HS approaches;they say that In these days the In-
terior of the earth becomes warm and vapours
Issue from It, These Jamrahs are on the 7th,l4th and Slat
of Shub&t,and the Arabs say that on these days meteors
fall from the stars of the mansions of the moon.
312. Ayygm al-rajgz mfl hlya. The days of the old
woman (rajaz) are seven days beginning on the 2Sth ShubSt.
They are not free from lee,cold and winds
DAYS OF TES nor of extreme changes In the weather,and
OLD WOMAN are consequently called the cold days of
the old woman. These are the unlucky days
In which the people of rld perished In a storm,only one
old woman surviving and continually mourning for them.
Arabs however say that the word is not 'ajtlz but ''ajuz,
as It were the hinder part of the winter.
313. Fami ra.igz oalam. These days are also known as
the •'ajuz-l qalam. Ya^qOb al-Klndl has written a book on
these days and says that the reason of
ADJUSTED DATE the change in the atmosphere Is the
arrival of the sun at 90° from its
apogee,the place where the equation changes frcm plus to
minus. Since the apogee moves,Abdullah bin rAlI al-pSslb,
better known as Abdullah Qalam,made these days to accord
with the position of the apogee In our time,not In Ptol-
emy ' s. Therefore the days became known as rajuz-l qalam.2
314. Fami ayram al-bfihur. BahUr begins on the 19th
of TammDz and lasts for seven days. The Greeks say that
Orion's dog,the Southern Dog-star,Is due to
DOG-DAYS rise at this time• the heat becomes
1 The Coal days. Chron. p. 2Ts. The first Jamrah falls
These jamrahs and the succeeding cold spell are recorded
on the same days In a Persian Calendar for 609 (Jelal.)
1099 A.H., 1587—8 A.D. reproduced and translated by M.F.
Beck 1695. Jamrah he. translates "Solennitas" as If It
referred to the a tone-throwing at Mlna (Snouok-Hurgronye
I.e. 105-6, Burton II. 203. Lane 453) ,and the cold spall
"dies (vetulae) frlgorls adultae hyemls". In an Arabia
Calendar for 1349/1931 the Jamrahs are postponed to
Feb. 20, 27 and March 6, and the cold and stormy spell
(al-tiusum v. Dozy) lasts from March 10-17.
2 Chron, p. 245,
183
^4^vy
^ 4 **> w ^
^-A v^ .iî * ^-Vj >^>y«V^l 5^^ >
iiuu?
Wtf Lllfe; ^
iiîj ji ijX \ ir
j.>LILj4aL«^ w>yc
^Z\^Xs\i\^j JÂJ ji'tiv? f^l^L;^)

^ ^ ? • fc '
jL^J ^-y kLlV.^
314-316
exce33iye,and the name is said to be derived from buhran
a crisis or a decision made,because the authorities try
to gain information as to the state of the weather In
the winter months from that on these decisive days. The
first day of bfihilr is an indication of what Tlshrln I
will be like,the second,of Tlshrln II and so on,so that
if there is fog or rain or wind on any of these days,
the corresponding months will have the same. Especially
in Egypt do they accept prognostics from these days as
to whether crops will thrive or not.^
315. Fahal llghayr ha'ula* shal'mln dhallka All
nations and settlea communities celebrate other days 'by
holding feasts and fairs at well-known
OTHER SIMILAR points,but it is difficult to know about
DATES them all individually;those we do know
about we have dealt with in a more
suitable place,
216. Fahal llmajuz al-sughd ayySm kadhallka. The
Maglans of Soghdia also have their feasts and festivals
of a religious nature called aghSms,
SOGHDIAN FEASTS but the necessary knowledge with re-
gard to them has not reached us.
The people of BukhSrfi call the first and second
Soghdian months by corresponding names. In these they
hold bazars,among which are the first and second
mfikhlzaj,2 at which we are told stolen articles are soM,
great confusion prevails and no returns are made. The
first of these is the 13th day of the third month Ijfaan,
and the second the 13th of the fourth month Basak.5 The
fair of Tawawls,a large and populous town,lasts for seven
days from the 415th of Mazhlkhandfi the siith month,while
that of Shar*", also the name of a town,lasts for ten
days from the 15th of MasSfOgh5 the tenth month.
J Chron. p. 260. MB has ztlrr for zurQr.

^ Makhlraj Chron. MSkhlrah P.
*4 12th NisanaJ.
r 12th Basakanaj Chron, 221, text 234.
5 P. Ghar , Chron, p. 425,
Chron. text p. 235, 7, has MasfifUgh in it there is a
feast from the 5th to the 10th and then the Muslims have
a fair at Shargh for 7 days. Trans, has Marsafiigh.
184
CJJ A-> j>-j rt-li L^lsfrfc- J|tJ>=^
^ '-Xi^W^v t l^L 'U;i
Wfw^J^ ^SÛJJ£=>WLI?^*1^'_^ LV iij&a'> J
^pt"'
317-319
S17' Fama Khaaan. It Is said that Khazan^- is not a
Soghdlan expressIon,although the Soghdians use it,but a
TokhSra2 one,and the Tokharlans regard it as
AUTUMN a sign of change of t£e weather towards cold.
There is a special autumn feast for the upper
classes which is on the 18th of 3hahrlwar,and one for
the common people on the 2nd of Mihr, Both of them
celebrate the beginning of the use3 of the wine-press
(and the treading of the grapes?).
310. Ma ayySm maJQs Khwgrizm. The Magian3 of
Khwarizm agree with those of Soghdla as to the traditicns
of their months,and the names of
DAYS OF MAGIANS these are not different except to a
OF KHWARIZM dialectal extent. Some of the days
of the KhwSrizmtan months are well-
known; their New Year is called Nausarjl;4 argha-stian5
is the first of their third month and the sixth of
Khurdad. In our time this argha-sQSn is regarded by than
as indicating the time for sowing sesame,and the sub-
sequent operations. AjghSr,which means fire-lighting,is
the 16th of the fourth month on which day they kindle a
big fire at rightp after the fashion of the Sadah, and
drink (wine slkr ) round about it. ^rom this day they
calculate the proper times for cultivation,gathering in
and pressing the grapes and the like, Faghburiyah5 is
the first day of their sixth month and on it la the
expedition of the Shah to the frontiers. There are also
Chlr-ruz which is the Persian Ram-rUz and Nlmkhab the
leth7 of the tenth month,which in our times is in the
middle of winter.
319. Fama al-ayyam wa'l-ahuhur al-Mu^tadldiyyah.
When the Persians neglected intercalation their months
came on earlier; Nauruz arrived be-
MUrTApiD,S DAYS fore the ripening of the corn,and
the payment of the taxes before the
marketing of the corn. The agriculturists of the rural
12 IcEIzSn ao.
Name by which Tokhffristffn in the upper basin of the
Oxus was known to Hsuen Tsang. Tokhariyya A corrected
in margin of AO to Bukhffrlyya.
43 Of. Chron. trans. 207, text 222.
Missgelt. Chron. p. 223, text 235 Nausarohl. (off.
5 arPja-suan Chron. Text 236.arIjalB3 ohuzar. dross will b3 put
^ Faghrubah Chron. trans, p. 224. Faghlrlyyah A.
Chron. text p. 236. Faghburnah P
7 2l3t Chron,
105
f » Uj y U r)'4 A -«»^clj lA-^J—^ [• 1 ^'
#
*' ■* •
1
v ? L-V L
s .'^^) 1 -K^j-
bi. *D'
! " ''- : <■' ' ■' v v' V

_J i ir>- Lyl. J_J jLJ1 ♦TOO'3
',• ** *» «0 "V
—J?îA>ca'Jll ^l^^lZl^LL^pLiL^yi
^LsljUj vJ^J-jl pj_j^J l^jU>j«LJ^,£^î}]j»ill

* '* ^ ^ 4 -S' * ^
W" —^-ir^-' t~ j^-p JjUiJj-j'
319-321
districts became much distressed,and the authorities were
in difficulty^ So Mutawakkil resolved to postpone Nauruz
to a later date,30 that it might be easier for the peas-
antry: but his purpose was not fulfilled for he was as-
sasinated (247 A.H,)r before it was carried out,land it
was reserved for Mu ta(}id to do so,who was determined
to effect it. Nauruz was transferred to the 11th Haziran,
and the various Persian months with their oontainid
festivals which follow Naurdz were also transferred;they
intercalated five rsupplementary days in the same way as 2
the Syrians,and Mu taîd added a sixth day in that year.
320. Fama ayyam al-IChwgrizmshghiyyah. Similar
changes were effected in Khwarizm (in 348 A.H. 959 A.D.)
by Abmad bin Muhammad bin ''Iraq bin
KHWARI3M3HAH1S Mansdr Khwarizmshah3 who was desirous
CALENDAR that the number of days which it was
usual to count in relation to agri-
culture and the vintage should start from a fixed point,
so that differences as to seed-time which occurred among
the peasantry should not arise. So he altered the
Khwarizmlan months4 so as to agree with the Syrian ones
and made Nausarjl (their Nauruz) the 2nd of Nlsan.
(Srd^Chron.)
321. Ma al-madmun daftar al-sanah. Calendars are
always ha.sftd nn the Ferilan mnnthH nn flnnnnnt of the
ease and beauty of the arrangement. They
CALENDARS are called 'taqwlm* because everything set
opposite each day may be depended on for
accuracy.
Similar calendars constructed in Kashmir for the
Hindu year,are used throughout the districts of Hindus-
tan; they are written on rolls of the thin bark of tuz
and are called 'tithi-pattri' or books of lunar days,
but they were not durable and the calculations were
approximate not accurate.
ffith regard to the calendars in use in our country
you must know that the first column to the right of the
table contains the days of the week in abjad letters,so
that A means Sunday,B Monday, Z Saturday and then the
1 Chron. p! 37/32.
2 chron. p. 36.
® Abu-Sa^Td Ahmad. Chron. p. 229, He r was the father of
the last prince of this dynasty, Abu Abdall5h bin
Muhammad^whom Ma'mun attacked and made prisoner in 385/
996,annexing
4 then Khwarizm.
Chron, p. 229/241 Nffflsfirzl P.
f ^>li. pî-^r"'^ ^ ^ Û^-»L4UL»^\>tA—*
<• * \s 1 *, f 9 ^'
l^JL j [*) I *£J l^lJJ AL-i
f $-\i\
^jUi. Al£>i(ll>^ yjy.
• * * «* » ^ t—' ♦'
jjJ^/L^L-i J_^«lî^ll UiJ »S=^>j
—'4!Jjji4j-'<-ji'l^l l> L cJ^Sy^ t—\_))J LA^£JI

321
week having been ooncluded back to A again. The second
column contains the days ot the Arabic months from the
Ist to the 29th, if the month Is short, and to the
30th If complete; this Is followed by the 1st of the
next month. In the third column are the days of the
Greek months from 1-30 or 31, and In the case of
Shubat 2B or 29. The fourth column has the numbers
of the days of the Persian month the name of which
la written above, from 1-30 and In the case of AbSn
35, while the names of these days are recorded In
column five.
Next come the names of the seven planets, and
In each column under these are three rows, that to
the right Indicating the signs of the zodiac from
0-11 In abjad letters {tbeing Arlea, 1 Taurus etc.),
that to the left, degrees and that In the middle,
minutes. These three rows opposite a day indicate
the position of the planet at midday for the
locality for which the calendar Is constructed,
and the amount of movement In degrees and minutes
from day to day. If Increase In these Is continuous
In the direction of the signs then the movement Is
direct, if there is decrease, It is retrograde,
while if there is neither Increase nor decrease the
planet is stationary either In the direct or
retrograde course. Further there Is a column for
the ascending node of the moon (ra^), one for hours
and minutes of the length of day, and a third for
the altitude of the sun at midday. Sometimes a
Iv LÛMJ kkl i' i^Jj/llA-î J
' • • * •* ^ * _ .x«
_,,—ii^l ji j U^. ilili ^jfj»s=> j^VJ ji» J^.
wl* JoJj ^jr_ ^'yL-

* * y *
ci-A j ^-j i' Ow'-'^ jii(U==^/,^lL*J v_jCX
^^vJâAel wiei»^ L.f-a.J=^\1
JB. ^llij Jl*.
^xijLvu ^ji i—liîÛi J L^>-U.'
vJl^j ^Lfl5
321
column Is provided for the latitude of the moon but
this Is of little use and as such Is discarded, What-
ever else Is Included In the calendar Is provided for
the people generally who regulate their work by the
position of the moon In the signsând Its conjunction
with the planets.
On the margin of the calendar to the right are
placed the months of the various nations,their
festivals,the conjunctions and oppositions of the sun
and moon and the sign and degrees thereof where these
occur, the time of day or night,and the ascendants at
such times,the last being very useful for eliciting
weather probabilities. Again the time Is shown of the
sun's entry Into the various signs,and the ascendants
at such times,except In the case of Aries where the
ascendant Is the ascendant of the year,and the calendar
Is adjusted from this point,the entry of the 3ur. Into
Aries.
They also show at the beginning of the calendar by
a diagram how to equate the twelve houses, the position
of the planets therein and the resultant prognostics
for the whole year. Before this theme are given the
dates of the Prophets (on them be peace) and the dates
of distinguished kings, because en Intellectual
pleasure Is found In such things. Some people Include
pictures of the new moons which occur In the Persian
year showing how each is going to appear when first
seen whether erect or recumbent, also Its relation to
the point of sunset, so as to be of assistance to the
observer looking for the new moon. Many other things
are added for the most part useless. If however there
Is an eclipse of the sun or moon in the course of the
year, this Is Indicated at the end of the calendar,
because an eclipse Is Indicative of so many
( , ** ^s* ''
—rX^ry*^t/'ii jLkJ ^^ yv* w41 >j* i' J

^ w ■*• ♦ >
- ypL-U^ J L«lU^J_riJ_J,'fJ^Jj ^£=a
I it If^lj Lc-'J^V ^Wv)
j;, u-iljtl ??Jr>»Jl-iJlj
V_ ..' ' 5 ' ( " « ' f

J
/ "A ""-> I wilT
ÛLÛ,
Tj '^J^1JI(3I^JJ ^ Jiîi I
f / * *^
a.~,JUjl-£=>-» «^ J Jjlt- LAL—Vj .LL^L^*>-\>|£=^-4-fc»j
•v •* * ^1 *
' UJ) Li-l A^k^
W 1 '-4^0^ «-j1 Iv-^ 4At )

321
dlBaî-eflable
In the oaee of an Acllpsa the oate la fLvea, the asiouut be^lnnlo^
things that 11 ie Ufldsairabla to have It at the of night orofday
the which
oalsndar.
will have elapsed till the
beginning, middle
of theAnddiameter of and
son end
or of
noonthe
andaolipea,
the the
colour extent
of the of delay
oolipse if there
whether ia
usual. any, the amount if net total in 1/12the
now «« add by way of an ezeuftple a portion of a Persian month eo as to facilitate the reading of tha
Calendar.
Meridian THM SIGHT H MOZTTH ABAB Tame a Of jlumUirB
of Per- Bumben
of Day a
of
AltitQds Hours Xaoaul- PoPBian
Days of sian
Dayo of Day a of
Tlahrln
Month
of Days
Of of ing
3un. Day Bods. us raury Vo nuQ Mare Jupiter Saturn Uoon ^Jun Month Month of
I. ngptA Cftfl 7e*ic
0 0 0
A9016' 26°42" 1044' 23° 9t 2 32»
11.23 20° 19' 3 31« 906' 17 54' Bursuid 1 6 23 I
4a0l2» 270&6' aD a« 23c U' 2020'
11.20 20°16* dOas1 230L? ia064' Bahman 2 6 24 £
J. n
4a029' 0
89° 10' 2019* 23°19' 202S.
11.18 200l3i 6 21- 7024" 19034» Ardlhahlsh 3 7 26 3
1
ifiC 6' 11.16 acîo 7049'0 2** 2° 34' 23°24' 2023' C0a54' Shahrlwor 4 Q 26 4
<C7> cca II
0 0 0 l 0 0
47 44« IL.U 20^ 7' 9 21' I 38 e 49' 23 29" 20£1' 6049- 81q61' lofandunno Ih B 9 27 5
47082" 11.12 80° 3* loOM1 2052' SOlO'i £3034' 2019' 21*25' 33fl54l Zharrtiih 6 10 20 6
Q ««=■ I ■ai
The BHoandant
of ooajunoticJU off of
thoLibra,
conjunction of the ooon ia of Aquarius, the hour, Vrlday Sh ftn. and the degree
Suppose we 23®l
ars asked as to the general oonditlona on Tuesday the 2Sth of Ramadan, we look in the oolumu
of the d&yo
hawing found efthla
the weweek
see for
thata 3It (Tuesday)
colnoldea which
with oorreaponds to Syrian
the /th of the the 2bthandofCreek'months.
:,amadan in the Arabic •oiomc,is
If the aana
189
J^vll a-3^ JÎL. îjfc. L*^. ^1 ^ J>3-ii
' s ' t* —
-ill U«L—~ti?'
r5
rr
a^gjU \ "1 f.
■J ' , I.nS mrTTS z* r;
f?-
V
t r-V r- ^1
i*.ja. J-J.J .-v® jp
*. -
r ^'y V J -t^> j-t
f fcH"
j-fc
* i tf^ irt j.>. »=»
j*i -L ht it- Sy5 i-u^j iii--1
rîU t*-i
^**^1 rfr t if •iu.t & iWifc t.— t
fy* j^LAU JjJ

* y $ ♦^ ^ '^X*' » *
\JtC^^llilD »loc»£^«^jLa*) i^JljUc^lÂill
321
written above as In this case we at once know that
it is Tishrln I, if not we turn to a table of
Greek months and find that Tishrln I is written
opposite it. We also find in the Persian column
that it corresponds to the 3rd day, Ardlbahisht of
the month Abfin, which name is written above the
table. If we wish to learn the date according to
the era of Alexander, we find it on the margin of
Tlshrln I, of the Hijra beside Muârram and of
Yazdigird beside Nauruz the 1st of Farwardln, on
the condition that Tlshrln and lAiharram are already
past; if not it will be necessary to deduct a
year, the result is the date required, viz.
Tuesday 85th Ramadfin 4201 A.H., 7th Tlshrln I,
1341 Alex, and Ardlbahisht, 3rd of Aban, 398 Yazd.
[7th Oct, 1029 A«D*]
Then we look at the position of the planets
and find the sun at midday at the locality for
which the calendar is made is in 19054f of Libra,
A comraon form for a

figure of the heavens
at a nativity, in
which the degrees of
the cusps and the
situations of the
planets are inscribed.
The chief properties
of the houses are
here Indicated, 461.
Another form on next
page which shows the
inequality of the
houses in relation
to the ecliptic.
1
As remarked Pers. Cat. B.M. II. 452. PLl has 425
but this is by error due to the preceding blst u
panjum ramadan; the words from 1341 - Abffn.tPL and PP
agree with A.] are omitted; otherwise the calendar is
the same with some inaccuracies.
4
*<* t^> ^ ^ {9^*? '^/■^_jiV Lj J i>»jC»yA^ LÛn.!
\ i j
J' ^'?Pt5-'-T,-^fe**,-^(:->->' ^
2-; ^JLJ^L^jLÎU
JJ> J J
J»JJ-^/Uîljr-'^jLiltj»^îi\>J^ 1 L^k»-13ILl^jil
^Sy ^ ^.kJj^r3 —■o-^-^.iijJp*!1

Y
/ *
y)' vJJ^J^.JO ^
^LyLw^ 5
—: U A1^^ TLUVÂD ,>^'
j^^l AJyAld^Jfy-! ■ WjU'<_ii<«J^«4i3lL^ i j Jh-j

321-322
the moon In 7024,, of0Virgo, Saturn In 2026, of
Gemini, Jupiter in 23 o19, t of Gemini, Mars in 2018'
of Canoer, Venus in 29 10 of Virgo, Mercury 6 21*
of Libra, and ras in 20o13, of Virgo. The length
of the day is llh. 18ni. and the altitude of the
sun at midday and so the conditions at
midday have been arrived at.
322. Kaif yunraf mustaqlmha wa raji*' ha. Both

sun and moon are direct in iheir movements, there
being nu retrugi'ade yliaae, and
DIRECT AND similarly the ascending node has no
HBTROGHADE direct course, but it is necessary
in the case of the other planets to
distinguish between direct and retrograde move-
ments. In the case of Saturn, if we look at the
day after that discussed, we find that it shows
three minutes leas, we know therefore that it is
on the retrograde path. The same days1show in
the case of Jupiter an increase of S*, and of
Mars 16*, both are therefore direct, as is Venus
R.A.M.C. 51 56
Al Biruni
XII orn Khwarizm Vil
Sept
05
Lat,
-/III 1 IV
■k \
3-
r
—J
V. p. R.A..I.C. 241056'
^ has 50 for 5.
191
7°—-' î^Jr^~x~J.h^j^li
. ^.Y .• ' I ' *'.*>. ** -" */
>—^ A-aJ3
*>!>£)Jj^LjV^lJ.) Jj
..I .. ... V ' .'*» ". . .:. ..'Ill,
** ' / j ^ ^ *'
322-323
which increases by 1 14t. Her direct course is
rendered more evident by the fact that she moves into
Libra on the following day. Mercury la also direct and
increases by . A glance at the hour column shows
that there is a decrease of two minutes per day, and
that the day is shorter than the night. The altitude
at midday is also seen to decrease from day to day.
323. gakaif yurraf maudi^ al-kawkab llwaqt mafrud

ghayr niaf al-nahSr. The following example will ahow
how the position of a planet at
CALCULATION POSITION any particular time may be
STAR AT OTHER TIMES found as long as its position
at midday is known. Suppose
that 7h. 40m, of the day hours have passed, this being
Tuesday; we divide the day hours into two equal
parts, viz. 5h. 39m. the difference is 8h. 1m.
Neglecting the minute we can say that two hours after
midday have passed by the time mentioned, because the
number of hours up to midday is less, if it were
greater, these two hours would belong to the forenoon.
Now two hours is the i2th of a complete day, and we
employ this to the motion of the sun, which we know
progresses lo in 24 hours, therefore, a 12th of 1°
being 5*, this is added to the known position of the sun
giving 1^9' of Libra for its position after the lapse
192
L jiic-W —-iLj^LXcj
•yi ^
SîJj^tfcl^j^j aliall
w^>-- -i—wJtL jL^t

333
of 7h. 40iii. of the day hours. If the time were two
hours before midday the sun would be In of
Libra, and Its position that of 3h. 40m. after
sunrise.
An example oan also be taken from the moon.
Suppose 2h. 20m, of the night hours have elapsed on
Wednesday, then we add the hours back to Tuesday
midday, making 8 hours, the0 3rd of 24. Now the
progress of the moon Is 14 S9' per day, and the 3rd
of that , which has to be added to the
position of the moon making 12017' of Tlrgo for Its
position at the time stated.
The same process oan be adopted with any planet
which is direct in its movement, and any other item
in the table which increases or diminishes, We
take for example Saturn as an instance of a planet
retrograding; its rate of progress is 3' and
consequently 1' in 8 hours, but as its movement is
contrary to the direction of the signs, this minute
has to be deducted from the position at midday,
therefore 2° 25' of Gemini at two hours of the
night of Wednesday.
So must one proceed by adding or subtracting
with all the items of the table.
■•"-> •• l-Vv. f ■ -/r<
jCfti' Lyit^J LuVâ^j—L. JJ/) v_^l—

5
A l ' "ut'
CiJ I jl* l_4H£>4_l»(^wal^j 1_> lfrLl\_J l" A^Sji—Uj |
>* . ^ ) Vv '
j^=iu«yJ) ^_Xir J^-Ly Li
Aju55 > îl-%ij4jUi
A 1JA^tS [jujJiA^^y^Jo Lylc-Lj

, * ' ' "»
*" *^ ^ V\ ^
oV^JjU/i J Jkjij i L«i^?_y]> J >—Jill!
J
w ' ^ ^ ^
Jy jjjU. jlj^j ' '—'^-lli
Li
THE ASTROLABE
324-325
324. Ma al agturlgb. The astrolabe1- Is an instrument
of the Greeks; its'name Asturlabun i.e. mirror of the
Stars, Hamzah of Isfahfin derived from
THE ASTROLABE the Persian as if*it were sitara-yab
(star-finder). By its aid it is possible
easily and accurately to know the time,and how muoh of
the day or night has passed, as well as other things too
many to enumerate.
The instrument has a back,belly and various separ-
able parts, which are held together by a pivot in the
centre. Various figures and lines are on the Instrument,
each of which haa a technical name for purposes of
distinction.
325. Ma a^da al-agturlab. The astrolabe is round
except for the projection of the 'kursl* in rwhich there
is a hole for the swivel, ilaqah and
PARTS OF THE ring halqah. In the centre of "the
ASTROLABE astrolabe is a hole in which the pivot
turns; the latter holds the various
parts together with the aid of a pin,the ôrse*. On tbe
back there is a rule,the ridadah,which turns on the
pivot; its ends are sharp po in is, nmrl,and towards the
centre from each end there prujeuta a quadrangular
piece (libnah, hadaf an archer's butt) with amaAl holes
serving as sights.
The face of the astrolabe,the other side of the
backjls surrounded by a raised ledge.the ûjrah,fitting
accurately
r within which is a perforated plate,the
ankabut (spider's web).shabaka or rete. Part of this
plate is a complete circle on which are inscribed the
twelve signs of the zodiac; beside Capricorn a sharp
1 For two English works on the Astrolabe, of. Chaucer's
Conclusions on the Astrolabe 1391 ed. Skeat. Early
English Text Society 1812 and w.H. Morley, Description
of a Planisphere Astrolabe, constructed for Shah
usayn in 1712 A«D. London 1856.
Misspelt in MS.
3 P has awlzah; Morley p. a uses ♦'llaqah for the
rcord or strap from which the ring is suspended, and
urwah for the brass swivel between the ring and the
kursT.
194
^.jWÔv > >—^ ej Ljj
1
J \f-\\£\^(j& Lj^J ^LJ3VJ
9 4
^ *\ ' * ^ '-*'
^ eji£=> »_J^
»Jô IfrLs Ja—4JJ
^^yLjC
jj-i- '
, v 1" ^ " V » X' ' '"
1 .j L-r-^ a> L»lnj^J jJJ

> ' v * ■''"■• " ^ ••■ '. ^ " >
__• ^ V*'". ' 1 J^» JII
^jC—4j| A>^Vj»-Vv-t' i_Nj-Ji—\ 'a^ i U1»

45
^ af W '
^ JliL^J,:] >3 ^
y r , t* .• »!- , ■' > '~ «'
^^ ri' j*^ v--^ ^3,4' •Ajl»)>!-ÂJ^-^'V L
325
point the 'murl*, projects from the olrole end oontlnually
rests on the Ijujrah when the rete is turned on the pivot.
Within and without the zodiac circle are sharp triangular
pieces attached to the meshes of the rete with the names of
fixed stars engraved on them - s tar-pointers. When the horse
la removed from the pivot, the rete and the discs underneath
it come apart; the latter are conatruoted for different
latitudes, •climates•, both surfaces of each disc helog used.
O
Table
Jut
Ipll tie
Back of the Astrolabe

4
V The Rule or •"lijgdaS"
In the larger astrolabes the back ia not only used for meas-
uring altitude and shadow, but affords space for a ^reat deal
of astrological Information. The signs are there with their
faces, terma and their lerda, the Mansions of the Moen, the
parallelogram of two shadows with a tahla of trlplloltles in
the Interior; sines, ooslnea in the upper left quadrant, and
In the right, the parallels of the signs, the meridian altltud.©
of the sun at various latitudes, e.g. L, and its altitude at
various places, when It cresses the azimuth of Keooa, e.g. M,
When the ri^Qdah ia fitted to the hack by the pivot and
secured by the horse on the other aide, the pointers ride on
the fcujrah, indicating altitude and shadow.
105
~—^îy-J^ l>- £>t». ^5 lil»^ L-L'C^J^
^ VCUI ^^1 jf^LlUk-^ ^
I ^Ju^V>a1^. U3 ^?;£=3l^Û^l>jS)^.J_jil ^.1
x >
" ' * ' 1. ' v^ '
jLu^Js ^
^ , ^ , ^ .• », . •' 1' * • ** *
0
.■t
-: , G.'r-
3^ (y
.Jq " v 7 " iT.

e) Uj*1! i_ — fesUall
>.
Ûaai'o*0
The figure on the opposite page does not represent the
ûmm.hut a simple form of the hack showing the quadrant
of altitude and quadrant of shadow.
The above shows a simple form of ânkabut or rete
from PL without underlying discs,flttlng enugly into the
n.mmi bounded by the ûjrah which is graduated to 360°
grouped in 15s=equal hours,and In this oase shown with
the kurai,''urwah and halqah attached. The rete can be
rotated, its pointer traversing the degrees of the h^Jrah.
There are shown 5 star-pointers within and 6 without the
zodiac circle. When the horse is withdrawn from the pivot
the rete and underlying discs can be removed from tbe Cmm.
Cf. figure overleaf,at its right the title of next paragraph.
195a
m
m
A dlaa prepared for a oertaln latitude. The three
great circles are from without. Tropic of Capricorn,
Equinoctial, Tropic of Cancer. SW, East and West Line,
HH, Horizon intersecting It and the equinoctial at A.
The upper part of the vertical line is the Line of Mid-
heeven. Above and parallel to HE are muqantares In 6s
ending at Z the zenith. Delow are the lines of the
unequal hours from 1-12. A projection In the r\inB fits
Into notches at the bottom of the discs and keeps them
In place.
195h
n
326
326. Ma aaaml khutGt al-asturlab. If the astrolabe
be held with the back towards one and the kursl upper-
most, the line which runs horizontally
LINES ON THE from left to right is the horizon or
ASTROLABE East and West line. The upper left
quadrant is the quadrant of altitude,
and its margin is divided into ninety equal divisions,
grouped in fives or tens, beginning at the horizon line
and ending at the middle of the kursl. These degrees of
altitude are numbered In ,abjadr letters. The opposite
quadrant, the quadrant of shadow, is divided into digits
of shadow beginning with a point diametrically opposite
the middle of the kursl. There is no definite limit for
these digits except what is brought about by the
division lines beoanlng increasingly close as they re-
cede from that point. (The artist in P. hasînoorrectly^
divided the quadrant of shadow in the same way as the
quadrant of altitude,)1
On each of the discs under the rote (which are
accommodated in the belly or mother of the astrolabe)
are engraved three concentrlo circles, the largest and
outermost of which is named the Tropic of Capricorn,the
smallest and innermost, the Tropic of Cancer and the
middle one, the Circle of Aries and Libra or the
equinoctial. Each disc is divided into four quadrants
by two diameters, the East and West line and a second
which intersects it at right angles, and is divided at
the centre into an upper part towards the kursl - the
midday line, and a lower, the midnight line,respective-
ly known as the line of mid-heaven and that of the
pivot of earth. The horizon is that arc of a circle
which passes through the intersections of the Circle of
Aries with the East and West line; above it and similar
to it are the 'muqantaras* or parallels of altitude,
divided into East ani West halves, by the meridian,
^ This 1b also the case in AO and AO1, but AO has

an inserted leaf pp. 196-7 where it is divided at
45° (12 fingers) into umbra recta 1-12 and umbra
versa 12-1. Usually in Persian Astrolabes the umbra
recta is carried to 50 fingers on on© quadrant (fig.^)
and 30 feet on the other, umbra versa being only
indicated in the central "square of 2 shadows".
j -• '" ^-t, .- •" ' {w»
» * * flr^^. ^ ^
wl^dM' ' t—aû sii ^j /-^"J
\^$Z~>*j-aM JUUÂfr Ui^JU^SsJÎ
^jlj ^L-^L U J ot^=»xijii ljfyy^^^»)

** 9 *
■—^r-^ *-9^^
L.J V,->-J41LJM' -^-^J^j jlu^ L^yf^J^ÂI

326-327
as is the horizon. The smallest muqantara is that
at the zenith marked 90°. There are also the
lines of the unequal or temporal hours below the
horizon passing between the Tropics of Cancer and
Capricorn, and numbered from 1-12.
327. FamS al-asturlab al-t5mm wa'l-nlsf wa

ghayruhum. A complete astrolabe is one that has
ninety muqantaras nimrbered
COMPLETE AND PAHTIAL in abjad letters 1 to 90
ASTROLABES from horizon to zenith.
If the instrument is too
small to contain all these, then only every
second muqantara (half-size) or third, or sixth,
or tenth is marked (but not fifth although this
form should be made].^ In the smaller astrolabes
the divisions of the zodiac are similarly treated.
The expressions large and small refer to the
number of divisions and the dexterity or otherwise
of the artist.
Morley p. S mentions Khumst as one of the forms

made.
197
'•bejJjvJi! uXiil I* £*_» Uj £-jLl ^'li'
l^1 r VlV
J^^lv
.' "j ' "'' * "
iWlVrS)^
k>i^\ .yl >j jê> 1« U^ _^kl^J^jj

328
32B. Ma al-a^turlabat al~mukh511fah llhadhlhl al~
9if5t. There are also astrolabes of dirrorent models
from that deaoribed without umieoeg-
ASTROLABES OP sary detail,which is a northern as
DIFTKRENT FORM distinguished from a southern instru-
ment. In the latter Cancer occupies
the place which Capricorn holds in the northern instru-
ment, and is opposite to Capricorn,as is the case with
the other signs which in their new positions are still
opposite their former opponents. The disc bearing
parallels of altitude is characterized by the fact
that the ends of the horizon arc and of a few of the
muqantaras are directed downwards with their convexities
towards the kursl,while the others are in the samo
position as in the northern instrument.
Several varieties of these two forms are distin-
guished, like the 'asr1 whoso muqantaras are like myrtle
leaves in shape,the ♦mutabbal' which is drum-shaped,and
the ♦musratan'. There is also the 'mubattakh* called so
because the muqantaras and the zodiac circle are flat-
tened into an elliptical form like a melon. Again sane
instruments have additional discs,such as the tablet of
horizons (saflhat al-afHqlyya) and that of 'matrahu'l-
8hurar (place to which the rays are projected ■ aspects)
and that engraved with azimuth circles passing through
the zenith, lines of the equal and unequal hours,of the
rising of the dawn and the descent of the twilight.
Again on the back of the astrolabe lines of the
sines,1 of the shadow of the azimuths" and of the mid-
day and afternoon prayers are often indicated. When
necessary the rule, divided into two halves, is also
lettered, the crooked hour lines, the numbered divisions
of sines and arcs being marked on it. But there is no
end to this chapter.
21Janub for Juyub PL.

The altitude of the sun at various places when it
passes over the azimuth of the qlbla, PL and PP have
zilil slim for zill-i sunut.
190
' •i n-/ / J
. f+ II . I ^ m V Ik 4|*^
nk -^-J dj jl<J ^J^siljj^-iJJ J
{PjL-Z*
X JXs
êsLa«\l^
■ '^lUu»#L«^jL*>WiÛ^_^J^»ljjl Âs^JUiiltL^
389-331
389. Fama al-arSqim rald al-zahr. The baok of the
astrolabe sometimes has the terms or limits of the
planets.the faces and tripllolties en-
INF0FB1ATI0H graved on It; If there Is room also the
ON BACK names of the planets,while these are
generally Indicated by the create marks
K. Saturn; H. Jupiter, (Jltars, © Sun, ^ Venus,
Mercury,>5 Moon. 1J) The Hindus, however, use the
Initials of their names for them.
330. Kalf vukhadbu al-lrtlfa'' bi'l-asturlab. In
order to take tns altitude of the sun with the astrol-
abe, suspend It fiTnily nn a finga-r nf
HOW TO TAKE the right hand,the face towards the
ALTITUDE 0? SUN sun,then move the rule until the
shadow of the one libna nearest the
sun falls on the other and until the rays of the sun
pass through both upper and lower sights,then note the
degree of altitude Indicated by the point of the rule,
and whether It Is Z. or W, I.e. before or after midday.
331. larrlfah al-sll wa'l-lrtlfar ahad huma mln
al-Skhlr. Ihen the altitude of the sun has been taken
and it Is desired to know the—
TO KNOW SHADOW AND length of the shadow of a gnomon
ALTITUDE, THE ONE (shakh?) at that time,note how
FROM THE OTHER many fingers of shadow correspond
to the altitude In question,then
PL .2. Y
AO AT M cT
^ ^ I Y
AO 1 J
Y
AP * ' ^
N -r t ^ ?
PP Y ^ t ^ t Y
from Abu tSshar De magn. conjunct.
AL A- •v-'f Y ^ T ^
Wiademann has reproduced those of AO^-, Byzantln. Zeltsch.
HI p. 145.
199
*V ^ 9
Lm LL<> v-fci lj
î> ^ -jp ^-^jdi ^ lûUL^)
—lLi-1 *^=>J^
'"»■—-^3-J^Jilji^^Ll_JJ^j ^jLACaîAûALi^v-lrf
^j/'V^Jfc*-^ l^pii I J^f(t4
(£>u-iVf^ û^^!>
-^—a^j iiljLJ»^]> Ulx*!v liPj

331-332
the length of the shadow Is to the height of the
gnomon as the number of fingers Is to twelve.
Conversely, If the length of the shadow be Known
and the number of fingers oorreapondlng in accord-
ance with above proportion, then the altitude oan
be determined by placing the lower end of the rule
on the number of fingers In qusstlon.
332. Ma^rlfah al-tallr nln Irtlfa*- al-shams.

To determine the ascendant from the altitude, select
the dlso oonstruoted for the
TO KNOW ASC3MDAMT place of observation (or as
FHOM ALTITUDE nearly as possible) place It
uppermost and fit the rete over
It, then find and mark the muqantara. East or Neat,
which has the same number as the altitude (If the
astrolabe Is not complete Its position must be
estimated). Thereafter ascertain from a calendar
the eimot place of the sun at that time, and mark
that point on the corresponding sign of the zodiac
on the rete (this may have to be estimated if the
astrolabe Is not complete). Then rotate the rate
^ <* <*
«• V *
_i)J| sJjiS i^Xu j!,^_jU=l»
J^1^1 U-^.^ ^^îd-VvJutl

—jj^*Q> ^_»J)îj —^1U
J> Jm5 1 jf
-jii'J.}îi*^» LÛ=.
^ Ij L L ^^ljl\5j\£=,! •>! V J lyL
_,^VI I
332
The translation of paragraph 332 has "been con-

densed by the omission of the examples of estimation
given In the text, If the Astrolabe is not complete.
The altitude of the sun Is e.g. 20°, and the 20th
muqantara has to be found. If the Astrolabe Is a suds.
It lies between the 18th and the 24th muqantaras, and
consequently a third of the distance between these
beyond the leth line. If It Is a thulth. It lies be-
tween the 18th and the 21st lines, two thirds of the
distance between these beyond the 18th line.
When the position of the sun has been learned from
a calendar, this must be marked on the corresponding
sign and degree on the zodiac ring, and this mark
placed over the muqantara determined. The ascending
sign and Its degree will now be found at the East
Horizon, If the East Horizon does not correspond exact-
ly to one of the divisions of the sign, the degree of
the Ascendant must be estimated from Its position be-
tween two of these divisions.
This method of estimation must be adopted In all
similar oases; It would be tedious to have to repeat
the explanation In each case.
200a
^_^?^£- n* a. li LiL-J»^*,j> IjUJûilj
>-j^ '^f»4
I 4 I L*-i,} '£
• " "" • "^ ' • ' ,' »
ê)' J^yl
6
l!-^/. LL>Y iLLia- iw^ r-j^]AA^ J'y ' JiM 'iiJ j»t
^ ** * 1^* in
^^£=jj Ji^. L]p«L vO^^v f**'
o3 |jÛ^ L'_4^ w jiL^j ^l^l^l^STci'^^^l'L^

332-334
until the degree in question is over the muqanjara
already marked, and examine what sign and what
degree thereof coincides with the eastern horizon;
this is the ascendant.
333. galfyu^raf al-mSdl^ min al-nahSr. When

the degree of tnc ascendant has "boon placed on the
east horizon, see what division of
HOW MUCH 0? the tiujpa the pointer beside Capri-
DAT ELAPSED corn indicates, then move the rete
from west to east (past the mid-
heaven line in the direction opposite to the
succession of the signs) until the degree of the sun
comes to the east horizon, and then note where the
pointer is on the hujra. The difference gives the
number of divisions between sunrise and the time
the altitude was taken, known as the dS'ir of the
sun (8 S44), and as fifteen divisions are equal to
one hour, and one division to four minutes, the
result gives the length of the day that has passed
in equal hours and minutes.
334. Fakalf al-jaill^ wa'l-irtlfa^ al-

shama min qibal ai-mgdlr min al-nahlr. Given the
* number of hours of the
TO KNOW ASCENDANT AND daî that have elapsed
ALTITUDE FROM FOREGOING to find the altitude
of the sun and the
ascendant. Place the degree of the sun on the east
201
0
«- ^ vv * *
IrUjiyu
jl^fcJ illMj JLUiÛ
l^âjcSlcvJ <-~^>\r*
^j^rlii •-»' L*^! L- v-i L> y
^fcL-P^lLj atln ILj^t^Je-Jlûiii. ^-Ayîr
-^* » ^L i ^ ^ .
^L, j>)
334-336
horizon, and note the division of the ûjra on whioh
the rete point rests, then rotate it to the west for
the number of divisions oorrosponding to the number of
hours elapsed. Then see what degree of a sign Is at
the east horizon, this will be the ascendant, and
observe on which muqantara, west or east, the degree
of the sun Is, its number gives that of the altitude.
335. Fak:alf turraf al-sS^gt al-muwaj jah. Hov to

know the unequal hours. When the ascenuant is placed
on the east horizon, look where the
TEMPORAL HOURS nadir of the degree of the sun is
among the unequal hour lines below
the horizon, the nadir will be so many degrees of the
seventh sign from it and will mark the hour in
question. As we know which1 it Is we are not con-
cerned with how much of It has elapsed.
335. Fakalf turraf hadhlhl al-ashya1 mln sS^St

al-lail. How to ascertain the foregoing - the asoendant
etc. from the hours of—the night,
ASCENUANT ficC FROM Since the altitude of the sun
NIGHT-HOURS cannot be taken, if you know by
observation how many hours of the
night have passed, convert these into divisions of the
hujra, then place the nadir of the degree of the sun
on the east horizon (for the nadir is used by night
instead of the degree of the sun by day) then rotate
^ (ohandumP) v. f>
208
o^tfeJulUj 'l^. * L
•'' , \'!t / ''*'*' ~

>_J^(y4A),A
>—^Liju^pjj jilcX- w~i»cJî ljn.r./»l ^LA)L\

336-338
the point on the hajra to the division calculated
and look at the east horizon, the sign there is the
sign of the ascendant, and the degree of the sun is
at the unequal hour.
337. gaif yujadu irtifar kawSkib al-thSbitah.

To take the altitude of a flxetl star, suspend the
astrolabe in the right hand, turn
ALTITUD3 OF the particular star-pointer towards
FIXED STARS the star in question till it is
sighted, then note the degree of
altitude marked by the rule, and note whether it is
east or west by its relation to the midday line.
338. Fakaif ylKraf al-talir minhu. To find the

ascendant from the foregoing, place the tip of the
star-pointer on the muqantara
ASC2NDANT FROM corresponding to the altitude,
ALTITUDE OF THESE east or west as the case may
be, then look at the east
horizon, where will be found the sign and degree of
the ascendant, and at the degree of the aun^which
will point to the actual unequal hour.
t * y, ^ f
Ûj *^£zS<£=&
f *■ S | ^ ■& ^ •*
w
'' i, • * • fc • *■ v
lJ^^y^(llta^' cAjfl»jV
>- J ""^-v u ■* ' ^$ '
fll 1
t^Hf ^ rt "^j » r*- 1 iîI n** I
'*.9 ' ' /- ('" ' ' * ^ ^
s__jl/k.l«^J J\Îi i__£=»îl' wW
v^fia^sai^ Ji jîW J*
f* i-lÂA^-e-l—;r^«_a*i>
^ jSj
•^_jLiî! J.J^JLiaW ll^ >£=Û
'T^' —jPll^Jj ' Ljj—^ ^-JuJ^jUa

339-340
r
339, Kalf 7U raf al-m8dl^ mln al-lall. To know
from the foregoing how muoh of the night has passed,
note the position of the point of
HOW MUCH OF the rete when the degree of the
NIGHT KIAPSED ascendant Is on the east horizon,
then rotate the rets Inversely till
the nadir of the degree of the sun Is on the east
horizon, note how many divisions of the hujra It has
traversed, and translate Into hours.
340. Kalf 7U'"raf waqt tulu*" al-kawkab wa

ghurflbhu. To find the time of rising and setting of
a star whether by night ur
TIME OF RISING AND day, place Its pointer on the
SETTING OF STAR east horizon and see If the
degree of the sun Is above the
horizon among the muqantaras. If it Is, It rises by
day. Then note where tfie rete-polnt Is on the
hujra and rotate It backwards till the degree of the
sun reaohes the east horizon. Translate the amount
of movement Into hours; these are the hours of the
day whloh have passed before the star rises.
If the degree of the sun Is below the horizon
among the unequal hours, then the star rises at
night. Note the position of the point of the rete
and rotate It backwards till the nadir of the degree
of the sun Is on the east horizon, and translate the
divisions traversed Into hours, whloh are those of
the night whloh have passed before the rising of the
204
Is' . „
J wiS*
(JWC >L*^ ^j^/isyS^- I
J^SausAjjÛf^,^
340-341
star. If the time of setting is wanted, use the
west horizon Instead of the east and proceed as
be fore.
341. Kalf taswivah lil-buvflt al-ithng-fashar.

To equalize the twelve houses, place the degree of
the ascendant on the east horizon,
ADJUSTMENT OF the point of the ecliptic on the
THE HOUSES west horizon is the cusp of the
seventh house. Then look at the
meridian, what has arrived there is the sign and cusp
of the 10th house. M.C. - If what you find is also
the 10th sign from the ascendant, the angles are
erect. When they are succeedent, the point indicated
on the astrolabe will be in the 11th sign fran the
ascendant^ although it must be written down as the
cusp of the 10th house. E.g. if the cusp is in
Aquarius, the house will be formed of Aquarius and
so many degrees of Pisces, while if the cusp is in
the 9th sign, the angles are cadent, and the house
is formed of Aquarius and so many degrees of
Capricornus. If Aquarius alone occupies the
tenth house, then Leo is in the fourth, if Aquarius
and Pisces, then Leo and Virgo, and if Aquarius and
Capricornus then Leo and Cancer. This relation
applies to the rest of the houses; so if you know
one house, you know its nadir.
To determine the cusps of the other houses, turn
the rete inversely so that the degree of the ascendant
U 'jyLii,
'" -f s An"
■Ûa^jjllc-Lij*! (J^JfO |»>L£= (_jli

^ i i* ti .1 I * i#Kii« t * ^ ^ ^ * t*
loV^CiUal ^JJ»J>l_5L>i''
• , -^ ', ^ ' * '/ / ^
■ ^|Jf»_< Uj^J -^-J ^_5>i^^^Jj^J^>_3ilLl,ll^Lll)
jlj—Vi^ (^[jUsjjiilJ^L^jU^l Î^jpLtu
ifôy —Âj'
341-34E
comes under the horizon, and is placed on the line
indicating the beginning of the eleventh unequal hour, -
i.e. through tao temporal hours « 1/3 of the semi-noc-
turnal arc of the ascendant then look at the meridian
line to see what sign is there and what degree; it will
he the cusp of the ninth house and its degree, the
nadir of which is the cusp of the third. Then move the
rete through two unequal hours so that the degree of the
ascendant rests on the beginning of the ninth hour,
the sign and degree at the meridian will be those of
the eighth house, their nadir those of the second-
Then turn the rete so that the nadir of the degree of
the ascendant rests on the first line of the third hour
under the west horizon, the sign and degree of the
eleventh house will be at the meridian; their nadirs
those of the fifth; then turn the rete to the right
so that the nadir of the degree of the ascendant rests
on the first line of the fifth hour, the sign and de-
gree of the twelfth house will be at the meridian; its
nadir is the siith- Thus all the houses will be
oquallzed-1 (Flge.ôn pp. 150, 190, 191.)
34E. Kplf yuâf al-t5liy.fldn watad akhir. To

doteimine the degree of the ascendant if another
oardo is known, if the known degree
ASCENDANT FROM is the western one, place it on the
ANOTHER ANGLE west horizon, if M.C. on the meridian
towards the kursl, if I.C. on the
meridian below the horizon, and in each case look at
the east horizon for the result-
^ Llbroa_del saber II, S74. As to another method of

Al-Biruni'a, see Sedillot, Haterlaui II, 509*
206
i-^ji
^j^lV6 J
W-i-i^-j0^!? ^>Ks.
/JLjiJJ WU^Jj i}^^f
J, * IV v " 'v ^ 0f ^
^WjliL)^W^<^^>f^.>-»i-L>'- *.tl
—
I ** } >* ' 1 ^
* j^—' i—> ^>£=«-^}o' ^ I ^y.A/—4:3 /-»ij
,e
<->)
" lîl iz, j >*9

343-344
343. Ma^rlfah rard nahr wa masSfah âlg^-ard
yuhSwllu balna mlsahatib wa baina ai-mgalh hg'll.
To find the breadth of a
WIDTH OF A RIVER OR river or a piece of ground the
PIECE OF GROUND other extreialty of which it is
impossible to reach so as to
measure it in the usual way, stand on the bank, hang
the astrolabe on the right hand and move the rule till
you sight the other bank; then turn round without
changing your position and without altering the rule
look through both sights for
a mark which you can reoog-
eye of observer nlso and measure the distance
between your position and the
mark, the breadth of the
river is the same. The same
1 method can be used for a
width of river equal distance piece of land.
344, Ma^rifah r\imq. al-blr. To find the depth of

a well, stand on the margin with the astrolabe In
the left hand, the quadrant of
DEPTH OP WELL altitude towards you, and move the
rule till the opposite margin of
the water or the bottom is seen through both
sights. Then note the number of fingers in the
quadrant of shadow to which the rule points, place
its tip at one finger less, and go straight up higher
until the opposite margin is again sighted without
3n4 point
mouth Ist point of

observation
depth
urface water
^jJJ^^£=^$-l'^- L-A^j I -> t>V^^î=^« uX^>'j»-J> ^
v .* ^ >^»-*' •* *" * --^ S,
v/1 \ sUil^^J^1
i? >^lfL^>;]
^riAL'0^- s^sw^tyj-^ry ,
^^"f-'^'^L)^,
L(^9-LjjiM>jj 't£sS tJjLX" —»V>_2tl.ytj» j[JJj^_ji>JfLi'
j IW AtliJ {90^^>}
*_ U '.' * I - tL t
344-345
disturbing the position of the rule.
Measure the distance between the
two points of obaerTation, and
multiply by the number of fingers
of shadow noted. The result Is
the depth of the well, while that
dlstanoe multiplied by twelve
gives1 the diameter of the
noil.
345. Maîfah tul mlnarah au hafit mimmS yumkin al-

wusQl llalhi. To find Hie height"of a'minaret or wall
the base of which it is possible to
HEIGHT OF MINARET reach, take the altitude of the sun
the base or WHICH and continue observation till it
CAN BE REACHED attains 45°, then measure the
shadow, this gives the height of
the minaret. If the sun does not
reach 45° at the desired tlme,plaoe
the point of the rule at 45° and
move forwards or backwards till
you find a point where the top of
the minaret Is sighted, then
measure from that point to the
minaret base of the minaret and add your
own height; the result is the
height of the minaret.
its shadow
^ 7or an alternative method cf. Alfonso, Libros del

Saber II, 287. AO p. 213 leaves out a line rbetween
12th and 13th which requires shifting the idada to
a finger more, before rising to the 2nd position and
sighting anew,AO1 also. The procedure is the same as
in § 346.
208
' & 0
25
2, U>JÂj»--jc.\Jjj\
LU *»-»
o^-AU^gJli i
-—■ jlladl
v^^hejt^'-^ Ijjf^ >1 jt^J^rd^
-.A- u'' j
346
346. Marrlfah tul mlnarah au hajit la yumkln
al-wuaul llalhl. To find ihe heigKt of'a minareC7
column or mountain the baae of
HEIGHT OF MINARET which it is impossible to reach,
BASE OF WHICH stand where you are and move
INACCESSIBLE the rule until you see the top
of the object through both
sights just as you take the altitude of a star, then
note the number of fingers in the quadrant of shadow
to which it points and move forwards or backwards
(according as the ground is most level), If forward
place the rule-point at one finger less, if back-
ward at one finger more, and walk till the top is
again visible through both sights. The distance
between the two points of observation multiplied
by twelve is the height of the mountain, while the
same distance multiplied by the number of fingers
of shadow observed at the first point of
observation gives the distance between that point
and the base of the object. Similarly the height
of any object in the air, such as a bird or a cloud
which is so stationary as to allow of the altitude
being taken from two different points, can be de-
termined by the same method, as well as the dis-
tance between you and a perpendicular dropped to
the ground from the object.
top of mountain
ts aide
its height
1st point 2nd point

base
of perpendicular of observation
209
»• ' i.••11
' **.*'
i .(• Hir.- *.i "
1? / " *" ^ •*' * «
—^Viy L»feD %
* >* W ^ ^
Li»VA*^ôL^?
fct
y * » ^•,,1
>•*!
' ' ' • M
*1,. '^r'
\ H_>>uu ' - "

346-347
And now that we have arrived at this point,
having noted the terms used in geometry and arith-
metic, called attention to the nature of the
heavens, shown how to read the calendar and to
manipulate the astrolabe, and have completed these
subjects, it is time to deal with the expressions
which astrologers use with regard to the decrees of
the stars, and whicb are of interest to a querent.
By the majority of people the decrees of the stars
are regarded as belonging to the exact sciences,
while my confidence in their results and In the1
profession resembles that of the least of them.
ASTROLOGY
347. Taba1y al-buruj ^Qif hl^Bj And first we
shall deal with the relation of the signs to the
charac tcrt uLics of the four
NATURE OT THE SIGNS elements, separately end in
combination.
As to the nature and temperament of the signs
if they are written down in two rows, upper and lower,
the first sign above and the second below it, and so
on to the last, all those of the upper row are hot
and those of the lower cold, while the pairs so
arranged are alternately dry and moist.
-1- Preface, India, p. 25. '♦That he believed In the

action of the planets on the sublunary world I take
for certain; though he nowhere says so. It would hardly
be intelligible why he should have spent so much time
and labour in the study of Greek and Indian Astrology
if he had. not believed in the truth of the thing,n cf.
Ghron. p. 217. He apparently also shared the general
belief in the efficacy of charms end talismans, but hia
contonporaiy Avloenna is very contemptuous in his
refutation of Astrologers. Rlsalah fi radd al-munajjimln.
cf. Mehren p. 237, Homenaje a D. Er. Godera. Bardesanes^
a Syrian Philosopher in the 2nd half of the 2nd century,
condemned astrology in plain and weighty terms.
210
*
y
t *wf " '"~' *.
tî j^y^-o ^-^*^1- w yj
[0 " # "* t 7 » l 41
^K" -- ^
t t
%
l^"' -S- / it) "^y * * * " • C?
w—-^r^£=>j L_Ji^1B/^p'-J^
^î>jl^J;' '-i-fr-J^^y\ '
^jr-^y?^3-1 '-,yf:3J ^ —1j—*"

347-349
Dry Moist Dry Moist Dry Moist

Hot Aries Gemini Leo Libre Sagittarius Aquarius
Cold Taurus Cancer Virgo Scorpius Caprioornus Pisces
When therefore you know the active virtues of a sign
whether heat or cold, and the passive virtues, whether
drynoss or moisture, it will not be conoeeled from you
what particular element of the world and what
humour of the body each sign resembles. Each sign that
is hot and dry is related to fire and yellow bile,each
that Is cold and dry, to earth and black bile, each
that is hot and moist to air and blood and each that is
cold and moist to water and phlegm.
The Hindus regard as moist signs Pisces, the
hinder half of Capricorn and the anterlor^half of
Aquarius for reasons given above In speaking of their
representations, viz. that the hinder end of Capricorn
is fish-like, and that of Aquarius water. They do not
however raokon Scorpius as belonging to the moist signs,
but count It with the aerial ones, while Cancer holds
an Intermediate position, sometimes being regarded as
watery, sometimes as aerial according to circumstances.
348. Fama al-dhaker mlnha waTl-unthd. All the hot
signs are male and the cold female. The planets are
powerful in those signs which
MALE AND FEMALE resemble them In nature and sex,but
they partalie of the nature of the
signs In which they are situated so that a planet
obviously male shows a tendency to fonaleness by being
In a female sign. The Hindus say that all the odd, i.e.
male signs are unlucky and the female signs lucky.
349. Fema al-naharl mlnha we ma al-laill. There is
a general agreement that all the male signs are diurnal
and the female nocturnal. The
DIURNAL AND NOCTURNAL diurnal planets are powerful
in the day signs and the
^ Corrected to posterior In P but not in A.

V,
\>^
•V^ >Î 4^;.i!'
jWv
^1
J%j1jl^l£rti£a\jU.U^<i! ij»»N^vb__jji aMLlj ■ *-> llllLI
Lj Ljl
^MsL^J£=%)i!L
^ f' \
aIUL^L JLVfe Ûli^

349-352
nopturnal In the night ones. In the Greek blzidhaJ it
Is stated that aocordlng to some Aries, Cancer, Leo and
Sagittarius are day signs and their nadirs Libra,
Capricorn, Aquarius and Gemini are night ones, while the
remainder partake both of day and night. The Hindus believe
that Aries, Taurus, Gemini, Cancer, Sagittarius and
Capricorn are powerful at night,the six others by day.
350. Famg aL-maoturah al-a''da■ Aries, Taurus,Leo
and Pisces are descrlbed as maimed, the first three
because their feet are cut off at the hoofs
MAIUED and claws, and Taurus In addition because It
Is only half an ox cut In two at the navel,
while Pisces is Included on account of the absence of limbs.
351. Fama al-lsuntaalbah wa ghayr al-muntaslbah.
Aries,Libra-and Sagittarius are described as erect con-
stellatlona In the books,the others are net
ERECT AND referred to In this regard,but the Hindus
OTHERWISE always say that Aries,Taurus,Cancer,Sagit-
tarius and Caprlcornus are asleep and re-
present them recumbent,while Leo,Tlrgo,Libra,Soorplus
and Aquarius are erect,ând Gemini and Pisces recline on
one side. Their Intention In this matter Is unknown to
me,for the position of the figures In the constellations
Is of no Importance,end they offer no evldaice in the contrary
358. Fama al-lnslyvah wa ghayrhS. The following
signs are represented as human: Gemini,Virgo,Libra and
half of Sagittarius and Aquarius. Such la
HUMAM AND the case In the figures shown above
OTHERWISE with the exception of Libia,but when Libra
Is represented In the act of weighing, a
l I am Indebted to Professor Nalllno for the Interpre-

tatlon of this word,to the proper pointing of which AL
comes nearest. It Iq the Fahlawl vlzldhak (N.F. guzlda)
•chosen' - 'AveoXoyicu (of Vettlua Yalens) one of the
Greek works which reached the Arabs through a Fahlawl
translation. See Walllno,Memoirs presented to Prof. E.G.
Browne p. 351 and see reference 1to India I, 158. 117
first Latin book was a 'Delectus ,never associated with
the name of a compiler. Cf. Grund. Iran. phll. p. 303.
Yalens also appears later as 476 , 479.
5 On their heads A F but corrected margin, "hid stqhi.
818
^7 -A..I ^.UV?<j»Jj^JI
^jkij Ô-JI
(IÎm!K-vi
«<0. .LljiC-^^ «.^.*wUl(^

*i~ , !•. '-
UXJy'jSVl?
* f ' *
4 UfJ>1;
353-353
human ox bird figure suspends the balance or simply a
human hand. The four-footed figures are Aries, Taurus,
and Leo, nhlle the hinder half of Sagittarius, some-
times the front half (of Capricorn on the analogy of
Taurus4) are also so reckoned. Then of these Aries and
Taurus have cloven feet, Leo claws and Sagittarius
hoofs. Again the people generally from youth up
entertain certain Ideas as to the signs, such as that
Leo, Scorplus, Sagittarius and Capricorn (PlsoesA)
suggest beasts of prey; Gemini, Tlrgo, Pisces and the
hinder two-thirds of Capricorn, birds; Cancer,
Sagittarius, scorplus and Capricorn, reptiles; and
Cancer, Scorplus and Pisces, aquatic animals.
The Hindus have a redundancy of Interpretations
of this kind; they say that the hiugm signs are 4
Gemini, Virgo, Libra (the fore part of Sagittarius]- -
and the hinder half of Aquarius, all of tdilch they
describe as bipeds, while the quadrupeds are Aries,
Leo, the hinder half of Sagittarius, and the fore
?art of Capricorn. Beference has already been made
o their Ideas as to watery and aerial signs.
353. Fama al-misawwltah mlnha wa ghayr al-

muaawwltah.. Gemini. Virgo and Libra are loud-voiced.
of these Gemini la capable
VOICED AND VOICELESS of speech; Aries, Taurus
and Lao are half-voiced,
Capricorn and Aquarius are weak-voiced, while
Cancer, Scorplus and Pisces are voiceless.
J J-*.? ^jj-Ji
O l>—'ikj^
^Q^j\^=t> ^ .hS^/tJ/Jj
^fiAsJkz^s Lr^ J J
^jd LJ^^J^CAJV J
1 vôn^bu—
al__£=>i.Lk=> U>_rl^5 ^ jV J
^ "rÂ—u4>^lk^^jiij<Ûj sS*^
353-356
Knowledge as to voice end speech Is essential as to
whether In a airfloulty Indications in these signs are
harmful or the reverse,
354. Fama al-walud mlnha wa'1-âqlm wa ghayrhum.
Indications of the signs as to families. The wapery
signs Cancer, Soorplus, Pisces
FERTILE AMD BARREH and the hinder half of Capricorn
favour large families; Aries,
Taurus, Libra, Sagittarius and Aquarius small ones,
while the first part of Taurus, Leo, Virgo and the
first part of Caprloom Indicate sterility. The
production of twins Is specially In charge of Gemini,
hut also Is favoured hy Virgo, Sagittarius and Pisces,
and sometimes by Aries and Libra and the last part of
Capricorn. (The foreparts of Capricorn and Scorplus
Indicate hermaphrodltlam^) In consequence of what we
have said Aries and Libra are described as being of
two natures, as are also Capricorn and Sagittarius-^.
Virgo Is called mistress of three forms, and Gemini
as many-faced, because they denote not only twins but
three or more children.
355. Famg al-hBIha fl'l-nlkah. With regard to
marriage, Aries, Taurus, Leo, Capricorn Indicate
eagerness thereful,—for Libra and
RELATION TO Sagittarius much the same can be said.
MARRIAGE With regard to the conduct of women,
Taurus, Leo, Scorplus and Aquarius
denote reserve and abstinence; Aries, Cancer, Libra
and Capricorn corruption and bad conduct, while Gemini,
Virgo, Sagittarius and Pisces denote a mean In this
regard; of the four Virgo Is the most virtuous.
356. Fama al-buruJ al-mutllmah dhawat al-hamm.
Leo, Scorplus and Capricorn are dark and anxious,
and there Is a susplulun of Imuble
DARK AND In Virgo and Libra.
ANXIOUS SIGNS
^t^fj^lvO^ ^ 1^' loÛUi
AliA* J^> r-^
^V-^ l»U A»S' ilj>>-lN) jj^
A» > 4^^dl^l!ê,-l^£stli-f ^ wyL-s^
Vj —'V-J -> L*-» c£fc^-l-Jj
-^-k&JJ ^vU==^^
» •,', ** .* •' ^ I t ^
~-r'/
^ -jil-45 V-v^-A*'3
357-358
357. gena dalalatha âla Jlbat al-âlam. Aries do-
notes the middle of the East,Leo a point to the left,of
that towards the Worth,and sagit-
RSLATION TO POINTS tarius one to the right towards the
OF COMPASS South;similarly with each of the
other trlpllclties. Thus Taurus
Indicates the centre of the South,Virgo a point to Its
left towards the East and Capricorn one to the right and
West. Gemini occupies the centre of the west,Libra a
point to
left S right its left
and South
and
Aquarius,
one to
Its right
and North,
left Cancer
right
is In the
centre
of the
North,
T Scorplus
a point
to the
left and
West and
places
a to the
left right right and
East. All
are re-
presented
In the ac-
right N left companying
figure. 1
358. Fama dalahatha âla al-riyah. - A wind
from a quarter associated with a particular signcoming
Is also
associated with that sign thus the
RELATION TO WINDS East wind with Aries,the West with
Gemini,the South with Taurus and the
North with Cancer. Similarly with the Intermediate
quarters^ S.E. wind is related to Virgo or to Sagit-
tarius according aa ii is nearer S, or S.
T Which^Ts corrected from the figure in PL and Pt where
the fiery (E.j, and airy (W.) trlpllclties have changed
places. AO AQi PL^ correct. (S) earthy, (N) watery.
JlAv'^ JeJ&bjr'j Si
SS-U.y
\^y-
T rv>
Lr" r
y.
r~ r .r
'T^.r-, ir^ •V
-ri^j b^JL>j^-» sJJ!-LJli lJI lilj l» 'Z ^J|^»
VKiLv—>iU l! iLiflUU^.^'fl tJ.ll^r'iL ""il M'li/'tt

359
359. Famg dalglSthg '"aia a'jS. al-lnsgp. The
following are the various parts of the tody whloh
are related to the several signs.
RE1ATI0K TO The head and faoe to Aries, the
PARTS OF BODY neok and windpipe to Taurus, the
arms and bands to Gemini, the chest,
breasts, sides, stomach and lungs to Cancer, the
heart to Leo, the womb with Its contents to Virgo,
the hack and buttocks to Libra, the genitals to
Scorplus, the thighs to Sagittarius, the knees to
Capricorn, the shanks to Aquarius and the feet and
heels1' to Pisces J-
In this matter there Is much confusion In the
books, for according to some, not only the head
and face but also the bowels are governed by Aries.
The analogy In this case does not seem to he clear.
But It Is clear In the saying of a Brahman that If
we Imagine the zodiac to he a man,with Aries the
head and the soles of the feet directed towards It,
then the allocation of the parts of the body
according to the Hindus conforms with what.we have
said above except that the face Is given to Taurus.
The signs are also Indicative of the various
diseases of msn, of his complexion, figure, face,
and the like, they also govern localities and
countries, and denote various matters regarding
animals, fire, water, etc. To facilitate study these
are set down In the accompanying tables.
But God Is All-knowing.
1
The above matter Is repeated In the column (360al
adjacent to 3SO which Is not reproduced In
translation.
216
\
Ul< iQJ. ijul i ^ ;l^
v^'jui'j U=>J^> Al Ji
rLiW ji' U\\ itfj_

y y ,• f
JU.ljÛ) - jy-U*
^■yH
360
360 Dalalat al-buruj alQrl-akhlaq wa^l-siyar.
r
INDICATIONS OF THE SIGNS A3 TO MORALS oc MANNERS
1 Laughing and talkative.kingly end haughty,fond
T of poetry,sharp-tongued.lustful,brave.
2 Of good judgment,negligent,a llar.a cheat,lust-
b ful and a fool.
3 Generous,chaste,excelling In games,fond of
I philosophy and astronomy.munlfloent.violent,
and a bEfl? (has the Qur'in by heart) .
4 Indolent,dumb,flokle and changeable.
5 Kingly,formidable,sha rp-tongued,hard-hearte d,
litigious,knavish,many troubles,a sinner,for-
a getful, powerful by nature,bold.
6 Liberal, good mannars,truthful,we11-lnformed,
if ofplous,a judge,thoughtful,lively,playful,fond
dance and music,a tjafl$.
7 Thoughtful,polite.generous,Indoleut,oowardly,
— just Judge,plebelau,excited In speech,a music-
ian and singer,a fjSflz.
01 Generous by nature,anxious,deceitful,bold,rou^»
morose,shsrp-tongued,a slayer,a hsriz,a fool.
Indolent,pleased with himself,bold.
9 Kingly,reticent,liberal,tricky,prejudiced,a
capable mathematician,surveyor,thoughtful about
the next world,fond of horaes.particular as to
food,drink and clothing,virile.
10 ArrogBnt,fal8e, choleric, Impetuous, changeable,
e vll-thinking, anxious, quarrel some, oplnlonative,
fond of gemes and life,crafty,forgetful,3haqq,
bold.
11 Nell-disposed,chaste,eager to accumulate riches,
— eager for magnificence end manliness.a gourmet,
bad-hearted,Inert,Indolent,restful,too anxious
about worldly affairs.
12 Good dlsposltIon,generous,elegant,lustful,un-
stable in his opinions,of good faith,mediocre
In business,tricky and deceitful,liable to err,
forget ful,foolish.bold.
The adjacent column In text repeats pert of 350.
, It— "^LpuShi!
J>UI
Ti^j >-
k^
"K
Vlj ViU'j l''^
Lji' j
1 >vV
T^TL^'
J.>l^ r^
—Jii' 1 IM 1 .
bl
//>V^
•• X
^ fc ^ —»~) ^ ' <y
p'^1
X
1 . ••
^J _jUjj ^1 9- ^'Wq-lSxA^SCn-^J-zli>1 "

361
r ,
361 Ala l-hllyali wa'l-aurah.
A3 TO Ft SURE AWE FACE
1 Medium height,thin,abort-sighted,glance upcast,
Y eyes dark,or gray,or dark gray,nose and ears
large,ugly mouth,hair curly and reddish.
2 Tall,"broad forehead,eyebrows short,eyes black,
the whites small,downcast,nose broad,the point
« upturned,large mouth,thick lips,hair black,
neck strong.
3 Medium height,good appearance,erect,fine
E beard and face,sharp-sighted,broad-shouldered,
shanks long in comparison with fore-arm.
4 Moderate height,limbs thick rather long,hair
fine brown,nose crooked,teeth uneven,downcast
look,corpulent,shanks longer than fore-aims.
5 Full heightjbroad face,thick fingers,slender
thighs,hip bigger,good-looking,gray-eyed,
a accustomed to wine,large nose,wide mouth,
(teeth separated from each other),chestnut
hair,A. prominent belly.
6 Medium stout inclining to toll,long hair,moles
on chest and abdomen,broad shoulders and chest,
flat-nosed.
7 Moderate size,good-looking,colour inclined to
brown and yellow,gray eyes,good nose,distinct-
ive marks on neck and waist,good feet.
8 Head erect,gooci-looking,eyes small,whites yel-
low, face round,forehead narrow,hair coarse,
slender thighs and ankles,broad chest and shoul-
ders, broad nose,paunch and a mark on the back.
9 Light,tall,good-looking especially from beck^
front view,good eyes,long beard,coarse nose,
complexion red,belly large,shanks longer than
thighs,marks on arms and legs.
10 Body slender erect,fine figure,face goat-like,
wide gray eyes,ears crooked,long beard,little
hair,thin legs,active gait.handsome.
11 Medium height,tending to tall,forehead narrow,
— eyes dark gray,black,the black part wider than
the white,coarse lips,downcast look,body well
filled out,legs unequal,good-looking,broad chest
12 Good figure,delicate joints,smooth skin,fine
face,medium stature,fairly broad chest,narrow
shoulders,small head,narrow forehead,looks
down.black eyes,handsome.
j-j-i.^' ;
jiJ jNilt L" 1>/i '■", -s

ITS^fWVTlBf,
SMISA9 fiSEHJISJ
Jjilfjiii jsj^yi-;
^ lijJs^^jLi* J! ^ t' >' \V
wr
??
362-364
362-r^64 DalfilSt ralS &l-alw5n3 rala tabqat al-nas
wa as\jab al-sinS''at.
COLOURS, ladications of the signs as
CLASSES to colours 362
AHD Hindu opinion 363
ARTISANS Professiona, trades &0 364
1 White and reddish. Reddiah white. Kings.bank-
Y 'ers,coiners,blacksmiths,coppersmiths,butchers,
shepherds,spies and thieves.
2 White and brownish not shining. White. Sell-
a ers (Tailors^-) and weighers of grain,fisher-
men, (cobblers-^ 1 agents and farmers.
3 Greenish yellow. Pistachio green. Kings,cal-
culators, teachers,hunters,dancers.musicians,
n painters,tailors,
4 Smoke-coloured not quite black. ADark red.
Sailors,(water diviners,swimmers) and canal-
diggers.
5 Whitiah red. "White of clothes .withered vege-
a tables. Horsemen,coiners.falconers.
6 Whitish yellow. Changing. Vazirs,eunuchs,
ITjt secretaries,supervisors,ordinary people,
dancers,singers,assemblies of men.
V Vfhlte tinged black- Black. Magnates and dig-
nitaries, privy counsellors,merry-makers,phllo-
sophera,geometricians,merchants,(grammarians)
devotees.
« Vacant P.B. and MR- Golden. Physicians,en-
n\ chanters .magicians, sailors .
9 Reddish. Colour or palm fibres. Horse-deal-
ers, mid die -class people,busy-bodies,meddlers
with other people's business,(who,although wlft
honest Intentions,excite strife)p undertake
their burdens^.
1U colours mixed like a peacock,brown and green.
JC Piebald,black and white. Hunters and slaves.
11 Yellow,sapphire blue and various colours.
Bright red turning yellow. Servants,traders,
— ass-drivers-4-,makers of glass and15 jewellery,
uneducated people,grave-robbers.
12 White. KhSki. Most revered and religious
people. The last part of the sign for blind
men,those who operate on them for cataract
and sailors.
1 PL, AO, AO1.

219
(T
bi ^-tr11-
'J-' V
OÎa"
^-^^'jJ.vUtJAJjHlA_/UJj1i)/l/ â>; ^-^>1
c
^'WH -JPjjL-U.
Ui# oiilo* OjrU)^)
^rXjJ( Lx. X
V
^r Ulil^jlj L)!j L,jy) loy'jxj)
s^-bJ—I Ubuû^,y, J/ ^yUJj) V
U>J[j i^*))^ b D< ( —Ii ; .
CT
—^ ui^-A^b 4^0 >i "v;
■—»tjji
">J'^ tb
lJLS y
tj e>^ r^
1^—^w'iil/bbl/TjjuWi i ^ -
jc^pîc
il»»J (! ^j c*r;
365
365 fAld-'l-bllad wa'l-nawabl.
A3 TO CITIES AMD TERRITORIES
1 r Baty Ion j Pars, Pal est ine. Aiiliarbal jfin, AlSn.
z Elstricts of ,'IrSq,M5tiin,Hamedtian.Mountains of
tt Kurdis tan,C te siphon,Cyprus,Alexandria,Constan-
tinople .Onian.Ral .Ferghana.and shares in the
control of Herat and sljlstan.
a
R Egypt,the cities of Barqa,Armenia,Gurgan,3IiaQ,
Muqan and shares In IsfahEn and Klrman.
4 That part of Armenia Minor which is heyond
"-L-o Muqan, Parts of Africa,Hajar,Bahrein,Dabll,
Marwalrudh,Eastern EhnrfisBn.and shares in
Ealkil and Adharbadgan.
b Turkestan as far as Gog and Magog,and the
ruined cities there.Ascalon,Jerusalen.NlsIbis,
the twin cities,Mala^ya.SlatEn.Makran.Dailaiii,
Abrashahr, Tils, Soghdiane, T1 rmldh.
6 Andalusia.Syrla,Crete,the Euphrates and Meso-
potamia, JarSmaqa, the capital of Abyssinia,
>F San'a.Kufa,the cities of Pars in the direction
of Klrman,and Slstan as far as the borders of
India.
7 The Greek Empire as far as Tunisia,and upper
Egypt to the confines of Abyssinia,Antlooh,
Tarsus,MSooa,Taliqan,TokhSri stSn,Balkh,Herat,
Slstan,Kabul,Kashmir and China.
B The HijBz country,the desert, of Arabia as far
as Yemen,Tangler,Qiyad,Khezarla,Oilmis,Smul,
TH SErlah,Nahawand,Nahrawan,and shares In Turkish
Soghdla.
9 Persian ""Iraq,DInawar,Isfahan,Ral,Baghdad,
Danbflvand.Darband of the Khazars,Jundl-SEbOr,
/ shares In Bukhara and GurgSn.the borders of
the Sea of Armenia.and Barbary as far as Morocco
10 Makran and Slnd,ana the rlyer MlhrSn (Indus]
and the sea between Oman and Hindustan,Eastern
China.Asiar Minor.Ahwaz and Istakhr (Persapoll^
11 Southern Iraq as far as KUfa and Hljaz.the
— country of the Copts,the West of Slnd and
shares In Pars.
12 Tabarlstan and the country north of GurgEn,
BukhSrE and Samarqand,shares control In Asia
* Minor: QEllqala1 as far as Syria,Mesopotamia,
Egypt.Alexandria,the sea of Yemen and Eastern
Hindus ten.
^ Erzerum Nail. II. 41.
ir
•u
O tysj
i •• -i
a
U''*B^MtijU\c>^(j]irjlj tz-Ju^ -v-U /.
^kr^JUî
-krlbjLiuJ O --Uo \fc.
^-jl^vvA>J'b.» ot—A^ 1^"

i,, t^)
>JJS>) i^. vyjjyj uj
^(•Hlii ^r^fjJ^rj l^)sjkrt)irîÂ'

IrJ-J
366
r
366 A la-1-amakin.
AS TO PLACES
1 Deserts.pasturing places for beasts of buraen.
r Wood-sheds.places where fire is used.thieves'
dens,places where jewellery is manufactured.
2 e Mountainous places.orchards.pasture land,store-
houses for food.cow and elephant sheds.
3 Mountains.hills.mounds,hunting-grounds,river-
IT eides,resorts of acrobats and gamblers and
musicians.kings1 palaces.
4 Reservoirs,reea-beas,river margins,ouitlvatea
<Co places,trees,wells,rivers,and places of
worship.
5 Mountains, for tresses, high sanctuaries, icings •
Si palaces,desert places,quarries,barren saltish
ground.
6 7^ DivanajWomen1s quarters.muslclans' nouses,
threshing floors.cult!vated fields.
? -n- Small mosques am places of worship .castles,
cultivation,palm-groves,observatories,plains,
orchards.tops of mountains which are cultivated.
a High places,pools of bad water,prisons,places
of grief and mourning,scorpions1 holes,
deserted places.vineyards,mulberry-grovea.
9 Level plains,!laglan temples .Christian churcbea,J-
/ arsenals,cattle-stalls,lime-pits, irrigated
orchards.
10 oasties.ancient reservoirs/5 harbours,fire-
place s, (weeping places}," slaves, sleeping
places,holes of dogs and fozes,lodgings for
strangers. The first part of the sign indicates
stone and gravel and water wheels.
11 Running ana standing water.heated batn-water,
taverns,brothels,canals and ditches,birds
nests and resorts of aquatic birds.
12 Abodes or angels,holy mBn,MBelan priests,
X mourning places,cane-brakes.lake shores,salt
marshes.granaries.
21AO and AB1 have yabr for blêt.

^P has §arajhfl for âhflrlj. Tenka were plastered with
sar\5j, oement.
nj u xî u
Pi
)>!ixW)^Jrj -^bL^tnJJoUl
asm t'-zms m
m If ^>v 1 t b^ w U W 1^
367-369
367-:569 .DalSlSt •'alS al-ashjSr wa'l-nab5t.al-mlyBh
wa'l-rlyHlj wa'l nalran.al-.iawHhlr wal-alst.
TREES & OriOPS ItcHjoatlais as to treea & orofs 36^
V/ATER WIND Sb EIRE As to water, wind & fire 368
JEWELS &l KEKIOTE As to jewels & furniture 369
X . Fire is used. Copper,iron,lead; bel-
Y mets.diadems.crowns and girdles.
2 Unlrrlgated fields,crops from setting out cut-
ti tings. . Clothes,necklaces,wool,hair,
collars; sweet fruits .artichokes.bastard saffron.
3 Tall trees. Zephyr,gentle winds,animal
H spirits. Anulets,bracalets,dlrams,dinars,
attar: drums.lutes and flutes.
4 Tall and medium trees. Good drinking water,
qrs rain,running water,and that which comes down
from the sky. Bice and cane sugar.
5 Tall tress. Tonaits,subterranean fires, mlnaxQs at-
tracted from the ground, cloudy weather. Coats of
nail and cuirasses,tall metal veeeels; aaarelda and ruUas,
gold and silyer and objeots msnulhctured from them.
6 Sowh fields,sowing end pisnttlng. AH rumlng water.
nf Uercury{(berriesJierbs and the ordinary seeds. OL)
7 Date palms,tall trees,and such as are grown on
-= fruits,which mete trees Winds
the top of mountains. which famir trees and
large and spread them;de-
notes dark atmosphere. Silks.lutes and drums.
8 Medium elzod trees. Running waters,rlwars,tor-
rents,underground conduits,black mud end dnwoed
land,such articles as are kneaded of clay.
Precious atones from water,like coral;(drugs),
sel-ammonlak,water vos3els,Bjiu3,,3uch things as are
made with fire.
9 ——. Natural streams and heat in the bodies
of animals. Tin,gold,all ttenufaotured articles
arrows and (tows «nd)QL spears and armour,(earthen-
/ war^Ct garments,armour, nibs (harfi (burnt
brlok and lime depilatory.
10
ft Crops,herbage and the like,such as do not re-
quire to be sown,fruit. . .
11 Tall trees,plantain and ebony,myrobalan and
belleric myrobalan. Seas.running waters,winds
— which stir up the seas,and destroy tall trees
and herbage;cold fogs. Tools and sites for draw-
ing water and for building houses, and for dig-
ging and planting trees.
12 Cotton,sugar,eruit-beerlng trees,eandal wood, camphor,
Jt edible fruits. First half, mfidium-aizsd trees. Stagnant
waters & lakes. Kerlsmother pearl.ccrahrtrBB.alags.edes.
222
9M5fw™i
w ., . /Sji ! y
~ ~ ts^^^^n^yjiiryfaju»I i CJ
jL
OtjUjLi(JI,!, ^1
^ ^
'~-'^1i/'Vplol/>'^ Vr»
j^Vjj^vuj ^j,
jwkj^tw. 5^2®^ S!
■^j
3?0
370 Dalalat lala al-îllal wa*l-amraî.
SICKNESS AND DISEASE
1 At first very strong,afterwards weak and
liable to disorders,especially In the head
Y such as baldness,blood to the face,rashes,
lepra and scab,limbs worn out.phlegjiatio,
sweet-smelling.
s At first very strong,towards the end lean and
spare.only moderately subject to disorders,for
0 the most part of the neck like scrofula,and
quinsy and points to freckles,ozaena and marks
on back and breast.
3 Healthy and sweet-smelling body,Illnesses not
1 serious,generally catarrh or gout,not much
distress.
4 Weak and sickly,gout,catarrh,cancer,baldness,
GTS e ozema,deafne ss.ringworm,dandruff,leprosy,
clmples,piles.heaviness In left foot and fingers
b At first strong,but afterwards weak and liable
to disease,especially of the stomach and pain
Q In the eyes,loss of hair; at first offensive
breath.
6 Strong,moderately lean,and slender,sickness
moderate,loss of hair,sal''.
7 —n- Limbs strong,sound,middling slender.
8 At first strong and thickset but at the end of
life weak and sickly,Illnesses chiefly deaf-
ness and dumbness,cataract,cancer,eczema,
ringworm,leprosy.retention of urine.eunuchlsm.
9 At first strong,at last weak and sickly,moder-
ately thin healthy body,gout,catarrh,blindness^
/ blind of one eye.baldness,epilepsy,superfluous
fingers.headache.and marks on the legs.
10 Weak sickly but sound limbs,deaf and dumb,
qjiithalmla, bleeding, itch, scrofula, cancer, bald-
ness, tumour s; the tendency to baldness much
stronger than under other signs.
11 At first strong,at last weak and sickly,limbs
sound,diseases of the tongue,jaundice,catarrh,
gout,bilious headache,pain In the eyes,and
veins.vertigo,rupture,epilepsy and ozaena.
IS Weak,thin,sickly,especially In limbs,Inerves
efâb) gout,sleeping of the limbs,bllloue,
eczema, rl ngworm, dandruff, bald, sal ""j leprosy,
catarrh and abundant hair, athlth.l
^ Such contradictIons not Inrrequont.
E23
. <£■
lJ
C~ ^
'—yj^j, îil^^jjui ^V-liUc-Vi^ vT

. .' . C>_il^=*^' ' \')'-
r ^ L^J j, 6\)J, LÎ,

-7\\
___îi_»i'Ail^-»U»c-Ml/i—-> >v> U^!j-_3^V

r
- ^'kj>, ' •• 'X
\~ ^ i ' It » •" " ^>% 1^*1 ; • / y I |— ' f T '■■ *

371-372
371 rilgênwa *• a^l-balwgnHt.
1 T HI hoofed animals, wild and do me & tic such as goata and
2 sheen: also rams and dear,
Cows,oalveo,elephanta,gazellea; animals *iioh become
» attaohad to man.
a IT DombFIc fowla and euon birds as become tame; gazelles
4 and homed vlpora.and terrestrial animals,that are
fteptlles,aquatic
OZo- numerous In the desert like beetloe; eoiaonoua lizards..
b Wild horses,tame lionsFl all animals with claws,black
a snakes.
6 Magpies,Diack crows,Duiouis,sparrows,parrots,large
7 A. Biras,leoparda,and jinn.
8 Rex tiles,aquatic animals,destructive wild beasts (of
wv prey) .many-footed anlmala like scorpions and wasps (and
9 Dolaonouo Insects)0L. . ,
Solid-hoofed anlmala especially paok-horsea,mules,
f esses. There is also on indlaation of birds and
10 Kids.lambs.animals that are herded,creepIng things.
11 Bipeos,vultures, slntlr for nusdr,eagles,beavers, Jerboas,
t2ti sinjib.eablea,ermineb,aquatic birds espeoially black
12 \ Birds,fleb,large and etmll.aquatio aamtvora.werpente,
372 rkl* slnln ftl-burdj. |r^m
oK HUl tf TO atotts also
Years Months Days Da ye Hours
1 V 15 15 37^ 4(3) 3
2 « a 3(8) 20 X 16
3 2. 20 20 5° 4 4
4 ens 26 25 62* 5 6
5 a 19 19 47* 3 23
6 ** 20 SO 50 4 4
7 6 a 20 1 16
6 bv 15 15 27* 3 3
9 ? 12 12 30 2 12
10 K 27 27 67* 5 16
11 ss 30 30 75 6 6
».I12)«
12 12 2(12) 30 2
r t
I jLl-afrgs al-fla bah,wa l glba*' al-darlyah^ like huntimg-lfloparda).
^ No explanation la given of tbla table, it la arrived at by the
The years and the monthe are eûel la number to the minor yeare
(437) of the lord of eaob sign (440) and the daya and hours are
the same number multiplied either by 5/2 or by 5/24.
No reason Is glTon for the teo domlollee of Saturn being al-
lotted different numbera.(They are the aaae (30) In the Opue
Introd. venloe, 1506 where the four last oolumna are unexplained].
But Vettlue Valena p. 164, gives a reason; he aeslgna 1/4 of the
O'a great years to , and 1/4 of the > 'a toUtâvi
fti&utrpov .oe fig. 440
years of k\rS*e#»<i (readandxpivo<i,T)
the sum . of theae forma the great
The first method allows a year for every degree of oblique
aaoenalon of each sign in any olimete and a month for every
five minutes. • The numbers In braaretc are the oorrect ones.
224
y*
B m
»« p »«
373
373» MS al-nazar wa'l-auqPt. As the complei must
follow the simple we have now to consider the relations
of the signs to each other.
IN ASPECT OB Each sign Is In sextile aspect,
INCONJUNGT ta3dIs,to the third and eleventh left
and right of It,and there is a sixth of
the zodiac (60°) between any degree of that sign and liie
same degree of those named. Similarly the quartlle as-
pect ; tarbl ^ Is between a sign and the fourth and tenth
left and right,separated by 90°,and the trine^tathllth^
between the fifth and nlnth>di3tant 120° and the op-
posite slgn^muqabala^ls the seventh, 180°. There are
therefore seven signs to which the sign in question
___ turns its
dexter face and
/0 which are
conse-
quent-
ly con-
side red
to bo
W- bound In
aspect
to It.
The two
signs
T which
I are each
side of
the one
In ques-
tion and
their op-
posltos,
viz.the
second ani
twelfth
and the
sixth and
eighth
sinister are not
In as-
The signs used are d conjunction, pect and
opposition, oo sextile, ^ are known
as In-
quartlle, D trine. A conjunct
(sfiqlt) .
285
f>\J»> Csi&bj I?
Âl^.-fcj 4^
Lijli * V ^ j-^Vj^k-fya—
Âaj^tâj-J * —J;^)!
a
*-r-1'^QJ_^cxvjlJJ^^
^J)l_ailj WwaC L-^ ^ I

s- ^
374-376
374. ,,Ma al-tmruj al-mitetabblyah wa'l-mutataghHaH
wa'l-nuta adlyali. Slsna which are In aextile or trine
1 are rrlendly to each other, Uiuhb
SIOHS FBIENDLy, In quartlle unfriendly and that
CMFBIENDIY, HOSTXIE oppoalte inlmloal. Thus Gemini
and Aquarlua are In aextlle to
Arlea.Leo and Sagittarius In trine to It,and these are
mutually friendly,while Cancer and Capricorn being In
quartlle and Libra opposite are Inlmloal. The inoonjmot
signs to Arlea are four,viz.Taurus,Tlrgj.Sooiplus & Places.
375. Ma tartlb al-naaar. The following Is the order
In power of the various aspects. The moat powerful la
conjunction,!.e. meeting In the same
HELATIVE PQTER sign, then the opposite , then the dei-
0? ASPECTS terl quartlle,sinister quartlle,dex-
ter trine,sinister trine,dexter sex-
tile .sinister seitlle. When there are two aspects the
more powerful renders the weaker one Incompetent and
takes away Its power.
376. Hal vuwaflqun al-hlnd fl dhallka. The Hindus
are partly In agreement and partly dissent from this
doctrine. They are In agreement In
HINDU OPINION regard to the opposite, quartllos and
trines, but they say that while a
sign looks towards Its third, the third does not re-
gard It, and while It does not look to Its sixth, the
sixth does regard It. They do not apply the term as-
pect to conjunction,for they say that when one stands
erect and looks ahead, one cannot see oneself. With
regard to the relative Importance of the aspects they
say that from a sign towards the third and tenth
signs there Is a quarter of an aspect, and to the
fifth and ninth, half an aspect (towards the 8th and
4th three quarters of an aspect and to the 7th a
complete aspect)-®-. They describe the second and
twelfth signs as Inoonjunct to the first and It to
them.
yL
• Dexter aspecta are those contrary to the order of the
signs, so that a planet In T oaeta a dexter quartlle
to one In "H, and a sinister quartlle to one in 0 •
* *
' 'l4>* . i •!» . '

W^cj A
Jj^yj
377
377. Hal lllburJj IttlfScSt ghayr al-nazar. T'jid s%is
equidistant From an equinoctial point fig. 242"are said
to be equipollent, 1 bo-rouse the day-
RELATIONS hours of each are equal to the night
BESIDES ASPECT hours of the other,and their ascensions
are equalS in all places, 242 such as
Aries and Pisces,Taurus and Aquarius,etc. The correspond-
ence la by inverse degrees,one being north the other
south, the
B first of
Aries being
It equal to the
twenty-ninth
of Pisces,3
and the Ifth
to the 20th.
Two
signs re-
volving in
the same
parallel,
North or
South (equi-
distant ftrom
a solstice)
are described
as correspond-
ing in ccurse
(in itlnere),
<rj> their day
hours ere
equal as are
their night
hours, and
The vertical lines Join equipollent their ascen-
signs, the horizontal those correspond- sions are
ing In their course. identical at
ADC. Northern half. CBA. Southern half. the equator,
DAB. Ascending. BCD. Descending half. such as Gen-
The ascending signs according to Y711son ini and Can-
are YbH, ^ "if be cause when in them the cer, Taurus
sun's decllaation
- - is increasing
_ and Leo, The
iHuttafiqain fl'i-quwwa - laoBuvanoOvrcfb^ Demophllus.
2 voav&popa of Ptoleny.
3 The 30th degree being regarded as destitute of a canpanlon
so as to associate odd degrees with odd and even with evnn.
4 Muttafxqain fI1 l-ârlqa. of QemophlluB
laobuvauouvra of Ptolemy.
^ 'C^
.w^Û>-j il ^
L—W-^ J^'jWi^SU L>J ^ylaj^-
^ j i, i' Â> ^Ljii*iijt^4i-t>y^^ i_>icL-
/•&=**£WW,^>V- ?t aj'JUIAUU
jlL -' Jflt <*

377
correspondence is elso by inverse degrees, the beginning
of Cancer corresponding to the end of GeMiiii,and the
tenth of the fomer to the twentieth of the latter.
These two relations receive different names in the books,
and there is no permanence in such names,but that term
is best which corresponds to the meaning.
^.bu Ma'shar hus called the two signs which have the
same presiding planet {8 440) as concordant in itlnere,
and although this is different from the two kinds of
agreement referred to above,it is a relation which has
to be considered. With regard to the agreement which we
have spoken of,Abu Ma^shar calls the relation of Aries
to Pisces,and of Virgo to Libra by power,and that of
Gemini to Cancer and Sagittarius to Capricorn by course,
as natural sextlles,although they do not regard each
other,but since the nearest aspect to the inconjunct
place is the sextile,he has called them by that name.
Similarly the relations of Aries to Virgo and Pisces
to Libra by course, and those of Gemini to Capricorn
and Cancer to Sagittarius by power, he speaks of as
natural opposites, although there is here no aspect.
But in the quartile aspect it occasionally happens
from these agreements as in the case of Taurus to
Aquarius and Leo to Scorpius by power, and in that of
Taurus to Leo and Soorpius to Aquarius by course,
that the disagreeable enmity of the quartile lessens
and its evil influence disappears, so that the
significance of the relation gains in power,just as
the removal of the inconjunction, obscurity and
evil from those seitiles and natural opposites also
takes place.
From those two correspondences to which we have
adverted, power and course, the zodiac is divided
into two sets of halves, 1/ northern and southern
halves, S/ ascending and descending halves (aS^ld
and habit).
*^
S
» -—•^Jj—-'■»M'
JLiJÛjL^^LJ yjc Jf«iJ

. #/ f " / w
.(A_^J,^«Jl-Mlj
e^^lc^'IÛ3 J\ ^ j i
378
378. Ma nlsf al-falak al-3arld wa'l-hablt. The lat-
ter are markBd out by the solstices,the ascending half
HALVES 0, ZODIAC
The Hindus call these halves tayana,,the ascending
•uttarayana' or north,because although the declination
of the sun in this half of the ecliptic is south,yet the
eun during the whole of the half keeps its face towards
its northern1 goal. The descending half is called
'dakshayana or southern by similar reasoning.
Signs of the ascending half are described as signs
of short or crooked ascension,because their oblique as-
cension is shorter than that in the erect sphere,while
those of the descending half are said to be signs of
long or direct ascension,because their oblique ascension
is longer than that in the erect sphere. 242,
The crooked signs are also called •obedient* and
this is due to concordance in course,because when you
compare two signs on one parallel,the one belonging to the
descending half comes first by the diurnal movement,and
the one of the ascending half later;so the former cnrrmnds
the "1 ntterj whl ch obeys the command and always follows.^
[According to Paulus Alexan-
drinus, Wittenberg. 1566 p E 3.
The commanding signs are fran
Taurus to Virgo:the obedient
rrjr signs are connected with
them by vertical lines. The
beholding signs from Gemini
to Aquarius connected by
horizontal lines to those
they regard. So also Yalens
TIJ, p. 24. But Chaucer says I.e.
p. 38 "These crooked signs
ben obedient to the signs
It that ben of riht Ascensioun
u (Cancer to Sagittarius)."]
T The southern signs were fonnerly called obedient, see
Bouch^-LeclercqjL'Astrologie Grecque,p,163,as in the
diagram from Paulus Alexandrinus,Wittenberg, 1586 p. E 3.
For Ptol©myt3 use of the terms commanding and obeying
see Tetrablblos I, 17. The northern signs command became
when the sun is on them,the day is longer than the night.
Junctinus I. 69 adheres to Ptolemy*s nomenclature.
229
«> ''l/' *' "*
] • jflb —'^''CvJ-r'
" > ^ ^ v " ^ "
i ' ' ( 'J C* •
'^(-^-UilAIUj . ^Jlj-^'^lj"! j if (*i ^ ^yKL!)'

i ' ,< , ■ s , **
L_jUd'
J^/bUi -ijjhx* >-J^'
S- tv^jj^Jl (il --^4j h^lLj
^jj^ll-ljl t J^Dy^liaklJe Lai) <w4>aJl^jLJ>i»L Î
i-Aj.j. i ^^LlSiy
JjLu
-
\ / ", " Jl *
379-330
379. Ma al-authallathat. Those signs whose nature
as regards two qualities (B 347] Is Identical are situ-
ated In the zodiac at the angles of
TRIPLICITIES right-angled triangles; they are con-
sequently known as trlpllcltles and are
recognised as entitles,although three In number,the ef-
fects of each being Identical or similar. The first
trlpllclty Is formed of Aries,lleo and Sagittarius,all
of which are fiery In their nature,withering and heavy,
while the special domain of each Is for Aries,fires In
ordinary use,for Leo those present In minerals and
plants,and for Sagittarius that which Is distributed
from the heart of animals throughout the body.
The second trlpllclty composed of Taurus,Virgo and
Capricorn la earthy,generous with Its wealth,and the
Interpretation of Its effects Is that Taurus Is respons-
ible for pastureland which Is not sown,Virgo for plants
which have neither berries nor seeds and smell trees,
Capricorn for sown crops and large and tall trees.
Gemini,Libra end Aquarius form the third trlpllclty
which Is airy In nature,sending winds abroad,and In de-
tail Gemini Is characterized by that quiet air which pro-
duces and.sustains life,Libra by that which causes trees
to grow,fertilizes them and produces fruit, and
Aquarius by destructive stones.
The fourth trlpllclty of Cancer,Soorplus and
Pisces Is watery In sympathy, Cancer denoting sweet
pure water, Soorplus that which Is turbid and Pisces
that which Is stinking, distasteful and alkaline.
380. MS al-iiiurabbarat wa buruj al-fasul. Quadrants
of the zodiac ana signs or the seasons. Aries, Taurus
and Gemini are vernal,
SIGNS 07 THE SEASONS changeable, govern childhood,
the east and the east wind,
the first watch of day and night. Cancer, Leo and
Virgo are aeatlval, restful, govern youth, the south
and the south wind and the second watch, Libra,
Jj • jL,
rJ
^\;i a^\av- I ■ JjU v^Ml^c
\ j^jjj *—j lajjjL IL
'—<*—^|Vj^ > Lv»i^
", ..v . . . -
J^-\> ^S yS^* J VJ'
360-381
Soorplua and Sagittarius are autumnal, changeable,
goyeru adult life, the west and Its wind, and the third
watch, while Capricorn, Aquarius and Pisces are hiber-
nal, peaceful, goyem old age, the north and the north
wind and the fourth watch.
The first sign of each season Is called tropical
as It Is the turning point, the second fixed, because
when the sun Is In It the season Is established, and
the third blcorporal. Each one of these Is related by
quartlle to the others of Its kind, and thus Aries,
Cancer, Libra and Capricorn fom the trojfloal tetragone,
the Indications of which are gentleness,purity and
sociability with a tendency to science and details.
Then Taurus, Seorplua, Aquarius and Leo fom the fixed
tetragone, the indications of which are mildness,
tbougbtfulness and Justice, In many cases of lltlglous-
ness and pugnacity, and sometimes of endurance In ad-
yerslty and patience In trouble and Injustice. Gemini,
Virgo, Sagittarius and Pisces, the blcorporal tetragone,
Indicate amiability, leylty, playfulness, thoughtless-
ness, discord In business, caprlolousness and duplicity.
The Influence of the fixed signs according to what
has been said Is obylous, that of the blcsrporal more
obscure, and that of the tropical between the two.
We must now turn to the essential characteristics
of the planets uncomplicated by any other Influence,
because the relation of the planets to the signs Is
such that when they enter them they undergo certain
alterations; for the planets like the signs are
spiritual forces which change the nature of bodies sub-
mitted to their influence, a retrograde planet for
example, may change a temperament Into a choleric one,
or a Joyful or anxious one, according as one of the
four elements becomes preponderant and alters the
activities of the spirit and the conditions.
381. Kalf tlba*' al-kaw8klb. The planets always
Influence whatever is receptive under them. So the
results of the action of Saturn are In
MATURE OF the direction of extreme cold and dry-
THE PLAKETS ness, of Jupiter of moderate heat and
moisture, of Mars, of extreme heat
and dryness, of the sun of not lnmoderate heat and
__ JUW 1 L^^j^Jj' l-^s —ili-: Uljy'O
i?V II.' Lv Ij/jjJI i^|J^>>!l.L>jjr^))jl'j -JL JLvJil'^j r"'

•• r * ^ 4 j y
« ""• ^ ' *
j i^L>£|^<L\£^_xIar\ i J! 3>iJ»
,—"J 4^' * j_t^Jl ^H-aJ jLU i_-».i
} • - I1 «, «• , **' *
1
.• «■ ' t " '
'—^tl*0-<Jl^j»êt, |>^j'Lâiyjj l(j_^(^feA-v
Cj^rxJjSss! I fXX
1
^ }^y1^P Ji^LJy^j<llily.j i»j>L
381-382
dryneas, less then characterizes Mars, the heat
being greater than the dryness. The Influence of
Tenus Is tovards moderate cold and moisture, the
latter predominant, of Mercury towards cold and dry-
ness, the latter rather stronger, which Influence
however may he altered by association with another
star. The moon tends to moderate cold and moisture,
the one sometimes dominating the other. For the
moon alters In each quarter In accordance with the
extrinsic heat It Is receiving from the rays of
the sun. Comparing It with the seasons of the year,
the first week has a spring-like character tending
towards warmth and moisture, the second summer-like,
warmth and dryness, the third after opposition,
autumnal towards cold and dryness, and the fourth
winter-like towards cold and moisture. Some people
say that moisture always predominates In the moon
whatever Its station, but as a fact Its moisture
tends to warmth with the increasing light of the
first half and to cold with the decreasing light
of the second, because when the extrinsic influence
ceases It can only return to Its original condition.
382. Fama halha fl'l-nuhusah wa'l-3aradah.

With regard to the good and evil fortune due to the
planets, Saturn and Mars are
MALEFICENT AND maleficent, the former especially
BENEFICEHT so; Jupiter and Venus are bene-
ficent, especially the former.
Jupiter confronts Saturn In olearlng-up unfortunate
complications as Venus does Mars. The sun Is both
beneficent and maleficent, the former when In aspect
tw —^»J lT'!i^j\;y^Û * ^
******* f*4*
"l^v 4^ Unj^L-^Jt A*-Jo^nfc3^'licJ,£=a^>jJ <_)>-•»
t Luû^ iL', UUt Jb^ûiÎiL_L
»* M ^ - •/ 4 ^ , *•* I 4 (#
Jj/\J«y) .j^Ji i-e>j^!J^ci-/^ '-fi;' ■' ^ fi-5'^
■^.^fil—b^—l <>—zj-*') 'J
-)[• ey*^j wLW'y^^ A

382-383
and distant, the letter when In conjunction and near.
Mercury also is either very fortunate or the reverse;
It assists whatever planet la near it, but when alone
is Inclined to beneficenoe, the more so in proportion
to its proximity. In virtue of Its own nature the moon
Is fortunate, but Its position with regard to the other
planets changes quickly owing to the rapidity of Its
motion.
On the whole the effects of the beneficent planets
may be described as virtue, peace, plenty, good
disposition, cheerfulness, repose, goodness and learn-
ing. If these influences are powerful, they are
friendly to each other, if weak, they lend each other
assistance. On the other hand, the maleficent effect
destruction, tyranny, depravity, covetousness, stupid-
ity, severity, anxiety, Ingratitude, shamelessness,
meanness, conceit and all kinds of bad qualities- If
powerful they help each other In enmity, but If weak,
abandon each other, and when alone are active but
cowardly.
Some people say that Saturn is at first Inimi-
cal on account of Mars, and later fortunate on account
of Jupiter because It accompanies them In all states.
They say of Mars It is at first fortunate and later
maleficent, and the same of the sun, but we know of no
justification for these Ideas, for the principle at the
root of this matter Is that any planet which has Its
t.70 qualities In an extreme degree Is maleficent; in
a moderate degree, beneficent, and that If the
qualities are unequally present, then It Is neither
called beneficent nor maleficent except under certain
conditions.
383. rshal 1 lira*3 waTl-dhanabjfl hadha madkhal.
Many astrologers attribute a definite nature to the
ascending and Qesceuding nodes, saying
EFFECT OF that the former Is wnim and beneficent
MOON'S NODES and denotes an Increase In all things,
and the latter cold, maleficent, and
accompanied by a diminution of Influences. It Is re-
lated that the Babylonians held that the ascending node
233
_J*V(£>U-Mij tV i>lj€>L^)Jf ^
', " ' ' - .,_, . / /\"* ' V. _ -
. > t »
1
^r ' ' ' ' ' * >
i-j _>ul»ij.*5i
itjU. 1»Ifr >i^-lj—»Utult*gjl j
; ijl "- A^>
J'J- »*<k>b i-QL^J UiJmj
j Lli ^ 1
Oj^ j^jj
>i ll LÛiufcll L^l"l-i^\ —fU'
^J,
383-386
increases the effects of both beneficent and maleficent
planets, but It Is not every one who will accept these
statements, for the analogy seems to be rather far-
fetched .
364. Fahal 111-hlnd fl hadhS ral. According to the
Hindus, Saturn, Mars, (the sun and the ascending node)?
are In general maleficent; (they do
HINDU OPINION not mention the Dragon's tallr. Jupiter
end Venus are In general beneficent,
end Mercury Increases the effects of both beneficents
and maleflcents. Of the moon some say that while waxing
it Is beneficent, and when waning, maleficent, while
others assert that for the first ten days it is neither
beneficent nor maleficent, during the second ten, bene-
ficent, and during the third, maleficent.
365. Fang al-dhakar wa'l-unthC. All the three
superior planets and the sun are male, Saturn, among
them,being like a eunuch (has no
MALE AND FiaiALE influence on blrth)p. Venus and the
moon are female, and Mercury herma-
phrodite, being male when associated with the male
planets, and female when with the female; when alone It
Is male In its nature. Some people say that Mars is
female, but this opinion Is not received.
386. Foma al-nehari mlnha wa'l-lalll. Saturn,
Jupiter and thft sun fiTfi diurnaT nrid their
power during the day. Mars, Venus and
DIURNAL AND the noon nocturnal and Mercury is either
NOCTURNAL one or the other depending on the sign
in which it Is, or on the planet with
which it Is associated. Every planet assists those
resembling it, the diurnal asking assistance from the
dlumal and the nocturnal from the nocturnal.
The sun is lord of the day end the moon of the
night, because their Influence Is exerted during these
periods. Every planet which is under the horizon
during its own period is without influence.
Some people say that the. dragon's head is male
and dlumal and the tail female and nocturnal, but
this is quite illogical.
0
"""' ^
- " V • ' r * . ) ' •i

y4>^cy?-"^ t^^'-,Â-l\l/JlaL
Ai-I j\kej jU^/l\j
__^^LU1_r>L*^,^'l« j> JIjc- »

w
■ i *0 *m t ^
-_pJWlL?'-) /^>^ji; iUâ^s*
'* .' .• .^ .. • "'l ' ' » ' M *
]) l / j Ltjs^JAft
387-388
387. Hal tabql dalalat al-kawaîb. THe indications
of a planet do not always remain constantj tHey are
Je^ciulent on its relations to the
ARE I1OTICATI0NS Tarious signs, to other planets and
CONSTANT? to the fixed stars, to the position
as regards the sun and its rays, and
to distance from, or proximity to the earth. Thus
Saturn which is dry as it rises becomes moist as it sets.
The effects which are thus attributable to the
various situations of a planet present themselves in
two forms, the one fortunate, the other unfortunate.
Saturn, for example, which governs matters of the land,
if in conditions of power and beneficence improves the
agricultural conditions, blessings and good luck ensue
and increased profits are realizedi but if the con-
ditions are adverse, the faming operations are attend-
ed by disappointment, bad fortune and failure.
All the indications of the planetary influences
which are described in the books are set down in the
tables which follow.
r 388. Limff yatakarrar al-shai* wBhld al-madlfll
alalhi indatl-kawfikib wa lam yakhtalif fi bardiE^. It
may be asked why mention
WHY ONE QUALITY REPEATEDLY is made of several
ATTRIBUTED TO CERTAIN planets in connection
PLANETS AND NOT TO OTHERS with one subject,when the
same is not the case with
others (the signs) .1 This is due first of all to cer-
tain defects in the art, and to confusion of reasoning.
The maetors of astrology first agreed to arrange things
according to their colours, small, taste, special
peoullarltles, actions and habits and attached them to
planets in accordance with the nature, beneficence or
maleficence of these, hut other associations were
suggested by resemblance in time of appearance or of
coming into action. It is rare that only one planet
furnishes the Indications for one subject or object,
generally two or more ere associated, as for example
when two elementary qualities are present obviously
related to two different planets. Thus the onion is
related by its warmth to Mars and by its moisture to
Venus, and opium by its coldness to Saturn, and its
1
P has burjl for badlhS.
235
' w* /
^ L^-Lo^^j 1^1w^jL^Ja—* 1-3 »j\y3V)
ju Lj^T;'r^s^
Llo^
•■ ^ «*
-—t y£=^JjÛf-t^
388-389
dryne ss to Mercury. So when any one speaks of Saturn as
the signiflcator of opium, It Is merely its coldness
that is referred to, and If Mercury Is cited In the
same capacity, that is due to its dryness. Those people
who do not use discrimination in these matters are
therefore responsible for the contradictions which
occur in their books.
Again there are groups of objects which have as
general signiflcator one particular planet, while
other planets are associated with the individuals of
the group. Thus Venus la the signiflcator for all
sweet-smelling flowers, but Mars in the case of the
rose is associated with it on account of its thorns,
colour and pungent odour which incites catarrh, while
Jupiter shares with Venus in the case of the narcissus;
Saturn in the case of the myrtle, the Sun in that of
the water-lily. Mercury in that of royal basil, and the
Moon in that of the violet.
Similarly the various organs of a plant are dis-
tributed to different planets. Thus the stem of a tree
is appropriated to Sun, the roots to Saturn, the thorns,
twigs and bark to Mars, the flowers to Venus, the
fruit to Jupiter, the leaves to the moon, and the seed
to Mercury. Even in the fruit of a plant like a melon
the constituent parts are divided among several
planets, the plant Itself and the flesh of the fruit
belong to the sun, its moisture to the moon, its rind
to Saturn, smell and colour to Venus, taste to
Jupiter, seed to Mercury and the skin of the seed and
its shape to Mars.
389. Kaif dalSlat ralBtl-jlhSt. I have not seen
in the ordinary text-books any reference to a connection
between the planets and the points
RELATION TO POINTS of the compass except in
OF COMPASS NayrlziPsl fBook of Nature,8 who
in speaking of the four tripllclV
les refers Saturn to the East, Mars to the 'Jest, Venus
to the South and Jupiter to the North.
The Hindus, however, attribute to the planets
certain powers which they call directional (JihatI)
this belongs to Mercury and Jltpiter at the horoscope.
1 Suter Abh, Gesch. Math. VI, 67 is of opinion that
several works attributed to Tibrlzl should be credited
to Nayrlzl. AbuTl-Abbaa P. has Nayrlzl. Nayrlz is
130
2 miles E, of Shiraz.
KitBb el-mawaild, not Included in the list of
Nayrlzl^ works given in Not. et Ext. VII p. 118.
■ «x .• • ✓ v* 7
•»i •
f >^/^->^-' r4^3 ^
^ ft i }<'. " ^ j • ' ^ *" *
*' ">CJbi^ i L^tJ^li^^—jilj^-J> —;U|lj^j
i c3>Uub-Njj^-'s^J—•LLfc»«iJti_ji»l^£=1
yu^fc lll^
' ^r Ls^ ^ J e*^ ^cjc
^ *Lj£=»5 Ly
309-390
to the sun and moon at the tenth hQuso, to Saturn at the
seventh, and to Venus and the moon at the fourth. So it
heaomea necessary to associate the East with Mercury and
Jupiter, the West \?i th Saturn, the South *lth the sun and
Mars and the North with Venus and the moon.
They have also an octagonal figure called ra's
which they use in trying to secure victory in gambling.
Here they place the sun at the Hast,Jupiter at the South,
Mars at the South-East,the moon South-West.Saturn North-
West, Mercury North,and Venus North-East,the West point
being left vacant.
390. Kalf qlsmah al-ayyam balnaha. With regard to
the distribution of the days olf tHe week among the
planets,it is natural that the
PLANETS AS LORDS Oi* first hour of the first day
HOURS AND DAYS OF WEEK Sunday should he given to the
planet which is the cause of
day and night,via- the sun. The second hour is allotted
to the next lower planet Venue, the third to Mercury,the
Arc of day Arc of night
Day of 16 equal hours {40 gharJa) I Night of 8 equal hours \

240° oquinoot, (80 gharia) » 120©
de.To. 6ajn. 12 no on . 4pj] Spin. ,1211 4&jn.
1 2 3 4 s 6 7 a 9 10 11 12 i 2 3 4 5 6 1 8 r -C 11 IS
o 5 >1 i- & Q h. 3 o ? 3 T> h. s 0 3
Day of 18 uneqaal hours-VlSth Night of 12 \iiequal hours
arc of day - 80o 1/12 th arc of night = 1CP
Diagram of equal and unequal hours with
the Lords of the hours for a Sunday.
The Arabs divide the whole day from sunrise to sunset
into 12 day hours and the night from sunset to sunrise
into 12 night hours- In the diagram the day is much
longer than the night,16 of our hours to 0. Therefore the
Arab hours are very unequal to ours,and are also unequal
as the days vary in length- Here 2 spaces are given
to Arab day hours and one to night hours, so 3 Arab day
hours >» 4 of ours aai 6 Arab night hours » 4 of oura*
T One of the games of nard-
237
—fjMj —> ^3
Vjtir-"
* ' \ I^ **** * # *
^ vlju;
^_J>^ WL-M^ i-^ Ll'
b JllslcLit—>U 3
J^\$J ^rxJJJij
390-39S
fourth to the moon, the fifth to Saturn and so on till
the second day Monday whose first hour falls to the
moon,second to Saturn,and so on In the same way until
another Sunday arrives,when the first hour is again the
turn of the sun. The lords of the hours haying been
determined In this way It was natural that the days of
the weeh should be assigned to the planet associated
with the first hour thereof.1
Some people assert that the odd hours of the
twenty-four are male and the even ones female.
391. gahal fl hadhg IKhtllBf. The Hindus deal with
this matter In a better way. They reckon their day of
twenty-fom hours from sunrise to
HINDU DIFFEHENCE sunrise,and allot the whole day to
one governing planet without making
separate provision for the hours. Their night follows
day,and their hours are equal which appears to be the
most reasonable method. Our astrologers however,deal
separately with day and night and divide them Into un-
equal hours,so that the lord of the night which follows
a day Is the thirteenth planet counting downwards from
the lord of the preceding day and (an easier calculat-
ion) the sixth downwards or the third upwards.
It Is on account of this that the unequal hours are
engraved on the astrolabe,but this method of division
Is contrary to nature.
392. Half qlsmsh al-aqailm balnahB. With regard to
the seven climates the first from the equator to Its
boundary Is gliien to Oaturn the first
F1AKETS AND and highest planet and the one with the
CLIMATES widest orbit.because the first olloate
Is the longest of all,the most generous
In yielding the necessities of life,end Its Inhabitants
resemble Saturn In colour and disposition. The second
climate belongs to JUplter and so on to the seventh
which Is allotted to the moon. Abu llarshar regards this
as a Persian view, and says that the Greeks give the
first climate to Saturn, the second to the sun, the
third to Mercury,the fourth to JUplter,the fifth to
Venue,the sixth to Mara and the seventh to the moon.
1 For a memorla teohnlea of the planetary hours see

Skeat I.e. p. 23-7, and for the Semalne planetalre
BL. p. 460. Fig. 244.
238
^L^l'
•J^'"-^^^ ^-J^1>»J^^ '•'.(f^î^l L4»
—Iwy f ir-UL^^^L-J^
uiU^LJL
LI^âvILIS... ^,jiî>-^'.. JV.I si.
_► r'i |. *11 I' I ' 'T • i '*1 . \ \ Ml I Vllki 1^1 . I*
JjjjJjVJ
393-5
393. Ma tawaXlr al-bllad wa'l-aqallm wa aaâb 3ar
ath5. To find an association tetween a particular place
and a sign or plauw L ia a maLLer
ASCENDANTS OF for investigation and research,
CITIES, GLEÂTES, but hov are we to draw a horo-
LORDS OF THEIR HOURS scope or ascertain the lord of
the hour for a place,unless we
Imow accurately the time of the beginning of its con-
struction? And what city ie there of which such a re-
collection is preserved? Even if a religious ceremony
be associated with the foundation of a city,the history
of Its early conditions has passed into oblivion. Even
suppose that is not so, and that we assume a certain date
of its foundation,and draw a horoscope and calculate the
lords of the hours in accordance therewith,how are we to
do so for a well-known stream or a. great rlver^lnce we
can know nothing as to when water began to flow in lb and
excavate its channel? These questions are futile and
their absurdity is obvious to the Intelligent.
394. Ma sunu al-kawaklb. The years of the planets
are of four degrees r least.,mean .great and greatest (§ 437).
The last are only used for mark-
YEARS OF THE PLANETS ing certain time-cycles,although
some people say that in ancient
days the planets granted such long years of life. Astro-
logers of the present day only use the three former de-
grees for determining the length of life at a nativity,
and the numbers which they thus elicit must not be inter-
preted literally as years jbut freely, for some times ttey re-
present years,but sometimes months,weeks,days or hours.
395. Ma flrdarat al-kawSklb. The years of a man's
life according to a Persian idea are divided1 into cer-
tain periods (firdar) governed
FIRDARIA OF PLANETS by the lords of these known as
Chronocrators (§§ 438-9). When
one period is finished another begins. The first period
always begins with the sun in a diurnal nativity and with
the moon in a nocturnal one;the second with Venus in the
one case,in the other with Saturn,the remaining periods
with the other planets in descending order. The years of
each period are distributed equally between the seven
planets, the first seventh belonging exclusively to
the chronocrator of the period, the second to it in 8
partnership with the planet next below it and so on.
X firdar,according to De Saumalse from ttepio55p vov ,
Bouch^-Leclercq p. 491 n. The flrdaiia appeal la lei as
tpaprSpict (Cat. cod. ast. graec. cod. Flor. p. 83). .
3 394 and 395 are more suitably placed before 436 in PL*
LIV * •* ^^ ^
\jÂ III -iaA^-il^3A. U I U—-a^L—^
L â. v|^—1 ô-»U W^=LJ\ >>LJjlii^S_^).^l

^ ^ 9 ^ w ^ fc * •5 "' • "^
L«^liJ Ll> JLjf^=.J^jt^_£s»^g|&aLil/.^j)
* * ^ *
—L1-JJ J saxJJ -»^1jA^*) i-liUvj^^l^j
^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^v»»\r- v^L^.Ioj»
1 A.lb* i( UU-l
^ *
' vj!. U^ I-
396-401
306-401. Tabari al-kawaXlb wa dalSlgthg. The
general charaoterlsties of the planets and their
indications as to 396 element-
R4TURES CF THE PLANETS ary qualities; 397 beneficence
AND THEIR INDICATIONS or maleficenoe; 398 sex; 399
whether diurnal or nocturnal;
400 saell and taste; 401 colour.
Saturn is extremely cold and dry. The greater
malefic. Male. Diurnal. Disagreeable and astringent,
offensively acid, stinking. Jet-black also black mixed
with yellow, lead colour, pitch-dark.
Jupiter is moderately waim and moist. The greater
benofic. Male. Diurnal. Sweet, bitter-sweet, delicious.
Dust-colour and white mixed with yellow and brown,
shi ning,glittering.
liars is extremely hot and dry. The lesser malefic.
Male (some say female). Nocturnal. Bitter. Dark red.
Sun is hot and dry, the heat predominant. Male-
ficent when near, beneficent at a distance. Male. Di-
urnal. Penetrating. Pungent,shining reddish-yellow,its
colour is said to be that of the lord of the hour,
Venus is moderately cold and moist, especially the
latter. The leaser beneflc. Female. Nocturnal. Fat and
sweet flavour. Pure white tending to straw-colour,
shining, according to some greenish.
Mercury is moderately cold and dry, the latter
predominant. Beneficent. Male and diurnal by nature,but
takes on the characters of others near. Complex flavour
and colour, the latter sky-blue mixed with a darker
colour.
Moon is cold and moist, sometimes moderate,
changeable. Beneficent and maleficent. Female. Noc-
turnal. Salt or insipid, somewhat bitter. Blue and
white or some deep colour not unmixed with reddish
yellow, moderate brilliancy.
w i<5>| w L .. ^
• 5.
Str^ --^jU
oA y|
^ Solb ^
t-
402-406
408-406. Daia_[_llha al-rautlaqah. Kalflyat ta3hk51,
e^-ySmhS IqllmhS wa ajngs al-ar^. Indications as to "402
' the properties of things, 4i3 their
INDICATIONS form, 404 the days and nights of the
CONTINUED week, 405 climates, 406 nature of soils.
Saturn: Coldest, hardest, most stinking and most
powerful of things. Shortness, dryness, hardness,
heaviness. Saturday (and Wednesday nlât)^. First
climate. Barren mountains.
Jupiter: Moderate, complete, pleasant, best and
easiest things. Moderation,15 solidity, smoothness.
Thursday (and Monday night) . Second climate. Easily
worked soil.
Mars: Hot, hard, sharp and red things. Length,
dryness and coarseness. Tuesday (and Saturday night) .
Third climate. Waste,hard and stony lend.
Sun: Most expert, noble, well-known and generous
things. Bevolution, mines, worn-outness, empty and
vacant places. Sunday (and Thursday night)p. Fourth
climate. Mountains rich In minerals-
Venus: Most pungent, most agreeable and delicious,
most beautiful, softest and ripest things. Squareness,
dispersion, smoothness. Friday (and Tuesday night)15.
Fifth climate. Soils with abundant water.
Mercury: Mixture of moderate things. Compounded of
two things of this nature. Wednesday (and Sunday night?.
Sixth climate. Sandy soil.
Moon: Thickest, densest, molstest and lightest
objects. Density, 15moisture, opacity, llgjitneas. Monday
(and Friday night) . Seventh climate. Plains and level
ground.
•• âUiX> I,
Lkl^l^fcR
It „ ^jOÛ) s
jMIoJUI
jO!<>jC£=>)] "*■■ Tjj1). L W.
^ „^P'fp5»P_a
"sDi uf^. W^ÎJ =^
■Of^l '■"ây ^
^jltbr9
^ liA->b
407-408
407-408. Malaha mln al-amakln wa*l-maaakln.
Indications as to ,407,places and buildings: 408v
countries,
BUILDINGS AND
COUNTRIES
Saturn: Underground canals and vaults, wells, old
buildings, desolate roads, lairs of wild boasts,
deserts full of tbem, stables for horses, asses, and
camels, and elephants1 houses. India, Zanzibar,
Abyssinia, Egypt, Ethiopia between the West and the
South, Yemen, Arable end Nabatea.
Jupiter: Royal palaces, mansions of the nobility,
mosques, pulpits, Christian ohurchef and synagogues,
science, books, ordinary vessels, teachers' houses,ham-
lets of leadworkers. Babylon, Fers, KhurasSn, the
country of the Teviks and the Berbers In Africa as far
as the West.
Wars: (Fire-temples)^, fireplaces and firewood,
roadside fires and the vessels necessary for the art of
the potter. Syria, Greece, Slavonla, North-Western
countries.
Sun: Kings' and sultan's palaces. Hljjaz, Jeru-
salem, Mount Lebanon, Armenia, Alan, Dallam, Khurasan as
fa^ as China,
Venus: Lofty houses,, vessel a1 (roads) which hold
much water, places of worship. Babylon, Arabia, HijSz
and its neighbourhood, (islands and sugar-plantations)^,
and cities of Mesopotamia and the Middle of the Marshas,
Mercury: Bazaars and divans, mosques, houses of
painters and bleachers and such as are near orchards,
irrigation channels and springs. Mecca, Madlna, ''Iraq,
Dllam, Gllfin, Tabarlstan.
Moon: Moist places, underground or under water
brick-making, places to cool water, streams and roads
with trees, Mosul, AzarbalJBn, the narrow streets of
the oomnion people everywhere.
1
jarf and ûruq are confused In this paragraph.
■tqi
it-Jlj. i/N
q|
■
1 f )yj ^-J^Lroo L»Jb)>}
1.
io hji) bÛ) wÂ'kj
--
L^>t -—
îL !/jkl l\jH» AA-I \)
r
-
.Iv^ly J l^Jj^ 1
'—'jp}J<* l'P ^
^^CO^Vsj-^XJ'jj^ A
1
| c^v1^ jK-SSi'J H
409-411
409-411. MfllahS min al-mard£nlyBttel-fIIlzz5t
waTl-jawahlr, ai-hubCb wa'l-fawaklH. Indlcationa as to
' 409, mine a; 410. me tals
RELATIONS TO ORES, METALS AND and precious atones;
JEWEI3, GRAINS AM) FRUITS 411,grains and fruit.
Saturn: Litharge,Iron slag,hard atones. Lead.
Pepper^bellerlc myrobalan.ollvesjmedlers,bitter pome-
granate ,lentils,linseed,hempseed.
Jupiter: Mercaslte,tutty,sulphur,red arsenic,all
white and yellow atones,atones found in ox-gall. Tin,
white lead,fine brass,diamond?all jewels worn by man.
Wild pomegranate,apple,wheat,barley,rlce,durra,ohiok-
peaa,sesame.
Mars: Magnetic lron,shadna (lentil-shaped atones)
cinnabar,rouge and mosaics (faslfuaa), Iron and copper.
Bitter almond,seed of turpentine-tree.1
Sun: Jacinths,lapis lazuli,yellow sulphur,orpiment,
Pharaonic glasa.marblejre-algar.pitch. Gold and what-
ever la coined therefrom for kings. Orange and maize.
Yenus: Magnesia and antimony. Silver and gold and
jewels set in these,household vessels nad© of gold,sil-
ver and brass, pearls,emeralds,shells. Figs,grapes,
dates,origanum and fenugreek.
Mercury: Depilatory,arsenic,amber,all yellow and
green stones. All coins struck with name and number such
as dinars,dirhams and copiers,old gold and quicksilver,
turquoise,coral,tree-coral. Pease,beans,caraway,
coriander.
Moon: Nabatean glass, white stones,erne raid, moonstone .Sil-
ver and things manufactured of silver,such as cups,
bangles,rings and the like, pearls,crystal,beads strung.
Wheat,barley,large and small cucumbers,meIons.
^ âbbatu'l-kha^rfi',the green seed ef Piatacia terebln-

thua according to Al-3aitar,Not.Ext. XXIII,234,stcmachio;
good for gums and teeth. In a qlâ*" of IjSfl? (608) evi-
dently hashish,perhaps prepared as a contectlon 'pista-ibang'.
, u ,4?
fUjipW-WiWI A
.^lj4oU\2rL«Al
\Jg,) ^ Uu-JSIj^)^
a
. 77 -v.
sa;
atS K4t
Arah —I'Jw
I,JJJI fe>!
Uu»lU ^
lb "u,
=9 I
v.^
412-413
412-413. Malaha min al-ashjar, al-nabat.
Indications as"Tto74T2Ttfeesl 413 herbage and
crops.
RELATIONS TO
TREES Sc. CHOPS
Saturn; Oak-gall tree,citron or myrobelan tree,
oIIto tree and also willow,turpentine tree,oastor-oll
plant,and all those which hear fruits with disagreeable
taste or smell,or hard-shells such as walnuts and
almonds. Sesame.
Jupiter: Trees bearing sweet fruit without hard
skin such as peach,fig,apricot,pear and lote-frult.com-
panions Venus as to fruits. Hoses,flowers,herbs sweet-
smelling or tall,such plants as are light and whose
seeds fly with the wind.
Mars: All bitter,pungent and thorny trees,their
fruit with rough skin,pungent or very bitter such as
bitter pomegranate,wild pear,bramble. Mustard,leeks,
onions,garllc,rue,rocke t,wild rue,radish,egg-plant.
Sun: All tall trees which have oily fruit,and
those whose fruit Is used dry,such as date-palms,mul-
berries and vines. Dodder,augar-oane,manna,tarangubln
and shlr-khlsht.
Venus: All trees soft to touch,sweet-smelling,
smooth to the eye like cypress and teak,apple and
quince. Sweet and oily berries,fragrant and coloured
herbs,spring flowers and has a share in cotton.
Mercury: Pungent and evll-smelllng trees. Savoury
herbs and garden stuff,canes and things growing In
water.
Moon; All trees the stem of which Is short such
as the vine and the sweet pomegranate. Grass,reeds,
canes,flax,hemp,trailing plants such as cucumber and
melon.
ilca^n«B^B!raji*i3SSLi.
«-Uij\y i
AS=a
'îO—J'
3Gpe3U5l^5I55j a
—jUJb -.^1 ,
^ _ii ii'ii '•-. ;. . . *•
iiUSg^Zj-j i
AUor
* » % t^fi7?y;
^4^»> ^.Di ^lj)av
l L_i:LlL, (^r—?J W
414-417
414-417. Malaha mln al-aRhdiya wa'l-adwiva.alat
al -ma rR flh1 ahwBI 1 . Tnd1 nati nnn Ha tn. ill A,
and drugs; 415.household
RELATIONS TO FOODS & DRUGS, utensils; 416,states of
HOUSEHOLD REQUIREMENTS, being; 417^powers.
STATES OF BEING, POWERS
Saturn: Drugs cold and dry In the fourth degree,
especially those which are narcotic and poisonous.
Dwellings. Sleep. Retentive power.
Jupiter: Those which are moderately hot and moist
and are profitable and agreeable. Fruits. Clothing.
Vital, growing nutritive faculties and the air In the
heart.
Mars: Whatever Is not poisonous but pungent and
warm In the fourth degree. Drugs. Business. Passion.
Sun: Whatever Is warm beyond the fourth degree and
Is salutary and In general use. Foods. Eating and
drinking. Youthful vigour.
Venus: Moderately cold and moist foods,useful and
pleasant to the taste. Savoury herbs. Coition.
Sensuality.
Mercury: Foods which are dryer than cold and
are agreeable but rarely useful. Grains. Speaking.
Faculty of reflection.
Moon: Foods which are equally cold and moist,
sometimes useful,sometlraes detrimental, and are not
In constant use. Beverages. Drinking water. Natural
power.
846
L, Li,
/
/-
U> ^ J ij
* ;
; If-— dL*)\)'^-jjJll^( >\
-i
•,y
% /
iv
Mt *
A-^Vy51 £
/ tb
% 1,
J
'lu^r
Lj>i> LAM^ 1
i ô'u^. ^
. CiiJ
' * tv
<V^saJUjoM •OrÂliiVvî,
/. L-LJtvi^'
"VJV
j
418
r
4X6. Dalalat ali dhawet al-arbaâ. Indloatlona
as to quadrupeds.
INDICATIONS AS TO
QUADRUPEDS &C
Saturn: Black animals and tliose llTlng In holes
In the ground; oxen, goats, horses, sheep;! ermine,
sable,weasel, oat, mouse, Jerboa,also, largs black snakes,
scorpions and other poisonous Insects end fleas and
beetles.
Jupiter: Uan, done atic animals and those with
cloven hoofs such as sheep, oxen, deer, those Which
are speckled and beautifully coloured, and edible, or
speaking, or trained such as lions, ohetaha and
leopards.
Kara: Lion, leopard, wolf, wild pig, dog, des-
truetlve or mad wild beasts, venomous serpents.
Sun: Sheep, mountain goat, deer, Arab horse,
lion, crocodile, nocturnal animals which remain con-
cealed during the day.
Yenus: All those wild animals which have white
or yellow hoofs such as gazelle, wild ass, mountain
goat also large fish.
Uercury: Ass, camel, domestic dog, fox, hare.
Jackal, ermine, nocturnal creatures, small aquatic
and terrestrial animals.
Itoon: Camel, ox, sheep, elephant, giraffe,
all beasts of burden obedient to man and domesticated.
^ Na'lm A,ahuturmurgh but perhaps for nareuh sheep

&o. and not for ostriches.
246
IKftUTV \K2ft
l4
v^4 * > **■1
BMrriA
»9
-aI-^'j a lli' ^ yy
419-422
419-422. Dalalat ralA al-tuyur, al-aneslr wa'l-
akhlat.Bshya' fl tadan al-lnaan. fl'batn al-lnaSn.
' TTiajnat.lnna aa t.n.J.igr
INDICATIONS A3 TO BIRDS, birds and other fliers,420,
ELEMENTS AND HUMOURS, the elements and humours,
ORGANS OF THE BODY, 421,organs of similar
VITAL ORGANS. nature, 422,vital organs.
Saturn: Aquatic and nocturnal birds,ravens,
swallows and flies. Earth, black bile and occasionally
crude phlegm. Hair, nails, skin, feathers, wool, bones,
marrow and horn. Spleen.
Jupiter; Birds with straight beaks, grain eating,
not black,j .geon,franoolln,peacock,domestic fowls,
hoopoo and lark. Air and blood. Arteries,sperm and bone-
marrow. Heart in partnership with the sun.
Mars: Flesh-eating birds with curved bills,noc-
turnal,water hens,bats,all red birds,wasps. The upper
part of fire and yellow bile. Veins and the hinder
regions. Liver together with Venus.
Sun: Eagle,ring-dove,turtle dove,cook and falcon.
The lower part of fire. Brains,nerves,and the hypochon-
dria, fat and everything of this kind.^ Stomach.
Venus: Ring-dove, wild pigeon, sparrow,bulbul,
nightingale, locusts and inedible birds. . Flesh,
fat and spinal marrow.Kidneys.
Mercury: Pigeon,starling,crickets,falcon,aquatic
birds and nightingales. Black bile. Arteries. Gall-
bladder.
Moon:Ducks,cmee,oaiion crows,herons,chicks,
partridge. Phlegn, skin and everything related thereto.
Lungs.
L-i
^Hlk^ ^1
Je^gj si
C r •* n-
t-f
oy A* *'*,
^'i
gi.
X3Û
f¥"
'QMj -4f ^l>

sJA*
^Jl^l
w-jJt
•^Mj
U->|
_J_a-l
<».* - J_y^J
V •»
jUt
^j-'jibî,^buiij ^41
i
/
>jît 5.^-1
iJv?'
^l »\^lj
oV l^j! i\
f» jâ^j
^LjljJdW^
423-426
423-426. Malaha min al-ra'3. al-bawaas. a^da' al-
badan. DalalSthg âia al-aanfin. Indications as to,423,
parts of the head; 424,
INDICATIONS A3 TO PARTS sense organs; 425^paired
OF HEAD, SENSES, MEMBERS and other organs; 426
OF BODY, TIME OF LIFE period of life.
satum: Right ear. Hearing. Buttocks, podez,
bowels, penis, back, height, knees. Old age.
JUplter: Left ear. Hearing and touch. Thighs and
Intestines, womb and throat. Middle age.
MSrs: Right nostril. Smell and touch. Legs,
pubesF1,gall-bladder4, kidney. Youth.
Sun: Right eye. Sight. Head and chest, sides,
teeth, mouth. Full manhood.
Tenus: Left nostril. Smell and Inhaling organs.
Womb, genitals, hands and fingers. Youth and
adolescence.
Mercury: Tongue together with Venus. Taste.
Organs of speech. Childhood.
Moon: Left eye. Vision and taste. Neck, breasts,
lungs, stomach, spleen. Infancy to old age according
to Its various quarters.
1 Zahar, zahra Is P. for gall-bladder, as in PP.
248
» /w Uu
O^L^yUJu v * «
• > j- -
J-DU
b 9
Oc^)^
- -3 •J^J
i .Lisi .
♦ • OLkallj
OVJ
Ooii
i ^
j^Li
0
.^!i)î AsJaU' ^•*)
jai
j _pai %i
jlj
^/ i
^"J ■?\
4E7-428
427-428. Malahg min al-anagb. dalglfft ^14'1-
îla wa'l-§uwar. Indicatlona aa to,427, relations
and connections^458
RELATIONS AND CONNECTIONS figure and face.
FIGURE AND FACE
Saturn: Fathers, grandfathers, older brothers
and slaves. Ugly, tall, wizened, sour face, large
head, eyebrows joined, small eyes, wide mouth,
thick Hps, downcast look, much black hair, short
neck, coarse hand, short fingers, awkward figure, legs
crooked, big feet.
Jupiter: Children and grandchildren. Fine figure,
round face, thick prominent nose, large eyes, frank
look, small beard, abundant curly hair reddish.
Mars: Brothers of middle age. Tall, large head,
small eyes and ears, and fine forehead, sharp grey
eyes, good nose, thin lips, lank hair, reddish, long
fingers, long steps.
Sun: Fathers and brothers, slaves. Large head,
complexion white Inclining to yellow, long hair,
yellow In the white of the eye, stammers, large
paunch with folds.
Venus: Wives, mothers, sisters, uterine kindred,
delicate child. Fine round face, reddlsh-whlte com-
plexion, double chin, fat cheeks, not too fat, fine
eyes, the black larger than the whitej small teeth,
handsome neck, medium tall, short fingers, thick
calves.
Mercury: Younger brothers. Fine figure, com-
plexion brown with a greenish tinge, handsome, narrow
forehead, thick ears, good nose, eyebrows joined,
wide mouth, small teeth, thin beard, fine long hair,
well-shaped long feet.
Moon: Mothers, maternal aunts, elder sisters,
nurses. Clear white complexion, gait and figure erect,
round face, long beard, eyebrows joined, teeth
separate crooked at the points, good hair with locks.
■StiaZS
m**
429
429. Malaha mln al-alfat. Indloatlon as to
disposition and manners.
DISPOSITION AND MANNERS
Saturn: Fearful,timid, anxious,suspicious,miserly,
a malevolent plotter,sullen and proud,melancholy,truth-
telling, grave, trusty,unwilling to believe good of any-
one, engrossed in his own affairs and consequently In-
dicates discord,and either ignorance or intelligence,
but the ignorance is concealed,
Jupiter: Good disposition,inspiring,intelligent,
patlent,high-minded,devout,chaste,administoring Justice,
truth-telling,learned,generous,noble,cautious in friend-
ship, egoistic, friend of good government,eager for edu-
cation,an honourable trusty and responsible custodian,
religious.
Mars: Confused opinions,ignerant,rash,evil conduct^
licentious,bold,quarrelsome,unsteady,untrustworthy,
violent,shameless,unchaste but quickly repentant,a de-
ceit r, cheerful, bright, friendly and pleasant-faced.
Sun: Intelligent and knowledgeful,patlent,chaste,
but sensual,eager for knowledge,power and victory peek-
ing a good name for helping others,friendly,hot-
tempered but quickly recovering repose.
Venus: Good disposition,handsome face,good-natured
inclined to love and sensuality,friendlinsss,generosity,
tenderness to children and friends,pride,Joy,patience.
Mercury: Sharp intelligence and understanding,affa-
bility, gentleness,open countenance,elegance,far-sighted-
ness, changeable, deeply interested in business,eager for
pleasure,keeps secrets,seeking friendship of people,
longing for power,reputation and approval,preserves true
friends and withdraws from bad ones,keeps away from
trickery,strife,malevolenceâd-heartedneas and discord.
Moon: Simple^-,adaptable,a king among kings,a servmt
among servants,good-hearted, forge tful-;loquacious, timid,
reveals secretsya lover of elegance^respected by people,
cheerful,a lover of women,too anxiouspnot intellectual-
ly strong much thought and talk.
15 pure in heart. 2 nRsft 2 duplicated. ^ and amusement,
about them.
V
ol^Liu
X
t wz^JjjÛI J.^
•' M . '..■' -^- J ,!'. -t-1. . .-' >, '
JJ1il> UJ>ls
3^1
"O
3 L^VÛi xiJliiAt liJ
^ IA^'J1^'' —r*^)5 ^ ^-f»^ ej^4^vr^>-^-
L-r'^-Uy^ t^jjjj^ji^4^ w "

J jÛ_ij3lj^j\)t3 j\jJu-iWIjbil v j'
7v
450
450. L'alaha mj,n al-afal wa'l-Bhara'lz wa'l-
ekhlBq. Indications as to conditions of life and
aotlTltles.
ACTIVITIES, INSTINCTS
AND MORALS
Saturn: Erile and poverty, or wealth acquired by
bla own trickery or that of others, failure in business,
vehemence, confusion, seeking solitariness,enslaving
people by violence or treachery, fraud, weeping and
walling and lamentation.
Jupiter: Friendliness, a peacemaker, charitable,
devoted to religion and good works, responsible,uxorious,
lauding,eloquent,eager for wealth, in addition to affa-
bility some levity and recklessness.
Mars: Marriage,travelling,litigation,business going
to ruin,false testimony,lustful,a bad companion, soli-
tary, spiteful and tricky.
Sun; Longing for power and government, hankering
after wealth and management of worldly affairs,and im-
posing will on the Ignorant,reproving evil-doers,harsh
with opponents. If sun is in exaltation,the position is
favourable to kings,if in fall to those In rebellion.
Venus: Lazy,laughing,Jestlngjdanclng,fond of wine,
chess,draughts,cheating,takes pleasure In every thing,
not quarrelsome,a sodomite or given to excessive veneiy,
well-spoken,fond of ornaments,perfUme,song,gold,silver,
fine clothes.
Mercury: Teaching manners,theology,revelation and
logic,eloquent,fine voice,good memory for stories,
ruining prospects by too great anxiety and misfortunes,
fearful of enemies, frivolous,eager to buy slaves and
girls,busybody,calumnious,thieving,lying and falsifying.
lioon: Lying, calumniation,over-anxious for health .
and comfort,generous,in distributing food,too uxorious,
levity In appropriate places,excellent spirits.
1 little conjugal happiness, too much marriage.

851
^—,^\ * . . L-i . .11 >-4 —k-\— VI *j\£>n
. I Us. .4
' T->— ^ ,, — > " Nj
*—'^NaJ-Lji
Ld>jj
A3 %
431-432
431-432. H5 yanaub llalhg mln al-rlll&l wa'l-
amrSij,, wa âbqat al-n£a. Indications as to.,431,
diseases, 432,classes of
RELATIONS TO DISEASE people.
AND CLASSES
Saturn: Sickness,afflictlon,poverty,death,disease
of internal organs,gout. Owners of estates,kings' in-
tendants,religious of various sects,devotees,wicked
people,bores,the overworkedêunuchs,thieves,the mori-
bund, magicians, demons, ghouls, end those who revile them.
Jupiter: Sickness,fatigue, fever,death in childbed,
Caesarean section. Kings, vazirs, noble stagnates, lawyers,
merchants,the rich and their sycophants.
Mars: Eever. Leaders,cavalry,troops,opponents,
disputants in assembly-
Sun: —. Kings, nobles, chiefs, generals,
officials, magistrates, physicians, societies.
Venus: ——. Nobles, plutocrats, queens,
courtezans, adulterers and their children.
Mercury; ♦ Merchants, bankers, councillors,
tax-oollectors. slaves and wrestlers.
Moon; Diseases of many kinds. Kings, nobles,
noble matrons? celebrated,and wealthy - aghdya* -
citizens.
^ mutara3sifUn, but here maldiidiin interesting people.

^ l, haratir5 hawamil, the proper plural la hamalah
pregnemt womenZ
.>^biiT
^ w f
jLrf J^-LJojl j' ^-AWUi^l
Lj>j i, •^«)|v<iAJ j j
^PUf?t«» !l
i \ ^-^-4^ ' ^\j ^ i - i
1
6UJ j
acI^L.,
1
Vjil jUsIj ^1 J l^ljjjil
y L^»^ 9 (,1^1 iÛi i

'■■' - ' if
i— lyji^ jjip^v i
jO—
5 i i
! A^J—^ J>lî>^JJil
433-434
433-434. Dalelatha re.li al-adyan: sugarha
allatl tasaimarattig. Indleatlona as to ,433^
religions, 434,pictorial
XHDICATIiNS AS TO RELIGIONS representations of the
PICTURES OF PLAHETS planets.
Saturn: Jews and those who dress In black. Old man
seated on a wolf,In his right band the head of a man and
In the left a man's hand; or according to another pic-
ture,mounted on a bright bay horse,on his head a helmet,
In the left hand a shield and In the right a sword.
Jupiter: Christians and those dressed In white. A
young man with a drawn sword In the right hand and a
bow and a rosary In the left,on horse-back; another
picture: man on a throne,clad In variously coloured
robes,a rosary In the left hand.
Mars: Idolaters,wlne-blbbere,dressed In red. Young
man seated on two lions,In the right hand a drawn sword
in the left a battle-axe;another picture: mounted on a
bay horse,helmet on head,In the left hand a spear adorn-
ed with red roses,pennon flag^,ln the rl{$it hand head
of a man,clad In red.
Sun: Wearing a crown; Uaglans, ulthralsts. A man
seated on something like a shield on wheels drawn by
four oxen,In his right a staff on which he rests,In his
left a maoeP gurz, beadsA ichare■ another picture: man ( jurz)
seated,face like a circle,holding reins of four horses.
Venus: IslSm. Woman on a camel holding a lute idiicii
she Is playing; another picture: woman seated her hair
unloosened the locke In her left hand,In the right a
mirror In which she keeps looking,dressed In yellowish
green,with a necklace,bells,bracelets and anklets.
Uercury: Disputants In all sects. Youth seated on
a peacock, In his rlît hand a serpent and In the left a
tablet which he keeps reading; another picture: man
seated on a throne,In his hand a book which he Is read-
ing, crowned, yellow and green robe.
Uoon; Adherents of the prevailing religion. Man
with Javelin In right hand,In his left thirty,you would
think there were three1 hundred,on his head a crown,
seated In a chariot drawn by four horses.
1 'sisad P.sooo
253
V ^ . |
'Tc v4 J^^ljJlLj/lj li1* '-V^*
-V-^-jJ^—»J5-y'V-.>La>^ |j
| uiil^Lu
j^jc'?4.'^ni..yii) ■.-e'/.L.z^ "ILL*.ll . it
435
435. DalglathS ald al-alnS,'St. Indications as
r
to trades, professions, etc.
Saturn: Building,paymaster,fanning,reclaiming land

and distribution of water,(fraudulent transactions,^)
apportioning money and heritages,grave-dlgglng;selling
things made of Iron,lead,bone,halr;oopper,black slaves;
knowledge used for bad purposes,such acts of the govern-
ment as lead to evil oppression,vrrath, captivity, torture.
Jupiter; Noble actions,good government,religion,
doing good; Interpretation of dreams; goldsmiths' work,
banking; selling old gold and silver,white clothes,
grapes and sugar-cane.
liars: Law-making, selling and making armour,black-
smiths craft,grooms,shepherds,butchers,veterinary
surgeons,surgeons,clroumolsers,sellers of hounds,cheetahs,
boars, wolve s,copper,alckles,beer,glass,bores,wooden
cups.brigandage,contention,houaebreaklng,highwaymen,
grave-robbers and prison, torture,execution.
Sun; Receiving,giving and selling gold-brocades.
Tenus: Works of beauty and magnificence,fond of
bazaars,oommeroe,measuring by weight,length and bulk;
dealing In pictures and colours,goldsmiths work,tailor-
ing,manufacturing perfumes,dealing In pearls,gold and
silver ornaments,musk,white and green clothes,maker of
crowns and dladams,accompanying singing,composing
songs,playing the lute,feasts,games and gaming.
Mercury: Merchants,calculators and surveyors,
astrologers, necromancers and fortune-tellers,
geoma trlolan,philosopher,disputation,poetry,eloquence,
manual dexterity and anxiety for perfection In every-
thing,selling slaves,bides,books,coins; profession of
barber, manufacture of combs.
Moon: Engaged In business matters,missions,agencies,
accounting;strenuous In religion and divine law,skill
In all branobes;praotloe of medicine,geometry,the high-
er sciences,measuring land and water;growlng and cutting
hair; selling food, silver rings and virgins,also Indicates
captivity,and prison for the deceptions of wizards.
.1
pi1»t ^' y Uj >[> >'._; v^dl, Û_i ÎjîL^J^V'
^'^y'ty^jJ^nj'- ^^s=ai
JzJw 'L
r
J7
* « y
^7 ^^
;
!L 9z>y \*J)^ ?p) \^tSA a 1
yltigpO^kf^
M
■—a
^n— «^' it i
..-^r ,
n,
J
i i
436-439
436-437.
1 Awamirha mln q^dflam wa mln khal& aunufaa.
The orbs and years^ of tbe planets.
ORBS AND YEj\RS OP FIAHKTS
Orbs least mean Years ,,
great- greatest
Saturn 9° 30 43^ 57 265
Jupiter 9° 12 45i 79 427
liars 8° 15 40j 66 264
Sun 15° 19 39| 180 1461 (sotblao cycle)
Venus 7° 8 45 82 1151
Mercury 7° 20 43 76 461
Moon 12° 25 S3l 108 520
438-439. Plrdarat wa nuddah al-sharakah. Periods of
life (flrdHrlnl nnntrnllBrt by the planets as chronooratora^
438_»aad the ttmcs of as80ciatloii/439/
PIRDiHIA AND THEIR (seTenths of the periods) of the other
ASSOCIATION TIMES planets with the general chronocaatora^0&
Chronoorators
Indiumel In nocturnal Times of asaoolation
Periods nutlvltlea nativities in last six sevenths
1 10 years 9 years In moon'speriod
Sun Moon In sun's ly.5m.4d,7h.
period ly-5m.a2d.2lh.
2 Venus Saturn In Venus' period ly.Im,21d.5h.
S years 11 years In Saturn's period ly.6m.25d.17h.
3 Mercury Jupltar In Mercury*b period ly.10Bi-8d.7h.
13 years 12 years In Jupiter's period ly.am,17d.7h.
4 Moon Mars In Moon's period ly.3m.123.21h.
9 years 7 years In Mars' period ly.lOh.
5 11 years 10 years In
Saturn Sun Saturn's period ly.6m,25d.l'ai.
In Sun's period ly.5m.4d.7h.
6 Juplier Venus In Jupiter's period ly.em.17d.3h.
12 years 8 years In Venus' period ly.Im.Sld.Sh.
7 liars Mercury In Mars' period ly.
7 years 13 years In Mercury's period ly-10m.8d.r7h.
8 Dragon's head ,, Tail The Dragon's Head and Tall have
3 years 2 years no asaoolation times with the
whether day or night4 planets
fluence (amr] oan affeot another when applying to conjunction
or aspect. The figures are as in Porphyrlus p. 204,but vary
in modem books.
® Cf. 394 and 522. The great years are the sums of the Egspdan
Ptolemaic terms of each planet 453; the least of ^ 4 and J)
have been related to their periods of revolutionjOf 6> to the
Metonin cycle,of $ to its orb,while those of S and § and the
greatest years remain unexplained. In the case of q and J,
the mean is least great cf. Vat.Val. p. 157 and B.L.41D
where© and treated like other planets.
3 Vettius Valens p. 164 has another explanation for the
great years (reXcta frn) of the planets;-
H 1 of © great years + £ great > - 57 (note 372)
4-1 of© greet years + ruast - 79
or *• of Jt •* * + least - 79
* i of > H + least of 2^ « 66
of J> 11 " + least of h, - 84 (Ihe sum of tbe terns-82)
H ^ +
* A span of 75 years ia thus leastprovided
of © = 76for.
CSBI
m jr
re ritx 3.V
t- rifl x?-
}
iXl6»\ W-J^yH ►jy I ^
4.5
r VI f-rv X
'jl u
£ &• Vl~
q 'J
('V ! d r 11 rif C
f +
l .'
=.5/ r.l
^ U ir
LyjUji.
(3 cirfT
v> fS ir 8 If
>yj- llsl
y
1 fl V1* f ii
U f\
S J **TS as?"
rs 11
a r
A
440
440. MS burut al-kawSii:lti. He now proceed to dis-
cuss the relation of the planets to the signs.
The zodiac belt is divided into two
D01DCC1LES OF halves, the first extending fron the
THE PIAHETS beginning of Leo to the end of Capri-
corn, and this half is given to the
sun whose domicile is the first sign, viz. Leo. The
other half is given to the moon; it extends from the
beginning of Aquarius to the end of Cancer In which
sign its domicile is. As the other planets have two
methods of movenent retrograde and direct, so also
they have each two domiciles one on the sun side and
one on the moon side, at equal distances from the in-
terval between Leo and Cancer. Beginning with Mercury
the nearest planet, Tlrgo on the sun side and Gemini on
the moon side are assigned to it as domiciles, then
Libra and Taurus to Tenus, Scorplus and Aries to Mars,
A Sagit-
tarius
and
Pisces
to Jup-
iter
m and
Capri-
corn
and Aq-
uarius
l/td V to Sat-
urn as
D in the
annexed
figure.
It.
c
ABC - The Sun half.
ADC - The Moon half.
Uf
S^—Vi ^MlB
j^X H
VA •&< li> M ,,: ..
VA â, £. Tg/
^35^445
441-448.
441» Fahal yastawl hal al-kawkab> One of these
domiciles is always more congenial to the planets and
it is said that there they are more joyful
DOMICILES on account of temperament, format ion, and
PREFERRED sex» The sun and moon,however,as they are
not confined to one domicile find condit-
ions in all» But of those which have two,Mercury pre-
fers Virgo to Gemini,Venus Taurusîars Aries,Jupiter
Sagittarius,Saturn Aquarius.
The opinion of the Hindus agrees in some respects
and differs in others; they say that Mars finds Aries
more congenial,the moon Taurus,the sun Leo.Mercury Vir-
go, Venus Libra,Jupiter Sagittarius,and Saturn Aquarius.
They call such situations ,mGlatrikunaT^ and assert that
a planet occupying one ef these has more influence than
in its own domicile.
442. Ml al-wabal. The signs opposite to the domic-
iles of the planets are said to be their detriments_or
DETRIMEIJTS debilities {Arabic,'7ebal,Persian,hityaxnh).
The Hindus
while recog-
a nizing the
domiciles de
Sort Jm. not know this
TIT expression.
The detriments
are shown in
the accompanf-
ing figure.
T ;
%
"rlLtf-Ow-
TC
1
India 11.325.
257
<^-AU^-L^>ilJi.'jjI a>. ^
Lîl ul , » "-^f
1
* 1 ijyiJ
Ms *** j '
^—r
L^"-' X
cj*^ /i]U
n,
ir-^' _ji
0^5- 1JI
U -JL L j^tol^ôjyji
C j^J K
443-444
443. Ma ashrfif al-Kawaklb wa hubutha. There are
certain signs which are described as places of ezalta-
tlcn (sharaf) of the planets, like
EXALTATION AND the thrones of kings and other high
PALL OF PLANETS positions. In such signs the exalta-
tion is regarded as specially relat-
ed to a certain degree, but there are many differences
of opinion In this natter, some saying that it extends
to some degrees in front of or behind the degree in
question, while others hold that it extends from the
first point of the sign to that degree, and again
others that it is present In the whole sign without any
special degree. Below are the signs and degrees accord-
ing to the Persians and Greeks-
Saturn 21 of Lihra
Jupiter 150 of Cancer
Mars .«. 28° of Capricorn
Sun ,.. 19° of Aries
Venus 27° of Pisces
Mercury 150 of Virgo
Uoon •.. 30 of Taurus
Dragon*s Head 3° of Gemini
Dragon*a Tail 3° of Sagittarius
The opposite signs and degrees are regarded as
places of dejection for the planets, when in them, they
are said to he in their 'fall* (hubtS-f), and are therein
confined and their condition deteriorated.
444. Hal fl al-ashraf gillgf. There la no differ-
ence of opinion as to the signs of exaltation, but the
Hindus diffoi as to the degrees in
ICNDDS DIFFER certain cases. They are agreed that
AS TO DEGRESS the exaltation of the sun lies in 10°
of Aries, of Jupiter in 5° of Cancer,
of Saturn 20 of Libra, the others as above, except
y w
^ ♦ * f-
■ ' * «
3j^l]_^>^.j. . ^r-'^ 9
'A^r
^ ^ j •
^^JW'ils^Li.^!^ 4-^ ^ ^ ir*
^ f V ' U' H 1 '" >
3 5 wslpiJ ÂJT SJ^J îjc
Jîl
- -Jt^
lu JjJ C s&J A, JQ^JI 'k-A
^jlbl ,- ^3'
T
i TT ^jjl-l T :> 4* ^L" ' ^ JJ-i "iiî
—^J5\1
^ >w'^ -.
444-446
with regard to the Dragon's Head and Tail which are not
mentioned by them in this connection as is quite proper.
445. ArbSb al-rauthallathBt mS hiya. Each triplic-
ity, 379, has a lord by day and another by night, also
a third which yhares this reaponsibil-
LORDS OF HIS ity beth by day and night. Thus the
THIPLICITIES fiery triplicity has as lord the sun
by day, and Jupiter by night, while
Saturn is a partner both by day and night. The earthly
triplicity has Venus by day, the moon by night, liars
being in this case the partner. The airy triplicity
has Saturn by day, Keroury by night and Jupiter as
partner, while the watery triplicity has Venus by day,
L!ars by night and the moon as partner.
Their Lords
The Trlpllcities
1
By Day By Night .
Lst Fiery Y a Q K 21
2nd Eartny if T ? a-
3rd Airy I V V
ith Watery "Ir ? V
However Eashwiyite^- astrologers associate all
three planets at the same tirie with each triplicity,
and merely make the following distinction between day
and night, e.g. the lords of the fiery triplicity are
the Sun, Jupiter and Saturn by day, and Jupiter, the
Sun and Saturn by night and the rest on rthis analogy.2
They do not desert their position (l.yar hna) on con-
sideration, but have filled their books with decrees
based thereon, and propositions deduced from these
(l.tafrl'']
446. MunSzarah al-kawaklb fl al-buruj kalf hiya.
Whenever two planets are in signs which are in aspect to
1 Al-Blruni had a poor opinion of the Hashwlyites - v.
Chron.p.90, and 587 and 529. As to their doctrine, a
creed of the oommon people as compared with the more as-
istocratlc and intellectual llutazllites,and the origin
of the name y^Van Vloten - Hashwlya et Nabita. Inter.M.
Congr.lSQ? and Goldzlher - Livre de Ibn Toumert.p,65.
Alger
2 1903. Dlet.scl.terr® p. 396.
The first page of IL has a table showing this arrange-
ment.
JJ)Lj v-JL^VJU'1JuU i—'j i, ^ I^__J
Jrî j)
u-?)^ aJlA) —jjj f
' ' ^ *-J 4

1
Jaii jI^L
^ ^ 9 '
,v * {*
3
iJi l\llfes I ^jl^s>^=J I
J
» *'« * ' li
J- Loil^/OLj> ^ T^^ti Li^Ûsilj wi^^J^L-

1
^ "» » " £^' > *
—-''^y Lij»Lv Uy .>
446-447
ASPSCTS OF PLAIIETS each other 373, they also are
IN SIGNS said to be in aspect; If they are
in the sane sign they are describ-
ed as conjunct mujtanirin. while if they are at the same
degree the conjunction is said to be pantile (muqtarln).
If one of them is in a sign third from the other, they
are in sextile aspect to the right or left, if in a
fourth sign, to be in cpiartile, if in a fifth in trine,
and if in the seventh, opposite^ Should their degrees
be equal they are styled muttasilin for then between
these aspects it is possible to construct either a regu-
lar hexagon, or a square or a triangle in the zodiac,
or to divide it into two - 373-
447. Kaif aadaqah al-kawakib wa âdawatha. Friend-
ship or enmity oetween the planets is, according to us,
based on what we have said as to
FRIENDSHIP AND their domiciles, but astrologers
ENMITY OF PLANETS have different theories on this
matter. There are those who base
them on the temperament and nature of the planets them-
selves, Saturn and Jupiter being regarded as inimical
because the one is dark, maleficent and extremely dis-
tant, while the other is shining, beneficent and only
moderately distant. There are others who base them on
their elementary qualities, those that are fiery being
inimical to the watery,and the airy to the earthy,while
there are still others who found them on the relative
situations of their domiciles and exaltations,if the
aspect of these is inimical then their lords are also
inimical: further any planet whose domicile la twelfth
from the house occupied by another planet is ininlcal
to the latter. When the basis of enmity is arrived at
in any of the ways we have enumerated, then that for
friendship and indifference becomes obvious.
" ^ * m * % 3
V , • ,^- ' ~ ^
s
J>5^/*L j)La>^ L*L* .UjjJliJ
^ jUI|«<J L. L-j
l^ J^ \ 13 ^ 31^'\ 511 ^
JLJc-IJ \j)C !_ —i*^--Lr^'--r3'^&i--*^-j
L^-^J » l-r V^®

447
The views of Abu •l-Qaslm, the philosopher,based
on the foregoing considerations are shown In the oolunns
of the subjoined table.
mutually offering asking
hurtful Injur- friendship friendship
Planets with ious to to froml
Saturn Sun end Moon Jupiter Mars /onus

Jupiter Mars Mercury Mercury Venus loon
liars Jupiter Venus Moon Sun Saturn
Sun Saturn Venus Jars
Venus Mars Mercury - Saturn Jupiter
Mercury Jupiter Venus Venus neither offers
nor asks frieiid
ship
Moon Saturn {Mars Jupiter Janus
The astrologers of our day however,lay little stress on
|the friendship or enmity of the planets In the matter
of judicial astrology. The Hindus on the other hand re-
gard them as equally Important or more so than the dom-
islles and exaltations, we have accordingly set down
their opinions In the acoampenylng table.
Planets Prlends Enemies Indifferent
Q ^ D 9 $
J> O ^ - none
$ i-G J 9 h?
$ 0 ? j>
h (J Q 5 ? ^
? Q ■»
h.2 9? & <3 i>
^ read latfinah.
2 !j) in US.
5 In IB.
261
♦
m$32±
t&Sk
>AJa& j>&>
447-.I50
As far as friendship or ennlty is concerned, they
are liable to change, because if a planet meets another
in the 10th, 11th, 12th, 2nd, 3rd, or 4th houses,! pp
friendly the friendship becomes complete, if indifferent
becomes friendly, and if inimical indifferent. Also If
it meets another in any of the other houses,the effects
are precisely the reverse of these.
448. 11a al-nlmbahr. Vie shall now speak of the
different parts of the signs and the fate of the
planets therein.
HALF-SIGN Half of a sign is called 'hour' by
the Hindus (nlm bahr in Persian).^ The
first half of every male sign belongs to the sun and
the second to the moon, and on the contrary, of every
female sign the first half belongs to the moon and the
second to the sun. My friends, in this matter contin-
ue to obtain conclusions which differ from the above or
are directly opposed thereto, and Indeed the distinct-
ion between the two cannot be compared with that between
light and darJmesa, as we have said and shall continue
to say,but the people ■sho have made use of this distinct-
ion are agreed upon its value,in spite of the opinions
of others.
449. Ma al-wujuh. Each third of a sign - ten de-
grees - is called a face (wajh) and the lords of these
faces according to the agreenent of the Per-
FAGES slans and Greeks are as follows:- the lord of
the first face of Aries is Mars, of the second
the sun, of the third Venus; of the first of Taurus,
Mercury and so on in the order of the planets from
above downwards till the last face of Pisces.
450. Ma al-guwar. The so-called 'figures' are in
reality also the faces,but called so (suwar) because
the Greeks,Hindus end Babylonians assoclat-
FIGUHE3 ed with each face as it arose3 the figure of
a personage human or divine, and in the
! Of. the statement India II 324, where a planet's nat-
ure is said to undergo a change towards friendliness in
the Eastern and towards enmity in the Western houses
without
2 reference to meeting another planet there.
Of. India I 843 where the 'centres of the signs' should
be the 'half signs'.
3
For a list of the Egyptian divinities according to
Hermes, v. Ruelle, Rev. de Phllol. 1908 p. 247.
262
r
i V f / "', ^ ^ ••
* JC-^»\\^5 ily ÛMa-jljÎÎJJ^JLJJ^L J

^JU Jv-i-t 3jc ^ îiÛL
\ * t* #
1 «• * Vn. *,»%•
—SJ y^-Û^yAj ^jil^ ^1jjt-^li of iLi—iijA^j^WjLi
^ _ yS^Ll^âXoUlLilbvAsL^^^^-M<[_^
'—'^^J
'—^J- ^
450-451
case of the Greeks the faces were also associated with
such of the other 48 constellations ascending at the
saiae time.l But this duplication of oonstellationa is
mentioned in connection with affairs, designs and under-
takings which are peculiar to the cwuntry in question,
and is used to obtain decrees with regard to these.
V/e shall not undertake to give an account of It both to
save apace,and because It would be useless,as the as-
trological books we have are destitute of any instruct-
ions for using it,
451. I.'ia al-darljan. _B7 the Hindus these thirds
•f a sign are called darigan or Drlkan (decanate), but
their lords are different from those of
DECANATES the faces, because the first decanate has
as lord the lord of the whole sign, the
second, the lord of the fifth sign from It, and the
third, the lord of the ninth sign.2 The lords of the
faces and of the Hindu decanates are set down In the
table.
SlRns Lorfls •f faces Of darijan

10° 20° 30° 10° 80° 30°
Arlea Mars Sun Venus Mars Sun Jupiter
Taurus Mercury Moon Saturn Venus Mercury Saturn
Genlnl Jupiter Mars Sun Mercury Venus Saturn
Cancer Venus Mercury Moon Wo on Mars Jupiter
Leo Saturn Jupiter Mars Sun Jupiter Mars
Virgo Sun Venus Mercury Mercury Saturn Venus
Libra Moon Saturn Jupiter Venus Saturn Mercury
Scorpio Mars Sun Venus Mars Jupiter Moon
Sagit- Mercury Moon Saturn Jupiter Mara Sun
tarius
Capricorn Jupiter Mars Sun Saturn Venus Mercury
Aquarius Venus Mercury Moon Saturn Mercury Venus
Pisces Saturn Jupiter Mars Jupiter Moon Mars
1 TrapavareXXovra _ Bouch^-Leclercq lc.125 and pas-

sim. Boll, Sternglaube, 1926, pp. 60, 142...
2
The lords of the decanates are the lords of the signs
in the order of the trlplicltles 379, Aries, Leo, Sagit-
tarius &c.
j—. [fci' 1^ U> ^
s_3UJji\L tU^L^l/qCi^
^f> j^L«l k^X££j\£=»J> i xJ^xl-t ^9JLJ—SL\y^
—iLii\jAyU4
US
J^1 J_ J J^JI &>J>>U 4_^ J>t^J»

1
E^ jSvj
J^'Urf. Jri
sLî ^ 'ot-xÎ ^ J? pv"'

J-ilti. ^ oeil i-Jy J_>t Oyt!
1
A-C^
J *3Ki] WJ33f«XaJIEaWllf ■■» rt^Wl
452
452. Hal istaâmal Batlamiyus athlath al-burilj.
Ptolemy hna nTnn madft uae nr thft tlilrdfl nf the a4gnfl.
He determined by experience and observa-
PTOLEMY'S tlon of the signs the changes In the at-
SIGN-THIRDS mosphere which are Indicated by the
signs as a whole, by the individual
thirds In these In longitude and by their northern and
southern parts In latitude- So whenever the action of
the planets on the weather and of their situations at
the times of conjunction and opposition In longitude
and latitude when weather prognostics are sought It Is
not easy to estimate the combined effect of all of
these Influences,as well as of the association and sep-
aration of the planets and the fixed stars- The follow-
ing table Is taken from Ptolemy-
Indications of
Thunder & bringing heat Bringing Wind,rain Temperate Burning not;
T rain & destruction odd & Ice 8c thunder plague
epidemics
Heat inclin- temperate unsettled earth qualtBS cold and heat,light-
ing to oondltlcm & hot wet ning thun-
moisture derbolts
Temperate winds drying scorching destructive temperate unsettled
un around heat moisture
'-'-c Improvement
warm
scorching scorching hot winds 8c temperate
heat heat earth fwakes
winds
Heat Wind Moisture Jot depre^ng temperate destructive
a atmosphere moisture
doisture.& Wind Temperate Very hot & temperate very wet
thunder destructive
-fW Changeable Great heat Jfedahire bring fine temperate Very wet
Inge^daulcs weather
Phuhder &, Wind Moisture snow and temperate earthquake«
llKbtnlna wind
71ndy Wind Very wett moisture temperate Very hot
unsettled
Very wet Very wet Very wet &, jreat heat temperate rains
Z bringing changeable lest ruction
destruction
as laid and Great heat wind end Very wet temperate winds
wet snow
;oicl ana Wind wet moaerate very weu "vety hot
5t wet
264
iJV^S ^j^jfcUilr-^jJJ^jCLjl1j)
^•l^Ss.ljfe.Wj.VSj Jjcîî_-îl j jC^S^p JjUi i.

(DV ^ V _ y
UBSSiE»lBS9BOÊ2Sa»Sl!
E
Bn i-*/«t
—^>1
> I j-vi
feiKaiêassiEa
O^/U
,7 > 3s3C55 '•" i,
—- r ^jjf S-c^w
^5^
EaKaEgiiiigaii^MB Oi.'
V^l?^* ojiU
453
453. Ma al-ûdud.1 These are unequal divisions or
the signs knnyn »s termsj P.marz:with each one of them
a planet is associated. People however differ
TERMS in this matter,some holding to the Chaldean,2
I.e.the ancient Babylonian method,others to
that of Asmaratus,3 while others again adopt the scheme
of the Hindus.*None of these are employed by profes-
sional astrologers,who are unanimous in using the
Bgyptian terms,because they are more correct. Those who
have expounded Ptolemy^ works use the terms which he
records having found in an old book,and which he has in-
serted in his Tetrablblos. We have constructed a table
showing both the Egyptian and the Ptolemaic terms:there
is no use discussing any others.
t
3ipns ggyptian Lords of Terms Ptolepay 3 Lords of Terms
*•6 912 9 20 525 ^ 30 "4 6 Ol4 $21 526
?8 $14 ^.22 *1 27 *30 915 422 428
2(12 ?17 *24 Jl30 413 20 5 26
$13 $ 19 ^26 h 30 I! 2,-13 J? 20 0 27
>6 ?11 H. 18 $24 S 30 * 6 $13 919 V25
$17 I 21 5 28 h 30 $13 4.18 4.24
Jie $14 421 *28 2 30 ¥ ' ?11 419 $24
5? 911 $ 19 424 k 30 2f,12 I?1 y 24
$17 9 21 h.26 5 SO 9 14 519 >^5
2? W $ 22 h.26 5 30 $ 12 il9 ^ 25
97 $13 ^ 20 /25 Jh 30 n 512 $20
£12 ^.16 $19 *26 i 30 98 ^,14 $20 *26
1 The table from PL is substituted as an example of its
calligraphy.
2 vettlus valens, p. 14 seq. for oharaoterlsties of each
term. v. B.L.pp.206-210.
3 This form occurs in A and P and in AbQ Ua'shar's Mad-
khaljf. 190-3,also as Astar^QS in B.M.Add.23,399 of
Abu'l-Haaan ♦'All,and appears in the Latin translations
of the'latter works as Aristotua (Albumasar,lntrod.1489,
V.8.)Attarathyh,(cf.Bouch5-Lecleroq,p.215 n.)Asthoatol,
{Bonatus,l550 p.46)JJrofe3Sor Margoliouth suggested It
was probably the name of a Greek astrologer,
A variant in AB* f 63® 1 4, Arastraû points to (en)
Erasistratos, who.Dr.Wlthington shows me,according to a
list of books in a Greek translation of a work of Mas-
hallah,(Cat.Cod.ABtrol.Graeo.Cod.Plor,P.81-2) was the
author of several astrological books,among them one
265
1 v!
V—>'>iX'vi.ij-,LJi
U'
-v>-
77 / ; 7 7 12 7
V> •*
V.T 7
!< y ~x %T7 V y
7
17 y
v 0
^,
j/. / v ./: !.-V. 7 'i/j >, y 7 ^ 7'
h o V
V t/ V ./
77 7 V >> 7
\
/ V,,
,/: 7 7 s V * K- c» or i 7 V y
v
v^1- r4 ^
~v. 7 W rs. y M y
-j <{■
Vf\
HU' jJ% u c J
o is" /= ■3
v^J LyV
<K o*y y 7 7 ~\. f1 7 /
v< ^v/Jl, 7 yj 7 /; 7 .7 t-~V Sr.
J
v.* 07 y
V^S# v' si y 7 7 -Ji
\:
v.,
s /. 3-%, 7 X 7
K ,/: 7
A
Vr y
sk. 7 r-isir s 7^ ^ 7 /
454-455
454, yudud al-hlnduwarit The Hindus use only •no
series of terins for all the male signs, and the sane
series in the inverse direction for the
HINDU TERliS female signs. This is called their tri-
shanash,1 or the divisions of the thirty2
degrees.The result of the arrangement is that the div-
ision of the sign is not the sane in the two sets,and
consequently when it is desired to know which tern ap-
plies, it is necessary to reckon it out. The series is
shown in the anneied tahle as reported to us -
Terms of male Terms of fema3e
signs from the 55875 signs from the
beginning a/o —7 5 7 beginning a/c
to the Hindus £ ^to th^ Hindus
455. Al-nuhbahr. The Hindus regard the ninth part
of a sign(nuEbahrJ -3°SO* - which they call nuvanshaka,
as very important, IThen a planet is in its
NINTHS OF own domicile and ninth,that ninth is called
THE SIUITS 'bargutam* or most important. The table
shows the ninths of all the signs;the lords
of the ninths are the lords of the signs concerned. The
first ninth of the tropical dgns,the fifth of the fixed
and1 the ninth of the bicorporal ones are called 'bargtl-
tam (vargottama),3 This is en entirely Hindu method on
which all are agreed. My friends have altered the order
trepi cpaprapiov _ ^cf.395 n.) In a^simllar list by Aba
Marshar occurs q rou *Aproaeorpouf 1. *Apcxaectjdrou)
There is no hint in Wel^Jnann,s article(Pauly,Real-
Eacyk^ of any astrological leanings on the part of the
real Erasistratus,who flourished in the century after
Ptolemy and Valens.
The terms of 'Astaratus* are distributed between
the seven planets (Kadkhal,f,193). The first term of
each sign is devoted to the planet whose damicile it is
(fig,447)and the following ones to tke other six in de-
scending order:e.g.
Aries. 6 44 53 2 6 = 30.
©and }) occur only once in the first term,the other
planets twice. There are slight mistakes in the terms
1of n
2 India II, 213, trifiâisaka.
AO thalathln AOl AB AEl thulthaln PL has slyak burj
with marginal correction siyak.
3
Inila 11 223: in I£S. bargualm.
♦ MV
LWUl jlu> —evl .^-i:'!
I
.ry
^r>f
1
X. 7'
X: \ II
— ^7
l^5Û-Jyj^ ~f^j j^j

. ^ ^ j! Ul
~'^ <^1)'-"y ^-r3
W s Jj"^\XA^X—aA^ i ^-f^1
lyX Ajo^J L*jL*^LjeLj1__J-J

455-466
of the lords of the ninths and have arranged them in
the order of the spheres,hut it is better that we ab-
stain from using it.
c*<i
1st Aries Capricorn Libra Cancer Tropical
Mars Saturn Venus Moon signs
g04o» Taurus Aquarius Scorpio Leo Fixed
Venus Saturn Mars Sun
10° Gemini Pisces SagttiHn Virgo Blcor-
Mercury Jupiter Jupiter Mercury poral
ISOao* Cancer Aries Caprloom Libra Tfopioal
Moon Mars Saturn Venus
o
5ttil6 40» Leo Taurus Aquarius Scorpio Fixed
Sun Venus Saturn Mars
20° Virgo Gemini Pisces Saglttar. Bicor-
Mercury Mercury Jupiter Jupiter poral
23o80' Libra Cancer Aries Capricorn Tropi cal
Venus Moon Mars Saturn
26o40, Scorpio Leo Taurus Aquarius Fixed
Mars Sun Venus Saturn
9th 30° S©gtt%an Virgo Gemini Pisces Bi cor-
Jupiter Mercury Mercury Jupiter poral
The 1st 5th and 9th of these columns form respectively
the fiery,earthy, airy and watery trlpîcities, 379.
456. Ma al-ithn*L &ahriy5t. A sign may also be di-
vided into twelfths [ ithna ♦'ashrlyat ^ 32tte) of 2o30,,each
of which has a lord,the first twelfth
TTTELETHS OF having as lord the lord of the whole
THE SIGHS sign, 440 the second, the lord of the
next sign in succession, and so on to
the end of the series. As multiplication is easier than
division,and it is difficult for any one to subtract by
2 1/2 degrees,people simplify the calculation by multi-
plying the number of degrees and minutes of the par-
ticular twelfth,the lord of which one wishes to know,
= —^
■"b" t 1%? ( ^
' St- <r.
■f ^ -fe
50? & a»M £=> y
J^ll :iqi^ >1) jlii W»i jjH ->- 3\

-'j lijt-jl-UI -5> s i_-.
e^XLJU' :> JMljSsa
J^V/"'11^ ^' c>> J>I^j^'

ÎU ^ -j'ijc jl ' -jl X
*?
r
J^Nlj Q} l->J,
&
f>ji ^1 £*
1
^11-^1-ilU ^ julisf Jqii'SiTÔ^ if
Jiui Ûju* »L. oiîi

456
liy twelve, and then Tor every 30 counting one sign in
the direction of succession from that In which the
twelfth Is; the last complete 300 indicates the sign
whose lord is the lord of the twelfth In question. The
lords of the various twelfths of the signs are shown in
the tahle.
This Is the division as to which the Greeks and
the Hindus are in agreement, but I have always been
surprised that my friends have not altered It according
to the succession of the signs or some other scheme.
For If you proceed according to such a method you do
not commit other absurdities to mention which this Is
not the place.
Lords of
the ld2tha Twelfths of the Signs
V « hi lit K, ass K
Mars 1st 12th 11th 10th g\h 8th 7th 6th 5 th 4th 3rd 2nd
Venus 2nd 1st 12th 11th 10th gth 8th 7 th 6 th 5th 4th 3rd
Ifeirwry 3rd 2nd let 12th nth 10 th gth eth 7th 6th 5th 4th
Moon 4th 3rd 2nd 1st 18 th 11th 10 th gth Bth 7 th 6th 5 th
Sun 5 th 4th 3rd 2nd lat 12 th nth 10 th gth 8th 7th 6th
Manury 6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st 12 th nth 10 th gth eth 7th
Terms 7th 6 th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd let 12th llth 10th gth 8th
Heirs 8th 7th 6 th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd lat 12 th nth 10th gth
Jupiter gth eth 7th 6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st 12th nth 10th
Saturn 10th gth 8th 7 th 6 th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st 12th llth
10th gth Bth 7th 6 th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st 12 th
A■P
HH
Jhpiter 12th 11th 10th 9th ath 7 th 6 th 5 th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st
m
**? Ji
-trjp
VtS-" 1 -L v.
L v^.
k 4- t -.v L
^
% i-
'k£r^ —* T" > o j -> C i— L —
r k -> j
e
^ ■ c 1. I— i — 1
j o j J Z i. i— T — .— ?r
V
9 J j C a. i- t — r
i —
J Z 2m -- —- 1 — r <> d
L
z. i I — 1 -* T- S> t
-»
i— I !> a j j
\o^ c i r
L~ L —• -r* r i 0 J j SL
L — ] —' r * 5 J C
U-^ 1^
; CX^,. — ! -> 7" 5 0 3 J
c J. L_
1 ^
J \ r- 3j » J c X a— L
1^ [
r 61 _> J1 jJ «ir#|
Ll ^d
457
457. Ma al-dara iat al-""'^hakkarah. wa'l-mu'annathali.
Many ccmtroveraies exist as to tne sex or tne various
degrees of tne signs, and these dlf-
WATiFl Alt) fer very much as to their basis.
7EUALE DEOHEES IVhatever decrees you elicit from a
method founded neither on proof nor
analogy nor on the order which the intelligence demands
remain obscure until we cease to follow a path which
leads nowhere. There la no sense In people who proceed
on such lines, but, neTertbeless, they accept Indica-
tions from the sez of the signs In the same way as from
the signs themselTes.
Those people, however, who use a method based on
order, whatever It may be, do not accept the indica-
tions from the sez of signs as a whole, but regard the
first degree of a male sign as male, the second as
female, the third as male and so on by odd and even,
and similarly the first degree of a female sign as fe-
male the second as male, etc. as in the case of the
male sign. Again there are others who proceed by
twelfths of a
Aries 7 *2 6 *7 8 sign 2^° in-
stead of by
Taurus 7 *8 15 degrees,just
as the whole
Gemini *6 11 •6 4 *3 sphere Is di-
vided into
Cancer 2 »s 3 •2 11 •4 3 twelve signs
regarding the
Leo 5 • 2 6 *10 7 first twelfth
of a male sign
Tlrgo *7 5 *8 10 as male,the
second as fe-
Libra 5 *5 11 *7 *2 iiale,and the
first of a fe-
Scorpio 6 *7 4 ■ 5 8 nale sign as
female and the
Sagittarius 2 *3 7 *12 6 second as male,
Capricorn 11 ■8 11
Aquarius 5 • 7 6 *7 5
Pisces 10 k2 3 *5 10
w t-
'Ju—'
' .'i'." .v.. -., '! /•;..... . <r\< 'V..
! i^riÛJU,^11 U/^ lii j ui.

s sP-'j ^j^liiJ^CS^
C J
> 3 L ^ Lj;e-4^
r
p^1
/*• > L T 6
- 13^1 NJ»_41A!.uvi
^_ —»1 b OJVJ
" f- 1 -
f i~ c t al
U^ J
• .
u—• j L e> » JU'
1
t 2 •% it
q
^l^jLeui—SLVIf
1
1 ; 'i— j T
• L C I P>» ^^J*f w»
-> J> -J jlJ?
& T L~ ^ p, »
" 4 -11>»
457-458
etc.» while some of our predeoessors considered the
first twelve and a half degrees of a male sign to be
male, and the second, female, the next tvro and a half,
male and the remaining two and a half, female; pro-
ceeding in the inverse manner with the female signs.
With regard to schemes not based on order, a table
like that which we append, must be consulted (in which
the female degrees are marked with an a).
458. Ma al-darajat a1-mud1yah wa*1-mugllmah. The
distinction drayn hfitwflfln luminous anfl flark- dfigrfifts is
like the last not founded on any system
BHIGHT AKD and consequently recourse must be had
DARK DEGREES to the subjoined table.
Astrologers,however,use It for making declslens as
to colours,good and evil,strength and weakness,joy and
sorrow,difficulty and ease. But no two books are to be
found which agree on this inatterfnor are they likely t^.
be found.
The table shows several degrees of light and dark-
ness , brilliant (b) naiyir, luminous (L) muÎ, dusky (d)
•
are empty or void (v) ktiall.
jtrlea d3 s5 46 b4 34 b5 si
Taurus d3 L7 dg b8 v5 b3 b2
Gemini b2 d3 b5 v2 b6 d7
Cancer d7 bS dg 14 s2 b8 s2
Leo b7 d3 s6 v5 b9
Virgo dS L4 vg b6 v4 b7 v2
Libra b5 d6 b8 d3 b? LB
Scorpio d3 15 v6 L6 s2 L5 d3
Sagittarius b9 d3 b7 s4 d7
Capri oomus d7 b3 a5 b4 d2 14 b5
Aquarius s4 bS dS bS Y3 15
Pisces d7 M v6 L3 dlO
270
y- —' Wl 1 jii 1 ij^fj --■ ^ Lt)J-1 i->j}u^3/£cj.'r\^l,
ja * * -•'*'• m f s* , ' * -"" ;
Ûîi' Jf Ik^L LI* /•jXi* ij- u
—1 Ju. jlL
fr' i--a*<Ji*£yil 2-;' L^J

■...*"« '.. v * !• . '
**? W J-J» y-j J^sJl *
.-• ^JtlgUkjVl^L_ll)\j35_J-V)
j ":.: £iy-Z If gTJff
I ^ f JH 3 11 g aÎ a JL1 JXT1
; —* ^ gj; J T & -' <JH j ^ -'^JJ
; -> jJH i J €/" ^ Aii —-■ eA ' ^>l°- TjjET
~—'aIL* iZ î< ^ — * <*ij| * (/• tJ J)
TL. e?' a__4Li J >J e/* JL.V1
*iL -i ^ ,J>.» > ^ •> ^L3 ■jl /'ji1
j' „ r^~"' 'J ^ ^ ^ "ej* •i_A»l J
^';5Uil
i A
L—-^- ' ' ^" —JJ"^1 ^j^61
^^ ?
^*
j; i -> ^1 ^ ^^ ^
o e^'l •* ^ —•*£» -> AiLr ?" j «v» ^LT
!_ I ^> *»» ^ jL I L+ * s3\ * <&. ? yiT
'l [ ^ '*&m
459
459. MS al-dara-1at al-zSldah f 1 al-sa'adeii wa m5
al-Sbgr. THere are also degrees which increase and
diminish fortune. The former
DEGREES IlfCREASlMG OR are those In which if the lord
DIMINISHING FOHTUNE of the period whether sun or
moon, or the degreel of the
ascendant or the part of fortune la situated, the good
luck and power of each Is doubled. The latter are like
pits, abar, In which the planets are enfeebled In their
action, being neither able to effect good if lucky nor
evil if unlucky - the tendency is therefore towards
peace. Both are îowu in the following table.
jjegrees increasing fortune In the upper row, (pits
abar, A ohahha F) in the lower.
Aries || 19 th
II 6th 11th 17th 23rd 29th
Taurus H 8th
5 th 13th 18th 24 th P5th 26 th
Gemini 11th 1
| 2nd" 13th 17th 26th 30 th
Cancer || Ist 2nd 3rd 14th 15th
II 12th 17th 23rd 2«th 30th
Leo || 5 th 7 th* 17th
II 6 th 13 th 15 th 22nd 23rd 2eth
Ylrgo || (2nd 12th 20th)
U 8th ISth 16 th 2l3t 25th
LIbra H 2nd* 5 th 12 th*
| 1st 7th 20th 30th
aoorpio nisth 20th
9th 10 th 17 th 22nd 23rd 27th
Sagittarius 13th 20th 23rd
II 7th 12th 15 th 24 th 27 th 30th
capncornus istn 13th* i7tn» 20th
II 2nd 7th 17th 22nd 24 th 28th
Aquarius n 7tn 16th 17th 20th
1 1st 12th 14th* 23rd 29 th
Flsces 112th 20th
|| 2nd* 9 th 24th 27th 2eth
The ■ Indicates mistakes In US; brackets omission.
^ lord of the ascendant .

271
^^^^1jÎb-^^C-J»âlK%li_JLa^,_i L*J J*
CLau^l
,»
p ^VLjlNb ^1^5
jtv/
|— ^■ CJjui\1
j" L j jty , Ji-i
£=? A£z* J^=» t c
A
j-
J ->* .i- J. JLV( UA'
Jj r j. elauST
IJ ^LVt JM
_y »
r >■ ^- j i^1
■'tMJii
ÎW >^» L&. C jly(
£• - -^r-
i^£=> A «L»J11
J .£> J 1 jlyi
tii-H
*=* . JLVI
£==> 'yi^
J J6> -» !^)
oâr
>£=» A S jTy)
> _>
i-£» 1
^=» O-*-^ .• '
r >= pfe. , J* iyi m
-^-
460
460. MS al-maradl al-dallah ralj al-afat fi al-
r
''aln. Thnra htb nnrtain a-l tnati nn g mh i c.h nvn aniil -fn
be Injurious to tne eyes. Tbese
PLACES INJURIOUS have nothing to do with the signs,
TO THE EYES although some people say that there
Is a hint of this action In Libra
and Soorplus, but they are places which contain certain
nebulous stars, or certain animal figures from other
constellations which are able, to cause this Injury. The
really nebulous stars are four In number, one In the
left hand of Perseus, and this one does not count be-
cause Its latitude Is high, and It Is far from the
course of the planets; a second, behind the aselll on
the surface of Cancer, this has to be reckoned with;
a third Is behind the 19th mansion of the moon,which Is
described In books dealing with the heliacal rising of
the stars (Kutub al-anwa*" 166) as the venom (humah) of
the Scorpion, and this Is of the number, a fourth,as Is
the tlpl of the arrow of Sagittarius; again small stars
In a group have a cloudy effect such as Haqrehth6 5th
mansion of the moon which Is composed of three stars
In the head of Orion. Ptoletay regarded them as cloudy,
but they need not be Included on account of their high
latitude. The Pleiades also resemble Haq'ah and belong
to this series since their latitude Is low, the moon
passes by them and the sun also comes near them. How
those two luminaries represent the two eyes and their
action vision.
The dangerous places In the animal signs are those
like the sting of Soorplus,nlshtar P, the (point of the
P) arrow,nushaba of Sagittarius, and the shaukah sharp
tall of Capricorn, because Its hinder end Is fish-like.
The hinder end of Leo Is also Included, as Is the star
between the eyes of Soorplus and the water below Aquari-
us masabb al-ma'. He know of no nebulous star towards
the hinder end of Leo except the tuft between his tall
and t.ha Grpnt. Bear known as daflreh, Which Is composed
of small stars non-luminous,'looking like a cloud
shaped like an Ivy-leaf, the 'hulbah* of the Arabs, or
1 Several MSS have rBln for sinn.

272
<
■îi'jjAjjyUi' •^/***~> i *—- /«—i'
u-jls^^* ^1> Llyi-^JLJ-; *>*', i'. 3 j a43 V^ycÛ^wj^^J
v > '!•»* il-Wj tsL—J-

U; • ' ' * * - »^ V
Lv»^>'1I S~>J
LA> uL) 1 ^Jc-'J^
tpS^^pû*
r-Ljka)
W i
-X—u i> li5—^»Ow-'/*_J^j^>^l«^J_^f
^ l % . v
"Ts^ljjJ J-î—J^^v-JÛ^^cjjUÔjt'îj
jcs,'^j^..]ljp-i^ •''-> U1
. . ,< ' ' v
460
tuft of the lion?s tail. Its northern latitude is
twice as great as the south latitude of Haq'ah, and
therefore we think that it cannot be reckoned in this
series» besides the dangerous weapons of the lion are
his teeth and claws, not his tail. The stars between
the eyes of Soorpius extend from the diadem to the heart,
and are scattered luminous stars. The water under Aqu-
arius is composed of four small stars near each other
situated below the point where the beginning of the
flow of water is pictured. Some people call this place
the um of Aquarius, but there are no stars there, and
so an urn is assumed in the hand of the man from which
the water flows, just as a sword is assumed in the
right hand of Perseus.
Our foregoers settled the position of these stars
in their time, since which 600 years have elapsed; we
however show them in their present position (1340 of the
era of Alexander) but it must be remembered that their
position increases by a degree every 66 years,! i.e.
approximately a minute a year.
This is the table, and God is all-knowing.
T About 72 - The addition of i2o30k to the aiove figure

gives approximately the present longitude of these
stars .
873
1-jt-V^V^->t^=4/jî|^''1 J j'VJ
^ V ^ ^
Jt-Ulj • b^-J—Vl^j) 1c >-0jj«i\_]j">
9I ^ ~ ** '
i# ^ ✓
^lilj v-£3_^=» ^ tr^- ey^J—.bjWi
J^J j jî=:i-''^jj*J-,V^ lfl*j —^.jUiL." jiiJ jjA-^ \>—

<•"' • . ' ' '
0°-^ ^ -
460
Stars from oertain signs which harm the eyes
[Tame of Beginning with and ending with
Stars 31 gis D agrees ixnuxes aighe egress mnute
Pleiades Taurus 15° 55T Taurus 170 20*
Praesepe Cancer 34° - Cancer 24° -
Denebola Virgo 50 - Virgo 7° -
Bet ween the Scorpius 15° - Scorpius 19° -
eye s of
Scorpius
oQ
Sting of, Sagittal^ 40" | Sagitfcar- 11° 10*
H
Ssorplua ius | ius
Venom of Sagittar- 14° 52* 3aglt*a> 14° 54*
Scorpius ius ius
rip of Saglttaiv 18° 10* Sagitter- 18° 20'
arrow ius ius
Tail of 2
Oapnoon) Aquarius 10° - Aquarius 12° -
ffater of Places 3° - Pisces 4°
We now proceed to consider the conditions in the

signs from their relation to the horizon, which we have
already referred to as the houses' and their adjustment
341, and we adopt the same order as that use4 in dis-
cussing the indications of the signs and the planets, to
facilitate the recognition and comprehension of the
data ascertained.
Inshallah ta'ala
MS. has here munlr al-fakkah (Alphecca.Corona horeal-

is),
8 present longitude lloiO* Scorpius.
One would assume Shaukah to be a spike of Capricorn,
and not the tail, but the longitude corresponds to Deneb
i^' !
UiM i
\^> <?]
*—* — a<
-j-tvM o JiuiTj I'^^j
î
[1 ^ '<y r3^
: t J
| AIja J3i JuM^j
"
■V 'h A |] J-^V
..
\. . •M"i ]
<-
\
; O Jb ^>iV o 1 rT^'-^j
K t fc^n i_ 1 t "3uSi
f" — jij' îi
t
C i '-^ "aT
l-^ 1^1^ 1 1
^ ji JjW VU^£~<i/
ÛwkiUjj]
401
461. Dfllglgt allatl takhusgu 11'l-mawglId.
SPECIAL INDICATIONS OF THE HOUSES PECULIAR TO NATIVITIES
I Soul,life,length of life,education,native land,
II Suckling,nutriment,disaster to eyes If over-
taken by Ill-luck,livelihood,bousebold requisites,
assistants profession of children.
Ill Brothers,sisters,relations,relations In-law,
jewels,friends,migration,short journeys.
Intelllgence,knowledge,ezpertnees In religious law.
IT Parents,grandparents,descendants,real estate,
fields,houses,water-supply,knowledge of
genealogy,what succeeds death and what happens to
the dead.
T Children,friends,clothes,pleasure,joy,little
acquisition of property,accumulated wealth of
father,what was said of him at his burial-
service ,
VI Sickness,defects of body.overwork,If unfortun-
ate accident to legs,loss of property,disease of
Internal organs,slaves,maids,cattle.
VII Women,concubines,giving In marriage,msrrlage-
feasts,contentions,partnership,losses,lawsuits.
VIII Death and Its eauses.murder,poisoning,evil
effects of drugs on body,inheritance,wife's
property,expenditure,poverty,eitreme ladIgence,
feigning death.
IX Travel,religion,piety,fata,seriousness,
attainment of knowledge from the stars and
divination,philosophy,surveying,sharp discern-
ment , trustworthiness, interpretation of visions
and dreams.
X Rule of Sultan,government with council of
nobles,absolute authority,success In business,
commerce,professions,well-behaved children,
liberality,
XI Happiness,friends,enemies,concern for
next world,prayer and praise,friendship of
women,love,dress,perfume,ornaments, e ommerce,
longevity.
XII Eneml es, ml ser y, ami e t les, pr 1 son, debt, f 1 ne s,
ba11,fear,adversity,disease,prenatal fancies
of mother,cattle,harbours,slaves,servants,
armies,exile,tumults.
-.^x
S/:
^ •.-r' j^VJJe>S/T| : T.r
"A
1
. ^ [! Vîi
rsymsônwiii
, lt ly LiiVo^J^jf Lo 5 jis j "*
f-TT^
.j. ^ r>
HOBdmBBZaSl!
462
45S. Dolalathsi allatl yataâdl 11a'l-maa111.
INDICATIONS RELATING TO HORARY QUESTIONS
I Asking horary questions.important public
matters,nobility.advanownent in rank,witchcraft
and spells.
II Examining the querent,lending and borrowing,
counting frienda,arrival of stranger,enemies or
friends,mandate of amir,winds when they blow,
III Secrets and news and commentaries,well-born
ladles,journeys by water.
IV Old and hidden, things, treasures, thieves r
hiding-places,schools,fortresses,fetters ^dis-
missal from office] ,opening abscesses,lancing^-
and cautery,stepfather,prison.
V Messengers,right guidance,bribery,rectitude,
distant places,poor harvests,securing the wealth
of the ancients,feasts,food and drink.
VI Lost and escaped,some lost trifle which does
not turn up,affairs of women and eunuchs, ausplcicr,
hatred,calumny,violence,dissipation,deceit,
terrors.prison,enemy,poverty,moving from place to
place.
VII The absent,thief.places where travellers
assemble,treasure,death of contemporaries,foreign
travel,sudden murder [for a trifle].denial,
obstinacy,claiming a right.cheapness and dearnesa.
VIII Buried and hidden treasure,things ruined or
lost or old,middens and rubbish-heaps.sickness of
friends,lawsuits without a oasejfolly,contention,
pride,dullness of the market,leisure.
II Eailure,abandoned business,books,information,
ambassadors,miracles, roads, brothers-in-law.
X Kings,no tables,judges,the celebrated in all
olas8ee,amlr and his conduct in office,things
newly legitimized.wlne,etep-mother.
XI The treasury of the Sultan,Its officials,
trouble In the office,foreigner's child,
servants child, {read 'abd) things which are
sound, beautiful, advantageous,the beginnings of
affairs,friendship of the groat.brlbery.food.
XZI Fugitives,writers,those who neglect devotion,
a precious gem .prisoners, the matter which pre-
ceded the question, uroperty of oppressors.thieves,
lost property,acorn,envy and fraud.
JUi1!» liail ^_) «11 jUTpîl
VjÔl&UjetUlj^jl v^'
py«'ae^1,m^g^S5Eaga'fiji
d 'M£H*t->Wj Kuij) J
■^-, -— ■.£L LU _«- -^.-^.I ■ * ■ - It I
i
. 1->f "Jr ~v;"■^■'•-«i^--?^;u^'^^
a^Sfis&uKMiQâraPi^jiPiss^sssuii
XH Al-buyut. TH3 HOUSES
M H -bM H __d I
5p R| tnap cs(-pM rr2jn=r
=rn eld
?rlm«
3f life
1 c*d p 1 J odIhi 46S
^H t-91 It
K ojn ' J&XIQflS1 Sn^r''
ll "l
s p-idP U U'ti
ID O Uis aj"
•hp PJ
■^|c+ adB 464, Madhaiilb al-hlnd fi al-buyut.
o P*o cCt 3E £Bc*d fblrf is
al t»tTNIDU5 OF THE HINDUS AS TO THE HOUSES
1 3a> a> ■fi! » \9HBM !
Q) ^ r
U ca 465. Dal&lRthS^Âla^&l-aâ^
£»
a S ill 1 i naii
<4 r<9 <Ba t-
a
i i i i
466. l^dhahlb al-hlnd fi'l-ardS.
i
ID u & OPINION bV fflH HIMCUS A§ TO THE OHGAHS
| i 91
rv 0| Ol >t> a ■r tM 7
•o . irnvtta auwv(Lfta. RAJfX OF IHPUR POWERS
■ oTi «i
do sM 466. AlwSnhl.
id 1 p a THEIR COLOURS
11 ct-a M
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
o Of +o 1ft
469. Paiir al-kawaAlb Tlha. JOYS OF EE PULSETS IB THiir
O ■oe o V o> -r 47Q. zunor qawi ai-xawaxib nna.
1IV1M0E AS TO PUTOR OP PLANETS TW TTTEV
- - OA < r"- - to - • «v 47X. WalHyatna bl tariq. al-hlnd.
TMJJIIH lUHDS ACCUl^ll'ld 'i'U THE HIHDUS
CPS a
ei»o aB & s i MQa Bh M3 i 4 78. Al-dhakar^wa | l--untha.
»H HaP a §1-o a <» «H a P»P a
ffl a a
m
y>
a
a m
B
E
&j£
B
473
473. Aiiwal ukhar muta''alllqah rala' -1-buyut.
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE HOUSES IN GROUPS OF THREE & SIX
I II III IV V 71 VII TTIII IX X XI XII
Body Body & Soul: Body with- Neither body Soul
and some say body out Soul: nor Soul: wlthout
Soul without soul some say because it body:
because it is body with contains the on ac-
at a dark Soul, be- houses of count
place until cause itis death and of
it emerges situated travel rapid
into light between ascen-
light and sion
darkness
Right left right left right
sr left
jo lour red black kt eon white
Fast moderate slow moderate slow
x alow
good deficient good deficient
or bed
luok
Direc- H" W S E
tion
Sez female male female male
Temp- cold and cold and hot and hot and
srsnctxt dry wet wet dry
Hindu from Ill-I from IX-IV from X-m
ideas Ascending bow Descending bow falling , Ascending
as to rising, unfortunati . bow
halves fortunate. rising,
dlYldad fortunate
by line
MC to
IMC
Halves nawa > ship ohatra > parasol
livided underground above ground
by line night of planet day of planet
from allied to rightness allied to leftness
Hor to and shortness. and length .
00.
1
India II 221.
EJA
ifti
^1 >! i* 4
I , ! I : -V
474-475
474. Kalf hal al-balt Idha isbtaralca flhi bur Jan.
When a house is formed of two signs, if these are about
equally represented, the lords of
WHEN H0U3S FORMED the signs are also the lords of
OF TWO SIGNS the house, if both are In aspect;
If only one is in aspect it beoooes
the more important, while if both are inconjunct, that
is superior which has the greater number of dignities.
The victory must always be given to that one which has
the highest number of degrees in the house.
o
475. Mfl sahm al-sa^gdah. The Part of Fortune
is a point of the zodiac, the distance of which from
the degree of the ascendant in the
PART OF FORTUNE direction of the succession of signs
is equal to the distance of the moon
from the sun in the opposite direction.^ The method of
determining this is to find the place of the sun (Place
1), then that of the moon (Place 2); the ascendant is
Place 5, Then subtract Place 1 from Place 2 beginning
with the signs. If in Place 1 this is a higher number
add 12 signs to Place 2 and subtract. Next turn to the
degrees and subtract as before, if Impossible, deduct
one sign from Place 2 and add 30° and then subtract,
7^hen finished with the degrees, proceed with the
minutes the result is the distance of the moon from the
sun. Then add Place 3 by signs,degrees and minutes,
and look at the result; if the minutes are more than 59
carry a degree to the degrees,if they are more than 29
1 According to modern astrologists to that sign which

contains the cusp of the house.
2 Cf. Bouch^-Leclercq p. 299 seq.
2 Or the distance of the sun from the ascendant is
equal to the distance of the moon from the part of
fortune in the same direction. Pig. 341.
i ^ ^ * at
y«<WUViilx-''J^jLjJlisLXi
■ yf \ I L-l^ ^ —il* i-y ^V^-'
J ji1 iM I ^r'-^ V^^^'f>^='1
'" ' • 41
■' ^ . ;• * "
I> e>=-\j j-r^ '-'^•tir*
i— u' j-*' -•^J j^^«j^^l>^-fiÛ»
(sill^-jlfîjjii I ^ lJui^^l^^ljj|y^ iijl 3

475
carry ona to the aigns, and If the algno are more than 11,deduct 18,the result
is the Part of Fortune,
*70 27C>
ioo 30O 240
35o 330
2/0 lio
340 36o
Asc. Asc.
0 / )5o >bO
6o ixo
I xo
Ftg.
The Part of Fortune^(diurnal) fig« 1 is the diatanoe ofOfromJ according to
the auooesalon of the signs measured from the ascendant In the same dlreotlon,
(nocturnal) fig, 2 is the dletanoe of 3> from© eooordlng to succession and
maaerured from the ascendant In the same direction. The Part of Daemon Q
(diurnal) fig. 2 is the distance ofO from I) according to suocessiou and
measured from the ascendant In the opposite direction; (nocturnal) fig. 1 la
the distance of from© aooordlng to aucoeaalon, and measured from the
ascendant In the opposite direction. The two Inner lines refer to the Part of
Fortune; the two outer to the Part of Daemon - modified from BL. fig. 35.
260
dU^'^VjVwJU! ^ k)
^jju, Allii^l'j^,
'•• ' .' . V s

^Jlc-11 £1AJZ^*» I j J (ji ljL>Ua U^Lrt LÔ'jIjlfcj _
•£■-»<>
4»^.'L^4 T»^9 \(* 11 ^ l! ^ % V
' ^j ' i! 'rl
/
^ !• / V
^ ->J ? io.' j L )oJj
'i^J V0J^V3îL-i.^vJ^)U—^Wj^t
^ ^*^4 1>j * o-l J i

. V _ / *» : V '. I -^ . ' ''J' V
Wci^jWii
475
Take the folloiriog as an eaample. The ascendant Is
8 20' of Tlrgo, the sun is in ^7044, of Cancer, and the
moon In IS^S' of Taurua. These are placed in three
rows as 8hove described.
Sun Boon Ascendant'^
Place 1 Plaoe 2 Place 3
Signs OS 01 05
Degrees 27 15 08
Minutes 44 25 SO
The number of the signs of the sun being higher than
that of the moon, 12 must be added, making 13, from
which the 5 of the sun must be deducted, leaving 10.
The degrees of the sun are also hl£$ier than those of
the moon, therefore 1 must he deducted from the signs,
leaving 9, and 30 added to the degrees, making 45, from
which 27 falls to be aubtraoted, leaving 18, Similarly
with the minutes 1 degree must be earxled to them,
leaving 17 and 60 added making 85 from which 44 sub-
tracted leaves 41. The result of the aubtractlon of the
sun's plaoe from the moon's Is therefore 9s 17° 41', to
which the plaoe of the aeoendant being added glvea
14a 25° 61'. Prcin the laot figure 60 must be deducted
and carried as 1 degree to the degrees, and from the
first 12 must he deducted leaving 2, so that the result,
the Path of Portune, is 2a 260 01', viz. 26° 01' of
Qsmlnl.
This is the method of calculation adopted by
Ptolemy for the part of fortune which he never altered,
but others proceed in this way for diurnal nativities
while for nootumal ones they put the moona In the
first plaoe, the sun in the seoond, and the asoendant
in the third, whence necessarily many disputes.
1 Or la ISO 25'
Aso. 5s 8° 20'
6s 230 45'
3s 27° 44'
Sa ae" 1'
2 In which uaaa the $ would he in 20 39' at the
same diatanoe from the asoendant in the dlreotion of
suooeaalon - and in Fig. 341 in f 13° 50*.
281
•jr.
1 ^J6I i—Di
0
S _
8
/1j 1 il
4 ^ I
1 ^ I
^jLsj^JifcUlj(»j^.4_jJl^.Sj>ll CJ^LaL^- .V
r^
oUUUr JJ^ÛIL
■^ ' "
Yvl^** ^ *
476
476. Fa hal ghavr aatm al-aa'-5dah Sv-v.<i-
Ptalemy recognized only one Part or Fortune, butothers
have Introduced an eioaaslve numher
OTHER LOTS THAN of methods of casting lota at
PAST OP PORTUMZ nativities. We reproduce in tables
those which AbQ Ma^shar has
mentioned.1
In each case there are three things to be attended
to, place 1/ the beglnillng, 'mubdrf', Place 2/ the end,
•muntahd', and Place 3/ the oaatlng-off point, 'malqrf',
which are treated as in the preceding paragraph, the
position In a figure of the heavens of the fortune or
lot In question being thereby determined. These three
points are called respectively, •manquj' 'manquj mlnhu'
and 'muzad •'alalhl'. Sometimes the same arrangement is
used for both diurnal and nocturnal nativities, but
frequently points 1 and 2 are Interchanged for nocturnal
ones.
It is Impossible to enumerate the lots which have
been Invented for the solution of horary questions,
and for answering enquiries as to prosperous outcome
or auspicious time for action; they increase in number
every day, but the following 97 different lots, 7 of
which belong to the planets, SO to the houses and 10
to neither are those most oomraonly in use.
1
Madkhal Kablr - ff. 293-300 are occupied with a
detailed description of the various lots and f, 331
seq. with the summery used by Al-BIrQnl.
2 The amount subtracted, that from which it is
subtracted, the amount added.
j
^li^» IJ--
"» J
Jc-j 1>
l»Li —tj^
" u> f
^v,ib ^
^ -îi JL^-J
1-1 rllUlOU
« >
475
Kamea of the Fortunes Distance be- Cast Diurnal
tween Place from or Noc-
1 & Place 2 Haoe 3 turnal
Fortunes of tl e 3ev« n Plai e tsl
part of Fortune or ^
Lunar horoscope G 5 Asc ai-
dant change
part of Daemon2 w q- J ©
and religion n
Of friendship and Q
love
Of despair & penury
& fraud Q
Of captivity, pris- ©
ons and escape >1
therefrom
Of victory, triumph
and aid P 2f.
Of valour & bravery (t © n
Fortunes of tl e Twe] ve Hoi ises
First House - Three For tui es
Of Life V Tl n
Pillar of horoscope
Nativities,Perman- e o
ence Constancy
10. Heasonlne & eloquence $ $
Second House - Three Fortui es
11. Property Lord Cusp
of II of n rr
12. Debt
13. Treasure trove \ n same
Third House - Three Fortutf es
14. Brothers rt -
\
1 These are the seven Universal xXt!poi
1. Tuxn 2. aaiisDv
3. *Kp<n4 4, 'AvaiYHn
5. NEtiEhl? 5. N1 Kt]
V. ToXiia
of Trlsmegistoa. B.L. p. 307.
2 The lot of the sun, which Is the lot of the unseen
and religion [sahm al-ghalb wa'l-dln) nX^poi; Aafpovoi;.
B.L. p. 295.
Al-BIrhnl said that an illiterate soothsayer's
accurate prophecy was due to the colnolienoe of his P.
with his Asc. OhahSr MaqSla p. 67. T. also p. 63.
283
,
M J.J ^5^
-Jk J^1' J
1 ^ ai^f l_>
J^'
J4f
jjiyi -Jk oU-i* e^îLU^V>- r
J^-
oU^J* J> j UaJjlLUAj^J'^r >
-Jk a
M ol*-41
fjJjyi _Jk JJIU xL—a!' J
oUJ* ' J_J4flyJ^Jêl^^tr _J
f
-Jk
-
Ariia^y)
Jjik
j^-
^lfe.\i iili ejliuA'
^1 JM <
^3^- J5 —o
"jjyi " .Jlf JUU _JU' L
jJlW' J** —A^V* —-
ÎW* _>Jk eA ' ^jIUa
4
Xlll^V-
^v-UUil&l
t^JU- -k.
476
15. Number of brothers As cen-
\ dant same
16. Death of brothers 10°
fc slaters 0 or m change
fourth House - Ilgl t Fortuj es

17. Parents GHU K n
18. Death of Parents \ V II »»
19. Grandparents H '* ♦»
SO. Anoestora & K s n
relations
£1. Heal estate a/o « V n
Hermes /■ V
£2. Heal estate a/o if
some Feralsns **
23. Agriculture,
tillage 9 same
24. Issue of affairs \ Lord
of d " ••
-
fifth House - Fire Fortune: I
£5. Children U?) ii change
26. Tine and no. $ ■ if same
of sexes
27. Condition of ti
males "
28. Condition of $ n it
females
29. As to whether Lord
ezpsoted > of
birth male house «
or female of j change
884
jlkfc S^/ljtJtj^-J Xf.
^1
'^l
\ y ->•
„
& -<e. y ty ^ t
>'
C%| / 1^ y ^1
s<ji
*/li Â&UÛWl
• |
/ H
k y ^îu4j
>c]jyb<(oS!L(AV<f-1
l'^
IW N y
s
[ ^-Lls^W-'
K^\y kj-. JWL*- dLi=»
y
k^ jS=
K
1^ [y j
w
| ^L'VUîjU^
F" 11^ IIH •7
1^
w Jatf*
r'
1 1 JÛ3^Cji
1 1
476
Sixth House Four Fortune >
30. Disease, defects,
time of onset 51 t
of them a/o Ascen-
Hermes dant change
31. Disease a/o to
some of the £ $
ancients n same
32. CaptlTlty Lord Lord of
of house
time of Lord
of time
of AO1
Lord
w of TI »» same
33. 3 lares ? 5 «
Seronth House - Slzte an Fortu Lea
34. Marriage of men \ o
(Hermes) ¥ n n
35. Marriage a/o O ? •* n
mraiisi
36. Trickery and
deception of " -
men and women n
37. Intercourse » " w
36. Marriage of
women (Hermes) ?
39. Marriage of 1 $ »»
women (Talens) "
40. Misoonduot by n
women
41. Trickery 4. deceit
of men by - "
women »»
42. Intercourse /> " n
43. Dnchastlty of " ft
women n
44. Chastity of v ? n n
women
45. Marriage of men 4 Cusp
? VII
women (Hermes) w
46. Time of marriage G 5 «
(Hermes)
47 Fraudulent marriage h. ? tt ft
4 faollitattnK It
1 OOdXtK. Tettius Talens.
1
> y A
j UmS'^^pJAW* Y
y %I N tj,» ~1 !
1^1
1^1 X1 *—j*** l
i
H Ji
y Sv
k
(%
^x;- !
J
y n?>
v^..
r^, I ÛLii^^>
m 'y k
'O
1 L
KM y\ yL
NO^;-
r^l 't>v i ^y~\"\sxy^ -<♦
ks 1 v> y
i.
>
|_ ^ ■i-T
"^V/
L. r*
V< •
is ]_ ' fr^j^~yf
46. Sons-in-law \ p Ascen-
dant change
49, lawsuits 6
Eighth Hous s - five Fortur: 33

50. Death > Cusp Degree same
VIII of >t
51. The Anairetai Lord
(al-quttal) of
Ascen- D Ascen-
dant dant change
5a. Tear to he feared Lord of
at birth for House
death, famine In nhich n
d or ^ same
52. Place of murder , S Degree
and siclcness of ^ change
54. Danger and H Ascen-
Violence X dant n
Ninth House - Seve: Fortur 38

55. Journeys Lord Cusp n
II II same
56. By water tL 15° 03 *♦ change
57. Timidity and 5 bX
hiding ** tt
56. Deep reflection h 5 n n
59. Understanding and Q if n
wisdom K
60. Traditions, know-
ledge of 0 ♦t n
affairs
61. Knowledge whether
true or false ? if same
Tenth House - Twel-\ e Fortxi hes

68. Noble births Prom \ ord of
time o his
degref of
eaalte tlon change
65. Kings and Sultans £ D n w
64. Adml nl s tra tor e, t
vazirs, etc. n
886
• '> jLpi'Jy^- Tl
rtx J
X- i-
1^
-X -J>l^ o
*s
X I
c%j ^ i xi y ii o^w&w i s
i
i !1 1
Ix. ^1! A
ct, îx^l Xi! .uij^Wi j
[^vv i X-| 7>yt' ^/i -—/jiiû-n y
<%/\ j*\ ^
V \N
l ^*-
t -r If
i(^^l , _/U'jUJ3;vlioD))(^v-l^-r
1 Vs^jl j i Jii>l|»l^j,A/U-'jvl L-
i j]
R% ^
x I ylkLiU^JJ^y.
^jCv-
•i fX'-i v 1 5'li ^ !-u
! (%' ^ 1 XiZL
476
65. Sultans victory 0 >L Aacen-
conquest dant change
66. Of those who ®
rise In \
station n ♦t
67. Celebrated persons o
of rank same
66. Armies and o \ ♦♦
police change
69. Sultan. Those
concerned In \ i rt
natlvltlea same
70. Merchants and H
their work $ 9 change
71. Buying and « 0 It it
selling
72. Operations and
orders In o
medical ¥
treatment It n
73. Mothers 5 tt n
?
Eleventh Houi e - El iven For :unes

74. Glory Q Ascen-
dant change
75. Friendship and " If 11 tt
enmity
76. Known by men and
revered, O
constant In n It
affairs n tt
77. Success "
76. Borldllness $ tt n
79. Hope tt tt
80. Frlende T« tt same
81. ■Violence «. « «
82. Abundance In S Q
house « tt
Tv T
y v<
ÔN
Im- "'"'^jf^/Pj^- I â<

a
y *^4 >' fte5irUi^Jîtrtf.{](_^0>
^4- 11^
y 4>; >' ^ÎJfllltslijlljU'jflr-JJ rl^-,
y^l^yv- l"
c% Jdjkf'
k^labÛ
0
(^
î^Ln^ ^1
1^ O^K
Ji^'^r-^^^'r ^1
k% ^ '^yi >1
O^.
& f 1
y r ^ |
v_»^
ey ^4 ItAW -!
c% J^- ^C O J'IA-.V^ iîi
V^. vJjit l_2-^ll
k' jy <4
-«
476
85. Liberty of person O Ascen-
dant ohange
84. Praise & accept- V
ation ?
Twelftb House - Thre4 Fortu

85. Enmity a/o to
some of the V £
Ancients
86. Enmity a/o Lord Cusp
Hermes JIX Xtl
87. Bah luck «
Altogether 7 For tun s belong to tne Plan sts and
80 to the Houses.
Ten Fortunes not r Jlated o Plan bts or jouses
88. HallaJ Degree T> Ascen-
d oi £ dant same
89. Debilitated ©
bodies change
90. Horsemanship, \
bravery
91. Boldness, violence, Lord
and murder Aso,
92. Trickery end ft
deoelt y
93. Necessity and $
wish
S; 'x
ll
fit Jbl
■£/ H As 1
y <<v
i^j k?- J>1
Jf; 1
—si.Lfei^L^vU'
JZ^Tf
! Tj
a / a: /v
o —"
■^t ■>i u
ÎWI î! i «
r y ,1 [ -5
47 6-477
94. Requirements and
necessities Cusp Ascen-
a/c Egyptians 0 III dant sane
95. Realization of
needs and ffi H
desires 9 H »»
96. Retribution £ G> n change
97. Rectltude n tl
s
477. ?nhal mukhtalif ''amal hadhlhl al-slham to

hal yatafaqa lihntp mlHUB. There are people wLO adopt
methods differing from the a hove imdei
DirFKRSNCBS aume ulruumatauuea; e.g. with regard to
IN FHA0TI0E the lot of parents when Saturn Is under
the rays of the sun, they take from
Jupiter to the sun hy night or vloe versa hy day, and
cast from the aseendant. Again In the oase of the lot
for grandparents, If the sun Is In Leo, they take from
the beginning of Leo to Saturn by day, and by night
In the opposite dlreotlon. And If It Is In the domicile
of Saturn then from the Sun to Saturn by day, and vice
versa by night, In both oases oast from the asosndant
even If Saturn la under the rays or otherwise
afflicted.1 Should two lots indicate the same point.
It Is regarded as very fortunate. In some of these
1 Cf. BL. 305 n. 3.

289
.. . T
y y -»i
r 1 •J v^l^ C|
v
y •>
•' ^
V in
| »• y* ^
^ Wi—ij^!/,^'-» 0-^=' ^Lî U) >

477-479
cases the instructions for day and night are the saine,
in others different as may he seen from the table, in
the former event there is no advantage to be derived
from a separate calculation.
478. Fahal ghayr hadhihl min slhgni. This matter of
casting lots is a very long one, so that one might
think there is no end to it. For instance
OTHER LOTS there are those which are cast at the
turn of the year (the entry of the sun
into Aries) on worldly matters and affairs of empire,
and those which are cast at conjunctions and oppositions
of the moon to elicit prognostics as to weather, as to
success of ventures, and other horary questions.
append in tables the opinions of others on these
matters which we have derived from hooks on the subject.
479, Fahadhihi siham tastaramal fl tahSwtl sinl

al-r51ani wa^-qirSnSt.
LOTS WHICH ARK CAST AT ANNIVERSARIES OF THE
WORLD-YEAR, 249, AND AT CONJUNCTIONS
1. The sultan's MC 0 UC annlv. V same
lot
2. By another Beg.
way Asa. Degree
ConJ. oonj. Asoend w
S. Victory1
A gbalbah © Lord of
P flrtlzl VII ft tt
(Degree
of Des-
f cendant)
4. Battle > Degree
Lot of
Victory
5, Second way a/c '/
to '■BoarLh. Asoend
6, Third Wi.y al- If
furkhanj k n
7. Truce between > 8X
armies n
1
In tE. Falh cultivation.
29o
9o
' k.Vj lyll>l JJiJUliil lj l^-M I tU^_I> LU.j1^,
tj iW- 2-7 —^ L^WjAy
jL^ji
IJN1 _uilj J
IV '%
(% J^- v\
^J —
pw r
Wtj 't>v
t^ 0^/41/^4^^ A
c
a y IJLA-jhj
3> * , J
^s
47*
8. Conquest t Ascend sane
Triumph change
10, Of 1st -Lscen.
conjunction year Desree
conj. conj.
11, Of 2nd Ascen. Degree
conjunction conj. conj.
The following lots are assooiatei. with the years,

the four quarters,
of the moon.
1. 3arth \ Ascend same
2. Water y $ M
3. Air and H Lord
wind ¥ of his
domi-
cile
4. Tire o 5
5. Clouds $ \ tt change
e. Ha ins 5 $
•). Cold ? H Ascend
6. Floods 0 K y at
moon-
rise
^ PL1 has gap here to 489.

291
% 1 r
,, ..,, . - - i-
1
|v« "Q-
(X. J ^z- i—
6f sS o^'r i
•*
ot y V ^>JVVr i
r '
€ K k —
ct, ■y r-
cWv^
\ t? jlji^ >:
0
A t
*
b \ s>
V ->
<%; r *■ ?'
^'y>
9 ^1 k
479
Lota as to prognostics regarding crops Sc.o.
1. Wheat O
2. Barley,
meat
3. Rice, millet ?
(P. gawars)
4. Maize k
5. Pulse ? ?
6. Lentils and $ \
Iron
7. Beans, h i
onions
6. Chiok-peaa O
?
9. Sesame, \
grapes ?
10. Sugar ? V
292
1
].. -3
_.J\j
■ojj^:
•
y-vJ
K, V
Lv v ,: —^j'J^ ?►
; 1^] V^
► ', 0 v
lot ? "-^L-eV ->
y t
\ 7 %;
J
a ■tf ^, *
H 4 J
<%/ ^v- z
Xs | ^ 1^ i'
-i- •^1 i—
479
11. Honey- 0 Ascend change
12, Oil ' ^ 5 rf
13, Nuta, flax fj ? rt ft
14, Olivas IT
15, Apricots \ o ;
16. yater melons V "
17, Salt ? £ rt n
18. Sweets o ? n ft
19. Astringents \ IT "
?
20. Pungent tilings s " n n
21, Raw silk, ? ti
cotton "
22 Purgetiwes '/ N n
23, Bitter £ n n
purgatlTes
24. Acid purgatives ti n
293
z L
• V
k V
'Z
& JU
la, "v 7' Or'J'fV-
Z 4*
p
k \ z >
a % / _il^r
s
y- < ÛyoiJ^ L1
Z' H t?
Z % b»
a. z ,*■ Ar^j^r u=
g#1 H. Uj-
>=
Vj->..
/ / iyAJ^k' j
-1
479
Lots oast In oonneotlon with horary questions
1. Secrets Lord of Cusp I Aaoen. same
Aso.
2. Urgent wish Lord Lord
hour aso.
3. Time of Lord Lord I
attainment hour
i. Informa tlon
true or
not
6. Injury to Lord
business aso.
e. Freedman and \
servants
7. Lords and tr
mas tars
8. Marriage Cusp Aseen.
711
9. Time for
action
(Walls)
10. Time occupied
therein \
11. Dismissal or
resignation
12. Time thereof Lord Cusp
(wails) of the I
affair
294
1" I
h Kîfe- III
>> j' fe -x
7-
X X
2
/ X
"s; ^TH^r j
^|
r 1
J? ^v S \
r i
r- Vr..#
r •v;
\f*S>
r rv r^
5
i^ X |__i/-^» JWL^v !>
% y
yX # JjMsSJifr' L
% [> l—
s^ K>
479-480
13. Life or death of
absent person "J> t Ascen. same
14. Lost animal G t* tr M
15. Lawsult " rt
16. Successful Issue o n it
17. Decapitation D Cusp
VIXI n
18. Torture M \ Cusp
IX if
480. fama al-aatiaian ira'l-bahlmatan. On the

practice of sortilege by two arrows ana the Inter-
pretation of antmal omens.
ARROWS AND AimOLS
The book of Hermes known as the 85 Chapters dis-
cusses the Indications derived from both. As to omens
from two animals, MSshS'llah mentions that a black
animal should be Interpreted as Saturn and a yellow one
as the Sun. As to sortilege by two arrows none of the
interpreters has been helpful In furnishing an eiplan-
atlon with regard to them except Mfishd'llah whose
examples are founded on the lives of kings, other
members of the profession are inclined to adopt long
calculations by many and devious meihods neither
restricted nor free from error. Some of them at the
entrance of the Sun Into Aries In discussing the
permanence of empire and the probability of rebellion
take the first arrow as equivalent to the distance of
the sun from the middle of Leo, and the second to that
from the moon to the middle of Cancer, both oast from
the ascendant, and the same for day and night, while
others who have studied the subject most earnestly
assert that the first arrow represents Saturn himself
and the second Jupiter. What has been written on this
subject alone would make two large books.
<%\if <sd 7 lT?" i\s»-jftf~ h
e s X
C% J
-<it •'t? X
K
3^ 7, Jûu^ y 1
-4C
7 s
u^
v^-. t-
7 x gljji^r
r
y^y a * ^ * '
^\^X£rf^\~j^ W^^jU uU
N_—L-Uii)
481
481. nviina al-tasmlm ga'l tashrlo ira'l taghrlb.
¥e now proceed io dealwltn the various positions of
the planets in relation to the sun,
CAZim which are responsible for the most
ORIENTALIT? complete changes which closely
OCCIDENTALITT resemble ohanaes In their Indications,
due to the rlclssltudes of natural
conditions, 15S.
If a planet should be within less than 16' of con-
junction with the sun or have passed It by leas than
the same amount, It Is designated as 'samlm',^ The
superior planets, however, are only In'such a position
In the middle of their direct course, while the Infer-
ior planets are In it In the middle of their direct and
retrograde courses. In regard to 'tashrlq' orlontallty,
the Inferior planets In the middle of their retrograde
course resemble the superior in the middle of their
direct course. If the superior planets and the inferior
ones In the middle of2the retrograde course exceed the
minutes of tapilm all are said to be 'muhtarlq',
combust, until their distance from the sun is 6°;
thereafter they are no longer so styled but are said to
be under the rays. In this condition they remain like
prisoners in confinement until the distance of Venus
and Mercury from the sun amounts to 12°, of Saturn and
Jupiter to 15° and of Mars to 18°. This point is
described as the beginning of 'tashrlq' orlentallty,3
but they are not necessarily visible at this period,
for the time of visibility varies with each country and
climate. But the term tashrlq Is properly limited (to
the heliacal rising) and after this they are designated
'musharriq', which the Persians call 'kanar-i ruzl'.
Thereafter the higher planets differ from the lower,for
the former continue tending eastward till they are 30°
1 samlm, in the middle of the heart,(Lane) of the sun.

In'astrologioal works, caziml. The Cent. Diet, suggests
a derivation from qalb and shams, but Kasamlm, as If
the
2 heart, is more probable.
s End of lacuna In PL.
They are now west (right) of the sun, rise before It
In the east, and become morning stars.
—fV£=».
—0^—HU\j
-k-'^-'ly Iv^la^jj^ ^^)\ia-J jA.l»l-^
^J Û1_J)
' » .•' "fx' .• t y ,

J
*?> ^ >J-^S'''
wjJiA ^lij Uilijyt^ ^J^l^=aJ

f -A * £ * aJ ^
jei!jjjj—UlWybLtW J UmV I i
481
from the sun, and after which they are said to be
weakly oriental till a distance of 90° is attained,
and the name taahrlq does not cease to be applied for
at sunrise they are in the eastern quarter, while
whenever the 90° is exceeded the term orlentality
ceases to be applicable. Thereafter the first
stationary point is reached, after which the
retrograde movement sets in; when this is concluded
there is again a stationary point before the direct
course is entered. Arrival at opposition to the sun
occurs in the middle of the retrograde path, which
is thus divided into two sections, 1st and 2nd.
The higher planets after their station until
they are distant 90° from the sun are in the east
at sunset, but when less than 90° incline to the
west, and when the distance is 30° this situation
is called the beginning of oooidentality (taghrlb),
till Mara is 18°, Saturn and Jupiter 15°, and there-
after they are under the rays, until only 6° separate
them, when they are combust, until only la* remain
when they are again in taamim.
In the Almagest the opposition of the higher
planets to the sun is called the beginning of the ^
night (&Hp6vuxo^),1{atrSf al-lail)^, (kanar-i shab)^,
it is a situation which is peculiar to the higher
planets, for under it they rise at sunset. The Persians
however, are in the habit of using the expression
Kanar-l ahab for both higher and lower planets, but
that condition which they call the beginning of the
night Is really oooldentality, therefore they add
west, so as to distinguish between the two.
1
The MafStlh al-ruHlm defines the expressions KanBr-1
ruz and KanSr-l shah incorrectly as respectively
visible at night and visible in the morning.
296 a
^ l^tj j'/ilj.
J ^-^V17VU^—J3 ^ ,-# «^-/T

# ^ '
1 jjfcjV^'ijslj gjj^j '—^^ '
il'-V-'J) JLai'j'—W j\ y_-. . JLAI i-Al
** " Û> ^ V •
_j-^^ ^fuî
482-483
482. Hai-1 Buflian az poa taahrla. Be said that
the orlentailty of Venus and Mercury occurs on the
retrograde pa^h^ and Is not
INFERIOR PLANETS oompleted till a distance of
AFTER TASERlQ 30° from the sun In both oases.
Thereafter they are stationary
and then oomes the direct course to their greatest
{western) elongation, after which they again begin to
approach the sun. All of these situations are called
oriental, until 12° separate them from the sun, the
beginning of their matutlne oooultatlon in the east.
They are under the rays until 7° from the sun and are
then combust till they reach the limit of samlm and
conjoin2with the sun In the middle of their direct
course. Thereafter they pass out from samlm, when
their situation In the west resembles that of the
higher planets In the east to the extent which has
been noted of them In regard to combustion and being
under the rays and Tlsiblllty at evening twilight.
Then they gain their greatest eastern elongation and
atop before they again retrograde, passing through
all the stages the distances of which we have noticed
till they return to tasmlm on the retrograde course.
r 463. fahal yanfasll al-zuhrah f 1 dhallka ""an

utarld. It Is necessary to distinguish between
Tenua and llsruury as regards
HOT TSNUS DIFFERS orlentailty and oooldentallty,
FROM MEPCHHT HERS as has been done between Mars
on the one hand and Saturn and
Jupiter on the other, (astronomers are agreed that
no suoh distinction Is necessary between these two
planets) for Tenus has a very high latitude, and
sometimes conjunction occurs when it has attained
Its highest north latitude,3 It then remains visible,
so that the expressions combust and under the rays
ceaae to be applicable, although the planet Is In
those positions; similarly at tasmlm whan the north
J2 After Inferior conjunction.

3 Superior conjunotlon.
149,6° 22'.
^ L ' r ULLil
^j-Lj^jjTû l^yyAL*
^-^LJj >J^lws>r*^_^ o'-^f uSljîAL^j
i-^^V,^.\(*^£. j iV-^J.fîVll-A^C^rj i
if ti»N zj^ôSSjy ^-^j^jL Ji^jo 2_1^L

u
* 4° " t
-Ox J^3J) p-^-JIji jl* b^^^JpyjtxjJU^

^ •* 1 gk ^ t
il^jj
• "T ^ *». ^ ^ « s u ^
483-486
latitude exceeds 7°, it must not be described as
samlmab nor muhtariqab but simply as accompanying the
sun, muciarinah,
484. ?amg hSl al-aamar min al-shama. The position
of the moon with regard to the sun as to tasmlrn and
combuB Uun is similar to that of
KELATIVE POSITION the other planets, as iQng as the
SUN AND MOON distance is less than 7 east or
west of the sun; beyond that it is
under the rays till the distance increases up to IE0
which is approximately new moon; thereafter the vari-
ous distances described as phases (254) which produce
the quarter, half, three quarters and complete illumin-
ation succeed, and are followed at the same distances
on the other side of opposition by similar figures.
485. Fama al-tavamun ran al-shams wa'l-tavasur.
Astronomers agree that ail throe higher planets from
the time of conjunction to
POSITION RIOHT opposition, and both lower planets
AND HOT OF SUN from conjunction on the retrograde
to that on the direct course, and
the moon from opposition to conjunction are to the
right (west) of the sun, while the higher planets from
opposition to conjunction, and the lower from conjunct-
ion on the direct to that on the retrograde course, and
the moon from conjunction to opposition are on the left
(east) of the sun.
466. Hal tataghayyar ta* thlrflt al-k:aw5klb
bltaebayyur ahwalha. It may be asked whether with the
changes in situation of
INFLUENCE OF PLANETS UNDER the planets described,
CHANGED CONDITIONS their action also
changes. If their action
did not change, there would be no advantage in paying
attention to these situations* Astrologers are however
agreed that the maximum influence of the planets is at
tasmlrn, and during this tho Indications are of
happiness and good news; they are also agreed that such
Influence Is at Its minimum In combustion, until It
arrives at a point where unluoklness changes to
ruination. However, dlstihctions are made In accordance
with the concord and discord of the nature of the
4^1
\r ^
i—j Af. iyljll j>Jj K^ L OLJJ'L^ '
£i>e~ ^f^j^'J-14
(^,LiU y=>^ 4' rjh ^

186
planets, as e.g. heat may beoome Increased and
moisture diminished, consequently the Injurious
Influence of combustion la less with some planets and
greater with others. After conjunction, the planet,
when under the rays, Is like a alok person advancing
to oonvaleaoenoe, and when oriental attains full
strength and Is In a position to bestow all Its
benefits. The Persians call this Its vazlrate,! (and
any one who wishes to do a good act, does It at this
tlme.)P They ertend this name to the whole of the
position right of the sun, until at a distance of 30°
from the sun the beneficial action begins to stop, and
the Indications of happiness to beoome moderate, till
at 60° the action changes, this point is called the
minor unlucky point, 75° the middle unlucky point, and
combustion (on the retrograde)!1 the major unlucky
point. The planet at the first resting place appears
strangled, hopeless, in the first section of the
retrograde course sluggish and depressed, while In the
seoond section hope of succour is given, which Is
confirmed In the seoond station, delivery being near
at hand, while the direct course indicates, as its
name suggests, prosperity and power. Similarly the
nature of the planets alters from their rising to
their setting In the ezoentrlo orbit, being dry during
the former and moist In the latter, without however
the nature of their action being affected. Also from
rising to setting In the orbit of the epicycle, for
from the oriental phase to the first stop they are
moist, then to the middle of the retrograde course
warm, then to the seoond stop, dry, and back to
orlentallty cold. The reason of the change in the orbit
of the epicycle Is that the action of the latter is
bound up with the sun, and it is said that nearness
to the sun means dryness and distance moisture.
Combustion also changes the nature and other
conditions like rising and setting which bring about
I dastttriyyah. (dastnr vazlr bad)!1 position of

author!ty.
399
^\\^\
i Jo. ^ —Ij^îi l^-^!l£s»^^)\ J— i-
^ 1 jlJsN ^J lyl y=.

W
yW t »U','|,*^0 S ' ^ty
3
uj-y'j a^tLA^JkLft^ ^^-J^-!>!£^*
486
action In tlie epicycle different from tnat In tne
eioentrlc orbit. The olroumstenoe tbat tbe planet Is
posited in moist places of tbe signs or terms gives
friendliness; again, In tbe matter of malenees and
femaleness they change, becoming male when oriental
and female when occidental.
Again among the signs the planets also are
affected by the Indications of the whole sign, just
as the soul depends on the condition of the body, and
so a male planet becomes effeminate when In a female
sign, and is even affected by the male and female
degrees of a sign, so that there are mixed indications
of eunuohism and hermaphrodltism, effeminate men and
masculine women.
So also In quadrants of the sphere In relation to
the horizon the planets may change in the matter of
sex, and also at the oardlnes. The effect of situation
at the oardlnes however Is simply to Increase the
Influence of the planet, so that good fortune at a
cardinal point Is Increased, especially If the sign
be a fixed one. Calamity and adversity are also
Intensified In a fixed sign especially If oadent to
the oardlnes, while they are weakened In a tropical
sign especially If not oadent.
Some people assert that the vest Is favourable to
the lower planets, and the east to the higher, but
you must understand that this Is derived only from
the analogy of maleness and femaleness, the east be-
ing male and the west female, while the criterion of
the difference between them Is distance from the sun.
It has been shown that the orlentallty of the
superior planets occurs on the direct course after
combustion, on this account they are then more
powerful because as It were, they are escaping from
distress and calamity; comparable to this Is the
vespertine visibility of the Inferior planets, which
also occurs after combustion on the direct course.
300
jC^V ^r* i^J \~y^?—
i "^-Wi. L/L:.u Wr-Ai, L\ 'iia^^ •::
.. 'v '. M \|V. .''.I l.M '\\U J. \U'L\U
-^jAûblJ
oLat-^JaLRj J A^tjill—
A^" I^X Wjyiû WA

'» ^ f * + S" '
tAxiJllJjL U 1-JU»CA^JJ^ iâj

0
* ^ ' tf
eJftg*
^ Ar^LA ) l_-
466
The oooldentallty of the superior planets occurs
likewise on their direct course as they proceed to
combustion, so to this Is comparable the matutlne
ocoultatlon of the Inferior planets also on their
direct course. The orientallty of the Inferior
planets resembles that of the superior ones In as
much as In both cases It takes place after combustion:
If the Inferior planets were at that time direct
there would be entire agreement of all In the matter
of orientallty. But the oooldentallty of the
Inferior planets, when their movement becomes slow,
Is a much more Injurious and weakening Influence than
the ocoldentallty of the superior ones because the
former have now turned their faces both towards the
retrograde course and combustion; so the superior
planets In their occidental phase are safer than the
Inferior, beoause It Is only suoosedad by their
occultatlon.
We have extraotod from Tarqub b. Ishaq al-Klndl^"
all that a beginner requires to know witt regard to
the different Indications of the planets as to their
powerful Influence In orientallty and their weakness
In oooldentallty, although these differences do not
amount to being exact opposltee.
1 The "Philosopher of the Arabs" - 9th Century. For his

philosophical work of. Edgsl, Al-Klndl, Leipzig 1057:
for his scientific work Wledemann, mvi, XL1I, XLIV:
for his astrological writings Loth, Al-Elndl ale
Astrolog, Leipzig 167S. V. note to ZSO.
301
J LjJ* UlL-» J^ ^ IJaJjUXJ J
ft v
-'.' -t " » : " - * '
Ld-yijôxb' ——^JvtL ^ji>-J-4l»^
«» «• ^ lil ^ ' ' W
* •• « U* ' " c
—Li*»>jl j^j,—ill IAN— 2-, Liu^ ij V/JjL-i'
fc
—x?"
J ^ # ' " * tf 4/
1
^ LôW^-* ^■J' ^)l>^L<yi
ij l^r.Uo ^L,J^Jlj k_uj__»J'> V_A*«<1 \a
iLjj ^
J>A'
467-486
487. DalSlathS wa hlya 480. DalalathS wa hlya
muaârrlQah. mugârritiali.
INDICATIONS #HILS ORIENTAL INDICATIONS WHILE OCCIDENTAL
Beginning of old age, happy In Advanced old age, miserable
fanning and art of Irrigation, standard of living, bueihesa
profound and affeotlTe mean and small in extent,
k judgment, sharp and authorlt- work In connection with ir-
itlve dlepatoh of all business rigation and walls, poor
natters. food, fraud.
Beginning of manhood and Advanced middle age,
oaturlty, good oonduot,beauty, oooupatlona of moderate
jlegance, desirous of offloe Importance,position as pre-
u. is vlzlr or q.adl so aa to In- fect or law-agent, and all
sure Justice,many possessions things connected with rellgfrn
good reputation, Joy In such aa copying books of
ihlldren. traditions; lumoral acts,
pilgrimage.sufficient wealth.
Leading In battle, oonttnandlng Mean positions in the enay
»rmies,reputation for courage such as butcher, cook, smith,
O$ sagerness for conquest; quick- farrier, surgeon; theft; work
ness in business; success In to do with fire and Iron.
Qlnlng.
0 Taahrlq and taghrlb Indicating position relative to sun are
Inapplicable to the sun Itself.
Lotions when oriental are Beauty,hatred,lova,Joy,glad-
less effective than when ness,pleasurejoarrlage,gifts ;
? occidental. as to crafts,forbidden
pleasures,work with ooloure,
pictures,brocades,embroidery,
Intelllgance,reasoning power Sams aa under taehrfq but
long consideration, wise de- leas efficient; oooldentality
si sions, poetry, eloquence, occasions little harm to It
? slerk of taxes, surveyor, and to Tanus.
orderliness, affability,
ftedlclne, astrology.
From middle of month to ^2nd From conjunction to 7th day,
denotes mature manhood, childhood, from there to op-
T> thereafter to conjunction, position, youth; when the moon
old age. Is under the rays It points
to things secret and con-
cealed,and especially It
points to the 111 condition
of creatures resembling the
light at that stage.
^ XA&m>
Lu-tJ. j 0 ti—OjA oUÎ J .^sPUST
J-Mj^JSIîLIIJ j L^J 11 Liv' i- iwj

V
^^liU)^ UiiSl»£)) jjl J jV*

J r**4lÎs-^L^S-k 2^-ai^f'\!^^^t^£»-
j j^^t- jfrJl j €
-•>^J-''^jW
^—y UX»\>l.U,
. lil') âJ'j'J^V-aiÔo^-Olil
•.?
£*\
^
\
^ fib'** (. liiljyL^ (
489-490
489. M5 al-lttisai waTl-in3lr5f. The terma
application and separation (Ittiaai and liislr5f) refer
to the formation of aspect3 between
APPLICATION the planets and withdrawal from such
AND SKPARATION positions. These are dependent on the
signs, and the same names are
employed which we have already explained in regard to
the aspects of the signs, 37-3 viz. conjunction, two
aextlle, two square, two trine and opposition. When two
constellations are in aspect, planets within them are
also in aspect, when the former are not in aspect, the
planets in them are inoonjunot and concealed from each
other. When two planets are in the same sign or In two
signs in aspect to each other and at the same degree,
they are said to be conjoint in reality, and the one
whose orbit is lower is said to apply Itself (ittasala)
to that whose orbit is higher, because the lower one
is swifter and constantly overtakes the slower one,
Consequently the moon applies Itself to all the planets
and is applied to by none; Mercury applies Itself to
all except the moon, Tenus to all except the moon and
Mercury, the sun Mars and Jupiter to those above them,
Saturn alone applies Itself to no planet because all
are below it. When of two planets in aspect, the
degrees of the inferior one are less than those of the
superior planet, the inferior one is said to be
proceeding to conjunction and when greater to be
separating from the superior. At the time of conjunction
the lower planet Is said to be conferring counsel
(dafir tadblp)1 on the higher and the latter reoelvlng
counsel from it (madfuîlaihi). This is conjunction in
long!tude,
490. Tahal limabdaf al-ittlsal hadd. As applicatlcm.
is like meeting, an3 separation like'parting, bo an
inferior planet when it enters a sign
BEOLNNINO OF where it comes into aspect with a
APPLICATION superior one, begins to show Its
movement towards conjunction, which
increases till conjunction is completed, unless
something else intervenes such as its being outstripped
by another planet, or deserted by the superior planet
^ dafaâ is here used In its sense of giving, not that

of repelling.
h Hi
j X ^~-1
■• *" ••' '"» . ' !•■ .' ,J
" *\
jily6UJ^*j-<^b 1^-Uv»Lv^-j:>
l#»U> ly brjf^ J ^jlks^

', ._ _, . " 41 T u> > » ',' J v
1,1
^ | . ' "I
■ ^ ^^Ki/^ ^
J
'* ^ ». t ' \ ' .
—i 7ol>Ul»L^V^^'Nj^1J^WXa,^--£-«_S>>--*
/
k" . - »c,.vfi[iHr'« '".
490-492
lea-vlng the sign In which It waa before completion, or
by Itself becoming retrograde and thus frustrating
completion. Eut there la much difference of opinion aa
to the amount and limits of completion. Some people say
that It begins at 5 degrees and continues till the
degrees are equal, the 5 'dead* degrees^491,being made
the basis of this Interpretation. Others say 6 degrees,
beoause It Is the fifth of a sign, and the average of
the planets' terms ,45S. Others again say IS degrees,
the distance at which the light of the moon Is obscured
by the sun, and still others, 15 degrees, the orb of
the aun, while others say the avarage of the respective
orbs of the planets In question (456). Again many
assert that only sompleta conjunction need be attended
to.
Separation begins when the degree of the Inferior
becomes even a minute higher than that of the superior,
but, on account of the trace of Influence which remains,
the completion of aeparatlon should be determined by
the amount assigned to the beginning of application.
491. Tama al-darajat al-mayyltah. The 'dead'
degrees referred to are five degrees beyond the
aseeudaut in the direction
THE 'Train' DBGH3B3 opposite to the succession of the
signs. Ptolemy does not reckon
these ae belonging to the twelve houses,, and does not
regard them as cadent to the ascendant, but If there le
a planet In them he associates It with the ascendant.
492. Fahal llllttlsal nau' gaayr al-ttill. There
are two other kinds of Conjunction oeeldee that In
longitude, viz. In latitude and In
CONJEHCTION ONLY nature. The former occurs when the
IN LOHGITHDE? latitude of two planets Is the same
either north or south, and the
degrees of latitude are equal. Then they are said to be
conjoint by latitude. If the degrees are not equal one
must look whether that of lower latitude Is rising In
the quarter In question^ and whether that of higher
latitude la setting In the same quarter, If so, they
are said to be moving towards conjunction. If the
■a-!^J 0î>'l^ ^ yÛs^-X^'
^yp^QO r^-l^
»_»>^.V-» VvO^-^ '-^J \-»-J Lv L^W*-^
^yj|.5jÛÛ.\ i-»j>] »4*oLj4!i*-XJn»jX^
. y^V—<_J^j ^ wj 1 ^yj^-^_^_s11»\ J
"'. 1 ' , '. '- " .. ,- " • , '" •" o- .
L]n» 2-- UVi^y^J^l/j I X^l t>J Jdsjl^ (î^*
"• » , " .0
a=.J Ûjjuill?
~^Ct Ip. _^J_^=»Lv2j lX»\ Û
-—it ^ %iiy' ly
* * y t * ^ ,
ZUI ^ U^ —cJo»\ yV
Z f "'' > ' \ ^ ^ 9 4-
498
latitude of the setting planet is lower than that of
the rising one, they are separating. If both are rising
one must see whether the extreme latitude of the lower
is not less than that of the higher one, if so, they
are uoTlng towards oonjunotlon; if less, that oannot
occur. If both are setting, and that whloh has the
higher latitude is quicker in setting, they are said to
be proceeding to oonjunotlon, whether that la completed
or not, because that of lower latitude may move to the
other side (or the other may overtake lt)P.
The superiority of conjunction by latitude to that
by longitude is due to the fact that It does not occur
except whan the planets are in aspect.
There Is another advantage viz. that suppose an
inferior planet applies Itself to a superior In
longitude and then to a third In latitude which Is
Inconjunct to the superior one, then the latter does
not continue in oonjunotlon by longitude at the same
tine.
Conjunction by nature occurs when two planets are
in equipollent signs,377, and takes place when they
arrive at correscondlng degrees In these. Z.g<
Jupiter Is In 80° of Aries and the moon In 5° of
Pisces, when the latter has attained to 10° of Pisces,
whloh is the corresponding degree to 80° of Aries, the
conjunction by nature Is completed. The condition
becomes fortified If the planets are In aspect during
this conjunction In nature. Similarly if two planets
are In corresponding degrees In signs correspondent
by dlreotlon, the oonjunotlon Is complete; e.g.
Jupiter la at 80 of Aries and the moon at 5° of
Tlrgo, then complete oonjunotlon will ooour at 10° of
Virgo. Aspect here also Improves the condition.
r
. •' • < * .
thlr' *
e^ ei^-*
vjtji
>^1 lit-'£jutj^fejj)A^bt tx\i<>_i«k^l

—* ' * '
ii ^ o^ *» ** *
^ i-
^r- j- , -i_^ ^ •- ,.
J ill^>
493-494
493. Ma al-muanahadah wa' l-muza''agan. The express-
lone testimony and dignity lananadah to muz a rQn]ah} ^ are
sjnunymuue terms and are applicable to a
TESTIMONY planet In two different ways, one oon-
AIID DIGNITY cerns the fortunate position which it
may oooupy, naslb, papp; (bahraP) If e.g.
It should be lord of the house,440^ In which It is
situated, or be In Its sxaltatlon^ddS, or In any other
position congenial to It, It may have one or more of
these dignities. If however It Is not In a favourable
situation it is said to be peregrine (gharlb), while if
either in Its detriment,448,or its fallj443, calamity
is added to the alien situation.
The other Mind results from something outside the
situation of the planet,and is of three varieties, lat,
when It Is In a situation favourable to another planet
and on this aooount has the advantages of that other at-
tributed to ItjWhether that be lordship of a house or
exaltation; End,depending on the disposition or essen-
tial nature of the planet,as e.g. the testimony of Mars
is connected with war and lawsuits,of Jupiter with
riches and estates,of Menus with amusement and marriage;
Srd,dependent on tlme,suoh as day for the sun and
night for the noon,or the lordship of the day or hour
or the like.
494. Hal lllshahadgt tartlb. The dignities have a
certain order of precedence. Most Important Is the
lordship of the bouse, next,
ORDER OF PRECEDENCE exaltation, then, term, then
OF DIGNITIES trlpllolty, lastly, face; and
so. a certain scale of numbers
T Merbal noun of za'hma III to become chief a/a Lane =
muzShumuh the ^ replacing the Z (as in 502 ab.) but
Muzsham a dignified planet and muzfi'amlyyabrdignity in
the abstract also occur. D.3.T. p. r 618 muzfi 'araah is the
claim of a planet for dominion (za amah) In a sign in
which it has a fortunate positionr (Ehapt for and
such a planet is called the muza am of that sign or
ahabld,witness. M'U p. 829 "nuza'mmah I.e. bazz such as
lordship of house,exaltation or the like". Dozy'l 593
gives a faulty definition of muzram with a partial quo-
tation from Slane Frol. II 819 n. 1 as • promlttor (vhloh
need not be a dignified planet or a planet at all) and
as occupying the second place in the zodiac in the dir-
ection of the Succession of Signs - a definition of
promlttor1 In oouneotlon with the operation of dlreotloo
Y. 581° AO and AB^ have murighama (alienated) by ml stale.
Vvii^ t^Jf-i'^JJf' '-r5?' ^bî' ^ If^lc
^ -• 'w * f
}) Vv9^bv-5^j^4-^^^^3^^ jl>j*£. a
-r /^^>\j wJj wfiui i>_H> ^W»j-^Loj >1^*
xZ&^bi >-JJ3^ jCjU^j^L^v-j^sajfeaitiji
JjUyLiJ Ot^ V^*1 >^l^-

J
î^lc^^HiA!^3l >^>U i ^Wij3
C-* bi^Jut^ ^Lc*". aM jVx

r. ^ ■>. '■ -•
494-495
has bean assigned to them,viz. 5 to the house^ 4 to
exaltation, 3 to term, 2 to trlpllolty and 1 to face.
The dignities of the tarlous planets may therefore be
added up and oompared with eaoh other, so as to see
which Is pre-eminent. It Is related that an authority
on this subject assigns 30 to the lordship of the as-
oendant,20 to exaltation,10 to lordship of face,5 to
that of term, 3 1/2 to that of trlpllolty, 4 1/2 to
that of the hour, and finally to the sun or moon.whloh-
eyer Is lord of time,as muoh as to the lordship of the
asoendant. The figures are then added and oompared.
This Is the praotloe of the Astrologers of Babylon and
Persia, who regard the lordship of the faoe as yery
Important. But among the Astrologers of the present day,
the trlpllolty Is regarded as haying precedence oyer
term and faoe,and Indeed the latter Is often considered
of no account, further In certain clroumstanoes changes
may take place In this order, e.g. the lord of exalt-
ation may take preoedenoe oyer the lord of the house In
natters of empire and goyernment In high places. It Is
neoessary to know that these dignities are strengthened
by aspeot, or by other oondltlons wbloh replace aspect,
because If the numbers of two planets add up equal, one
of which Is In aspect and the other Inoonjunot, the
former Is preferred eyen If Its fayourable positions and
testimonies amount to less than those of the latter.
495. lg al-mubtazz.2 The word 'mubtazz' means a
l ''lyar al-balt, a standard allowanoe to the house.
3 One of the meanlnus of bazza Is to ualn the mastery.
Lane. The derlyatlves In the Tafhlm are not recorded In
the ordinary dictionaries, but the Uafatlh al-rul<Im p. 229
has al-lbtlzaz.the possession by a planet of many dlg-
nltles In a sign,the planet Itself Is, called mubtazz
''alalhl. The Tafhlm has Htl2azlyyah 'alalhl. the mastery
or a sign. The word has undergone arconsiderable change
In the Uedleyal Astrologies. Abu Ma 3har A2 al-mubtezj
Hall,22 seq. al-mutoZjAloahltlus p. 61. al-mutem.
Junctlnus 1,1307, Al-mutazjId est planeta qul habuerlt
dlgnltataa ID ascendepte gradu. 523.
Id... 141. Al-muten,hoo est ylnoena,baben8 pluree
dlgnltates. Wilson, Almuten^ The strongest planet In a
figure In essential or accidental dignities. The change
from z to m or n Is probably due to the olrounatanoe
that zjls frequently used as a contraction Or substitute
for m and n. Cent. Diet, and H.S.D. Almuten for 0.7r.
al-mutaz = al-mu'taz as if from azza Till - Ingenious
but not In accordance with the history of the word.
307
fi^; *r^
•^—^XjlUi^ ^ ^j-.Lal /^Jl>aS * ^j\ iC. Wj-Lii j
^ u*) ; ^îûî-î^yjiiuj)
—iAL»U^. ^ji, J^w»iejli U*
—I'Wlîl ejji^j^j^-^j^ JLî Vj^VjjlliUlj »»11_
Cj»^\i o f i-* ■> ^J'^
Ûj \ ^jlL^JL
£yiU
495-497
victorious planet and vlotcrs^ may be arrived at in two
ways; 1/ mu^laq absolute
THB HULINj PLANET (essential),dependent on dlenitles
"AL-WOTSN" due to position in the orbit,or in
relation to other planets or to
the horizon; 2/muqayyad limited (accidental) ,when
these dignities are referred to one of the oharaotepls-
tlc properties of the twelve houses. 523.
496, VB al-hayylz wa ma al-halb. The terms 'Jjayylz^
and 'halb' are relaxed in meaning,and they share one
condition viz. that when a diurnal
9AY7IZ AND gALB planet,SSd^ls above ground by, day and
beneath it at night,and when a noc-
turnal planet is above ground at night and beneath it by
day,it is aaid to be in ita galb,and a planet is
described as in or not in its halb. Nhen in addition to
this a planet ia male, 385,and in a male sign,348, or
female and in a female aign, the condition is called
hayyiz,and a planet is said to be In or not in its
Jayylz. Moreover it is obvious that gayyiz is more oom-
prehenalve than palb,because every payyiz ia a palb but
not every halb a jpayylz.
Abu Marshar in this matter has increased the number
of male and female degrees. It ahould be known that
Mars in thia matter of payyiz Is different frcm the
other planeta,because it la both male and nocturnal; if
it is above the earth by night and below It by day and
in a male sign,it is then in ita hayylz.3
497. Ma al-munakarah. MUnffkara (contention) is
nearly the reverse of payyiz and occurs when a diurnal
planet is in the domicile 440 of a noo-
OONTENTION turnal one,and the latter is in the
domicile of a diurnal planet; or when a
nocturnal planet is in the domicile of a diurnal one, .
and the latter is in the domicile of a nocturnal planet.
^ The Arabic 'hayyiz' 'natural place* la the translation
of the Greek Sipcct;, preferred position. Cf. B.L. p.
103 n. 2 and p. 39.
2 The initial verses of ""All b. Abl al-RlJal'a Astro-
logical Arjuzah are devoted to al-mubtazz.
3 gayyiz translates the Greek StpeCti; and ia translated
'duatoria or ductorla aive seourltas' Bonatus p. 135.
haim for halz, Aloab. 17r. aym. Bonatus p. 671. See note
4to 495. an<
E.g. 1^ in T and d in t or 0 in l ^ in 0 •
| i»ti i^^D>
—*s^ »(^=»jW (ji ^^JI*|jLi*^îi^^
J^l^l >1, l^fJ>.i^_^^l l^£j^
' • ® > .IV

^K ^ V—«> ^tAy}
hz}$ •~^:=t^=^>^st-9\s^*l' ^ Jr'-tsfj^^'-^j
■ t* -^yJiSi^H <~£=>J&
^jÛjU*. l^li>\ Jj Ln-illêjoi)" vyu kJ=J>£=A '
^ t ^ j—y N
tr'^,vi^-Lwi'J Al
*• i* » ^s•
498r*500
498. Ma farah al-kawkab. The planets are said to
be joyful,powerTulThappy and In good spirits when they
are in oongenial sections (huzQz)
JOT or THE PL&DET of the signs 449-4S3,ln their'tjalb
or tfflyyizjthe quarters friendly to
them N. S. E. or V. Safljand also when far from the sun
those whloh were previously in distress,like the
superior planets when oriental and the Inferior when
oooldental in their direct course. They are also in
their joys in those preferred houses whloh we discussed
(469) - this is the best Mnown of all - and finally
they are joyous in those quadrants depending on the
horizon; the superior in the inoreaslng quadrants the
inferior in the decreasing ones (203).
499. M5 al-iqbSl wa'l idbgr. Prosperity (IqbSl) is
assoolated with the oardines^s theae_lndloate a happy
mean; adTersity (idbar) with the
PR03FEBITT oadent houses,whloh point to destruct-
AMD ADTSMITT ion and exoess. Eeing in those houses
whloh are suooedent to the angles is
beyond the half-way line to prosperity,for they are the
paths leading there from adversity. But this prosperity
and adversity are not all alike,Just as the oardlnes
are not alike but are higher and lower in glory and
dignity. And indeed the Cadent houses are not alike in
their destructive Influences,because although the 3rd
and 9th houses are oadent,the Sth and l£th are not only
oadent but are also inoonjunct to the horosoope.
300. Ma al-hlsar. A planet is said to be besieged
(hlsar) when sltualaJ between two others,as e.g. when a
planet in sign 1 is surrounded by others in
BESIEGED signs 2 and 1£. It also occurs when three
planets are in one sign,the middle one
whose degree is less than the one and higher than the
other is said to be corporally (bl'l-jlrm) besieged.
Again a planet is desorlbed as besieged by the rays,
when in front of it is another in seztlle or quartlle
and another behind2 it in like aspect. Vhen besieged by
two infortunes 382 the influences are extremely bad,
while if between two for tune a. thev are extremely good.
1 Eledemann UdT, 208 has noted the astrological mean-
ing of these words usually assoolated with the
trepidation theory 196.
2 In the MafStlh al'lilOm hlsSr is restricted to this
condition. (K1 miySn Ishan'dfistlat yS muzSâm-l 0
bBshaifmln musadaqehau min muzahamah AE) part note 310.
309
1
^ 5^' fc) ^ 0J I,*
'. J ". • . ' * -
5>\l« Is ^Li^,
^^ ^-J i U ^ l)_> t v^ ' T^ ^ ^J
^^>-J[suJ^_iai\9 Js^ju^ lijjiiU? J>liu ^Z<'

* v % * t« ^
iuÎ oi v 0&i\;
~^X^. t^t^" ^J-)^ -^ vWfc-^j^ Qjl^-^za

■ Nil ' ^ ^ t x ^
[ > o^ ^ ^ ^ t -*
1
V —^
^-> )^,^J, Jl jJl j XyX yi. ^ 9 o^^xi'l/J il^jj

4 '' ^ •I il '
501-505
501. Ma al-tuhaali. X planet on which a number of
unfavourable oonditlona is heaped,and In evil oase on
account of being oombuat or retrograde, or
SUSPICION in its detriment or fall or in a oadent
house,or inoonjunot,or antagonized by in-
fortunes.or whose aspects ere inimical is said to be
suspect (muttahim) in its significance. (If it shows
any promise, it is unable to carry it out.P)
502. MS al-lnr5m wa'l-mukflfflt. If a planet is in
its fall or in a pltJ4S9,or in a sign in which it has
no propel' section,it is as it were oon-
BENE?ACTION fined in a tight place or oave. If now
AMD RSQUITAL one of the planets friendly,447, to It
or its sponsor appllesl itself to it,
and gives a helping hand to deliver it from Its
oalamltous situation,It is described as conferring a
favour on it,and la called a benefactor (munlm) .Again
If the benefactor arrives at a similar disadvantageous
situation,and is applied to by the first planet,this Is
called requltal (mukafat).
503. MS dhu'l-ywnlnain wa dhu'l-yaaNrain. When a
planet la Tn the oardo of mid-heaven and itsseztile
and quartile rays fall together above
TWO RIGHT AMD earth,it is said to have two right
TWO USST HANDS hands,!! these fall below earth two
left hands. The indications of the
former are success and victory.
504. MB thalg'al-sair. If while within a sign a
planet does not enter into conjunction with another,
although in aspect to other planets,
VOID OP 00URSB it is said to be void of course
(khlll's-aalr),and is regarded as
having separated from conjunction whether in that sign
or not. (This name la given to it because the field Is
empty and it moves without any companion.P)
505. MB wahahl al-sair. When a planet la in a sign
and no other planet has been in aspect with it from the
time of its entry to that of its exit, it is
7BRAL said to be feral In its course [wahshi 's-salrl
This is practically impossible wltfi the
superior planets and the sun, and can rarely occur, but
with the moon it la necessarily the oase and frequently
occurs. If the moon with its rapid motion did not exist,
^ min muqBdaqlyyah au muzfl'amlyyah.
* * Of, ^
all U=^^y^J^Vi_k J Ali Mi) ul
* * ^ • *
-JA —--^>âi(l_iy l»-a*jyiJ9J
—jC-^J > W » JS^^gjlfe* l^*u}lj> >yt»4>
Ne>i^_^ JÎ ^clX. <L*ijj Zij3A-l|i
wfeLssJI cÛ^pJÛyi- K-£*J^0p,f>
^[jlj> ^LoJ^t-liyj^J^3^j»*-I^
Jfcx.j.sl
"VtJjt ^ 4_j^l^fe»i^^2> l^^c-lJU L ^_;fe.J^=^_3^5»ya
u^LJt i
505-506
this might Tei7 well happen to the Inferior planets,one
of them mowing rapidly the other slowly. Some people say
that when the moon Is feral^hls Is a substitute for
conJunotlon with the planets In whose terms It happens
to be within the sign,but this opinion la trivial
(muhalhal) and ijulte unsupported.
506. Blma dha vatlmm Icaun al-lttlgSl. That a
•famlllarltv'l of the various forms dlsouseed should he
canpleted between the inferior planet
COMPLBTION OF oonferrlng counsel (al-dafl'') and the
CONJUNCTION superior receiving It (al-madfue
•llalhl) 169, there must neither be
return (radd) nor evasion (faut) nor Intervention
(lrtlrBd) nor refranatlon (Intlkath) nor abscission of
llît (qat'al-nor) nor prevention (man1'). Each of these
will be distinguished and Interpreted.
1. Beturn. This happens to a superior planet when
retrograde or under the rays,for from weakness It Is
unable to hold what Is offered to It,therefore returns
and does not accept It. If the situation Is such that
thsKlsreoeptlon between them,or If the inferior planet
Is at an angle or both of them are at angles,or suoced-
ent houses,the end of such return Is satisfactory. If
however the Inferior planet Is In the weak situation
described,and the superior one at an single or In a
suooedent house.the result Is destructive even If at
first hope was Indicated. If both are In a weak situat-
ion from the beginning to the end there Is nothing but
destruction and ruin.
2. Evasion. This occurs when an Inferior planet Is
about to conjoin with a superior one; be fore this tsksspleoe
the latter moves out of the sign,and the Inferior planet
applies Itself to another planet either In the same or
another sign,the first aspect never having been
completed.
3. Intervention. This occurs when an Inferior
planet tends to become conjunct with a superior one,In
the latter part of whose sign there Is posited a third
planet lower than ttie superior snd higher than the
Inferior planet. Before the Inferior planet completes
^ An astrological expression for relation of planets

by aspect, conjunction, equality of declination
(antlsolons) to.
j£=\ jâJI ^>-J>- ' ^'\) lAfc»l
—t J U<jLit^ >i
-—i-^^b »Ui^=»>ÛL^' o r=
1' It '1 ^ . ' •.' ' *
^■> L^LU ■at»^)-ll-4<vô^^-j*^^^(^jl£ojj
■-~^. V^J^=»A^ >uw»Ui
£->112_U _)J «»_£=.jfeaj iJLi>\e>el)-J^^^::?,f t3-Jjil1 »U)j>

• '" j *"'' r^" •• >|V » .• 'v "
aj ^ '
jUj 1UU ^1J1 ^
506-507
oonjunotion, the third intermediate planet retrOijrades
towards the superior planet and passes it hy, till the
inferior inevltatly conjoins with It and not with the
superior one.
4. Abscission of light. If It should happen that
the intermediate planet is not in the same sign as the
superior one, but in the next and retrogrades into it,
this Intervention is one of two methods of cutting off
the light. The second method is when an inferior planet
tends to conjoin with a higher one and a third, still
higher is situated towards the latter part of the sign,
then before the inferior planet can conjoin with the
intermediate one, the latter moves to the higher one
and passes or conjoins with It. The Inferior planet
does not conjoin with the intermediate one but with the
superior later.
5. Refranatlon. If an inferior planet tends to
conjunction with a superior one but before completion
becomes retrograde the familiarity Is said to be
frustrated by refranatlon.
6. Prevention, when there is a third planet in a
sign between the Inferior and superior ones,it prevents
the conjunction of the former with the latter until it
Itself has entered into conjunction. When two planets
tend to form a familiarity with a third at the same
time,the one by means of corporal conjunction, the
other by aspect, the former renders the latter vain if
their degrees are equal; but when their degrees are
different, and the one casting the aspect Is nearer to
completion than the one tending to conjunction, the
former is preferred. (When however two planets apply
themselves by aspect to a third at the same time, that
Is preferable, whose reception occurs first.") Certain
aspects must have an advantage over others, Just as
corporal conjunction has over aspect,so that the more
powerful aspect should Interfere with the weaker, but
astrologers have not pronounced on this matter.
507. MS al-qabul. Reception. When an inferior
planet arrives in one of the dignities proper to a
superior one, and makes known to it the
RSCZFTION relation thus established, there is an
exchange of compliments such as 'your
servant' or 'neighbour'. If further the superior
planet happens to be in a situation proper to the
inferior one, mutual reception takes place, and this le
fortified,the richer the situation is In dignities,
^C\i ÛiU*Ay Jl \>j-> Ji f LSiJîîjijltiUaliVjaJ*
—-"W^ i-jj i—i^jj j LAJ J- ^ 3> jî£»
l^^C^^6^\-7tXj^ji1l^lJ^\w^y/'L^l&.»
' * vll *•' '" *' ^
r I >..ui!A.* i •^* ,U?\'.\M!lLji
jiAtbgjli Ju\»U 5 L-i^Jc i\j ci^\iU^^=tJ' Jt-*^'
^JaU^l6»JLJi£-L^y l^-l
507-510
eapeolally trhen the aepeots Indloate no enmity nor
maleTolence. When reception does not take place the
result Is negatlfe.
508. MS al-dSfl'". We have already stated 489-506
that al-darir is the application of one planet to
another and la described as bl'l-
TH2 DONOR tadblr. The Inferior planet making
application Is not specified as dafi''
unless It Is In a dignified situation proper to It
without regard to the situation of the superior, the
madfurllalhl, this conjunction Is called daf al-
quwwah, and If In one proper to the superior planet,
daf al-tablrah,which Is the same as qabQl described
above,or'else the Inferior planet Is In a place proper
to Itself which also happens to be congenial to the
superior planet; this Is called daf* al-tablrataln)
because the natural properties of both are united. The
same expression Is used when one (an Inferior^] planet
In its hayylz conjoins with another (a superior one1*)
In Its âyylz, the planets being both either diurnal
or nocturnal, for the hayylz requires two conditions
to render It oomplete^49&,
509. IS al-mur9dafah. When a retrograde Inferior
planet follows and overtakes a retrograde superior one,
the situation Is called 'muridafah'. Here
FOLLOWKR there Is no return on account of the simi-
larity of their situations but If there Is
reception the Indication Is for the successful termin-
ation of buslnesa which was threatened with ruin. How-
ever this conjunction, although there Is no refusal, Is
not equal to one In the direct course but Is far
Inferior in significance.
510. Hal yaqum maqSm al-lttlaBl wa'l-nazar shal'.
There are other conditions which are affl eaalous
besides aspect and conjunction. When
3DBSTITDT2S FOR an Inferior planet and an Intenned-
COEJONCTION AND late one both apply themselves to a
ASPECT superior planet, the latter Is called
a cbDector < Jem'' .because It assembles
the light of the others. If these are In aspect to each
other, this is Just as good as conjunction with the
oollootor; If they are not In aspect, that collection
^ ^ Ji-^V (y4 J* Ij^lj)
^ jS=y5
^ ■*> ' ' *7
—fe»^=2jli»llLa»|xlo e^J Aii^ l*A<ii_*^»J>Î-3i

t * «* •' ^ »/ *■ 1) ''"
jUi-^-i)3 JUjVV
¥• C i ''
^ lv^=c5-' L^^>J
ûlÛ4jL^)f^ ev I ÛJ?
»** ^\ \»' ^ ) >

V J7>
- Lji 4jW 1-^

510
of their light by another planet is effective in place
of oonjunotlon although they are inoonjunot.
If an Inferior planet separates from an inter-
mediate one which Is inconjunot to a superior planet,
and thereafter conjoins with the superior one the light
of the Intermediate planet la transferred to the latter.
This is called 'naql'' or translation and occurs between
two planets which are (Inconjunct or between two which
are?) In aspect but far from conjunction. This
condition is effective In lieu of conjunction.
There la another form of translation, when the
inferior planet conjoins with the Intermediate one, and
the latter has already been In conjunction with the
superior planet; It Is Just the same as If the Inferior
had applied itself to the superior. This occurs when
the Inferior planet Is Inconjunct to the superior one
because, when In aspect, It Is swift In arriving at the
oonjunotlon with the superior one.
In the books, one always finds the naql of Mars
by the sun to Saturn described as the greater naql and
that of the moon by the sun to Saturn as the lesser
naql. If two planets are inconjunct to a third or to a
certain place In the zodiac, and then both conjoin with
one which la in aspect to both and also to that third
or that place, the result Is like mirrors reflectingT
from house to house. This has also been called 'radd
but In view of what we have said before about radd,the
use of that word is ambiguous. There Is also another
aspect of real translation which Is not much enlarged
upon,except In relation to separation; they say that
when an Inferior planet withdraws from conjunction with
a superior one and conjoins with another then naql
occurs,light being transferred from the one to the
other and as this translation la an effective substit-
ute for oonjunotlon,It follows that It should not be
void of the1 effect of separation. However some other
word than radd1 should be used for this condition per-
haps sarf or '"aka (conversion or inversion) to remove
the ambiguity.
. ' ^ S^s, ' ,f ftl t ay
c-A >J 3^.**' j^3_ r^ l^^jtul ^
^l^j '
f> L-1 >_) lis*
/ *' ■*
,,
S y} *'" * M% ^ ' '♦
JAI'
—f L^
511-512
511. M3 fath al-bab. Vihen two planets whose notnes
are opposed! conjoin,this la called opening the doors.
So the conjunction of the sun or
OPENING THE DOORS moon with Saturn indicates quiet
rain,fine drizzle or snow-storms,
that of Venus and liars torrential fain,hall, thunder
and lightning,and that of Mercury 2and Jupiter the
opening of the doors of the winds.
512, Kalf yakOn auwwah al-kawSklb wa du'fhg. In
dealing preTlously with the relations of the planets to
the sun,to each other,to their
STRENGTH AND WEAKKE3S own orbits,to the zodiac,and
OF THE PLANETS to the horizon,we have dis-
cussed as far as possible the
good and efil. effects of each,as well as the suzmned
effects of more than one. Each planet has a most
favourable situation,and when some advantage is lost,
its power is diminished to a like extent. The converse
is true with regard to unfavourable situations.
A planet is at the height of its power when the
following conditions are present. Motion direct,rapid
and increasing,far from the sun's rays,oriental if
superior,occidental if inferior,in aspect to both sun
and moon,and these in a fortunate state,besieged by
fortunes or aspeotlng them,relieved of infortunes, as-
sociated with fixed stars of the same character, rising
in its own orbit,passing above the Infortunes and below
the fortunes.north latitude lnoreasing>happenlng to be
in domiciles of the fortunes, or their huauz or in a
place resembling its own nature, or in fioueea most
congenial to it, in its own hayylz, at an angle or
1
The context shows that it is not opposition in the
Zodiac (as Dozy incorrectly quotes from but op-
position of natures,447,or of domiciles which is re-
sponsible for the atmospheric phenomena. PL has fcSlhal
ishdn; PP khanlhal ishan; the definltlcn in Bujiit,
buyQthuma. The figure in 440 shows that the domiciles of
the pairs in question are opposite.
2 If you see the moon separate from Venus and apply
Itself to Mars or v.v. this la also opening of the
doorsÂlbohazen Haly p. 396.
315
^ aU- U^,l^»l- il^lj oirl^^j5rj|\6»i
-^Jjfe»ilfo> li Nw^'J <1
^LlZ^j uis^l^lc jiOjSsJ^rlv-^fisifvJ UU5t»j êîtU'
^clkgyl j^_li» ^ J Ujy- ir
^ fj—' Ij- 5
1—^£J^=»> vJ^'l^'^JU wjjat«»^ tAjLa* C-Ii^tl ôOll 1

* ^ S^ , ^ * f ^ ' , _,
■^■êJcL Jifii* VÛa^ûJ* ^4*
/iall^l^y^li U 3 U">
^ S** * ' <r ^, <■ ^ ' V^ * ^
612-513
suooedent thereto,In a quadrant of the same nature, and
inereaslng,elevated high above the maleflcs and
conquering.
But when alow, [retrograde,under the rays .occiden-
tal if superior,and If Inferior moving slowly]! west-
ward towards retrograde,Inoonjunct to sun and moon, or
in an unfriendly aspect to them .without reoeptlon, the
infortunes In an Inimical aspeot,or besieged by them,
associated with fixed stars of a contrary nature,
setting In own orbit, so that the maleflcs pass above
and the benefics below,decreasing south latitude, in
unlucky houses, in parts of signs foreign to them, in
detriment or fall, In a contrary (Layylz, distant from
the angles or succedent houses, In a quadrant of
different nature, at the nadir of their Joys, and con-
quered by the maleflcs high above them; this is the
acme of weakness. But In all conditions there is
always an admixture of good and bad, often difficult
to Interpret, and requiring all the resources of the
art as well as experience and industry.
513. Fabal tanfasll al-nayyirnn f 1 dhailka rald
al-kawaklb. In regard to the foregoing there is oon-
slderable difference be-
HOW SUN AND VOob tween the sun and moon on
DIFFER FROM HiE PLANETS the one hand and the other
IN THIS REGARD planets on the other. When
both of the luminaries are
in aspect to each other, and to the benefics, and are
in their own sections of the signs or those of the
beneflos, both of them are strong. But If they are in
situations unsuitable to them, and the maleflcs, full
of enmity are above them, and the benefics below, or
are eclipsed, or near the dragon's head or tall,
especially the latter by less than 13°, both of them
are weak. The moon Is especially so when near (muhfiq)
or In conjunction, or on the wane, or under the
^ line dropped.
316
•• JI p
r\>î * I *H| ^jy>- It-Ûsij t<^^/Vll_U ^
^ LL
ôU-^LiLLJ.*! l.i
1^ o U>J &
' » * -' » r' j * *" '* ^
\-Sb=*3
^L^J^k-uZ-^yJl» J^l jjai
iL^ I j>W
^^>1) j\Ul£=u I i îL^-

513-515
earth,or in the ocmbuet way,514, all of rhi oh inoreese
its weaicness.
Many people include among the inauspicious
situations for the moon the being in the last part of a
sign, and in the 12ths of both maleflos, setting in the
south, and being in the ninth house from the ascendant,
all of which are not exolusifely applicable to the
moon,especially the last part of the signs, where all
the terms belong to the maleflos,453, a situation bad
for all the planets, as are the lEths referred to.
There is also to be considered the quarter of tie
heaven, and the fact that the ninth house from the
ascendant- is the nadir of the joy of the moon,469, and
this is peculiar to it.
514. MS al-tarlqah al-nuhtariqah. The combust way-
is the last part of Libra and the first of 3oorplus.
These two signs are not congenial to
THE COMBUST WAY the sun and moon on aooouiit of the
obscurity and ill-luoic connected wltti
them, and because each of them is the fall of one of
the luminaries,443. They also contain the two malefics,
the one by exaltation (Libra, Saturn), the other by
house (Scorplus, liars). The peculiarity however which
has given the name muhtarlq is that the emaltatlon of
Saturn is near, the fall of the sun being on the one
hand and that of the moon on the other, while the
adjacent parts of both signs are ocoupled by terms of
Mar a. 4 53.
515. Ild kam slnf tanqaslm ahkSm al-nujum. There
are as many dlvlslins of Astrology as there are ele-
ments in the universe. These may
DIVISIONS OF be either simple or compound and
JUDICIAL ASTROLOGY on both the influence of the
planets is active. The former on
the whole do not submit to such influence, nor to any
change.except where they come into contact with each
other, when, because they are mutually opposed and
violent,they are always in strife. Such admixture does
take place on the surface of the earth, but is only
completed by the heat of the sun's rays. So all four
4SJ$s^)BS\ 1.^jjs^ 'w^-A.yi'5J>j|
^^ Iz&rJi 3 (Jt*«oil \ «>]j/i^"
Y?1
JX^l*
, f Odi^}^-#*?-
. ,, _ .
0^1,^- aÂ>V>\ <^3^2--^
j> v_>Jj.i»J- \Al V^)^ a^3 C
îîl Âi ^ * L^l)M

515
elements teoome united, and the surface Is the place
appointed for the action of the planets, which extends
as far as the power of their rays penetrates by reason
of the presence of Interstices. Then these rays return
by a contrary motion and carry with them the aqueous
vapour which they have produced, and they rise from the
earth until they reach a point where the power of such
movement becomes weak. So this motion and agitation Is
the cause of all the vicissitudes and disasters of
nature, the resultant phenomena being either permanent
or temporary.
Anything therefore In the way of heat or cold or
moderate temperature, of moisture or dryness owing to
movements of the atmosphere, or of the various forms
of moisture carried by the winds such as cloud, rain,
snow; everything that Is heard In the air such as sharp
claps and rolls of thunder; everything that Is seen such
as lightning, thunderbolts, rainbows, halos, meteors,
also shooting stars, comets and similar atmospheric
phenomena; everything that occurs In the earth In the
way of tremors, and subsidences, and In the water as
tempests and floods, and the flux and reflux of the
tides - all these form the subject matter of the first
division of astrology. These phenomena are not perman-
ent or rarely so; rain, snow, oomets and earthquakes
are those which have the longest duration; were they
not sufficiently widespread their concentration In one
spot would be disastrous.
A second division Is that which Is concerned
with the mixed elements, such as occur In plants and
animals, and is of two kinds, affecting the whole of
a population or only a part thereof. Tamlne may be
0
V * 1 /
vL-^' ^-Lsij^bu* 3 ■i^£"—£=^

Ols 0C t • J\ «•'... .* " /
jl > 1>L^l» ^J^^ ^L»0 ^ Ul I_A^6S>
—■^/^)-> ^•—i><^j ■—
i ' > ^" " o ^

Jl-'o^ iJCj(£^xa -jtfj^^jbM
<\ »' "?'''' ". "•' '•^' -'• *'
LA*s»b lif-Ui'ei^s. JIAj
-—^W1^ J. '-r6i
515-516
taken as an example of the former, due to failure of
orops or drought, and epldemloa suob as spread from
country to country, like the plague and other
psstllenoes which depopulate cities.
The latter yarlety la more looallted and acat-
tered in Its appearances, It results from psychical
phenomena, suob as battles, struggle for power, change
of dominion from one land to another, deposition of
kings, reTOlutlons, emergence of new religions and
sects, so that this chapter Is a long one and this
variety the more Important of the two.
The third division Is specially concerned with the
environment of the Individual human or other, the
events which affect him In the course of his life, and
the Influences which remain behind blm and In his
progeny, while the fourth has to do with human activit-
ies and occupations. All of these are founded on
beginnings or origins 'mabadl' possibly trivial.
Beyond these there Is a fifth division where such
origins are entirely unknown. Here astrology reaches a
point which threatens to transgress Its proper limits,
where problems are submitted which It Is Impossible to
solve for the most part, and where the matter leaves
the solid basis of unlversals for one of particulars.
When this boundary Is passed, where the aatrologer is
on one side and the sorcerer on the other, you enter a
field of omens and divinations which has nothing to do
with astrology although the stars may be referred to
In connection with them.
516. fema «l-mabadl' allatl blha tutraf durub al-
Sl-SfifTwi. The fundamental urinciuias w>noh are
applicable to enquiries In the
PRIKCIPLBS BY WHICH first and second of these
INqpiHIES BELONGING divisions of astrology are
TO THE EIRST DIVISION substantially the same. They
ARE KNOWN are based on the greater,
Intermediate and lesser con-
junctions,^- the exact places at which these occur and
the asoendantsat these times; further on the thousands
known as hazarat, hundreds■tens and the flrdarla. There
x Al-klndl oonoelved that those played the same r61e
for events In the macrocosm as does the horoscope for
the life of the Individual.
Ll> »jU» \*JeîtA-^»
Ui ^ o -^VA' a»4" i_&V>
. :•••■ t <■ ^
y Û£=^*!l^^ dcLlall
^ ^y^3S>
516-517
are people who take from the oonjuuotlon and opposition
of the moon whloh preceded the enquiry,and substitute
this for the aboTe,ana there are others who depend on
the nearest eollpses past or future, of whloh the most
hurtful are those of the sun,especially If of oonalder-
able extent.
617. Ma tafstl dhdllka wa tafstrhu. The degrees at
whloh Saturn and Jupiter meet in oonjunction, together
with the ascendant of that
AKALTSIS AND time,and the ascendant of
IWTKRPRBTATION OF THESB the year of the conjunction
all moye In the direction of
the succession of signs through a whole sign In a com-
plete solar year. The point arrlyed at Is called a
terminus (intlha*); moreoyer this terminus of each year
Is In the sign next after that In whloh It was the year
before, and In the same degree thereof, e.g. If the
terminus of the first year was In 10° of Cancer, that of
next year would be In 10° of Leo. The matter of the
thousands and what follows them Is In the like case,and
there Is no difference between them except In the
different amount of time allotted to the degrees and
signs. This la a usage of the Persians and became known
to us through their language.1
We have stated before that according to Abu
UB'shar the years of the universe are 350000,2 -(he
deluge being In the middle of these. This statement
occurs In his book called "The Book of Thousands' where
the degrees of the zodiac are each made equal to a
thousand years, so that the fraction belonging to a
year Is S 3/5 seconds. This Is the great division;
secondly, the signs are mads equal to a thousand years
each; this Is the term of thousands. Thirdly the signs
are made equal to single years, the terminus of years
being thus produced as we said before. Fourthly the
1 According to AbO Ma^shar In his Kltib al-ulttf, when
the heavens were first set In motion all the planets,
the sun Included, were In conjunction; when the same
phenomenon again presents Itself, whloh may not
occur for mllliona of years, the world will enter on
a new perlqd, Relnaud, Abu'l-flda, I. CXCI. The Book
of the thousands on religious houses treats of birth,
duration and end of the world, and fixes the times
when great changes in Smplres and Religions will take
place. d'Herbelot, IT. 695.
2 S04.
^xft) y'±Û~x^&'r:?£->:>{
V ** * ^ ^ ,•*
l4*^W w>J-^p* 7^0 îc- '
^—■; L^21 X^- — 'Âiy-O ^j-^-^t^' ^
4'fJiJjlJiXC-li'Ah»»I_JJLj-^>--'
517-516
degrees are made equal to single years, and this is the
small division.
Between the units and thousands two other terms
are Introduced, one In whloh each sign equals a hundred
years and another In whloh each Is ten. Nothing Is said
with regard to the share of the degrees In the oase of
the tans and hundreds suoh as we have spoken of In the
oase of the thousands and units.
Tie have previously dlsoussed the extent of the
flrdsrla, and placed In a table their order at nativ-
ities (438-9]. But here the order changes and that
of the signs which contain the exaltations of the
planets Is adopted (443); viz. 1st Aries whloh has the
exaltation of the Sun; 8nd Taurus of the Moon; 3rd
Gemini of the Dragon's Head; 4th Cancer, of Jupiter;
5th Virgo, of Mercury; 6th Libra, of Saturn; 7th
Sagittarius, of the Dragon's Tall; 8th Capricorn, of
Mars; 9th Places, of Venus 443. The order is there-
fore, Sun, Moon, Dragon's Head, Jupiter, Mercury,
Saturn, Dragon's Tall, Mars, Venus, and then back to
the Sun. The distribution of partnerships Is as
before, but the lords of exaltation have preoedenoe
over the lords of the flrdlria, whloh however preserve
their own order and the partnership In their own
sections, except In the case of the Dragon's Head and
Tall, whloh do not enter lnto_partner8hlp and are
therefore alone In their flrdarla.
These are the principles which must be relied
upon and used at every anniversary of the world-year^-
and Its quarters, also at every conjunction and
opposition of the moon, especially those which occur
Immediately before the anniversary and the quarters.
518. Pamg al-adwBr al-madhkurah 'Inda al-qlranat
wa arbd'ha. ¥he revolutions willcH are mentioned In oon-
neotlon with eon jnnn-Mnna rB17
REVOLUTIONS RSEERRBD n. 2,have a duration of 350
TO AT CONJUNCTIONS solar years. They are divided
AND THEIR QUARTERS differently Into quarters, by
some people equally Into 90
^ The entrance of the Sun Into Aries. But in 1020 the
Perigee must have been some 14° S of the winter
solstice In whloh case the relative duration of the
Seasons would be S 92.8, 3p. 91.4, 1. 88.5, Au. 88.12.
4
«** *
i.
^ i~^_X^ 4r .>1 fr 1^-^--; Q/r>j!|»^ ^3'

,» '* * • v- ' ' »V
V ^yla t-^V?/"l^ÛL^vy
• UÛ Uv-^Ô^ ^-rtr" ^TOi^1
VJ 3 ^J^<J^- ^J..M^jj
^ tjSiy^jlJu* Aôlei.i w^ljW-M3^lfrlf»y^jSs3
w^jij j\j>i V
516-521
years eaoh as If quarters of the eollptlo, by others,
substituting the relatl-ve duration of the seasons of
the solar year Into a first quarter of 90 years, a
second of 65 1/4, a third Of 90 and a fourth of 94 3/4.
519. ?ama al-mabadl' allattl blhs yakhtass al-qlsm
al-thgnl wa yatamayyaz mln al-awmal. In addition to thg
principles laid down
PRINCIPLES SPECIAL TO THE for dealing with
SECOND DIVISION AND DIITBREIJT questions of the first
IBOM THOSE OP THE FIRST order,the following
are adopted for those
of the second. The turn of the solar year and of Its
quarters,the conjunctions,oppositions,quarters and other
phases of the moon,also the rexperiences of people In all
places as to the rains (anva ^166] on the days of the
past year,further,the eclipses,combustions,conjunctions,
retrograde movements of the planets which have occurred
In the year. There are astrologsrs who note the ascend-
ant at the time of the entry of the sun and moon Into
the signs,and deal In the same manner with the five
planets,but this Is obviously going out of the way
without advantage.
520. Faaa al-sglkhudlh. That planet Is known as
the SalkhudI (Persian for) lord of the yearl which,at
the anniversaries of the world-year
LORD OF THE TEAR (solar year), Isat the ascendant or
one of the angles with dignities In
Its own degree, or If there Is nothing there, that
which la In a suooedent bouse. If there Is nothing
there also, then It Is that planet which Is not
Inoonjunot with the ascendant or Its lord. According to
the Hindus It Is that planet which Is next In order of
the lords of the days; to eaoh planet a year being
given. They make a great deal of this.
521. Fama al-mabSdl' allatl blhg yatararraf al-
clsm al-thBllth. The principles adopted for questions
of the third order are as follows:
PRINCIPLES OF TEE For every creature there Is a time
THIRD DIVISION of Its first appearance,and decrees
are then sought from the ascendant
and the figure of the heavens as to lt« condition. This
section Is exclusively devoted to man.and must not be
Haly p. 255, VI. 3. aloalcadeny; eel Id est annus et
cadeny Id est domlnus.
>IiUit 'jivAilîC--
.'' (J li
Xi.—Û y^c^L-jLi^ jUwftlAsuj^s iw^lt.i>j

' tt> *
—' ji ."Uj ^=>jU^ » j l£>-
^•T»% t ^
j^jliAx*oj*ujÎ>O ^w.Aaâii
j^b j,
J> Ji^ LaI* 1^ ^1

521
employed for plants,oropa or animals.^ There are two
initial polnts(sowlng or oonoeptlon.and time of appear-
ance (waqt al-rtujnm) 8 or birth. From the arrangement of
the stars,the hayliQ becomes known,and the 4kadkhuda,3
the i-nHr.g fianatn n-r the houses, (mubtazzBt) the gifts
(allowanoes of length of life), ''aLg.yB, iCe aJdltlona.
zlvBdat and doduotlons nucganBt~therefrijiii,aud the—
murderers [âwatl')® whToE put an end to It.
At the anniversaries of the birth there beoome toown
the progressions (IntlhB'St), the aphesea (tasylrat)the
lord of the revolutionary figure [sahib al-dawr],the di-
visor or distributor of the fortunes'of life(JSnbakhtar
or al-qSslm)" and the mudabblr Its partner8 In admlnla-
tratlon.the lords of the weeks,and the flrdarla.
1 These are included In the Persian version. ~
? Hyleg Of tha Tjtln anrt Vngl 1 ah T-OTiaai-1 nge j Creek
oipsTn;- Aooording to Vullers the derivation of haylij la
uncertain. It Is equal to the Pers. Kadbanu (mistress of
a family) Interpreted by astrologers as signifying the
body of the 'native' as opposed to Kadkhuda (master of a
family) signifying the soul, nnder the root 'hlj' Lane
mentions the myrobalan fruit (Pers. hallla.Arab,haHlaJ)
which in the stomach Is like a xood housewife In the base.
Bonatus p. 677. Ham v. note 495 mTJ. Both hay la J and
KadkhudS are slgnlflcators and Iheli mai'rlage deteimltBS
the length of life but of. Nail. II 355. For an Inoorreot
definition of haylaj see PUgnen.Add. auz diction. Arabes.
3 Persian for.head of a household (in Turkish pronounced
Klayfi.a steward);translation of otKOdeoworwq )Ti)q
ycveceax;), the alcoohoden latelchodela.aoolpodebla Ac for
other renderings see Abu MSâhar E IIII)r of the trans-
J-atlons. 4 v. 495. 5 plural of qati , translation of
ctvaiptrat . g The aphetlo theory rests essentially on
the assimilation of the Zodlao to a roulette on which the
life of the Individual is projected with more or less
force frcm a certain point of departure (an aphetlo
place) and Is arrested by certain destructive (anaaretlo)
places before having passed a quarter of the circle.BJ..
p.411. Tasylr = Spsotq - dlreotlo defined by junotlnus
p.379. v. 523. Athazir Haly p. 157 v. 254.
7 'quem Arabes vero Algebutar.Persae autem zamootar ap-
pellant' Junot.p. 1066. Both (and numerous other variants
such as allerlustar Haly p. 157, algerbutarla. Abu Ma'shsr
5 IIII Be mag. oonj. Ten. 1515) represent the Persian
JBnbakbtSr. IfU p.231 has by mistake JSnbakht5n, which
Suter suggested should be Janbakhshan,probably Influenced
by the Arabic & Latin tarms. Wiedemann p. 242.
6 Partloepa Junot. I.e.
323
}
^jKi lyj (jilfsL-l ^
HI ' ' ,* ^ ^
, . "'. ■• .^ . • ' /'
^j^J*" a-zs'^Ji^JJC- >1*1^. ^L_. I

-iuv> ^l^j'i_iy, ^«—a-U> Li'^ 7t-\y^—s^>
if} * ^ > ' ' V" ^-'
" f^'lly 5 y ■!- 9 Ja-» M 5 9 ^ £»t L ^ ^ 1-J=«» S^Jo-J^J *

522
SEE, Ma tafsll dhaIlka na tafalrhu. As to the
analysis ana interpretation of these,the Infant (al-
naulfld) Is at first delloate and neek,
INTZEPEBTATION Is unfavourably affected by the least
IN DETAIL Changs In Its condition,and It Is Im-
possible to have confidence In Its
survival until it has attained the age of four years.
These are called the years of rearing by the astrologers.
The first thing they do In these years Is to ascertain
whether It is going to survive or not,and when In their
opinion it Is sufficiently strong to be reared,they lock
whether there Is a hayllj or not. This they search for
In five places; 1/ the lord of the time,day or night; S/
the moon by day and the sun by night; 3/ the degree of
the ascendant; 4/ the part of fortune; 5/ the degree of
conjunction or opposition of the moon preceding the
birth. The haylfij Is one of these. After It has been de-
termined according to the proper rules,! then the most
powerful planet2as regards dignities (muzSramah] of
those In aspect to It Is the kadkhudd. If It Is at an
angle a large number Is assigned,If sucoedent an Inter-
mediate one,and If In a oadent position a small one.
These are the numbers which we discussed under the
years of the planets (437) and according to the oondltka
of the kadkhudi as regards power or weakness, these num-
bers indicate years of life or months or days or hours.
Ttese are the gifts or allowances Catlya) of the
kadkhudi. In the event of Its being In a maleficent or
weak position,every fortune which Is In a friendly as-
pect to It,or Is In reception with It,adds Its smallest
number to the allowance,In the form of years or months
according to the strength or weakness aforesaid,while
every Infortune In Inimical aspect deducts such a num-
ber. These are styled the additions and deductions. The
result Is the longest period of life to which the
native can attain,If one of the anaeretal* does not
Interfere. Sometimes In a nativity there Is no haylaj,
In which case the length of life must be estimated from
the numbers of the fortunes present. The anaeretal are
moreover malefic In themselves and their rays are Inlm-
loal like certain fixed stars which are known for their
1 The haylaJ must be In an aphetloal place,either near
2the East or Nest Angles or In the IX,X or XI house.
An alternative definition Is given by. Junct. p. 141
"the most powerful planet In an aphetloal place".
2
Chron. p. 40. 78 on the length of human life.
4 Saturn and Mars.
t JaLÛ ^ Uy\ ^^ wâÎJ
^ *\ yj ^
**^^1/*'*^!^? ^ jaflyj Aaynj ^ f?->fc^ Aj
—j^jl! ^ JVj^t^-^'o^
êîJ bj^'-^^ju)^1
>yâ^ i
evil effects 460. When the aireotion arrives at theti.at
the time when the half-year or quarter or yearly allow-
ance is due,disaster results and then the fortunes can
do nothing against the unfavourable situation.
There are astrologers who regard the situations at
the thirds of the year as gifts of the kadkhudS in p]aoe
of the positions at the quarters. But there are many
anaeretal,among them the degrees of the ascendant and
of the moon,if one of them interferes with the other,
and again the cusps of the 4th,7th and Bth houses.These
are separately dealt with in the books.1
Bach year the ascendant is ascertained when the
sun comes round to the same minute of the ecliptic in
which it 2stood at the birth,i.e. the anniversary
(tajiwll), and also every month when the sun arrives at
the same degree and minute it occupied in the radical
or revolutionary figure. The lord of the ascendant at
birth is the lord of the first year,that of the second,
the planet next below in the order of the spheres, and
so the lordo of the revolutionary figures for succeed-
ing years are reached in the seme fashion as you proceed
with the lords of the hourSjBSIO. The Babylonians adopt
the same method,hut start with the lord of the hour of
birttînstead of that of the ascendant, the second
being next in order below.
The termini of the years are determined as follows;
a sign being given to each year,the end of the second
year is in the second sign at the same degree as the
asosndantpand so with the third. When the signs and de-
grees of the yearly terms have been learnt,each year is
divided into (thirteen) months of £6 days 1 hour 51
minutes and a sign to each given,so that the last month
ends at the same degree as the radical asoendant has
1 Apparently Capella was regarded as one. When Abu Sahl
un leaving KhwBri&m with Avioeiiua was overtaken by a
sandstorm he foretold his death within two days because
the direction of the degree of his Asoendant would
then_reaoh Capella (not Capricorn as in translation)
'va an qatiâst'^Chahar Maq&la p. 87.
£ At wnioh time a theme of the heavens or revolutionary
figure is constructed in the same way as the ,âdloal•
figure 'agl' at the birth.
3 According to HermesjDe revol. nativ. II p.£19 and
Junot. p.1051 the dominus anni is the lord of the sign
of the year (as distinct from the SalkhudS of world-
years), and to Wilson p.280 that planet which has most
dignities and is strongest in a revolutionary figure.
(ÂL-lfeiAJ-- ^Js«lJ^\^Sj^^LllU#»^»->-9-AI t—^LoySi
^ l> k N».* ** '
SL> ytr^' -Si U-11- AUJo.^ A. U.J >\ > J) ifc
*-*' ^ 2^. AJIîAt L- U^^Âdul-('
4
"Z. ^ r - ' '
Li>j ^L»l_Jji\\ aj>il j i
1
^yi''J5^ ^rd^ f
522-583
the same sign as the first,while the first month of the
next year has the same sign as the year; similarly a
sign Is given to eaoh of thirteen periods of 2 days 3
hours 50 minutes,the end of the last of these periods
oolnoldlng with the end of the monthly term. 1
The lord of the week Is determined as followsttake
the days elapsed slnoe hlrth and divide by 7,note the
product,and count on the sane number of signs from the
ascendant of the 2radix,the one you arrive at Is the
sign of the week. ' Then count the remainder which Is
less than 7 from the lord of the ascendant In the
direction opposite to the succession of the signs, the
sign you thus arrive at is the lord of the day of the
week In question." There are astrologers who proceed In
the direction of the signs,not contrary thereto,
523. ?an8 sd'lr al-ma^dttdBt ma'ha. We have referred
previously to the Apheta and Its direction In regard to
termini,the thousands and cycles.
OTHER THINGS TO BE Here Its meaning requires to a
RECKONED WITH certain extent to be explained,
because In nativities the aphesls
Is not calculated by the equal degrees of the ecliptic
but by degrees of ascension, 3o the aphesls from the de-
gree of the ascendant and the planet which Is situated
there Is calculated by oblique ascension at the locality
in question,one year for eaoh degree.^ So also the
aphesls of the planet at the Occident angle will be ac-
cording to its desoenslon at the locality,because the
setting of any sign at a locality Is equal to the ascen-
sion of its nadir. However with regard to the If.C. and
1.0. and any planet situated there,the aphesls is In all
localities by ascension in the right sphere. So if a
planet Is not transiting one of these four degrees but
1 Cf. Juno tlnus p. 1138 who Is more aoourete. The year Is
divided Into 13 mouths of 2Bd 2h 17m 30,,,9",14," ,and the
month Into 30 days of 22h 28' 35" 18"' 18"" !
2 of the last complete week.
3 But probably not Its real lord,390.
* This is Ptolemy's method of determining the length of
life by the time taken by one planet to reach a certain
point of the zodiac or the former position of anotber plac-
et by the diurnal movement calculated In planetary hours
(Vl2th of Its diurnal arc] Kara rljv Aptpaiov or degrees
of oblique ascension. A year being assigned to eaoh de-
gree,90 years would be the allowance If the points were
separated by the semi-diurnal aro,whloh converted Into
degrees of right ascension might be oonslderably more.
1
^J^]<oWj Uyi\ î^tr^
^^'a- a ^ u .•
ir ->(1V^
Ar
*—^ * >A>^\rÛtjW j^»^î»c3}^L-i>^L»*
J~7~J^ Uj>o3)
■""lAg^luU AA.ji> liUît!-^5\^»

523-524
a point between two angle a,Its aaoenslon Is oompounded
of those of the adjoining angleSjSnd the saloulatlon is
a long and difficult business.
An arc of dlreotlon Is always calculated from the
haylSJ,the slgnlfloator of life,and never from any
other point except In special oases. The Kadkhude is
the slgnlfloator for the length of life. The degree of
the ascendant Is always made apheta whether there Is a
haylaj or not. When at an anniversary or any other time
there Is ascertained the point at which the dlreotlon
of the hoylaJ has arrived,the lord of the term In ques-
tion Is called qSsim or divisor,În Persian, Jan-bakhtar,
brlnger of the fortunes of life. The name qaslm comes
from the olroumstanoe that because life Is situated be-
tween the radical place of the haylaj and the anaeretlo
point (q5plr],the Interval Is divided Into sections by
the terms of the signs,and the lords of the terms beoomE
the lords of these sections. Any planet which la In the
term of the apheta or directs Its rays to It becomes as-
sociated with the administration of that section.
With regard to the ruling planets (mubtazzSt]; In
the various houses of the planets are numerous dignities
and associated therewith prenlnenoe In the possession
of these (IbtlzSzlyya). The mubtazz without qualificat-
ion Is that planet which at a nativity Is predominant
(mustaull) by virtue of numerous dignities at the ascen-
dant or Its lord,or at the five aphetlo points In the
radix (apl al-maulld) and similarly at Its anniversaries.
The firdGria we have already discussed both In relation
to the years of the world and to nativities.
524. fakalf dabt al-mawWlld wa ramalhg. Procedure
to be observed at a f>lrth.
When the ohlld is born you must
PROCBDTJHE AT take the altitude of the sun If It Is
A NATT7ITT day,and work out the ascendant and Its
degree. This Is the horoscope of the
nativity. If It Is night,then the altitude of a well-
known fixed star which is on the rete of the astrolabe
must be taken. Do not concern yourself with the planets
which would only Involve you In difficulties,nor with
the moon,for working with It would be a mistake unless
It is necessary. Further if by day or night the oon-
dltlon of the heavens Is such by reason of cloud or the
^ The divisor Is Important for Indicating the profess-
lon a native should enter. Junot, p.1070 from Albohazen
Haly f, 95 and also to a certain extent 'aloelcadeny',
520. p. 255^see 71. 3.
327
-'l=-\^\_aijiji^^j!l£^)\ J > ^Û?>^^^=l4yJc-<^Wl>^k)l
—j'^j-LL^/ S1—a-!^ J ys=»M
s—.A^M Q\s»^l^s»^LJvVii>.\ ?UôU.\_^ji£^' Tuatj LA

✓ . ^ \ ^ ' ,% ^ * L* v
~t/^l_ic-Vji\—X~AiflX^.'-»^»;j' |f_jJL^^Â!^-><_s»^=»\\\}]
524-5E5
like,that you oannot get an observation,then only the
determination of the time remains.
When you know how much of the day or night has
passed,the ascendant can be calculated by the method we
have described. The number of hours.elapsed can be de-
termined in two ways,the first by having a water-clock
or other apparatus for measuring time going before the
labour comes on,the clock having been set by sunrise or
sunset or the like. When the birth takes place,the hour
must be noted. The other way is to set the clock going
at the time of birth if previous notice has not been
received,and watch it until it is possible to take the
altitude of the sun or a star. It is then possible by
counting back the numbers of hours shown by the clock
to get the exact time.
If there is no clock available, all that is nec-
essary is a cup of any material which will hold water;
a hole must be made in the bottom of any dimension you
please,and when the child is born you may proceed in
one of two ways at choice,first by letting water into
it and second by allowing water to escape from it. If
you choose the former,place the cup on the surface of
clean water,watch till it fills and sinks. Imnedlately
take it out and empty it,and place on the water again,
and count the number of times it sinks until the sun
or a star is visible, A mark must then be made at the
point the water has reached,to indicate the fraction to
which it had sunk. Then take the altitude and note the
time,and proceed as before till as many sinkings, to-
gether with the fraction marked,have taken place as
noted. Then take the altitude again and determine the
number of hours from the second time the cup was placed
on the water,and count back the same amount from the
time the sun became visible,which gives the time of
birth.
If you choose the second way,place the cup on
something like a trivet,and take a pitcher full of
water, and fill the cup,,when all the water has poured or
trickled out, fill again and count the numbers of
pitchers used till the sun or star is visible,if there
is water in the cup make a mark,and proceed as before
with the determination of the time.
525. In lam yatahaqaQ rasad al-waot mfidha yufmal.
Should no observation have been made at the "time of
birth,the da termination of that
IF TIME NOT NOTED time is beyond the reach of soieime,
USE OF ,ANIM0I1AR, for there is no way of knowing it.
^ 1
1_
i r
•n~
lil
—VetJjB*SÛnatjU
585-526
but astrologers by estimation and oonJeoture arrive at
one little different In the sign of the aaoendant^when
an attentive observer employs oautlous questioning. But
It Is necessary that there should be a certain degree
for the ascendant,ao they find a way,by using an Indic-
ator (namudSr)1 which furnishes one which they assume to
be the degree desired. The Indicator moat In use la that
of Ptolemy,2 whloh If It does not dlaoloee the exact de-
greets the best substitute. The method In question Is
to ascertain as accurately as possible the time commun-
icated to you.and determine the ascendant,the oardlnes
and the places of the seven planets. Then find the de-
gree of the conjunction of the moon whloh ooourred be-
fore the birth If that was In the first half of the
month,or else the degree of opposition,If In the latter
half. Then determine whloh planet has the most dignit-
ies and testimonies, then the one that comes next,and so
proceed with the others till the last and note the
result. The most Important testimony Is being In as-
pect to that degree,for when two planets are equal In
the number of their dignities,the one In aspect what-
ever that may be,Is preferable. Then examine which of
the two most dignified planets la nearest to an angle
by counting the number of their degrees. Thereafter
transfer the angle to the degree of the nearest planet
and derive the ascendant from that. If the degrees of
the two planets are very distant from an angle,take the
next planet In order of dignity,and examine the others
till you find that whloh Is nearest to an angle and
proceed as before.
There are astrologers who do not attach any im-
portance to the relative distance from or nearness to
an angle but simply make the degree of the angle which
Is nearest to the most dignified planets the place
(from whloh to derive the ascendant) without altering
Its degree to that of the planet and proceed as we
have said.
526. Fakalf yuTraf masqat al-nutfah. The essential
condition which makes it posaible to discover the
temperament,constitution and form
THIS OF CONCBPTION of a native as well as the oon-
dltlona whloh take place In him
1 The anlmodar of the Latin translations ,Heotlfloatlon,;
on the use (and futility) of namddSrs (numudhSr) In
relation to the Nativity. Chron. p. 290.
2s Tetrablblos. Bk. Ill, oap. III.
P. has 'the same ae the degree of the latter'.
QijJbuji^ ^ a l^jjp
i-ii! J-e^^jlll
^ Al\' UJ» wk^y oW-^
>»J^\XW^j^l^J>\,y<^\ pal\Ûj
hJkfjii wÛ^mav V^W<>iV.'a'kJ>
^ u>^CUa»^\3\iy ^/î>
526
during life within the mother's womb is the ascertain-
ment of the time of oonoeptlon. Authorities insist of
use being made of this. It is possible to learn from
the mother or the father if they agree the beginning of
the phenomena of pregnancy,the direction of which they
have month by month or week by week ascribed to Saturn
or Jupiter and so down through the spheres.
The procedure adopted by astrologers is founded on
two principles either of which is satisfactory if
properly executed: 1/ it is assumed that the degree of
the ascendant at birth ie the same as the degree at
which the moon stood at the time of conception, and 2/
conversely,that the degree of the ascendant at the
time of oonoeptlon is the same as that in which the
moon stood at the time of birth. In the first place it
is desirable to ascertain from the mother whether it is
the 7th, 6th, 9th or 10th month of pregnancy, having
done so look at the ascendant and the configuration of
the heavens at the time which has been approximately
arrived at; if the moon is at the degree of the ascend-
ant,give to the ascendant of conception the same degree.
Then the child has completed so many full revolutions
of the moon before birth, either 7 (191 days 6 hours),
8 (218 days 13 hours) - here be careful not to say that
an 8 months child is not viable - 9 (245 days 21 hours)
or 10 (273 days 5 hours).
If the moon is not at the degree of the ascendant,
whether above or below the earth, If above, look how
many degrees separate them, and take a day for every
13° 11',^ and for every degree 1 hour and 5/6, and
every minute of a degree 1 5/6 minutes of time, and
subtract the result in days hours and minutes from the
days of that month of which you have been informed.
If the moon is below the earth, take the distance from
the ascendent to the moon, and proceed in the same way,
but add the result to the days of the month in
question. So the greater or less number which you
•L The mean tropical movement of the moon in a day.

330
' ' "' C^ > ^ r-^
JJc'bl ^ l^J^tC- ((^jk=»
''.... ' V- v -< t y*'JS
oAjJfca^VivJ >oi)5>-^«>4^]*>ii7>5^
[V' ^ »*• ''fc>^*,/' _^- r ^ * Cl^
jJJ jC^Za^*
526-528
arrive at Is the time spent by the Infant In the womb.
Count baelc therefore from the tine of birth the number
of days and hours,the result la the time of oonceptlon.
Thereafter aaoertaln the position of the moon,and when
you Imow Its degree make this the degree of the ascend-
ant,for this is approximately accurate from the data
available.
527. gamfl al-alam al-rBblT'. For horary questions
of the 4th order,the ascendant of the beginning of the
natter In band must be aseertaln-
THE FOURTH DIVISION ed,whether that bo determined
already as In the case of a
nativity,and therefore known,or whether a time has to
be seleoted or chosen as a starting point. The purpose
of this section Is to select a suitable time for carry-
ing out some business so as to Insure the presence of
fortunes and the absence of Infortunes, Just as we pro-
tect ourselves on the surface of the earth from the
rays of the sun,by selecting northern aspects,804
shady spots and using moistened punkahs and loe-housesA
In this matter pay no attention to the silly talk In
which the Hashwlyltes persist and their denial of what
we have accepted In this matter of 'eleotlons'
(Ikhtlyar).2
The essence of this section Is so to adjust the
eardlnes that the maleflos are as distant as possible
both In themselves and their rays,while they are to
be kept Illuminated by the benaflos and their light,
especially the ascendant and Its lord, also the moon
and the lord of Its house, and the slgnlfloator of the
business which la the subject of the Inquiry. Also see
to the moon and the lord of the ascendant and the
slgnlfloator that they are In aspect to each other, and
place tham In such a position that they all oast an
aspect to the ascendant lest the election should turn
out to have bad effects. This Is a long and wide field
of enquiry Into which It Is Impossible now to penetrate
further.
528. Famg al-qlam al-khdmls wa mabgdl'htt. Rules
for questions of the fifth order.
In view of
Khalsh hni tar va yakhhS zlr-l zamln agan4ap, 2 P- baa

'who are always crying out "Would that a miracle could
happen to us that this calamity should be frustrated
and that we should be made happy"'.
S31
^^
>*/»■ y>ol> ^^j-j) v -A-Lll ■> > o IA i
t- IY • ' • ^ «' C . * • (fx f ^ ..
^^ 5>jA.^ £7}Ul> A jUirrA'3
"•—-—a^Loj/JAJ A^>L»ji pyj L» jl
-V:i' ^ »yiyi> 3
^■
588-530
the nativities of querents reganllng various contingen-
cies are for the most part unknown.aatrologers deal with
the statement of the querent as a starting point Just as
If It were a nativity. The ascendant of the time Is taken
and Investigated,as well as Its lord and the moon and
that planet which the moon Is leaving. These are used as
signifies tors for the querent,and as the matters on which
guidance Is sought belong for the most part to the 7th
house and Its lord,or to such other-house In which the
question is comprised,461,and Its lord,also to that
planet with which the moon Is about to conjoin,there Is
no reason why with a little care and attention an answer
should not be found somewhere among the twelve houses.
This division Is known as that of the questions.
529. famg al-mas'alah al-blkBrlyyah. In case of an
Idle^- request or one for a general prognostic the custom
of the maJurl ly of astrologers Is to
IDLB AND QENKRAL follow the same procedure as In ottEr
VE3TI0N3 questions,namely to ascertain the
ascendant of the time of the query.
They then examine the aspects as they would at a nativity
and make conclusions I.e. as to the remaining period of
life and the conditions therein.
There are however astrologers who Increase the
range of horoscope Inspection by claiming to elicit the
past life of the querent. Hashwlylte astrologers,Inclined
to falsification,whan such a question Is asked bid their
clients return and sleep on the matter for three nlghtrf"
and concentrate their attention on It during the day,and
then question them. After satisfying myself as to their
writings I know of no method of dealing with them except
Insisting on exposing their vicious deoreesS and their
leading the querent Intoj crime by the bad advice given him.
530. Famg al-khabl wa'l-damtr. KhabI' refers to
hidden objects (concealed In the hand) and Jatialr to
secret thoughtargwerved by the
THOTJOHT READING querent. s What greater Ignominy le
likely to be the part of Astrologers
than that resulting from hasty dealing with such
T8 btkSrl is a Persian worTI
r Which he appears to have done In his "Kltib al-tanblh
ald slnSrat al-tamwlh".
2 For instances of euooessful thought-reading of._the
tales of Al-Klndl and Al-Blrunl In the ChahSf Maqala
p.64,from which the meaning of damlr may be gathered.
That given In Prol. I, 233 'pensês seorttes du destln'
is too restricted.
332
f ^ V #» 0 f y
bÂls/f ^
^^•J^dil J^l lî J^^jU
^k^sy' $£/*
530
(lusstions and In oomparlson how numerous are the lucky
bits of Itaglolans who keep up a patter while they are
on the look-out for tall-tale indloatlons and aotlonel
Now we hayo arrlyed at a point of the eolenoe of
the stars whloh I haye regarded as sufflolng for the
beginner; any one who ezoeeds the limits set out aboye
exposes himself and the solenoe to derision and soorn,
for suoh are Ignorant of the further relations of the
art and espeolally of those whloh haye been asoertained
with certainty,
Conoluelon of the Book of Instruction on the
Blements of the Solenoe of Istrology
Composed by Abu al-Ealhan Muhammad b. Ahmad
al-Blrunl. May the Keroy of Sod be upon'hlm.
Abundant Meroy. And Bis blessings on
Huhammad^hls descendants the pure In heart.
All glory be to God first and last.
As the Colophon has no date, the following from
the first fly-leaf of the MS are added.
By the accident of time this book oame into the
possession of the poor dependent on Allah the all-
sufflolsnt Auhad b. Asrad b. Mlhrla'r al-UustaufT. May
the Most High'God Improye his olrowastanoes,and favour
the realisation of his hopes In this world and the
next. May he cause him to seleot aright the winning
arrow from the ijulyer. In the month of Allah, Eajah
the Deaf, B59 AH. (Jan. 1436 A.D.),
He, the Guide. This book oame Into the possession
of the poor_slaye In need of the Meroy of our Lord the
Creator ""Ala b. Al-Hunaln b. '"Alfl al-Sahql. May God
oyerlook his sins by Muhammad and his family and his
generous assoolates. In'the year 669 AH. (1465 A.D.)
Praise be to God first and last and may He bless our
Lord and prophet IJuhaiimad, the best of mortals, and
ell prophets and saints.
Well endowed Is he who with sufficient humility
unites Intellect and Soul
For these two form a fortunate star-oonjunotlon
whloh has an enduring Influence with the people.
333
ky^r1^^
9 / ** m a fc^y/ is ^ /A
yjStQM&M^Zs
'-. - • * •7\. .. « ✓ ••
Â »(' -'f •*/
' l / * /
~'S'-° rr/f'-'iAi/Ks/
//.rr", //'iriivf/
.w- mmuK.
^®E' ay/- ' Yr^\^\
INDEX
(Prepared by Mrs. P.O. Gardner)
Ah)ad dl-3
Algebra 37-40
Allquat parts 11
Al-ir.ut«n 3QB
Altitude 132-6; by astrolabe 199-203
Aaplituda 129
Anglae 3-4; zodlaoal 149-50
AnnWersary 150
Anomaly (mean and true) 9t-B
Apogee of planets 61, 101; of sun 68; aployolea
93-109 .
Apparition, stars of perpetual 131-2
Arcs 4; angles In 10; similar 22
Aristotle on oelestial spheres IS
Arithmetic 23-37
Ascendent 149, 200-3
Ascending and descending 110
Astrolabe 194-7; uses of 197-209
Aatrology 210; zodiacal 210-73; planetary 231-62;
signs and planets 262-8; Judicial dltlalona 317-33
Astronomy 43-210
Au tumn 186
Xuzln 140
Aeloenna on astrology 210 n
Ayana 229
Azimuth 134
BargQtam 266
Beardlesa man 181
Bhulttl 105
GrahmAnda (ninth sphere) 44
Calendars 186-91
Cardinal points 49-50
Cazlal 296
Chameleon 47
Chronocratora 239, 26S
Chronology 161-73
Qlrole 4, 5, 10, 11, 2o-2; Indian 49, 56-8
Cities in climates 145-6
Cllnstes 138-46
Co-aaoansioiifl 145-7
CoBrtmst of planets 64; way 3X7
Gomplementa of arc and sine 5; of parallelograma 9
Cones 18-19; aoatlons 19
Conjunotions of moon 64-5; 150-2; of pleneta 151-2;
of sun and moon 1S2-3; aomplotlon of 311
Constellations, zodiacal 69-70; northern and sonthem
72-6; names of stars In 77-8
Creation, seasons of 162
Cuê 17; numerical 28
Cupola of earth 140
Cyolea 171-2
Cylludera 18
Dakshayaaa 229
Danger In heavens 272
Dates 171, 182-4
Dawn and trwlllglit 51-5
Day, oauae of 49; 51-3; world days 113-4; length
130, 136; arc 131; of weak (Hindu) 165; of
month (Persian) 170; special 183-6; lapse of,
by estrolabe 201-4
Deoenatea of signs 263
Decimal notation 36
Declination parallels 56, 59-60
Deferent of eployola 92 t
Degrees of circle 57; daed» 304
Depression (altitude) 132
Dlvialons of earth 141-2
Earth 45-6; size 118-20; laod under sea 120-5;
latitude and longitude 126-0; climates and
divisions 138-42; cities 143-5
Bcllpsea 154-60
Ecliptic 55; equinoctial points 56-7; alza 118
Elements, the four 119
Eployola 61, 92-4
Equant of epicycle 93
Equations 38-40
Equator 124-5
Equinox 56; equinoctial circle 66
Erse 172-4
Erect posture 125
Ether 43
Faata and feasts 174-86; Jewish 175-6; Chrtatlah 177-fif-
peralan 1B0-2; Oreok 185; soghdlan 104; iroglan 18&
FirdarU 229. 255
Figure 4
Fortune, Inorcaae and deoreaae 271; part of and
horary indications 279-95
Fractions 33-5
Galaxy 87
Geometry 1-25
Ghari 55
Gnomon 9; shadows of 133
Halb 306
Eayyiz 308
Heavens 45
Horary questloaa 276-93
Horizon 48
Hours 53-5
Houses of zodiaoel belt 149, 275-95
Injurious places in heavens 292-4
Intereolatlon 164
Islands 122-6, 143
Kalpe 113
Lakes 123-4
Land, diopâition of 120-6
Lanka 140
Latitude, oelestinl parallels S6; stellar 59;
planetary 60, 102-3; lunar 101; terreatrial 126-8
Letters (os nuneraLa) 40-3
Line 3
Llquorioe 47
Longitude 186-6
L#rd of year 322
Lots (In nativities) 282-95
Map {world) 124
Mercury, special noveaent 9B-9
Meridian 49; shadow and altitude 135
Weru (Mlru) 140
Mile, Ajatlo 119 n
Milky way 87
Months 161; 165-70
Moon, sphere 44-5; 64-8; 81-6; 96-7; 101; 152-7;
160, 233; in nativities 240-58; 316
Morwcoan algebra 41
Wovementa 47-8; of sun 89; of plsnets 191
Muhfirta 55
Nativities, figure of heeven 19#; terms 265-74;
indloationa 276-95; principles of fiiviaiona
procedure 227-30
Nebulae 69
Night, aee Day
Number 3 24-s?
Numeral#, Arabic and Moroccan 40-2
NuvSnahaka 266
Oblong 7
Occultation 131-2
One (unity) 22-4
Orbits aee sun, moon, planets, atara 91, 101-7
Orlentality and ocoidentality 296-9
Perfillaxla 15B
Parallel llnea 3-9; of declination and latitude 56
Pflpecltptlc 00
Perigeeof planets 64, 137; of sun 88-9
Permutation 12
Planets, names 60; apherea and movenanta 44-8;
60-4; erbita 91-2; rates 94; posltioTiB 96-7,
®«; movetnenta 108-14; size 115-9; Conjunotlone
150-2; posttlona 192, 204; nature 231-9;
indications 240-54; orbs and years 2S5;
domiciles 256-9; aapeats 260-1; related to
signs 262-0; to sun 296-308; application and
separation 303-4; dignities 306-17
Point 3; cardinal 49
Poles of sphere 20, 55
position see planets, stars, sun
Prayer time 52 n 4, 137
prime vertical T36
Prism 18
Proportions 11-4
Quadrilateral figures 7
Ratios 11. 14. 15. 17
Rising and setting of atsrs 204
Saftdhi 52
Sankallta 20, 31
Soorplons 102
Secaot 23
Seas 121-4
Shadow 49-50; 1S3, 137, 199
Slddh-Sate 113
Signs see 3odiac
Sine T] 5
Solid 2; reculer 20
Solstloe 56-ft
Spaae 2
Sphsres 19-22; celestial 43-5
Square 7; power 17; nurahers 32
Stara 46-8; 58-9; 68-9; 73-86; 115-8; 147-50
Staal-yard 17
3UQ 44; 47-9; 88-91; 157-60; 199; 296-6; 316
Surd 32
Surfaoe 2-3
Tangent 10
Thaneshwar (TBnTshiir) 140
Thought reading 332-3
Towna, latitude and longitude 126
Transit, in conjunofciows 151-2
Trapezium 7
TrepldatloO of orbits 101
Triangle 5-6; 16
Trlgonooetry, spheriGal 23 n
Trlplloltiea 23C, 259
TrTshSaesh 286
Twilight 51-3
UjJain 140
Unity 23-4
Value of n 57
Vetah 47
Winds 49
Years 162-4; 171; new year 180
Zodiac, symbola 43; slgna 56; constellatione 69; auc-
oeaaion 87-8; bouses 149; oalerrders 187; nature 210;
ooiapBSs end winds 216; indloatloDa 217-24; mutual
relatlona of signs 225-8; oscendlng and desoendlng
halves 229-32; relation to planets 256-8; degrees
269-70; fortune 271; indications in houses 275-95;
part of fortune 279-82

Book - 1029 - Al Biruni - The Book of Instruction in The Elements of The Art of Astrology

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Book - 1029 - Al Biruni - The Book of Instruction in The Elements of The Art of Astrology

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

THE BOOK OF INSTRUCTION

IN THE ELEMENTS OF THE ART OF

ABU'L-RAYHAN MUHAMMAD IBN AHMAD

Written in Ghaznah, 1029 A.D.

The Translation facing the Text by

-iiii- i >ri j i ji^vi ^ui ji <^j

This norl: had occupied Dr.

MatU and PrinUd by th* Rephka Proceu in Great Bnlain by

The Hlatopy of 3cier»oe Is oultivatod so aaalduous-

^ At a later period of hie life he must have met QSbds

WledeBiarin> Beltraege, LX, p. 61,. No. 6.

The paragraphs (abwSb) are referred to in the text by

Thle is the ISS. which haa been selected for reproduction

This KB. la dated 9 Ramadan 1035 A.H. (4 June 1626 A-E. }

As there are several place a In toe Tafhlm where dates

Paragraphs (abwab) are referred to by numbers alone; pages

T^e Chronology oX Ancient Katlona and the Iniilcfl of .U.-Blrunl,

yy thanka are due to yeaars. Percy Lund, Kumphriea & 0o.

^ o*/-^' /'* * * ' * "< ■ 1

!~-> >■ I ^ |.UjX^^JU3i^~r'lu^^

" _ '^ " --yjSt u

>l^JJja! A. L* a LL> ^ Jkaj U^Ll^U^'>' 3

UjI ^ M x jJ?- Li>ic-

j-barabar yak dlgar.P The translation by laljiq Ibn

^y>51 JW»^LL«J'XL^jf Ulj

lf^»lL 1» UUl*^jliJ iLfcj-V LI ^illlj ^tJlj

■'•The figure on the left Illustrates 'perpendicular* and

'3 * .-/ •'. - . -

l>i^«*. ■^^^--**^-v,^7::a^* xZ--^ oifc»\jLjk»- U

V*«—2^]>-LJ|fc> ^styi^i^sju 4^. 1_ j IJ J J UijI^J

1 s>w^*ilvZa*j 3 Ll* i^JjM,l(^ ^7/'

I^X w^1 u^j.

riliu'r.Li•• ^,,.r--' .' S •". .

'^î-»î^»iî U'j -^byy\*j~ l< is '■.) '^£jU^,'i^

■'•According to Stelngass, "the eye In which the tongue of

here is the distance here

^AL has hgdithah.

>f y^LLii^ lljJIL

iThis is numbered 37 In PL, while under 38 are,out of

X" .' .■•: *>'

1st 2nd 3rd

one five twenty five

i-^ljJI —J-" -*/'I >'b ^

"—L_^--»Hi!^!} -Miil ^cJo lt>! —

-*—» i w" L--i|lA_3 jW-«*^j>-V^1

\j L^JJjU »Jii I > C1*jj&j I JXjfc^ LH

t. . 'i jCl A-^yS^y63^»^^

V-V^^ JJA^aI^A X .XL 11i,Ai--~.i

-;i r aXJL-^, U^u1 ^>7"}^'46^1

>r^^i ^ Ult* ■^r—

—1^. li=aii}li— li^J^^^a^ii lUt^J^5^\j^/Oj^^-—Jl^'

OLII jl-^I^D; jui^a^

50. Misbah muthannah bi'l-takrlr. When the same

^ ) 2_^> Jjj* —' ^-7 ^jjU iS^^-.Ifial

') ^JL ^^>L—1

^ Jp" jAj ^ -ill

51. Nlsbah nm'allafah. This ratio resembles the

^ The copyist remarks that this line » was added inad-

fAjjby j^Ly* LX-^ >\ I ^1 ^

^i' ,J^y\^S\^\.: Xr.

-Af j^■**J.>1 A^-l/V *_j\_*>*o\ A-l> A-^t

55. Takafi^- al-nisbah. This kind of proportion dif-

56. Quwwah wa tul. A square is called a power,

^ o/-^' /' * * ' * "< ■ 1

1 s>w^ilvZaj 3 Ll* i^JjM,l(^ ^7/'

-—» i w" L--i|lA_3 jW-«^j>-V^1

-Af j^■**J.>1 A^-l/V _j\_>*o\ A-l> A-^t

$A~\£ 'J^y J^ J^J Iff \ Ijj V^\^ [f Vi^- ^y) l»

l»»^<-,tV'jcl> ftt* l^-a''i t>l»

' ••^'O^UjjOykj —ru^wjj- g- ■« -^1- '.-^/.ii